LaserJet E725 - Service Manual

HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535

Service Manual

www.hp.com/videos/laserjet
www.hp.com/support/lje72500mfp
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525 Series
Service Manual

SUMMARY
Learn about theory of operation, remove and replace, troubleshooting on the printer. Parts are either customer-self repair
(CSR) replaceable, or field replaceable units (FRUs) which require installation by a trained field-service technician. Use the
provided parts diagrams and tables to identify the required part.
Copyright and License
© Copyright 2020 HP Development Company,

L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without

prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to

change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not
be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Edition 14, 5/2020

Revision History
View a list of document revisions.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing
herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial
errors or omissions contained herein.
Table -1 Revision History

Revision Number Revision Date Revision Notes
14.0 May, 2020 Part number updates and general edits.
13.0 May, 2020 Part number updates and general edits.
Updated SSBM sections to current HPPK

content. See Stapler/stacker and booklet
maker (SSBM) on page 905.
SRM migration to SDL Tridion Docs.
Updated BHCI sections. See High-capacity

input (HCI) tray (workgroup) on page 588.
Added HP EPA 3.0 compliance content. See

Service parts changes For Environmental
Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products
on page 2813.
11.0 January, 2020 Updated numerous part numbers

throughout based on HP PN format.
Added Electrical Mechanical diagrams to

aide in troubleshooting. See Electrical-
mechanical diagrams on page 867.
Removed references to Control panel that

used 8”(inch) in title. This is due to the
marketing change to definition of the
control panel. See Table 1.1 Technical
specifications on page 8.
10.0 June, 2019 Updated all inner finisher content. See Inner
finisher on page 2203.
Updated developer unit remove and replace

procedure. See Removal and replacement:
Developer unit on page 205.
Added right door dampner kit remove and

replace. See Removal and replacement:
Right door dampener and lever kit
on page 338.
6.0 July, 2018 Updated parts numbers throughout

document to remove "SAM-" prefix and
updated new part numbers as identified.
Minor content edits (including graphics)
ENWW iii
Table -1 Revision History (continued)
Revision Number Revision Date Revision Notes
5.0 March, 2018 Upload all graphics to data base.
Part number updates.
Minor changes/updates.
4.0 January, 2018 Minor changes to environmental specs and

engine dimensions.
3.0 November, 2017 Updated code data for Diagnostics and

Service Functions
Replaced Product Overview with the UG-

style Printer Views and removed the
previous “Machine external view” section.
Updated R&R TOC level to 1.
Replaced references to SAW with WISE and

removed QR codes.
Replaced Samsung Paper Jam content with

the UG content
Moved specifications out of the appendix to

the Product Specifications chapter
Added additional specification content to

the Product Specifications chapter from the
UG
Removed the lists of tables and figures and

the alphabetical and numerical lists of parts
Placed ESD cautions at the beginning of the

R&R sections for the main printer and both
finishers.
Removed the Samsung precaution sections
Updated variable list items to refer only to

Diamond
Updated part numbers, part descriptions,

diagrams, and photos
Linked Removal and Replacement

procedures are linked to part number
information.
2.0 July, 2017 Updated TOC to only consist of 3 levels
Add error code and CPMD overview
Added “How to search for documentation”

section.
Updated toner average yield data
Changed all occurrences of #2 Phillips to #2

JIS
1.0 April, 2017 Service manual initial release
iv Revision History ENWW

Conventions used in this guide
Learn about the conventions used in this publication.
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
ENWW v
vi Conventions used in this guide ENWW
Table of contents
1 Product specifications and description .................................................................................................................................................. 1

Printer views .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2
Printer front view ................................................................................................................................................. 2
Printer back view .................................................................................................................................................. 3
Interface ports ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
Control-panel view ............................................................................................................................................... 4
Inner finisher view ................................................................................................................................................ 6
Stapler/stacker finisher view .............................................................................................................................. 6
Booklet finisher view ........................................................................................................................................... 6
Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8
Technical specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 8
Supported operating systems ......................................................................................................................... 10
Mobile printing solutions .................................................................................................................................. 12
Printer dimensions ............................................................................................................................................ 13
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions .................................................... 14
Operating-environment range ........................................................................................................................ 14
General specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 15
Print specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 17
Scan specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 19
Copy specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 20
Paper handling specifications .......................................................................................................................... 23
Supplies ............................................................................................................................................................... 27
Maintenance parts ............................................................................................................................................. 27
Optional ............................................................................................................................................................... 28
Feeding system ...................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Feeding system overview ................................................................................................................................. 30
Main components and functions ..................................................................................................................... 31
Cassette .............................................................................................................................................................. 33
Pickup Assembly ................................................................................................................................................ 34
Registration assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 35
Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly ............................................................................................................................... 36
Image creation ........................................................................................................................................................................ 38
ENWW vii
Printing process overview ................................................................................................................................ 38
Imaging unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 39
Fuser unit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
Fuser unit overview ........................................................................................................................................... 42
Fuser unit drive .................................................................................................................................................. 43
Fuser unit temperature control ....................................................................................................................... 43
Loop control ....................................................................................................................................................... 44
Laser scanner unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 46
Laser scanner unit overview ............................................................................................................................ 46
Laser scanning optical path ............................................................................................................................. 47
Laser synchronizing detectors ........................................................................................................................ 47
Drive system ........................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Drive motors ....................................................................................................................................................... 49
Main Drive Unit (OPC/DEVE/Registration/Tray 1/Feed) .............................................................................. 50
Pickup Drive ........................................................................................................................................................ 52
Duct Drive ........................................................................................................................................................... 52
Fuser/Exit Drive .................................................................................................................................................. 53
Toner supply drive ............................................................................................................................................. 54
Flatbed Scanner System ....................................................................................................................................................... 56
Flatbed scanner system overview .................................................................................................................. 57
Scanning system components ........................................................................................................................ 59
Caution for moving the scanner ...................................................................................................................... 65
Document feeder LX (dn models) ....................................................................................................................................... 67
Document feeder LX overview ........................................................................................................................ 67
Document feeder LX electrical parts .............................................................................................................. 67
Document feeder LX registration ................................................................................................................... 68
Document feeder LX drive system ................................................................................................................. 69
Document feeder LX scanning position ......................................................................................................... 71
Document feeder LX specifications ................................................................................................................ 72
Flow document feeder z models (GX) ................................................................................................................................ 73
Flow document feeder overview .................................................................................................................... 73
Flow document feeder sensors ...................................................................................................................... 73
Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor ...................................................................... 75
Flow document feeder drive system .............................................................................................................. 76
Flow document feeder specifications ............................................................................................................ 78
Flow document feeder registration ................................................................................................................ 78
Flow document feeder scanning position ..................................................................................................... 79
Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor ........................................................................... 79
Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method ................................................................................. 81
Flow ADF z bundles (GX) ................................................................................................................................... 81
Hardware configuration ........................................................................................................................................................ 83
viii ENWW
Main controller ................................................................................................................................................... 87
Low voltage power supply (LVPS; Type 5H) / switching mode power supply (SMPS) ............................ 91
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) (GX/z models) ................................................................. 92
Fuser drive board (FDB) .................................................................................................................................... 94
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA ........................................................................................................ 95
Eraser PCA .......................................................................................................................................................... 97
Waste Sensor PCA ............................................................................................................................................. 97
CRUM PCA ........................................................................................................................................................... 98
Toner CRUM joint PCA ....................................................................................................................................... 98
Paper Size sensor PCA ...................................................................................................................................... 98
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ................................................................................................................................................... 99
Inner finisher ......................................................................................................................................................................... 103
2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement .................................................................................................................................... 107

HP service and support ....................................................................................................................................................... 107
How to search for printer documentation ....................................................................................................................... 108
Order parts by authorized service providers ................................................................................................................... 112
Ordering ............................................................................................................................................................ 112
Orderable parts ................................................................................................................................................ 112
How to use parts lists and diagrams ................................................................................................................................ 112
ESD precautions ................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Service approach ................................................................................................................................................................. 114
Precautions when replacing parts ................................................................................................................ 114
Before performing service ............................................................................................................................. 115
After performing service ................................................................................................................................ 115
Post-service test ............................................................................................................................................. 116
Maintenance (printer cleaning) .......................................................................................................................................... 117
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX) .............................................................................. 117
Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX) ..................................................................... 118
Cleaning the scanner glass ............................................................................................................................ 118
Cleaning the transfer roller ............................................................................................................................ 119
Main parts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 121
Main assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 122
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX) .................................................................................. 126
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (GX) ................................................................................. 129
Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX) ........................................................................................ 132
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX) .............................................................................. 137
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX) .............................................................................. 143
Removal and replacement: Image scanner assembly (flatbed) .............................................................. 149
Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 1 ................................................................................................. 158
Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 2 ................................................................................................. 163
ENWW ix
Removal and replacement: Exit unit ............................................................................................................ 169
Removal and replacement: Fuser drive assembly board ......................................................................... 172
Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 5H board ..................................... 176
Removal and replacement: Developer fan .................................................................................................. 180
Removal and replacement: Main board ....................................................................................................... 184
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly ............................................................................... 190
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board .................................................. 194
Removal and replacement: Right door assembly ...................................................................................... 198
Removal and replacement: Fuser unit ......................................................................................................... 202
Removal and replacement: Developer unit ................................................................................................ 205
Removal and replacement: Drum unit ......................................................................................................... 213
Removal and replacement: Accelerator board ........................................................................................... 218
Install accessory: NFC Kit Installation ........................................................................................................... 221
Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution ................................................................ 231
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: 500 GB FIPS HDD/500 GB formatter HDD . 233
Removal and replacement: Formatter and formatter cage ..................................................................... 235
Removal and replacement: 500GB Main PCA HDD .................................................................................... 242
Removal and replacement: Control panel ................................................................................................... 247
Removal and replacement: Keyboard .......................................................................................................... 250
Exit assemblies .................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Upper and lower exit ...................................................................................................................................... 254
Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor ............................................................................................ 256
Cassettes tray 2/3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 259
Cassettes Tray 2/3 .......................................................................................................................................... 260
Main frame assembly .......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Main engine frame .......................................................................................................................................... 264
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive unit .................................................................................. 266
Removal and replacement: Toner duct drive unit ...................................................................................... 270
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive unit ............................................................................................. 275
Removal and replacement: Main drive unit ................................................................................................ 279
Removal and replacement: Fuser/exit drive assembly ............................................................................. 283
Fuser exit drive ..................................................................................................................................................................... 287
Fuser exit drive ................................................................................................................................................ 288
Registration sub-frame ...................................................................................................................................................... 290
Registration sub-frame .................................................................................................................................. 292
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly ................................................................................... 294
Main frame pickup 1 and 2 ................................................................................................................................................. 301
Main frame pickup 1 and 2 ............................................................................................................................ 302
Main frame pickup ............................................................................................................................................................... 304
Main frame pickup ........................................................................................................................................... 306
Removal and replacement: Trays 2–x main rollers ................................................................................... 308
x ENWW
Main frame ............................................................................................................................................................................ 314
Main frame ....................................................................................................................................................... 316
Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor PCA ................................................................................... 318
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit sensor ......................................................................... 320
Removal and replacement: Toner duct ........................................................................................................ 323
Removal and replacement: Transfer roller ................................................................................................. 332
Removal and replacement: Front door open switch ................................................................................. 334
Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit .............................................................. 338
Removal and replacement: Right door open switch ................................................................................. 343
Covers .................................................................................................................................................................................... 346
Covers ............................................................................................................................................................... 348
Removal and replacement: Left cover ......................................................................................................... 349
Removal and replacement: Rear covers ...................................................................................................... 351
Right door ............................................................................................................................................................................. 354
Right door ......................................................................................................................................................... 356
Removal and replacement: Right Door, Tray 1 and Tray 1 assemblies .................................................. 358
Tray 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 373
Tray 1 ................................................................................................................................................................ 374
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller .................................................................... 376
Right door exit and takeaway ............................................................................................................................................ 380
Right door exit ................................................................................................................................................. 382
Right door duplex ................................................................................................................................................................ 384
Right door duplex ............................................................................................................................................ 386
Removal and replacement: Duplex sensor ................................................................................................. 388
ADF (LX models) ................................................................................................................................................................... 391
ADF (LX models) .............................................................................................................................................. 392
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access
cover (LX) .......................................................................................................................................................... 394
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX) ..... 398
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly ....... 404
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX) .. 414
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models) ....................................................................................................................... 419
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX) ................................................................................................................. 420
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) PCA (LX) ................ 422
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller
assembly (LX) .................................................................................................................................................. 426
ADF main frame assembly (LX models) ........................................................................................................................... 432
ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models) ................................................................................................ 434
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) separation roller
assembly (LX) .................................................................................................................................................. 436
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) feed motor (LX) ... 443
ENWW xi
Flow ADF (GX/z) .................................................................................................................................................................... 447
ADF (GX/z) ........................................................................................................................................................ 448
Removal and replacement: Document feeder input tray (GX) ................................................................. 450
Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly ........................................................ 457
Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) .......................................................................................................................................... 464
Flow ADF open cover (GX/z) .......................................................................................................................... 466
Removal and replacement: Document feeder jam access cover (GX) .................................................... 468
ADF upper pickup (GX/z) ..................................................................................................................................................... 474
ADF upper pickup (GX/z) ................................................................................................................................ 476
Removal and replacement: Flow document feeder pick roller assembly (GX) ..................................... 478
Removal and replacement: ADF separation roller assembly (GX) ........................................................... 483
Flow ADF stacker (GX/z) ...................................................................................................................................................... 491
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) ............................................................................................................................ 492
Flow ADF main frame (GX/z) .............................................................................................................................................. 494
ADF main frame (GX/z) ................................................................................................................................... 496
Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder front motor (GX) ............ 499
Removal and replacement: Document feeder rear motors (GX) ............................................................. 503
Removal and replacement: Document feeder PCA fan (GX) .................................................................... 512
Removal and replacement: Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan (GX) ............................ 515
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX) ................................................. 518
Removal and replacement: PCA-ADF HIC (GX) ........................................................................................... 526
Image scanner ...................................................................................................................................................................... 529
Image scanner ................................................................................................................................................. 530
Image scanner assembly .................................................................................................................................................... 532
Image scanner assembly ............................................................................................................................... 534
Removal and replacement: Scan glass ........................................................................................................ 536
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement:
Scanner LED lamp module ............................................................................................................................ 539
Image scanner, lower (LX) .................................................................................................................................................. 543
Image scanner, lower (LX) .............................................................................................................................. 544
Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly – CCD and lens ............................................................... 546
Removal and replacement: Scanner APS sensor ....................................................................................... 550
Second Exit (Optional) ......................................................................................................................................................... 554
Remove the second eixt (Optional) .............................................................................................................. 554
Remove the return gate solenoid (Optional) .............................................................................................. 556
Dual cassette feeder (DCF) ................................................................................................................................................. 559
DCF main ........................................................................................................................................................... 560
DCF main frame pickup 1 ............................................................................................................................... 578
DCF main frame pickup .................................................................................................................................. 580
DCF main frame pickup,upper ....................................................................................................................... 586
High-capacity input (HCI) tray (workgroup) ..................................................................................................................... 588
xii ENWW
HCI main ............................................................................................................................................................ 589
HCI sub - frame ................................................................................................................................................ 606
HCI sub - pickup upper/lower ........................................................................................................................ 628
HCI drive ............................................................................................................................................................ 635
HCI sub - cassette ........................................................................................................................................... 660
3 Problem solving .................................................................................................................................................................................... 673

Control panel messages document (CPMD) .................................................................................................................... 674
Error codes ....................................................................................................................................................... 674
How to search for printer documentation ................................................................................................... 676
Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................................................... 680
Determine the problem source ..................................................................................................................... 681
Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................... 700
Problem-solving checklist ............................................................................................................................. 701
Print menu map ............................................................................................................................................... 703
Print current settings pages .......................................................................................................................... 703
Print event log ................................................................................................................................................. 704
Pre-boot menu options .................................................................................................................................. 705
Control panel menus ...................................................................................................................................... 723
Clear paper jams .................................................................................................................................................................. 789
Paper jam locations ........................................................................................................................................ 789
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam .................................................................................................................................. 789
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam .......................................................................................................... 790
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI ............................................................................................................. 793
Service mode (tech mode) ................................................................................................................................................. 795
Entering service mode .................................................................................................................................... 795
Service mode menu tree ................................................................................................................................ 795
Information ...................................................................................................................................................... 802
Maintenance counts ........................................................................................................................................ 804
Diagnostics ....................................................................................................................................................... 806
Service functions ............................................................................................................................................. 825
Print quality troubleshooting guide .................................................................................................................................. 828
Image quality problems and solutions ........................................................................................................ 829
Other errors ...................................................................................................................................................... 845
Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew ..................................................................................................................................... 863
4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams ......................................................................................................................................................... 867

PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) ................................................................................................................. 867
Exit section ............................................................................................................................................................................ 871
Drive section ......................................................................................................................................................................... 872
Paper handling section ....................................................................................................................................................... 878
ENWW xiii
Frame section ....................................................................................................................................................................... 880
Fuser section ........................................................................................................................................................................ 883
MP right door section .......................................................................................................................................................... 885
Scanner section .................................................................................................................................................................... 889
Document feeder section ................................................................................................................................................... 891
Image formation section .................................................................................................................................................... 893
Optional dual-cassette feeder (DCF) ................................................................................................................................ 896
Optional high-capacity input (HCI) .................................................................................................................................... 899
5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) ...................................................................................................................................... 905

Product specification and description .............................................................................................................................. 906
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view ..................................................................................... 906
Specification ..................................................................................................................................................... 908
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system ................................................................................ 915
Service approach ................................................................................................................................................................. 987
Precautions when replacing parts ................................................................................................................ 988
Before performing service ............................................................................................................................. 990
ESD precautions .............................................................................................................................................. 990
After performing service ................................................................................................................................ 990
Post-service test ............................................................................................................................................. 991
Order parts by authorized service providers .............................................................................................. 992
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers) ............................................... 993
Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker) ................................................................................................................. 994
Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher) .............................................................................................................. 1040
Bridge unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 1066
Covers ............................................................................................................................................................. 1090
Entrance unit ................................................................................................................................................. 1160
Punch unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 1166
Tray diverter unit .......................................................................................................................................... 1173
Top exit unit ................................................................................................................................................... 1202
Top output tray unit ...................................................................................................................................... 1229
Main exit unit ................................................................................................................................................. 1243
Paddle unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 1270
End fence unit ................................................................................................................................................ 1303
Tamper unit .................................................................................................................................................... 1338
Stapler unit .................................................................................................................................................... 1495
Ejector unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 1576
Main output tray unit .................................................................................................................................... 1732
Paper holding unit ........................................................................................................................................ 1793
Buffer unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 1851
Booklet maker ............................................................................................................................................... 1865
xiv ENWW
Booklet entrance unit ................................................................................................................................... 1876
Booklet paddle unit ...................................................................................................................................... 1894
Booklet end fence unit ................................................................................................................................. 1907
Booklet presser unit ..................................................................................................................................... 1929
Booklet tamper unit ..................................................................................................................................... 1952
Booklet stapler unit ...................................................................................................................................... 2009
Booklet fold unit ............................................................................................................................................ 2028
Booklet diverter unit ..................................................................................................................................... 2112
Booklet exit unit ............................................................................................................................................ 2136
Booklet output tray unit .............................................................................................................................. 2155
PCA .................................................................................................................................................................. 2159
Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................. 2177
Control panel message document (CPMD) ............................................................................................... 2177
Clear paper jams ........................................................................................................................................... 2178
Finisher system diagram .................................................................................................................................................. 2191
6 Diagrams ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2193

Diagrams (connection) ..................................................................................................................................................... 2193
Diagrams (FUSER EXIT) .................................................................................................................................................... 2194
Diagrams (PICKUP/PH DRIVE/SIDE) ................................................................................................................................ 2194
Diagrams (laser scanner assembly/HVPS) .................................................................................................................... 2195
Diagrams (toner) ................................................................................................................................................................ 2196
Diagrams (FDB/LVPS) ....................................................................................................................................................... 2197
Diagrams (UI) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2198
Diagrams (FRONT/OPC) .................................................................................................................................................... 2199
Diagrams (scanner) ........................................................................................................................................................... 2200
Diagrams (Dual Cassette Feeder) ................................................................................................................................... 2201
7 Inner finisher ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2203

Product specification and description ............................................................................................................................ 2204
Inner finisher view ......................................................................................................................................... 2204
Specification .................................................................................................................................................. 2205
Inner finisher system .................................................................................................................................... 2210
Service approach ............................................................................................................................................................... 2248
Precautions when replacing parts ............................................................................................................. 2249
Before performing service .......................................................................................................................... 2251
ESD precautions ............................................................................................................................................ 2251
After performing service .............................................................................................................................. 2251
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................... 2252
Order parts by authorized service providers ............................................................................................ 2253
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher) ....................................................................................... 2254
ENWW xv
Parts and diagrams (inner finisher) ........................................................................................................... 2255
Covers ............................................................................................................................................................. 2272
Entrance unit ................................................................................................................................................. 2299
Exit unit ........................................................................................................................................................... 2316
Paper support unit ........................................................................................................................................ 2338
Paddle unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 2424
Tamper unit .................................................................................................................................................... 2449
Stapler unit .................................................................................................................................................... 2560
Ejector unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 2589
End fence unit ................................................................................................................................................ 2655
Output tray unit ............................................................................................................................................. 2667
Paper holding unit ........................................................................................................................................ 2730
Punch unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 2777
Problem solving ................................................................................................................................................................. 2792
Control panel message document (CPMD) ............................................................................................... 2792
Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher) ............................................................................................................ 2793
Punch waste full sensor .............................................................................................................................. 2793
Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor ............................................................................ 2794
Entrance motor ............................................................................................................................................. 2795
Exit sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 2796
Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper holding
solenoid .......................................................................................................................................................... 2797
Paper support motor & home sensor ....................................................................................................... 2798
Front tamper motor and home sensor ..................................................................................................... 2799
Rear tamper motor and home sensor ...................................................................................................... 2800
End fence sensor .......................................................................................................................................... 2801
Stapler position motor and sensor ............................................................................................................ 2802
Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor ...................... 2803
Output tray motor and sensor .................................................................................................................... 2804
Output tray top of stack sensor ................................................................................................................. 2805
Top cover switch ............................................................................................................................................ 2806
Front cover switch ........................................................................................................................................ 2807
Appendix A Certificate of Volatility ..................................................................................................................................................... 2809

Certificate of Volatility ...................................................................................................................................................... 2809
Appendix B Service parts changes For Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products ....................................... 2813
Glossary of terms ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2817
Index ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2825
xvi ENWW
1 Product specifications and description
You will learn more about the following sub sections:
ENWW 1
Printer views
Learn more specifically about the different views of the printer.
Printer front view

Learn about the printer components (front view).
Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10
12
13
14 11
Item Description
1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)
2 Automatic document feeder width guides
3 Automatic document feeder input tray
4 Automatic document feeder output tray
5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)
6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only). Pull the keyboard straight out to use it. (NOTE: Close the keyboard when it is not in
use.)
7 Right door (access for clearing jams)
8 On/off button
9 Tray 1
10 Power switch
2 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description ENWW

Item Description
11 Power connection
12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)
13 Tray 2
14 Tray 3
15 Output bin
16 Easy-access USB port. Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer, or to update the printer firmware.
(NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.)
17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)
Printer back view

Learn about the printer components (back view).
Figure 1-2 Printer rear view
3
Item Description
1 Formatter cover
2 Interface ports
3 Serial number and product number label
Interface ports
Learn about the printer components (interface ports).
ENWW Printer views 3

Figure 1-3 Interface ports
Item Description
1 USB port for connecting external USB devices (NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.)
2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet network port
3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port
Control-panel view
Learn about the printer components (control-panel).
NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.
The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.
Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button on the printer control panel.
NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer configuration.

Figure 1-4 Printer control panel
2 3 4 5
6
1
Item Button Description
1 Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.

Home button
2 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present if users are not
logged in. The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out button is present. Touch the Reset
button to resume and release jobs from the previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the
quick copy count in the copy count field, exit special modes, reset the display language and the
keyboard layout.
3 Sign In or Sign Out button Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all options to the
default settings.
NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has configured the printer to require
permission for access to features.
4 Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several types of printer
Information button information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the following information:
● Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user session.
● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.
● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer using a phone,
tablet, or other device with Wi-Fi.
● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an optional wireless
accessory is installed).
● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.
● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using HP Web
Services (ePrint).

Item Button Description
5 Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

Help button
The status line provides information about the overall printer status.
6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to access more
applications.
NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can configure which
applications appear and the order in which they appear.
7 Start Copy button Touch the Start Copy button to start a copy job.
8 Home-screen page indicator Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The current page is
highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.
Inner finisher view

Learn about the printer components (inner finisher).
Stapler/stacker finisher view

Learn about the printer components (stapler/stacker finisher).
Booklet finisher view

Learn about the printer components (booklet finisher).

Specifications
Learn about the specifications.
Technical specifications
Learn technical specifications for model bundles.
NOTE: Hole punch accessories are optional for the stapler/stacker, inner finisher, and booklet maker
accessories.
Table 1-1 E72525dn, E72525z, E72530dn, E72530z, E72535dn, E72535z

Model number E72525dn E72525z E72530dn E72530z E72535dn E72535z
Product number Item X3A60A X3A59A X3A63A X3A62A X3A66A X3A65A
Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
capacity)
Tray 2 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)
Tray 3 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)
HP LaserJet dual Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

cassette feeder (DCF)
(workgroup)
2,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray
(HCI) (workgroup)
HP LaserJet Printer Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

cabinet (workgroup)
HP LaserJet Stapler/ Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

stacker finisher
HP LaserJet Booklet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finisher
HP LaserJet Inner Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finisher
HP LaserJet 2/3 hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch
HP LaserJet 2/4 hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch
Swedish hole punch Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
HP LaserJet Job Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

separator
HP LaserJet Spacer Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Automatic duplex Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

printing
Connectivity 10/100/1000 Ethernet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

LAN connection with
IPv4 and IPv6

Table 1-1 E72525dn, E72525z, E72530dn, E72530z, E72535dn, E72535z (continued)
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
Easy-access USB port Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

for printing without a
computer and
upgrading the
firmware
Hardware Integration Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Pocket for connecting
accessory and third-
party devices
Memory 6 GB base memory Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
7 GB base memory Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
Mass storage 320 GB HP Secure Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
High-Performance
Hard Disk
2x 320 GB HP Secure Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
High-Performance
Hard Disk
16 GB embedded Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
Multi-Media Controller
(eMMC)
Control-panel display Color touchscreen Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
control panel
Retractable keyboard Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
Print Prints 25 pages per Supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and on letter-size
paper.
Prints 30 pages per Not supported Not supported Supported Supported Not supported Not supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and on letter-size
paper
Prints 35 pages per Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and on letter-size
paper
Easy-access USB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

printing (no computer
required)
Fax Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional
Copy and Scan Scans 80 pages per Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and letter-size paper
Scans 120 pages per Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
minute (ppm) on A4
and letter-size paper
ENWW Specifications 9
Table 1-1 E72525dn, E72525z, E72530dn, E72530z, E72535dn, E72535z (continued)
100-page document Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported
feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-
pass duplex copying
and scanning
250-page document Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
feeder with dual-head
scanning for single-
pass duplex copying
and scanning
HP EveryPage Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
Technologies including
ultrasonic multi-feed
detection
Embedded optical Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
character recognition
(OCR) provides the
ability to convert
printed pages into text
that can be edited or
searched using a
computer
SMART Label feature Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
provides paper-edge
detection for
automatic page
cropping
Automatic page Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
orientation for pages
that have at least 100
characters of text
Automatic tone Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
adjustment sets
contrast, brightness,
and background
removal for each page
Digital Send Send documents to E- Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
mail, USB, and shared
folders on a network
Send documents to Not supported Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Supported
SharePoint®
Supported operating systems

Learn about supported operating systems.
The following information applies to the Printer-Specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for OS X and to the
software installer.

Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer and
installs the “HP PCL.6” version 3 print driver, the “HP PCL 6” version 3 print driver, or the “HP PCL-6” version 4
print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along with optional software when using the software
installer. Download the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, and the "HP PCL-6"
version 4 print driver from the printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support/lje72500mfpor
www.hp.com/support/colorlje78323mfp.
OS X: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/LaserJet
or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver. HP Easy Start is not
included in the HP Software Installer.
1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.
Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.
Table 1-2 Supported operating systems and print drivers

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on Notes
the web)
Windows® XP SP3, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
installed for this operating system as part of Windows XP in April 2009. HP will continue
the software installation. to provide best effort support for the
discontinued XP operating system. Some
features and page sizes in the print driver
are not supported.
Windows Vista®, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
installed for this operating system as part of Windows Vista in April 2012. HP will
the software installation. continue to provide best effort support for
the discontinued Vista operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print
driver are not supported.
Windows Server 2003 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
available for download from the printer- Windows Server 2003 in July 2010. HP will
support website. Download the driver, and continue to provide best effort support for
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to the discontinued Server 2003 operating
install it. system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.
Windows 7 SP1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is
installed for this operating system as part of
the software installation.
Windows 8, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is Windows 8 RT support is provided through
installed for this operating system as part of Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
the software installation.
Windows 8.1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print Windows 8.1 RT support is provided through
driver is installed for this operating system Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
as part of the software installation.
Windows 10, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specific print
driver is installed for this operating system
as part of the software installation.
Table 1-2 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)
Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on Notes

the web)
Windows Server 2008 SP2, 32-bit The “HP PCL.6” printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
available for download from the printer- Windows Server 2008 in January 2015. HP
support website. Download the driver, and will continue to provide best effort support
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to for the discontinued Server 2008 operating
install it. system. Some features and page sizes in
the print driver are not supported.
Windows Server 2008 SP2, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is
available for download from the printer-
support website. Download the driver, and
then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to
install it.
Windows Server 2008 R2, SP 1, 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specific print driver is
install it.
Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is

install it.
Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is
install it.
OS X 10.10 Yosemite, OS X 10.11 El Capitan, To install the print driver, download HP Easy
and OS X 10.12 Sierra Start from 123.hp.com/LaserJet. Follow the
steps provided to install the printer software
and print driver.
NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems, go to
www.hp.com/support/lje72500mfp or http://www.hp.com/support/colorlje78323mfp for HP's all-inclusive help
for the printer.
NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this printer, go to
www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click the links.
Table 1-3 Minimum system requirements
Windows OS X
● An Internet connection ● Internet connection
● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network connection ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space
● 2 GB of available hard-disk space
Mobile printing solutions

Learn what HP offers for mobile printing solutions.

HP offers multiple mobile and ePrint solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to HP Customer
Support - Knowledge Base.
● Wi-Fi Direct
● HP ePrint via email (Requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)
● HP ePrint app (Available for Android, iOS, and Blackberry)
● HP All-in-One Remote app for iOS and Android devices
● HP ePrint software
● Google Cloud Print
● AirPrint
● Android Printing
Printer dimensions
Learn about printer dimensions.
NOTE: A color printer model is shown in the figure below. However, the dimension information applies to mono
and color printers.
2
2
3 3
Table 1-4 Printer dimensions

Item Normal operating dimensions Maximum operating dimensions
Height 877 mm (34.5 in) (dn models) 1241 mm (49 in) (dn models)
925 mm (36.5 in) (z models) 1375 mm (54.25 in) (z models)
Depth 730 mm (28.75 in) (dn models) 1115 mm (44 in) (dn models)
780 mm (30.75 in) (z models) 1216 mm (48 in) (z models)
Table 1-4 Printer dimensions (continued)
Item Normal operating dimensions Maximum operating dimensions
Width 568 mm (22.5 in) (dn models) 1010 mm (39.75 in) (dn models)
584 mm (23 in) (z models) 1026 mm (40.5 in) (z models)
Weight 91.1 kg (200.8 lb) (dn models)
102.61 kg (226.2 lb) (z models)
Table 1-5 Printer accessory dimensions and weights
Product Length Width Depth Height Weight
HP LaserJet Cabinet 790 mm (31.1 in) 566 mm (22.3 in) 610 mm (24 in) 265 mm (10.4 in) 13.4 kg (29.5 lbs)
(workgroup)
HP LaserJet 2x520- 790 mm (31.1 in) 566 mm (22.3 in) 610 mm (24 in) 265 mm (10.4 in) 21 kg (46.3 lbs)
sheet dual cassette
feeder (DCF)
(workgroup)
HP LaserJet 2000 790 mm (31.1 in) 585 mm (23 in) 670 mm (26.4 in) 312 mm (12.3 in) 29.3 kg (64.59 lbs)
sheet high capacity
input (HCI) feeder
(workgroup)
HP LaserJet Job 790 mm (31.1 in) 464 mm (18.3 in) 394.7 mm (15.5 in) 124.5 mm (4.9 in) 3 kg (1.4 lbs)
separator
(workgroup)
HP LaserJet Inner 790 mm (31.1 in) 458 mm (18 in) 491 mm (19.3 in) 173 mm (6.8 in) 15kg (33.1 lbs)
finisher
HP LaserJet Booklet 790 mm (31.1 in) 1016.4 mm (39.75 673 mm (26.75 in) 587.5 mm (23.5 in) 62 kg (136.7 lbs)
finisher in)
HP LaserJet Stapler/ 790 mm (31.1 in) 1016.4 mm (39.75 673 mm (26.75 in) 587.5 mm (23.5 in) 40kg (88.2 lbs)
Stacker finisher in)
NOTE: HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions provided in this chapter to
make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation.
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power specifications.
See www.hp.com/support/lje72500mfp for current information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.
Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-6 Operating-environment specifications
Environment Recommended Allowed
Temperature 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F) Not available
Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) Not available
General specifications
Learn about the general specifications.
NOTE: Acoustic values are subject to change. For current information, see www.hp.com/support.
Table 1-7 General specifications

Item Description Specification
Processor CPU 1.2 GHz
User Interface Control Panel 20.3 cm (8 in) Color Graphics Display (CGD)
with touchscreen; rotating (adjustable angle)
display; illuminated Home button (for quick
return to the Home menu); USB High-speed
2.0 port; Hardware Integration Pocket;
Extended Keyboard (Flow models only)
User Interface LED 2 (Power/Status)
User Interface Key/Button 1 (Power)
Memory Standard Flow 7 GB, Managed 6 GB
Storage Standard One 320 GB Standard, embedded HP High-

Performance Secure Hard Disk; AES 256
hardware encryption or greater; Secure
erase capabilities (Secure File Erase-
Temporary Job Files, Secure Erase-Job Data,
Secure ATA Erase-Disk).
NOTE: US Government SKU uses 500 GB

FIPS 140–2 validated hard disk.
Storage Optional N/A
Interface USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 2.0)
Interface USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 2.0)
Interface USB (EDI) N/A
Interface Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)
Interface Wireless LAN Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC Active

Type
Interface NFC Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC Active

Type
Interface Other N/A
Warmup Time From Power off (power on to ready) Less than 25 sec
From Sleep Less than 23 sec
Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)
Power Consumption Ready Less than 250 Wh
Power Consumption Normal operation Less than 800 Wh
Power Consumption Max/Peak Less than 1200 Wh
Power Consumption Sleep Less than 1.5 Wh
Power Consumption Power off Less than 0 W
Power Consumption TEC ● E72525: 1.478 Wh
● E72530: 1.789 Wh
● E72535: 2.279 Wh
Default Sleep Delay Time Sleep mode operation 2 minutes
Maximum Sleep Delay Time Sleep mode operation ● E72525E72530: 60 minutes
● E72535: 120 minutes
Power Requirement Operation ● Input Voltage (Europe): AC 187–253 V

(-10%-6%)
● Input voltage (USA): AC 93.5–137 V

(-10%-6%)
● Input Voltage (Korea): AC 187–253 V

(-10%-6%)
● Rated Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Acoustic Noise Level (Power) Power Emissions ● E72525: 6.5 Bel (A) , printing mono
simplex, A4 at 25 ppm
● E72530: 6.6 Bel (A), printing mono

● E72535: 6.8 Bel (A), printing mono

Acoustic Noise Level (Power) Acoustic Power Emissions (ready) ● E72525: 6.7 Bel (A), ADF copy mono
simplex
● E72530: 6.8 Bell (A), ADF copy mono

simplex
● E72535: 6.8 Bel (A), ADF copy mono

simplex
Acoustic Noise Level (Power) Acoustic Power Emissions (active, scan) E72525/E72530/E72535: 6.2 Bel (A), ADF
scan mono simplex at 44 ipm
6.9 Bel (A), ADF scan mono simplex at 85

ipm

Acoustic Noise Level (Pressure) Acoustic Pressure Emissions Bystander ● E72525: 49 dB(A), printing mono
(active, printing) simplex, A4 at 25 ppm
● E72530: 50 dB(A), printing mono

● E72535: 51 dB(A), printing mono

Acoustic Noise Level (Pressure) Acoustic Pressure Emissions Bystander Inaudible

(ready)
Acoustic Noise Level (Pressure) Acoustic Pressure Emissions Bystander E72525/E72530/E72535: 52 dB(A), ADF
(active, copy) copy mono simplex
Acoustic Noise Level (Pressure) Acoustic Pressure Emissions Bystander E72525/E72530/E72535: 47 dB(A), ADF
(active, scan) scan mono simplex at 44 ipm
54 dB(A), ADF scan mono simplex at 85 ipm
Recommended monthly print volume Operation ● E72525: 5000 pages
● E72530: 6000 pages
● E72535: 7000 pages
Max monthly duty cycle Operation Up to 50,000 recommended monthly page

volume
Print specifications
Learn about the print specifications.
Table 1-8 Print specifications

Item Specification
Print speed Simplex ● E72525
– Up to 25 ppm
● E72530
– Up to 30 ppm
● E72535
– Up to 35 ppm
FPOT From Ready ● E72525: Less than 9 seconds
● E72530: Less than 8 seconds
● E72535: Less than 7.6 seconds
FPOT From Sleep ● E72525: Less than 31.5 seconds
Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Resolution Optical 600 x 600 dpi
Resolution Enhanced Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi with reduced speed
Printer Language HP PCL 6/HP PCL 5c/HP PostScript Level 3

Emulation/PDF (v1.7)/AirPrint™ compatible
Font 84 scalable TrueType fonts
Network Protocol ● IP Management (DHCP, BOOTP, AutoIP, SetIP, Static)
● Discovery Protocol (SLP, UPnP, Bonjour, DNS, WINS)
● Printing Protocol (TCP/IP, LPR, IPP, WSD)
● Management Protocol (SNMP v1.2, SNMP3, SMTP, Talnet)
● Scan Protocol (SMTP, FTP, SMB, WSD)
● Security Protocol (SMB, Kerberos, LDAP, IPsec, EAP)
Duplex Print Built in
Direct Print PRN/PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS
Print Features ● WSD print
● Secure print
● Stored print
● Booklet
● N-up
● Cover page
● Insert page
● Except page
● Barcode
● Eco
● Poster
● Glossy
● Watermark
● Tray priority setting
● Auto tray setting
● Tray protection
● USB print
● Secure PDF print
● Google Cloud print

Scan specifications
Learn about the scan specifications.
Table 1-9 Scan specifications

Item Specification
Scan method MMT
Compatibility Network TWAIN/Network

SANE
Color Mode Mono/Gray/Color
Scan Speed Scan to folder speeds DN bundles (black and white,

(hardware) gray scale, and color):
● Simplex up to 80 ipm @
600 dpi
● Duplex up to 120 ipm @

600 dpi
Z bundles (black and white,

gray scale, and color):
● Simplex up to 120 ipm

@ 600 dpi
● Duplex up to 240 ipm @

600 dpi
File Formats ● PDF
● Search-able PDF
● Compact PDF
● PDF Encryption
● Digital Signature in PDF
● PDF/A
● Single-Page PDF
● Multi-page PDF
● TIFF
● Single-Page TIFF
● Multi-page TIFF
● XPS
● Single-Page XPS
● Multi-page XPS
● JPEG
● PNG
Resolution Optical (ADF) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Resolution Optical (flatbed) Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Resolution Enhanced (ADF) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi
Resolution Enhanced (flatbed) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi
Scan Destinations ● Email
● FTP
● SMB
● HDD
● USB
● WSD
● PC
Multi-destinations Yes
Communication Protocol ● SMTP (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)
● FTP (IPv4, IPv6)
● SMB (IPv4, IPv6)
● WSD
● T4Net
Scan ADF Minimum for dn bundles: 128

Size x 140 mm (5 x 5.5 in)
Minimum for z bundles: 105 x

148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 in)
Maximum: 297 x 437 mm

(11.7 x 17.2 in)
Flatbed Maximum: 297 x 437 mm

(11.7 x 17.2 in)
Scan Original Types Text/Text & Photo/Photo
Copy specifications
Learn about the copy specifications.
Table 1-10 Copy specifications

Item Specification
Copy Speed Single Document Multiple Copy (SDMC) ● E72525
– Up to 25 cpm
● E72530

Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)
Item Specification
– Up to 30 cpm
● E72535
– Up to 35 cpm
FCOT From Ready ● E72525: Less than 6.2 seconds
Resolution ADF (Flow ADF/ADF) ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi
● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi
Flatbed ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi
● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi
Reduce/Enlarge ADF (Flow ADF/ADF) 25–400%
Reduce/Enlarge Flatbed 25–400%
Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Copier Settings ● 2–sided copying
● Scalability
● Image adjustments (darkness, contrast, background clean up, sharpness)
● Optimized text/picture (text, mixed, printed picture, photograph)
● N-Up
● N or Z-ordering
● Content orientation
● Collation
● Booklet
● ID scan
● Job build
● Job storage
● Watermark
● Stamps
● Book mode scans
● Erase edges
● Automatically detect color/mono
● Image preview
Copy Original Type ● Text
● Text and Printed Photo
● Text and Glossy Photo
● Newspaper
● Printed Photo
● Glossy Photo
● Copied Original
● Map
● Light Original
● ID Copy
● N-up
● Booklet
● Image Repeat
● Auto Fit
● Book Copy
● Watermark
22 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description
● Image Overlay
ENWW
● Stamp
Paper handling specifications
Learn about the paper handling specifications.
Table 1-11 Paper handling specifications

Item Specification
Input Capacity Standard 1040 sheets
Input Capacity Multipurpose 100 sheets
Input Capacity Other Options Dual Cassette Feeder (2 x 520 sheets)
Input Capacity BotomHigh Capacity 2000 sheets, A4 only

Input (bHCI)
Input Capacity Maximum 1040 Std + 100 Tray 1 + 2000 bHCI
Standard Cassette Tray Capacity 520 sheets x 2
Standard Cassette Tray Media Sizes ● Tray2: 140 x 210 mm to 297 x 364 mm (5.5 x 8.27 in) to (11.7 x 14.33 in)
● Tray3: 140 x 210 mm to 297 x 432 mm (5.5 x 8.27 in) to (11.7 x 17 in)
Standard Cassette Tray Media Types ● Plain
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Heavy Weight
Table 1-11 Paper handling specifications (continued)
Item Specification
Standard Cassette Tray Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m2 (18.5-24 lb/ Duplex)
● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m2 (25-28 lb/ Duplex)
● Heavy Weight Paper : 106-176 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 177-220 g/m2
● Thin Paper: 60-69 g/m2 (16-19 lb/Duplex)
● Cotton paper: 75-90 g/m2 (Duplex
● Colored: 75-90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Pre-Printed: 71-90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Recycled: 60-90 g/m2 (Duplex)2
● Bond Paper: 105-120 g/m2 (Duplex)2
● Letterhead: 75-90 g/m2 (Duplex)2
● Hole Punched Paper: 75-90 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Thin CardStock: 105-163 g/m2 (Duplex)
● Thin Glossy : 106-163 g/m2 (Duplex)
Standard Cassette Tray Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes
● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect: Yes
● Paper Type Detect: No
● Paper Size Detect: Yes
Tray 1 Capacity 100 sheets
Tray 1 Media Sizes 98 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm (3.8 x 5.8 in) to (11.7 x 17 in)

Item Specification
Tray 1 Media Types ● Plain
● Thin
● Bond
● Hole Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Heavy Weight
● Envelope
● Label
● Card transparency
Tray 1 Media Weight 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb): Simplex, Duplex Envelope (75 to 90 g/m2)
Label (120 to 150 g/m2): Simplex
Tray 1 Sensing Paper Empty Detect: Yes
Paper Size Detect: No
Automatic document Capacity ● 250 sheets for flow (GX/z models)

feeder (ADF) (LX/dn
models) ● 100 sheets for Managed (LX/dn models)
Duplex document Yes

scanning
Document Size ● Width: 128 mm-297 mm ((5 in-11.7 in))
● Length: 128 mm-432 mm ((5 in- 17in))
Document Weight ● E72525/72825
– Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.25 lb)
– Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m2 (12.25— 34 lb)
● E72530/72830, E72535/72835
Item Specification
– Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.25 lb)
– Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m2 (12.25— 34 lb)
● E77822, E78323
– Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.25 lb)
– Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m2 (12.25— 34 lb)
● E77825, E77830, E78325, E78330
– Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.25 lb)
– Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m2 (12.25— 34 lb)
Automatic document Capacity 250 sheets

feeder (ADF) (GX/d
models) Document size ● Width : 105 mm - 297 mm (5in - 11.7in)
● Length : 140 mm - 432 mm (5.5in - 17in)
Document Weight Simplex: 60 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.24 lb) (guarantee) 42-60 g/m and 163-220
g/m2(support)
Auto Detected Size A3/A4/A5/A6 SEF/B4/B5/Letter/Legal/Statement/Folio/Executive
Printer Output Capacity Standard 500 sheets, face down
Printer Output Capacity Maximum 615 sheets 500 sheets (Standard) + 125 sheets (Job Separator)
Printing Size Maximum Size 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in)
Printing Size Minimum Size 98 mm x 148 mm (3.8 in x 5.8 in)
Maximum Printing Area Trays 1–3 Top: 4.23 +/- 1.5 mm / Left: 4.23 +/- 1.5 mm
Maximum Printing Area Simplex from optional Top and Left: 4.23 +/- 2 mm
trays
Maximum Printing Area Duplex Top: 4.23 +/- 2 mm / Left: 4.23 +/- 2 mm
Duplex Printing Support Built-in
Duplex Printing Media Sizes ● 140 mm x 182 mm (5.5in x 7.2 in)
● 297 mm x 432 mm (11.7 in x 17 in)

Item Specification
Duplex Printing Media Types ● Plain
● Thin
● Bond
● Punched
● Pre-Printed
● Recycled
● Thin Cardstock
● Letterhead
● Thick
● Cotton
● Colored
● Archive
● Thin Glossy
● Heavy Weight
Duplex Printing Media weight 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb)
Supplies
Learn about the required toner cartridge and toner collection unit (TCU).
Table 1-12 Supplies
Item Part number Average yield
HP Black Managed LJ Toner Cartridge1 X3A65-67901 Approx. 48,000 pages
HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit X3A60-67901 Approx. 100,000 pages
1
Print cartridge life is approximate, based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage. Declared
cartridge yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based on images printed
and other factors. For more information, visit www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.
IMPORTANT: Toner cartridges or other supplies must be purchased in the same country/region as the printer
being used. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with the printer. This is due to
differing configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the conditions of a specific country/
region.
Maintenance parts
Learn about the printer maintenance parts.
HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.
Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.
Table 1-13 Maintenance parts
Item Product number Life
HP Managed LJ Imaging Drum X3A65-67916 200,000 pages
HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit X3A60-67901 100,000 pages
HP LaserJet Black Developer Unit JC96-11669A 400,000 pages
HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Assembly JC82-00479A 320,000 pages
HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Assembly JC82-00481A 320,000 pages
HP LaserJet Transfer Roller JC82-00466A 150,000 pages
HP LaserJet Trays 2-x Rollers JC93-00540A 200,000 pages
HP LaserJet Tray 1 Roller JC93-00540B 200,000 pages
HP LaserJet Flow ADF Pick Roller JC97-04650A 200,000 pages
HP LaserJet Flow ADF Separation Roller JC97-04915A 200,000 pages
HP LaserJet ADF Pick Roller JC97-04857A 200,000 pages
HP LaserJet ADF Separation Roller JC97-04852A 100,000 pages
NOTE: Depending on print patterns and the job mode used, maintenance part lifespans vary.
Optional
Learn about the printer optional parts.
Table 1-14 Optional list

Item Model E72535 E72530 E72525
HP LaserJet Dual Y1F97A Yes Yes Yes

Cassette Workgroup
Feeder
HP LaserJet Workgroup Y1G17A Yes Yes Yes

Cabinet
HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet Y1F99A Yes Yes Yes

High Capacity Tray WG
HP LaserJet Inner Y1G00A Yes Yes Yes

Finisher
HP LaserJet Booklet Y1G07A Yes Yes Yes

Finisher
HP LaserJet Job Y1G15A Yes Yes Yes

Separator WG
HP LaserJet Stapler/ Y1G14A Yes Yes Yes

Stacker Finisher Staples

Table 1-14 Optional list (continued)
Item Model E72535 E72530 E72525
HP LaserJet Inner/ Y1G13A Yes Yes Yes

Booklet Finisher Staples

Finisher Hole 2/3 Punch

Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch

Finisher Swedish Punch
HP LaserJet Hole Punch Y1G10A Yes Yes Yes

2/3 Accessory

2/4 Accessory

Swedish Accessory
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Y1G22A Yes Yes Yes

Heaters WG
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Y1G22A#BGJ Yes Yes Yes

Heaters Accessory WG
110V
HP LaserJet Paper Tray Y1G22A#B19 Yes Yes Yes

Heaters Accessory WG
220V
HP Second Exit1 Y1G23A Yes Yes Yes
HP Spacer2 Y1G24A Yes Yes Yes
1
Required to attach an external finisher and installing an inner finisher.
2
Required to attach an external finisher to a monochrome model printer.
Feeding system
Learn about the feeding system.
Feeding system overview

Learn about the feeding system overview.
The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism inside
the printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller assembly, and exit
unit.
Figure 1-5 Feeding system overview

Main components and functions
Learn about main components and their functions.
Rollers
Learn about the rollers.
Figure 1-6 Rollers
Callout Description Callout Description
1 Tray 2 12 Tray 4 paper path rollers
2 Tray 3 13 Tray 5 paper path rollers
3 Tray 4 (optional) 14 Sensor registration
ENWW Feeding system 31

(continued)
Callout Description Callout Description
4 Tray 5 (optional 15 Roller registration
5 Tray 2 pick/separation/feed rollers 16 Roller transfer
6 Tray 3 pick/separation/feed rollers 17 Roller output 1st
7 Tray 4 pick/separation/feed rollers 18 Roller output 2nd
8 Tray 5 pick/separation/feed rollers 19 Roller invert
9 Tray 1 pick/separation/feed rollers 20 Roller duplex 1
10 Tray 2 paper path rollers 21 Roller duplex 2
11 Tray 3 paper path rollers
● Pickup roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
– This roller picks up the paper from the tray.
● Feed roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
– This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the feed
roller.
● Separation roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
– This roller is placed against the feed roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the feed roller.
When two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of the torque
limiter of the reverse roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of paper. As a
result, the reverse roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.
● Feed roller
– This roller transfers the paper came from the forward/separation roller to the registration roller.
● Registration roller
– This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller
assembly.
Sensor, motor, and solenoid

Learn about the sensor, motor, and solenoid.

Figure 1-7 Sensor, motor, and solenoid
5SBZ1JDLVQ
TPMFOPJE
5SBZ
Cassette
Learn about the cassette.
The tray stores paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.

Figure 1-8 Basic cassette
Item Description
1 Structure: Drawer Type
2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80 g/m² paper standard)
3 Paper type
NOTE: Tray 2 does not support A3 or 11 x 17 paper.
4 Paper weight
● Plain paper: 60–220 g/m²
5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor
Pickup Assembly
Learn about the pickup assembly.
When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of the
paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down. The feed
and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and that the feed
roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.
NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.

Figure 1-9 Pickup unit 1
Figure 1-10 Pickup unit 2
Registration assembly
Learn about the registration assembly.
The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor.
The registration roller clutch is located between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on the
transfer belt (for color), and it controls power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on
the drum at the predetermined registration point.
Figure 1-11 Registration roller

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly
Learn about the Tray 1 feed assembly.
The Tray 1 feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.
Figure 1-12 Tray 1 feeder assembly
Specification
● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m² / 21 lb paper standard)
● Media size: 297mm x 432 mm – 98 mm x 148 mm (11.7 in x 17 in – 3.87 in x 5.8 in)
● Media weight: Plain paper 60 – 176 g/m²
● Feeding speed: 30 ppm (E77430/78330), 25 ppm (E77425/78325), 22 ppm (E77422), 23 ppm (E78323)
Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge Feeding)
Paper separation
Figure 1-13 Paper separation
When the Tray 1 paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a Tray 1 printing job, the Tray 1
solenoid [B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in Tray 1.

This machine uses a Feed and Separation Roller (FSR) system for feeding paper. The friction between the
separation roller [D] and feed roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.

Image creation
Learn about image creation.
Printing process overview

Learn about the printing process overview.
This printer uses one imaging unit and one laser for mono printing. The imaging unit consists of a drum unit and
developer unit.
The drum unit consists of an Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) drum, charging roller, and cleaning blade.
Figure 1-14 Printing process overview
The OPC drum (A) is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed to light from the laser scanner assembly (B).
The light produced by a laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The
negatively charged toners are attracted to the latent drum image by an electric field. The toners (real image) on
the OPC drum are transferred to the transfer media by the positive bias applied to the transfer roller.
1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.
2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.
3. Development: The magnetic roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum
surface.
4. Transfer: The transfer roller opposite the OPC drum transfers toner from the drum to the paper.
5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning blade removes remaining toner on the drum surface after image
transfer to the paper.
6. Erasing for OPC drum: Discharge cleaning is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the
cleaning lamp at the end of every job.

Imaging unit
Learn about the imaging unit.
Imaging unit overview

Learn about the imaging unit.
The imaging unit consists of the drum unit and the developer unit.
The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (1.2 in) with a circumference of approximately 94.2 mm (3.7 in).
The developing gap between a drum and the corresponding magnetic roller cannot be adjusted. The CRUM chip
is the sub part of the drum unit. The CRUM chip stores job count information and other data.
Figure 1-15 Drum unit
Drum drive
Learn about the drum drive unit.
The OPC drum and magnetic roller are driven by one BLDC motor and supplied with power from the coupling.
The drive shaft is directly inserted into the OPC drum to fix the drum unit. This structure provides stable printing
quality.
ENWW Image creation 39

Figure 1-16 Drum drive
Developer unit
Learn about the developer unit.
This printer uses a dual-component development system. The development unit contains 340 g (12 oz) of toner
carrier that is supplied to the magnetic (development) roller by the two mixing augers.
The developer unit has a toner concentration (TC) sensor. The TC sensor is used for controlling the operating
range of toner density.
Figure 1-17 Developer unit
Agitation occurs at the following times:

● During the process control self-checking
● During toner supply job
● During development job
The developer unit must be stored below 50°C (122°F) or the toner hardens and does not work properly.
ENWW Image creation 41

Fuser unit
Learn about the fuser unit.
Fuser unit overview

Learn about the fuser unit.
This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.
This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper by applying heat and pressure.
The printer uses a two-roller fusing system and thinner heat roller to decrease warm-up time.
Figure 1-18 Fuser unit
● Lamp halogen
The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One lamp heats the center of the heat roller, and the other lamp
heats the end of axial direction. The halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the heat roller. Each lamp has
its coil in a different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center. The coils of the side heater
lamp are located on both sides. The lamps are fixed inside of the heat roller. The lamps do not rotate when
the heat roller rotates.
● Heat roller
The aluminum heat roller transfers heat from the halogen lamp to the toner and paper. The thinner heat
roller reduces the time needed to warm-up and switch modes. To prevent the heat roller from adhering to
the toner, its surface has a PFA coating. The heat roller is rotated by a gear located on the side of the roller.
● Pressure Roller
The pressure roller is made of rubber, which ensures proper nip width between the pressure roller and the
heat roller. The force applied by the pressure roller ensures toner effectively adheres to the paper.
● Non-Contact (NC) Sensor

NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors) are located near the center and the end of the heat roller and
control the temperature of the heat roller.
● Thermistor
The thermistor detects the temperature on the surface of the heat roller and controls the halogen lamp.
● Thermostats
The thermostats cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the heat roller
becomes abnormally hot as a result of problems such as a NC sensor malfunction. The force applied by the
pressure roller ensures toner effectively adheres to the paper.
Fuser unit drive

Learn about the fuser unit drive.
The fuser motor (A) drives the heat roller (C) through the gear train. The pressure roller (C) is pressurized and
rotated by the heat roller.
Figure 1-19 Fuser drive
Fuser unit temperature control

Learn about fuser temperature control.
When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the contact
thermistors detect the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises the temperature up to the printing
temperature.
ENWW Fuser unit 43

Figure 1-20 Fuser unit temperature control
Overheat protection
The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases :
● The temperature detected by the thermistor stays higher than 240°C (464°F) for 20 seconds
The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:
The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases :
The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:
● Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.
● If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C (383°F), power is turned off to the
fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C (383°F), it also turns the
power off to the fusing lamp.
Loop control
Learn about fuser loop control.
The tension of the paper between the OPC nip and the fuser nip is known as the paper loop level.

Figure 1-21 Loop control
The paper loop level is controlled by monitoring photo sensors 1 and 2. The fuser unit controls the motor speed
for the paper loop level.
ENWW Fuser unit 45

Laser scanner unit
Learn about the laser scanner unit.
Laser scanner unit overview

Learn about the laser scanner unit general information.
The laser scanner unit consists of one polygon motor and one laser diodes (LD) unit. The laser scanner assembly
forms a latent image on the surface of the OPC drum. For this process, the laser scanner assembly has a
collimator lens, cylindrical lens, and an F-Theta lens on an optical path for each color.
The laser scanner assembly has cover glass to protect the glass on the optical path from contamination. The LD
PCA interfaces with the printer.
Figure 1-22 Laser scanner unit overview
Table 1-17 Laser scanner unit overview

Callout Description
1 LD PBA

Table 1-17 Laser scanner unit overview (continued)
Callout Description
2 P/Mirror Motor
3 F1 Lens
4 F2 Lens
5 Cover glass
Laser scanning optical path

Learn about the laser scanner optical path.
The laser moves from the polygon motor (A) to the OPC drum (D). The F1 lens (B) and F2 lens (C) determine the
scanning line and the image position. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer.
The laser scanner assembly has three types depending on printing speed. The difference between the three
models is shown in the following table.
Figure 1-23 Laser scanning optical path
Laser synchronizing detectors

Learn about laser synchronizing detectors.
The laser scanner assembly has a beam detector sensor board (PD PCA). The PD PCA (A) detects the scanning
start point.
Main Scan Start Detection
The beam is detected by the PD PCA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal (Hsync).
The following diagram shows the data scanning direction.
ENWW Laser scanner unit 47

Figure 1-24 Laser synchronizing detectors

Drive system
Learn about the drive system.
Drive motors
Learn about the drive motors.
The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.
Figure 1-25 Drive motors
Number Motor Motor type Qty Function
1 Exit PM-STEP 1 Exit drive
(Reverse drive at duplex job)
2 Fuser BLDC 1 Fuser drive/Fuser pressure mode
(Reverse drive at pressure mode)
3 OPC/DEVE BLDC 1 OPC/DEVE drive
4 Registration (Regi)/Tray BLDC 1 Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed 1,

1 2 drive
4 Feed 1, 2 E-Clutch 3 Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed

drive control
5 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pick roll/Tray 2 and 3 lift drive
ENWW Drive system 49

Number Motor Motor type Qty Function
6 Toner supply DC 1 Toner cartridge drive
7 Toner Duct PM-STEP 1 Toner transport in toner cartridge

drive duct
Main Drive Unit (OPC/DEVE/Registration/Tray 1/Feed)

Learn about the main drive unit.
Figure 1-26 Main drive unit (front view)
Figure 1-27 Main drive unit (rear view)

Figure 1-28 Main drive (OPC/Deve motors)
Power Train
OPC/Deve (Magnetic roller): BLDC motor drive control
● 1 → 2 (OPC drive)
● 1 → 3→ 4 → 5 (Deve [Magnetic roller] drive)
Figure 1-29 Main drive (Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed 1, 2)

Power Train
Registration (Regi)/Tray 1/Feed 1, 2: BLDC motor drive, clutch drive control
● 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 Clutch/Gear (registration (Regi) input)
● 1 → 2 → 5 → 6 → 7 Clutch/Gear (Tray 1 input)
● 1 → 2 → 5 → 6 → 8 Clutch/Gear (feed 1 input) → 9 → 10 (feed 2 input)
Pickup Drive
Learn about the pickup drive.
Figure 1-30 Pickup drive
Power train
Pickup: rotating (pickup/input)/counter rotating (tray lift input)
● Step → Forward rotation → Gear 1 → Gear 2 (pickup)
● Step → Reverse rotation → Gear 1 → Gear 3 → Gear 4 → Gear 5 → Gear 6 (tray lift)
Duct Drive
Learn about the duct drive unit.

Figure 1-31 Duct drive
Power Train
DUCT: PM-STEP motor drive
● 1 PM-Step motor → 2 gear → gear duct drive
Fuser/Exit Drive
Learn about the fuser/exit drive.

Figure 1-32 Fuser/exit drive
Power Train
Fuser and fuser release: One-way gear is used
● 1 BLDC Motor → counterclockwise rotation (CCW) → 2 clockwise rotations (CW) → 3 (CW) (Fuser drive)
● 1 BLDC Motor → 1 clockwise rotation (CW) → 4 (CCW) → 5 (CW) → 6 (CW) (Fuser release drive)
● 7 Step Motor →8 RDCN Exit (Exit drive)
Toner supply drive

Learn about the toner supply drive.

Figure 1-33 Toner supply drive
Power Train
Toner cartridge drive
● 1 DC Motor → 2 gear-M RDCN supply → 3 gear-M supply (toner cartridge drive)

Flatbed Scanner System
Learn about the flatbed scanner system.

Flatbed scanner system overview
Learn about the flatbed scanner system.
The scanner converts a hard copy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and Charge
Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage space or transfers
the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.
For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved by a wire.
It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.
The scanner system consists of the three following modules:
● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.
● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.
● Imaging lens: Makes an image on the CCD.
The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This keeps a regular gap between
the original and the imaging lens.
Figure 1-34 Scanner system overview
Scan process description

Learn about the scan process description.
ENWW Flatbed Scanner System 57

1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.
2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.
3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.
4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.
To make a stable image, a gap must be maintained between the original and the lens. To maintain this gap, the
HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.
Figure 1-35 Scan process
The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.
Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.
The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the green color
from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical image.

The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to the
processor.
The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor consists of
approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the FR carriage and HR
carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.
Scan resolution is 600 dpi.
Figure 1-36 Image processing
Scanning system components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.
To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed. The motor
drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the carriage.
The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and driving unit.

Figure 1-37 Scanning system components
● FR Carriage

Figure 1-38 FR carriage
– LED lamp module
This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module. The
original is illuminated by the light-guide. The heat sink is attached to the LED PCB. When the heat sink
is broken or expired, an engineer needs to replace it.
○ Light-guide
The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.
○ White LED
The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat deterioration.
○ Reflection holder
The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.
– Mirror #1
Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.
HR Carriage (mirror unit)

Figure 1-39 HR carriage
● Mirror #2 and #3
Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light. The
reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.
● Pulley
The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage move.
The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.
Imaging unit
The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.
Figure 1-40 Imaging unit
● Imaging lens
The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed CCD
sensor and pixel size.
● CCD PCA
The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD consists of
three channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the image depends on the
voltage level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal. The digital signal makes the
scanned image.
Wire driving

To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and releases
the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.
Figure 1-41 Wire driving
Scanner glass (flatbed glass)
The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of tempered glass
and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.
Drive motor

The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the position and
maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing belt and pulley.
Timing belt
The timing belt has a regular saw tooth gear and transfers the motor power to the pulley.
Figure 1-42 Timing belt
Paper size sensor
The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size sensor
uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.
Home sensor
The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photo sensor.
Cover open sensor #1
When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size sensor is on or
off.
Cover open sensor #2
The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using magnetic force.
ADF glass
Scanner read the original feed from ADF unit through ADF glass. The FR carriage read the original as it passes on
ADF glass. If ADF glass is contaminated.
Shading sheet

The shading sheet is attached under flat-bed glass. Before every scan job, scanner read the shading sheet to get
reference image with same optical conditions. If shading sheet is contaminated, a vertical line might occur on
scan image.
Figure 1-43 Shading sheet
Caution for moving the scanner

Learn about cautions when moving the scanner.
When shipping or moving the printer, the FR and HR carriages in the scanner must be secured with a scan locking
screw to prevent movement of these parts and possible damage to the scanner
This screw must be installed before moving the printer and then removed once the printer is positioned in place.
When installing
After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking screw is
not removed scanner failure will occur.
1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.
2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.

Figure 1-44 Remove scan locking screw
When moving the printer
When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.
1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the end of scanner side wall which is screw locked.
2. Remove the screw cap.
3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.
Figure 1-45 Tighten scan locking screw

Document feeder LX (dn models)
Learn about the document feeder LX (dn models).
Document feeder LX overview

Learn about the document feeder LX.
Figure 1-46 Document feeder LX overview

R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
R7 R8 R9 R10 R11
Table 1-18 Document feeder LX overview
Part Description Function
R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray
R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)
R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray
R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller
R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller
R6 REGISTRATION (REGI) ROLLER Original paper alignment roller
R7 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning
R8 SIMPLEX WHITE-BAR Support of scanning unit
R9 SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller
R10 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit
R11 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray
Document feeder LX electrical parts

Learn about the document feeder LX electrical parts.
ENWW Document feeder LX (dn models) 67

Figure 1-47 Document feeder LX electrical parts electrical parts locations
Pick~ Roller
4. Paper Length
3.Detect Pickup
2, Registra on Feed Out
Registra on 5. Paper Width

1. Cover Open
Roller
ExitRoller
6. Exit Idle
Scan In
Scan Out
Scan Scan CCD
Table 1-19 Document feeder LX electrical parts
Callout Item Function
1 Cover Open Detects if cover is open or closed
2 Registration (Regi) Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the registration path
3 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty
4 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length
5 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width
Document feeder LX registration

Learn about the document feeder LX registration.
Figure 1-48 Document feeder LX registration

Registra on Sensor
Registra on Roller
Item Document feeder LX
Registration 1 times registration

Document feeder LX drive system
Learn about the document feeder LX drive system.
The drive system consists of one motor and two clutches to transfer the paper.
Figure 1-49 Document feeder LX drive system

Pickup Drive secƟon
RegistraƟon Motor secƟon
Feed Drive secƟon
The document feeder LX drive system consists of two motors (BLDC and STEP) and one clutch that moves the
paper.
● BLDC Motor > Feed and pickup
● STEP Motor > Regi
● Clutch > Pickup
There are three sections: pickup drive section, registration (regi) motor section, and feed drive section.
The pickup drive section has three assemblies: pickup drive assembly, pickup assembly, and guide pickup
assembly.
The registration motor section has the regi motor, trans gear, regi roller, regi-idle roller, regi sensor, and actuator.
LX ADF original pickup assembly

Learn about the LX ADF original pickup assembly.

Figure 1-50 LX ADF pickup assembly
Pickup Drive secƟon
Pickup Drive Assy
Pickup Assy
Guide pickup Assy
After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system.
The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.
The CLUTCH cannot rotate inversely. The spring that is included in the ADF GUIDE PICKUP ASSEMBLY is connected
to COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, stand-by status occurs and stops the operation.
The ADF roller and pick roller are connected by the belt.
The ADF roller is provided with power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the registration roller. When
the pickup drive is stopped and the registration roller is driven, the ADF roller becomes idle.
The normal process is:
● When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated and the printing job starts. The motor and
pickup clutch begin working. The pick roller then moves down and contacts the original in the tray.
● When the registration sensor detects paper, the pickup clutch stops.
● When the detect-sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the printer enters stand-by
status.
LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly

Learn about the LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly.

Figure 1-51 LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly
istraƟon(V)$)/(+'-$%)"
RegistraƟon Motor secƟon
The registration drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the registration roller and transfer the paper to the
ROLLER FEED.
The registration roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When the original is placed in the nip, the roller is
rotated for alignment.
The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC repeats on/off to align each original.
Document feeder LX scanning position

Learn about the document feeder LX scanning position.

Figure 1-52 Document feeder LX scanning position
Item Simplex Duplex
Scanning White Bar White Bar
Document feeder LX specifications

Learn about the document feeder LX specifications.
Table 1-20 Document feeder LX specification
Item Specification
Capacity 100 pages
Scan Speed 80/160 ipm
Pickup Semi-Retard
Motor 2 each
Stacker Not applicable
Scanning White Bar
MSO Not applicable

Flow document feeder z models (GX)
Learn about the flow document feeder z models (GX).
Flow document feeder overview

Learn about the flow document feeder.
Figure 1-53 Flow document feeder overview

R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4
Table 1-21 Flow document feeder overview
Part Description Function
R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray
R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)
R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray
R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller
R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller
R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)
R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)
R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)
R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning
R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit
R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the duplex
white-roller
R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit
R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the exit roller
R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray
Flow document feeder sensors

Learn about the flow document feeder sensors.
ENWW Flow document feeder z models (GX) 73

Figure 1-54 Flow document feeder sensors
10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width
9.Pickup 1. Paper Length

Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration
3.LIFT
PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE

6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT
Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER
16. Exit
14. SIM Scan
Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan
11. Pre Registration

10. MSO
Table 1-22 Flow document feeder sensors
Callout Item Function
1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length
2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width
3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position
4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation
5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty
6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position
7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation
8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed
9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path
10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size
11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path
12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path
13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation
14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path
15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path
16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor.
Figure 1-55 Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Tx Sensor
Rx Sensor
This sensor detects multi-feeds.
● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)
● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.
● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.
● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.

Flow document feeder drive system
Learn about the flow document feeder drive system.
The flow document feeder drive system drive system includes eight motors.
The Flow ADF drive system consists for the following sections:
● Pickup release drive
● Pickup drive
● Pre-regi drive
● Regi drive
● Scan-in roller release drive
● Scan drive
● Exit drive
● Lift drive
Figure 1-56 Flow document feeder drive system

Pre-Registration Drive section
Registration Drive section

Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section
Scan Drive section
Lift Drive section

Scan in Roller Release Drive section
Exit Drive section
Flow document feeder lifting drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder lifting drive system.

Figure 1-57 Flow document feeder lifting drive system
● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR
● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray
● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray
● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement
● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.
Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system.
Figure 1-58 Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality
● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER
● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper
Flow document feeder specifications

Learn about the flow document feeder specifications.
Table 1-23 Flow document feeder specification
Item Specification
Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)
Scan Speed 120/240 ipm
Pickup Semi-Retard
Motor 8 each
Stacker Lifting
Scanning White Roller/White Bar
MSO Support
Flow document feeder registration

Learn about the flow document feeder registration.
The flow document feeder registration uses a two-times registration process.
Figure 1-59 Flow document feeder registration

Pre Registration Roller
Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor
Registration
Roller

Flow document feeder scanning position
Learn about the flow document feeder scanning position.
Figure 1-60 Flow document feeder scanning position
6LPSOH[
'XSOH[
Table 1-24 Flow document feeder scanning position
Item Simplex Duplex
Scanning White Roller White Bar
Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor

Learn about the flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor.
The MSO sensor detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.
Figure 1-61 Flow document feeder MSO 1

Figure 1-62 Flow document feeder MSO 2
Pre-Registration
MSO Sensor
Sensor
Table 1-25 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width)
A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF
(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
Length (11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)
A3 SEF X
(420 mm)
(16.5 in)
A4 LEF X
(210 mm)
(8.3 in)
B4 SEF X X X
(363 mm)
(14.3 in)
B5 LEF X X X
(182 mm)
(7.2 in)
A4 SEF X X X X X
(297 mm)
(11.7 in)
A5 LEF X X X X X
(148 mm)
(5.8 in)
B5 SEF X X X X
(257 mm)
(10.1 in)
A5 SEF X X
(210 mm)
(8.3 in)

Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method
Learn about the flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method.
● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.
● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.
● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.
● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.
Figure 1-63 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (1 of 2)
3XOOWKHOHYHU
Figure 1-64 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (2 of 2)
Flow ADF z bundles (GX)

Learn about the flow ADF z bundles (GX).
Model Engine Scanner
Platen DN-sGX Z-GX

Model Engine Scanner
Color 40 ppm Same at Scan Speed USM Capacity Scan Speed USM Capacity
whole
50 ppm model 80/160 ipm X 100 sheet 120/240 O 250 sheet
ipm
60 ppm
Mono 40 ppm
50 ppm
60 ppm

Hardware configuration
Learn the functions and specifications of the hardware configuration.
The electronic circuit system consists of the following:
● Main controller (main board)
● OPE unit
● Document feeder (Flow/LX) controller
● HVPS board
● LVPS board
● Fuser drive assembly
ENWW Hardware configuration 83

Figure 1-65 Electronic circuit diagram
The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.
The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives copy data
from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video bitmap data. It
controls all modulesrequired to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN, fuser, and so on.
The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal Asynchronous
Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the life of the toner cartridge,
drum, and developer units through I2C.

The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 500 GB SATA HDD to
control the engine driving, video signal processing, and user interface.
A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy saving
algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to display the system
information on the control panel.
The OPE unit displays the status of the system using the control panel TFT LCD in response to user actions or the
main controller.
The soft power switch in the OPE unit is used to safely shut down the system.
The ADF controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the ADF. The ADF controller
communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.
The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls power to the
fuser lamp. The LVPS board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.
The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

Figure 1-66 Circuit board locations
HP Formatter
(Not shown)
LVPS (2)

Main controller
Learn about the main controller.
This topic describes the main controller PCA and formatter cabling.
Main controller
Learn about the printer main controller.
The main controller consists of the main processor (Chrous4N), memory (DDR3 2 GB), flash (128 MB), 1 G
Ethernet PHY, USB 2.0 HUB, Micom (power/fuser control), can/video/UI/fax signal interface connection, motor
drive IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.
The main processor (Dual Core 1 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with various
devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by SATA cable and to other devices (ADF, dual cassette
feeder, finisher, modem) by UART.
Figure 1-67 Main controller block diagram

Figure 1-68 Main controller connection information
Table 1-26 Main controller connections
Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description
1 EXIT 8 Not used 15 POWER I/F 22 SCAN I/F
2 HDD POWER 9 GIGA N/W 16 FRONT MONO 23 2nd GIGA NPC

RJ45
3 HDD I/F 10 USB HOST 1/2 17 Right door 24 MSOK I/F
4 Image scanner 11 USB DEVICE 18 PICKUP 25 MODEM JOINT

CCDM
5 Flow ADF DCIS 12 HVPS MONO 19 PH DRIVER 26 Dual cassette

feeder I/F
6 FRONT USB 13 Laser scanner 20 TONER I/F 27 FINISHER

HUB assembly MONO
MONO
7 OPE POWER 14 Fuser drive 21 FUSER

I/F assembly I/F

Information
● Part Number: JC82-00541A
● Part Name: PCA-MAIN
Master system operation key (MSOK)

Learn about the master system operation key (MSOK).
The MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM and an x-
CRUM. The flash memory (4MB), EEPROM (256Kb), and X-CRUM are used for all system operations (system
parameter, device status, tech information, and service information).
NOTE: When a main board needs to be exchanged, reinstall the MSOK PCA to the new main board to retain the
system information.
IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main board in the
same orientation as when it was removed in order for the printer to function.
Figure 1-69 MSOK
1 Main PCA I/F connector
● Information
– Part number: Not applicable
– Part name: PCA-MSOK
Formatter cabling
Learn about the formatter cabling.

90
Cable Rev A
sGX/GX ADF Only CPS (J28)
Cable
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX
HIP2 USB
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine LAN
Engine HDMI
Engine Eng
g LAN ((J8)) JC39 - 002567A
Engine control
Controller Board Eng
g Control ((J36)) JC39 - 02553A
Formatter cabling
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)
8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle
J8
NA
Jxx
J12
J36
J29
CP HDMI (J30)
Table 1-27 Formatter cabling

CP Sideband ((J16))
JC39-02557A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
Figure 1-70 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX)
IOD (Island of Data)
Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

J51
Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit
Fan (J47) RJ45
Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt Device
2x Host Ports
LVPS
From
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
Formatter
Main board
Main board
Main board
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)
To
HIP
Formatter
Formatter
Formatter
Accelerator
NOTE:
Purpose
USB for HIP

(JC39-02553A)
(JC39-02584A)
(JC39-02584A)
Power for accelerator
High speed print data

High speed print data
Cable bundled.
Low level engine control
ENWW
Table 1-27 Formatter cabling (continued)
Cable Jxx From To Purpose
Front walk-up USB J20 Formatter Front of printer USB for walk u
NOTE: Cable bundled.
CP HDMI J30 Formatter CP Data to CP
NOTE: Cable bundled.
CP side band J16 Formatter CP Power, reset, wake lines,

display power, keyboard
(JC39-02557A)
Power button J16 Formatter Power button Power ON/OFF
IOD J16 Formatter IOD Data to/from Island of

Data
Internal USB/AA J21 Formatter Accessory Accessory
Engine power J6 LVPS Formatter 5V supply to formatter
Low voltage power supply (LVPS; Type 5H) / switching mode power supply (SMPS)
Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS; Type 5H) / switching mode power supply (SMPS).
The low voltage power supply (LVPS-SMPS) Type 5H PCA supplies electric power to the main PCA and other
boards. The voltage provided includes +5V, and +24V from a 110V/220V power input. It has safety protection
modes for over current and overload.
Figure 1-71 LVPS (SMPS) Type 5H PCA
Specification
● General input/output voltage
– AC 110V (90V-135V)
– AC 220V (180V-270V

– Input current: 13.7A (110V)/6.8A (220V)
– Output power: 1500W
○ DC 5V: 55W/DC 5VS: 30W/DC 24V: 432W
Table 1-28 Information
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00249A JC44-00250A
Part name LVPS 110V Type 5H LVPS 220V Type 5H
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) (GX/z models)

Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4).
NOTE: The Type 4 LVPS only exists on some early models during original release. This has been removed from
all new models.
Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)
The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards. The
voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection modes for
over current and overload.
Figure 1-72 LVPS PCA (Type 4)
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V1/2/3 and DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)
3 24 V on/off
Specification
● General input/output voltage

– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)
– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)
– Input current: 6.3 A (110 V)/5 A (220 V)
– Output power: 205 W
○ DC 5 V: 25 W
○ DC 24 V: 180 W
Information
Table 1-29 LVPS PCA (Type 4)
110 V 220 V
Part number JC44-00091D JC44-00092D
Part name LVPS 110V Type 4 LVPS 220V Type 4
Input/output connector
● AC input connector (CN1)
PIN assign PIN name Description
1 AC_L AC input
2 AC_N
● DC output connector (CN4)
1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5 V ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5 V ground
5 +24V1 Power
6 GND 24 V ground
7 +24V2 Power
8 GND 24 V ground
9 +24V3 Power
● Signal Connector (CN3)

1 GND Active Low
2 24 V On/Off
3 GND
Fuser drive board (FDB)

Learn about the fuser drive board.
This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.
Figure 1-73 Fuser drive board (FDB)
1
2
7
4 3
● Information
Table 1-33 Fuser drive board (FDB)
Part number Description Remark
JC44-00210E FDB V1 (110V) For E77822, E778425, E77830
JC44-00211E FDB V2 (220V) For E77822, E778425, E77830
8GR94-60001 FDB V1 (110V) For E78323, E78325, E78330
8GR94-60002 FDB V2 (220V) For E78323, E78325, E78330
● Connection
Table 1-34 Fuser drive board (FDB)

Item Description
1 Heater I/F
2 Fuser AC
3 Fuser drive PCA I/F
4 Type 5
5 Main S/W

Table 1-34 Fuser drive board (FDB) (continued)
Item Description
6 Inlet
7 Heater S/W
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA

Learn about the high-voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA.
The HVPS generates 5 high-voltage channels, including FUSER, SAW, AC/DC, T2+/-, and MHV.
Figure 1-74 HVPS board
Specification
● Input voltage: DC 24V, 3.3V
● Output voltage
– MHV: —1200V
– DEV DC: —497V, AC: Vpp 1000V
– THV+: 39.6uA, THV-: —1300V
– SAW: —990V
– FUSER: 400V

Connection
● Table 1-35 CN1
Description PIN name PIN assign
Output voltage FUSER 1
Output voltage SAW 2
Table 1-36 CN2
Output voltage AC/DC 1, 2
Table 1-37 CN3
Output voltage T2 +/- 1
Table 1-38 CN4
Output voltage MHV 1, 2
Table 1-39 CN5

PWM signal PWM SAW 1
PWM signal PWM DEVE AC 2
PWM signal PWM FUSER BIAS 3
PWM signal PWM VPP AC 4
PWM signal PWM MHV 5
nEN signal nEN DEVE AC 6
Output signal ADC MHV READ 7
PWM signal PWM DEVE DC 8
nEN signal nEN MHV 9
nEN signal nEN THV 10
Input voltage 3.3V PS 11
PWM signal PWM THV 12
Output signal ADC_HVPS_24V 13
Output signal ADC THV READ 14

Table 1-39 CN5 (continued)
GND GND 15, 16, 17
NC 18
Input voltage 24V 19, 20
Eraser PCA
Learn about the eraser PCA.
The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the drum after
printing.
Figure 1-75 Eraser PCA
Part number/name
● JC92–02747AB
● PCA-ERASER
Waste Sensor PCA

Learn about the waste sensor PCA.
The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.
Figure 1-76 Waste sensor PCA
Information
● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX

CRUM PCA
Learn about the CRUM PCA.
The CRUM PCA includes memory for the drum, toner cartridge, and fuser.
Figure 1-77 CRUM PCA
Information
● Part name: PCA-ZCRUM
Toner CRUM joint PCA

Learn about the toner CRUM joint PCA.
The toner CRUM joint PCA is the interface PCA between the toner cartridge and the printer.
Figure 1-78 Toner CRUM joint PCA
Paper Size sensor PCA

The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.
Figure 1-79 Paper size sensor PCA

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Learn about the dual cassette feeder.
The DCF is an optional device that stores additional paper.
DCF front sectional view
Figure 1-80 DCF front sectional view
Item Description Item Description
1 Global HCI to tray 7 HCI 4 pickup assembly
2 Feed roller (HCI 3) 8 Feed roller (HCI 4)
3 Idle roller (HCI 3) 9 Idle roller (HCI 4)
4 Feed roller (HCI 3) 10 Feed roller (HCI 4)
5 Separation roller (HCI 3) 11 Separation roller (HCI 4)
6 Pick roller (HCI 3) 12 Pick roller (HCI 4)
ENWW Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 99

DCF paper path
Figure 1-81 DCF paper path
Item Description
1 Tray 4 paper path
2 Tray 5 paper path

DCF electrical parts locations
Figure 1-82 DCF electrical parts locations
DC controller DC controller
Item Description Part number PCA Item Description Part number PCA
M1 Feed motor JC31–00033B CN5 3 to 6 S2 Tray 4 limit 0604-00138 CN6 4 to 6

sensor 1
M2 Tray 4 pickup JC31–00149A CN5 9 to 12 S3 Tray 4 paper 0604-00139 CN6 1 to 3

motor empty sensor 3
M3 Tray 5 pickup JC31–00149A CN5 13 to 16 S4 Tray 5 feed 0604-00138 CN6 16 to 18

motor sensor 1
SW3 Tray 4 auto- JC32–00013A CN9 1 to 4 S5 Tray 5 limit 0604-00138 CN6 13 to 15

size switch sensor 1
SW4 Tray 5 auto- JC32–00013A CN9 5 to 8 S6 Tray 5 paper 0604-00138 CN6 10 to 12

size switch empty sensor 1
S1 Tray 4 feed 0604-00138 CN6 7 to 9 S7 Door open JC39-01696A CN3 1 to 2

sensor 1 sensor

DCF sensor and signal
Figure 1-83 DCF sensor and signal
Item Sensor Signal
1 P_Size_DCF 1 Tray 4 paper size analog signal
3 nP_Empty_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 paper empty signal
4 Limit_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 paper limit signal
5 Feed_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 feed signal
6 P_Size_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper size analog signal
8 nP_Empty_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper empty signal
9 Limit_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper limit signal
10 Feed_DCF 2 Tray 5 feed signal
11 nDoor_open Door open signal

DCF PCA connection
Figure 1-84 DCF PCA connection
Connector number Connection
CN1 Download tool I/F (minicube)
CN2 Debug I/F
CN3 Cover open switch (24V interlock switch)
CN4 USB I/F
CN5 EMPTY/LIFT/FEED (Tray 4 and 5) sensor
CN6 FEED/PICKUP 3, 4 motor
CN7 Interface with main
CN9 Paper size sensor (Tray 4 and 5)
Inner finisher
Learn about the inner finisher.
The inner finisher is an optional device that stores additional paper.
ENWW Inner finisher 103

Inner finisher sectional view
Figure 1-85 Inner finisher sectional view
Item Description Item Description
1 Punch unit 8 End fence unit
2 Entrance unit 9 Tamper unit
3 Diverter unit 10 Stapler unit
4 Exit unit 11 Ejector 1 unit
5 Paper support unit 12 Ejector 2 unit
6 Main paddle unit 13 Output tray unit
7 Sub paddle unit 14 Paper holding unit
Inner finisher paper path
Figure 1-86 Inner finisher paper path
Item Description
1 Finisher main tray — staple/offset/punch
2 Finisher top tray — stack only

Inner finisher electrical parts locations
Figure 1-87 Inner finisher electrical parts locations
Item Description Part number Item Description Part number
S1 Stapler position 0604-001381 S12 Paper support 0604-001393

sensor home sensor
S2 Stapler position 0604-001393 S13 Output tray top of 0601-003440

sensor stack sensor (LED)
S3 Front cover switch JC39-01610A S14 Rear tamper home 0604-001393

sensor
S4 Main paddle home 0604-001393 S15 Top cover switch JC39-01610A

sensor
S5 Front tamper home 0604-001393 S16 0604-001393

sensor
S6 Output tray motor 0604-001393 S17 End fence sensor 0604-001381

sensor
S7 Output tray lower JC90-01320A S18 Punch waste box 0604-001393

limit switch sensor
S8 Output tray top of 0603-001309 S19 Punch waste full 0604-001381

stack sensor sensor
(receiver)
S9 Paper holding 0604-001393 S20 Finisher docking 0604-001393

sensor sensor
S10 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415

sensor
S11 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393

sensor
ENWW Inner finisher 105

Inner finisher PCA connection
Figure 1-88 Inner finisher PCA connection
Connector number Connection
1 CN3: REAR joint I/F
2 CN1: REAR sensor
3 CN10: Traverse mid sensor
4 CN8: Debug
5 CN2: REAR I/F
6 CN7: FRONT I/F
7 CN6: Stacker switch
8 CN9: Solenoid
9 CN4: Ejector and supporter I/F
10 CN5: Main I/F

2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement.
HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.
Additional service and support for channel partners
Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based Interactive
Search Engine (WISE).
Access WISE for Channel partners
1. Select Services & Support (near the top of the screen).
2. Under Services Delivery, select Technical Support.
3. Select Technical Documentation.
Find information about the following topics
● Service manuals
● Service advisories
● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Install and configure
● Printer specifications
● Warranty and regulatory information
Additional service and support for HP internal personnel
HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:
ENWW HP service and support 107

Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - Portuguese
● WISE - French
Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Chinese (simplified)
● WISE - Chinese (traditional)
● WISE - Thai
Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)
● WISE - English
Additional technical support WISE videos
The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.
How to search for printer documentation

Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals.
The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP portals
GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available to call agents,
service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend on your access
credentials.
How to search WISE for printer documentation
These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users. View a
video of how to find support content in WISE.
To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to locate
CPMD list.
Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.
How to search GCSN for printer documentation
These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find support content in
GCSN, or follow the steps below.
1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:
108 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement ENWW

– Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or
– On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.
Figure 2-1 GCSN home page
2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model (leave
the Model field as blank or the default).
NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.
Figure 2-2 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)
ENWW How to search for printer documentation 109

3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to bypass the
Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).
Figure 2-3 Add favorites (GCSN)
4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.
Figure 2-4 Clear search criteria (GCSN)
5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.
NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which type of
manual or guide the content might be listed.
Figure 2-5 Select search criteria (GCSN)
6. Select Submit.
7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search result is
100 documents).

NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model. All other
available content is filtered out.
Table 2-1 Information type selections
Technical information type Select this checkbox
Control panel message document (CPMD) CPMD-Map
List of all CPMDs per product Support Information
Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide
Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual
Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual
Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information
User manual or User guide User Guide
Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement
ENWW How to search for printer documentation 111

Order parts by authorized service providers
Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.
Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.
Table 2-2 Ordering
Item or provider Description
Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply
Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter the
printer IP address or host name in the address/URL field. The EWS
contains a link to the HP SureSupply web site, which provides
options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.
Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part is
orderable.
How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.
The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts list
table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the associated part
number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit
(FRU).
NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay careful
attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the selected part
number is for the correct printer model.
NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as a PCA
might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors.
ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder when
removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD
workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an
ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
ENWW ESD precautions 113

Service approach
Learn more about the service approach.
Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.
Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage, and
current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the machine, circuit
overload, fire, or electric shock.
● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause the
printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.
● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This printer
contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short circuit or
electric shock.
● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is disassembled, dust
might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts
inside the laser scanner assembly.
● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to overheating
and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.
Precautions when handling PCAs
Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.
● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA
– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.
– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.
● Precautions when replacing a PCA
– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.
– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when handling
insulated parts.
● Precautions when checking a PCA
– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before touching a PCA.
– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or cause
electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors, motors, or
lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the correct
screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted in their
original positions.
– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.
Releasing plastic latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when releasing
them . To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.
Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.
● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the power
cable.
● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.
● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.
● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an ESD
workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis before
touching an ESD-sensitive part.
● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.
After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.
● Verify that the service performed was successful.
● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.
ENWW Service approach 115

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:
Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.
1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.
2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.
3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.
4. Print a configuration page.
5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print quality
defects.
6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.
Copy-quality test
Learn about the copy-quality test.
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.
2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results
Fax-quality test
Learn about the fax-quality test.
1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.
2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.
3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.
Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the front of the
printer for correct orientation.

Maintenance (printer cleaning)
Learn about printer cleaning for maintenance.
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX)

Learn about cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX).
1. Open the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-6 Open document feeder unit
2. Clean the document feeder white bar and CIS using a lint-free cloth.
Figure 2-7 Clean document feeder white bar

CIS
Simplex
White bar
Duplex
White bar
ENWW Maintenance (printer cleaning) 117

Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX)
Learn about cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX).
1. Open the document feeder, peel back the white backing , and then release the green tab.
Figure 2-8 Peel back the white backing and release one tab
2. Open the access door. Clean the simplex white bar (callout 1), the CIS (callout 2), and the duplex white bar
(callout 3) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.
Figure 2-9 Clean flow document feeder white bar
Cleaning the scanner glass

Learn about cleaning the scan glass.
▲ Open the document feeder. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 2-10 Clean the scanner glass (1 of 2)
Figure 2-10 Clean the scanner glass (2 of 2)
Cleaning the transfer roller

Learn about cleaning the transfer roller.
1. Open the right door.
ENWW Maintenance (printer cleaning) 119

Figure 2-11 Open the right door
2. Clean the transfer roller (A) using a lint-free cloth.
Figure 2-12 Transfer roller cleaning

Main parts
Learn about the printer main parts.
ENWW Main parts 121

Main assembly
Parts diagram and parts list for the main assembly.
Figure 2-13 Main assembly
18

Table 2-3 Main assembly
Ref
No Part number Description Qty Repair procedure
1 JC90-01118B Exit 1 Removal and replacement: Exit

unit on page 169
2 JC82-00481A Fuser, 220V 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser unit on page 202
2 JC82-00479A Fuser, 110V 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser unit on page 202
4 JC95-02080B Right Door 1 Removal and replacement: Right

door assembly on page 198
5 X3A60-67901 Toner Collection Unit 2 Not applicable
7 JC97-04520C Image Scanner Assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Image scanner assembly
(flatbed) on page 149
8 JC97-04954A ADF LX whole unit 1 Removal and replacement: ADF

whole unit (LX) on page 132
8 JC97-04955A Flow/GX ADF whole unit 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

ADF whole unit (GX)
on page 137
9 JC97-04894A Laser scanner unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Laser scanner assembly
on page 190
10 JC44-00237B HVPS, 24V 1 Removal and replacement:

High-voltage power supply
(HVPS) board on page 194
11 JC44-00091D LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 41 1 Removal and replacement: Low

voltage power supply (LVPS)
type 5H board on page 176
11 JC44-00092D LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 41 1 Removal and replacement: Low

11 JC44-00249A LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 5H 1 Removal and replacement: Low

11 JC44-00250A LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 5H 1 Removal and replacement: Low

12 JC44-00210E Fuser drive PCA 110V (fuser drive board) 1 Removal and replacement:
Fuser drive assembly board
on page 172
12 JC44-00211E Fuser drive PCA 220V (fuser drive board) 1 Removal and replacement:
Fuser drive assembly board
on page 172
13 JC31-00162A Fan, Type 8, LVPS 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer fan on page 180
14 5851-6712 HDD 500GB - Main PCA HDD 1 Removal and replacement:

500GB Main PCA HDD
on page 242
ENWW Main parts 123

Table 2-3 Main assembly (continued)
Ref
15 JC82-00541A PCA, Main Board 1 Removal and replacement: Main

board on page 184
16 JC63-05410A White backing (LX) 1 Removal and replacement: ADF

white backing (LX) on page 126
16 JC63-05795A White backing (GX) 1 Removal and replacement: ADF

white backing (GX) on page 129
19 JC96-11669A Black developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit on page 205
Not shown JC39-01202A Cable, Sata, Main HDD 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC39-01943A Cable, PWR, Main HDD 1 Not applicable
Not shown B5L47-60101 Pulsar Control Panel 1 Removal and replacement:

Control panel on page 247
Not shown B5L46-40002 Keyboard blank for non Flow 1 Not applicable
Not shown B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy 1 Removal and replacement:

Keyboard on page 250
Not shown B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy 1 Removal and replacement:

Keyboard on page 250
Not shown B5L46-40029 Bushing for Keyboard 1 Not applicable
Not shown 6502-001131 Wire Clip Formatter 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC27-00014A Inductor Unit - 220V2 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC27-00013A Inductor Unit - 110V2 1 Not applicable
Not shown Y1G22-67901 Tray Heater (110v) 1 Not applicable
Not shown Y1G22-67902 Tray Heater (220v) 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC39-02112A Lower Tray Connector 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC92-02164A Assy- Engine Side Crum Connector 1 Not applicable
Not shown T3U55-60001 PCA Sada Riser 1 Not applicable
Not shown B5L46-40014 HDD cradle 1 Not applicable
Not shown B5L32-60002 eMMC card - 16gb 1 Not applicable
Not shown X3A62-60001 Accelerator PCA3 1 Removal and replacement:

Accelerator board on page 218
Not shown 0380-5077 Stand off 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC93-01538A Formatter Cage 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter and formatter cage
on page 235
Not shown B5L46-40021 HIP Cover 1 Not applicable
Not shown X3A92-60002 Island of Data Board 1 Not applicable

Table 2-3 Main assembly (continued)
Ref
Not shown B5L31-90902 Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) 1 Install accessory: HP Foreign
interface harness (FIH) solution
on page 231
Not shown J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit 1 Install accessory: NFC Kit
Installation on page 221
Not shown X3A65-67916 HP Black Managed LJ Imaging Drum 1 Removal and replacement:
Drum unit on page 213
Not shown 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (feed senor 1) 1 Removal and replacement: Feed
sensor 1 on page 158
Not shown 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (feed senor 2) 1 Removal and replacement: Feed
sensor 2 on page 163
Not shown JC39-02072A Wiring harness (output device) 1 Not applicable
Not shown X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter and formatter cage
on page 235
1
Type 4 LVPS is only installed in some early models during original release. Removed from all new models.
2
Inductor Unit is only installed in some early models during original release. Removed from all new models.
3
Accelerator PCA is only installed in some early models during original release. Removed from all new models.
ENWW Main parts 125

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the ADF white backing (LX).
This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder white backing (LX).
IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special installation
instructions.
Mean time to repair:
Service level:
Turn the printer power off
cable.
● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts down before
removing the power cable.
● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.
Table 2-4 Part information
Part number Part description
JC63-05410A ADF white backing (LX)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.
Turn the printer power on
○ Connect the printer power cable.
○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of the
printer.
○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.
○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.
Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.
Remove the document feeder white backing

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder white backing.
1. Open the document feeder cover.
2. Peel the white backing away to remove.
IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.
3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.
4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.
5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.
Figure 2-14 Close the document feeder cover
ENWW Main parts 127

6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.
Figure 2-15 Smooth the white backing
Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.
1. Dispose of the defective part.
NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html
2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.
CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed from
the replacement part prior to installation.
NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the roller
or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using disposable gloves
when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or pads.
3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.
NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end of the
instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.
E72520-E72530:
https://players.brightcove.net/1160438706001/SyKVJeRXx_default/index.html?
videoId=ref:REFIDPH0000000337
E77820-E77830:
Mean time to repair: 10 minutes
Service level: Basic
instructions.

○ Disconnect the power cable.
www.hp.com/buy/parts
JC63-05795A ADF White backing (GX)
Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

○ Connect the power cable.
○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.
Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.
Remove the document feeder white backing

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder white backing.
2. Peel the white backing away to remove.
IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.
ENWW Main parts 129

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.
4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.
5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.
6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.
Figure 2-16 Smooth the white backing


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 131

Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX bundles).
To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.
View a video of how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX/du bundles).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC97-05074A Document feeder whole unit assembly (LX models)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test

Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.
▲ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove it.
Figure 2-17 Remove the formatter cover
Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.
▲ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove it.
ENWW Main parts 133

Figure 2-18 Remove the upper rear cover
Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).
1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector cover
(callout 2).
Figure 2-19 Remove the document feeder connector cover

2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
Figure 2-20 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire
3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.
4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.
Figure 2-21 Release the document feeder hinge screws
ENWW Main parts 135

5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.
Figure 2-22 Lift and remove the document feeder
NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder whole unit assembly.
instructions.
JC97-04955A ADF whole unit assembly (GX/z models)
Required tools
Post service test

ENWW Main parts 137


Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).
1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-25 Remove document feeder connector cover
2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder harness
from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.
Figure 2-26 Remove the cable choke
ENWW Main parts 139

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.
Figure 2-27 Disconnect document feeder harness
4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open to a full
90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.
Figure 2-28 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.
Figure 2-29 Remove screws
6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.
Figure 2-30 Release the document feeder

ENWW Main parts 141

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder whole unit assembly.
instructions.
JC97-04955A ADF whole unit assembly (GX/z models)
Required tools
Post service test

ENWW Main parts 143


Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

ENWW Main parts 145

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one grounding
wire.
90°.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled
with the same alignment.


ENWW Main parts 147

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Image scanner assembly (flatbed)
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner whole unit.
View a video of removing and replacing the image scanner (E77820-E77830).
Service level: Advanced
instructions.
JC97-04520C Scanner whole unit part number
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the scanner whole unit

Follow these steps to remove the scanner whole unit.
ENWW Main parts 149


3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one and one
grounding wire.
90°.
IMPORTANT: If installing a replacement document feeder, note the alignment marks on the hinge stops.
Any new document feeder must be reinstalled with the same alignment.
ENWW Main parts 151


7. Remove three screws.
Figure 2-45 Remove three screws
8. Place the control panel in the upright position.
9. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the control-
panel bezel to the edges to release.
CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.
10. Remove two screws on the control-panel frame.
Figure 2-46 Remove two screws
11. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, the HIP USB cable, and one HDMI connector.
ENWW Main parts 153

12. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.
Figure 2-47 Remove USB interconnect cable
13. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.
Figure 2-48 Remove the keyboard
14. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.
TIP: Align the four tabs at the rear of the control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

15. Remove six screw-caps and six screws. It might be necessary to use leverage near the left hinge and then
pull the cover toward the back.
Figure 2-49 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover
16. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.
Figure 2-50 Release scan-left cover
ENWW Main parts 155

17. Remove three screw-caps and three screws (callout 1). Release the scan-right cover.
NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the replacement scanner
whole unit.
Figure 2-51 Remove scan-right cover
18. Remove two screws.

19. Disconnect the two scan cables and one FFC at the top of the main board.
Figure 2-53 Disconnect scan cables
20. Remove three screws. Lift the scanner straight up and off of the printer to remove it.
NOTE: After reassembly, utilize the target to adjust the scanner location as necessary.
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the scan bed by lowering the left side first and then lower the right. Align the
screw holes on the right, and then install the screws.
Reinstall the lower cover and ensure the cables are routed through the opening for the control panel and
the bracket is properly aligned in the cover.
ENWW Main parts 157

Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 1
This document provides the procedures to remove the feed sensor 1.
View a video of removing and replacing the feed sensor 1.
instructions.
0604-001393 Feed sensor 1
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.
NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.
1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-55 Remove cover
2. Disconnect the right door connector.
Figure 2-56 Disconnect right door connector
ENWW Main parts 159

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).
CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right hinge to
avoid injury.
Figure 2-57 Release right hinge
4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).
Figure 2-58 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.
NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener to clear
the lower right door. Remove clockwise.
Figure 2-59 Remove right door
Remove feed sensor 1

Follow these steps to remove feed sensor 1.
1. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor cover.
Figure 2-60 Remove screws and sensor cover
ENWW Main parts 161

2. Disconnect the connector, remove one screw, and then remove the feed sensor cover.
Figure 2-61 Remove feed sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 2
This document provides the procedures to remove the feed sensor 2.
View a video of removing and replacing the feed sensor 2.
instructions.
0604-001393 Feed sensor 2
Required tools
Post service test

ENWW Main parts 163


avoid injury.
ENWW Main parts 165

Remove feed sensor 2

Follow these steps to remove feed sensor 2.
1. Remove one screw, and then remove the Feed Unit (A).
Figure 2-67 Remove screw and feed unit

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket (B).
Figure 2-68 Remove screws and bracket
3. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the feed sensor 2.
Figure 2-69 Remove feed sensor 2

ENWW Main parts 167

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit unit
This document provides the procedures to remove the exit unit assembly.
instructions.
JC90-01118B Exit unit assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.
1. Open the right door. Disconnect the exit unit connector and two cable restraints.
ENWW Main parts 169

Figure 2-70 Disconnect exit unit connector and cable restraints
2. Remove three screws, and then remove the exit unit.
Figure 2-71 Remove screws and exit unit


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 171

Removal and replacement: Fuser drive assembly board
This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser drive assembly board.
Service level: Intermediate
instructions.
CAUTION: Wait five minutes after disconnecting the power cable before replacing the fuser drive
assembly board. Not waiting long enough after disconnecting the power cable can cause electric shock.
Fuser Drive Board 110V
JC44-00211E Fuser Drive Board 220V
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the rear bottom cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear bottom cover.
1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and then to
the right to remove.

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.
Figure 2-73 Remove the rear-bottom cover
Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.
▲ Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS cover.
ENWW Main parts 173

Figure 2-74 Remove the LVPS cover
Remove the fuser drive assembly board

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive assembly board.
▲ Disconnect seven connectors and cable restraints on the fuser-drive assembly board. Remove four screws,
and then remove the fuser-drive assembly board.
NOTE: Several of the connectors have tabs that need to be pressed in order to release.
Figure 2-75 Remove the fuser-drive assembly board


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 175

Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 5H board
This document provides the procedures to remove the LVPS Type 5H board.
instructions.
CAUTION: Wait five minutes after disconnecting the power cable before replacing the LVPS board. Not
waiting long enough after disconnecting the power cable can cause electric shock.
JC44-00250A LVPS 220V Type 5H
JC44-00249A LVPS 110V Type 5H
JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4
NOTE: Type 4 LVPS only exists on some early models during original release. This
has been removed from all new models.
JC44-00092D LVPS 220V Type 4
NOTE: Type 4 LVPS only exists on some early models during original release. This
has been removed from all new models.
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the rear bottom cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear bottom cover.

Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.
▲ Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS cover.
ENWW Main parts 177

Figure 2-78 Remove the LVPS cover
Remove the LVPS Type 5H board

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS Type 5H board.
▲ Disconnect four connectors, including one fuser-drive assembly connector and four other connectors, on
the LVPS PCA (Type 5). Remove four screws, and then remove the scanner LVPS board (Type 5).
Figure 2-79 Remove the scanner LVPS (Type 5) board


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 179

Removal and replacement: Developer fan
This document provides the procedures to remove the developer fan assembly.
instructions.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove the
power cable before attempting to service the printer.
JC31-00162A Fan Type 8
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

ENWW Main parts 181

3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.
Figure 2-82 Remove the rear-top cover
Remove the developer fan

Follow these steps to remove the developer fan.
NOTE: The fan shown below might look slightly different than the one found in the printer. However, the
removal steps are correct for this printer.
1. Release the cable restraint. Disconnect the in line connector and remove one screw. Remove the developer
fan.
Figure 2-83 Remove developer fan
2. Remove one screw.
3. Separate the plastic housing.
4. Remove fan.

instructions.
ENWW Main parts 183

Removal and replacement: Main board
This document provides the procedures to remove the main board.
View a video of removing and replacing the main board.
instructions.
JC82-00541A Main Board PCA
Required tools
Post service test


ENWW Main parts 185

Remove the formatter cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.
1. Disconnect ten connectors and two cable restraints.
2. Remove four screws and screw-caps, and then remove the left-upper cover.
Figure 2-87 Remove the left-upper cover

3. Remove one screw from the side of the formatter cage (beneath the left-upper cover location).
Figure 2-88 Remove the formatter cage side screw
4. Remove three screws from the formatter cage face, and then release one tab to remove the formatter
cage.
Figure 2-89 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage
Remove the main board

Follow these steps to remove the main board.
1. Disconnect 19 connectors, a ground wire, and three FFCs on the main board.
ENWW Main parts 187

Figure 2-90 Remove the main board connectors and screws
2. Remove nine screws, and then remove the main board.
3. Disconnect the MSOK from the removed main board, noting its orientation. Transfer the MSOK to the
replacement main board and install it using the same orientation.
TIP: The main board is marked to show the correct orientation of the MSOK when installed.
Figure 2-91 MSOK installation orientation
TIP: See the screen-printed icon on the main board to ensure that the MSOK is aligned correctly during
reinstallation.
IMPORTANT: A Shading Test for the ADF unit must be completed after replacing the ADF unit or main
board.


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 189

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove the laser scanner assembly.
instructions.
JC97-04894A Laser scanner assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.
▲ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 2-92 Remove the left trim cover
Figure 2-93 Remove the left cover
Remove the laser scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly.
ENWW Main parts 191

Figure 2-94 Remove the laser scanner assembly
2. Disconnect the laser scanner assembly harness at the left, and then partially remove the assembly from
the chassis. Disconnect the FFC cable, and then remove the laser scanner assembly completely.
CAUTION: If the laser scanner assembly is removed too rough or fast, the harness can be damaged.
Figure 2-95 Disconnect the laser scanner assembly harness and FFC cable
3. Complete a laser scanner assembly adjustment after a new laser scanner assembly has been installed.


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 193

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board
This document provides the procedures to remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board.
View a video of removing and replacing the HVPS.
instructions.
JC44-00237A High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board
Required tools
Post service test

▲ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 2-96 Remove the left trim cover
Figure 2-97 Remove the left cover
Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).
1. Remove eight screws, and then release middle hook.
ENWW Main parts 195

2. Unplug the connector and then remove the HVPS.
Figure 2-99 Remove the HVPS board


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 197

Removal and replacement: Right door assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove the right door assembly.
instructions.
JC95-02080A Right door assembly
Required tools
Post service test


ENWW Main parts 199

avoid injury.


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 201

Removal and replacement: Fuser unit
This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser unit.
View a video of removing and replacing the fuser.
instructions.
JC82-00479A 110V Fuser Assembly
JC82-00481A 220V Fuser Assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover (A).
Figure 2-105 Remove one screw
3. Disconnect two bulkhead connectors at the top and one high voltage connector at the bottom.
IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect the inline connector.
Figure 2-106 Disconnect the connectors
ENWW Main parts 203

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the fuser unit.
Figure 2-107 Remove two fuser unit screws

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer unit
This document provides the procedures to remove the formatter assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the developer unit.
instructions.
JC96-11669A Developer Unit - Black
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.
▲ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit (callout A).
ENWW Main parts 205

Figure 2-108 Remove the TCU
Remove the developer unit

Follow these steps to remove the developer unit.
1. Disconnect the drum unit connector. Remove two screws.
Figure 2-109 Disconnect drum unit and remove two screws

2. Remove the drum unit by pulling the gray tab.
Figure 2-110 Remove drum unit
3. Disconnect the connector.
Figure 2-111 Disconnect connector
ENWW Main parts 207

4. Remove six screws securing the rear cover.
Figure 2-112 Remove rear cover screws
5. Remove the rear cover.
Figure 2-113 Remove rear cover
6. Separate the developer unit (B) from the drum unit (A). Remove the cable from the guide
Figure 2-114 Separate developer and drum units

7. Unpack the developer unit box and check the components (four items).
Figure 2-115 Unpack developer unit
8. Remove two protective sheets.
NOTE:
● When removing the first protective sheet, make sure the magnetic roller is not contaminated.
● When removing the second protective sheet, make sure to avoid grease contamination.
Figure 2-116 Remove protective sheets
9. Fold the sheet into a funnel shape as shown in the following graphic.
Figure 2-117 Fold protective sheet
ENWW Main parts 209

10. Insert the paper funnel into the developer unit hole.
Figure 2-118 Insert paper funnel into developer unit
11. Pour the developer powder into the funnel.
NOTE: When filling the developer, intermittently lean the developer unit to avoid overflow.
Figure 2-119 Fill developer unit with developer powder

12. After filling the developer, attach the seal tape to the developer unit hole.
Figure 2-120 Attach seal tape
13. Remove the arrow label horizontally.
CAUTION: Do not remove the arrow label in a downward direction. Do not lean or tip the unit, as the
developer will leak.
Figure 2-121 Remove arrow label
14. Install the developer unit and drum unit in the reverse order of removal.

ENWW Main parts 211

instructions.
Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Drum unit
This document provides the procedures to remove the drum unit assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the drum unit.
instructions.
X3A65-67916 HP Black Managed LJ Imaging Drum
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the TCU

ENWW Main parts 213

Remove the drum unit

Follow these steps to remove the drum unit.
Figure 2-123 Disconnect drum unit connector

2. Remove the drum unit.
3. Disconnect the connector.
ENWW Main parts 215

4. Remove six screws securing the rear cover.
Figure 2-126 Remove rear cover screws
Figure 2-127 Remove rear cover
6. Separate the developer unit (B) from the drum unit (A). Remove the cable from its guide.
Figure 2-128 Separate developer and drum units
7. Replace with the new drum unit. Installation is the same steps as removal in reverse order.

NOTE: The replacement drum unit ships with a dummy rear cover for support. Do not use the dummy
rear cover in the product. It is missing the gear necessary to drive the developing unit.

instructions.
ENWW Main parts 217

Removal and replacement: Accelerator board
Learn how to remove and replace the accelerator board.
View a video of how to remove and replace the accelerator board.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA
NOTE: An accelerator PCA is only installed on some early models during original release. This has been
removed from all new models.
Required tools
printer.

Post service test

Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
▲ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the formatter
by the edges.
NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.
ENWW Main parts 219

Figure 2-130 Remove the accelerator PCA

instructions.

Install accessory: NFC Kit Installation
This document provides the procedures to install the NFC kit.
View a video of removing and replacing the NFC.
instructions.
J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.
Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.
Unpack the NFC kit

Follow these steps to unpack the NFC kit.
▲ Unpack the NFC kit.
ENWW Main parts 221

Install the NFC kit
Follow these steps to install the NFC kit.
1. Turn off the power to the product.

2. Remove the HIP cover.
ENWW Main parts 223

3. Identify the USB connector in the HIP and attach the appropriate USB cable:
a. Locate the USB connector that is along one of the short edges. A USB Mini B receptacle (callout 1.1) is
the most common. However, on some models, a USB Mini B plug (callout 1.2) is used.

b. Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided.
ENWW Main parts 225

c. Plug the USB cable into the socket in the HIP. Note that the USB logo on the connector may face down
on some models of printers/MFPs.
4. Attach the power and grounding ends of the USB cable:
NOTE: Before connecting the NFC accessory to the USB connector, verify that the product power is turned
off.

a. Attach the white power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the underside of
the NFC accessory with the contacts facing down.
b. Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the underside of the
5. Insert the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.
a. Insert the NFC accessory into the HIP recess using the hook-shaped clips first.
ENWW Main parts 227

b. Gently push the NFC accessory onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place within the
recess.
ENWW Main parts 229

wireless network icon will also appear on the control panel.

Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution
This document provides the procedures to install the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.
View a video of installing the FIH.
Mean time to repair: 1 minute
instructions.
B5L31-90902 Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)
Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.
Post service test
Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.
Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.
Unpack the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory

Follow these steps to unpack the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.
▲ Unpack the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.
ENWW Main parts 231

Install the FIH accessory
Follow these steps to install the FIH accessory.
▲ Locate the USB connector on the printer formatter. Connect the FIH to this connector
Figure 2-131 Connect the FIH

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: 500 GB FIPS HDD/500 GB
formatter HDD
This procedure is for removing the 500 GB FIPS HDD installed on the formatter.
View a video of removing and replacing the HDD (E72520-E72530).
instructions.
B5L29-67903 500 GB FIPS HDD
5851-6712 Formatter HDD - 500 GB SED
Required tools
Post service test

ENWW Main parts 233

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).
▲ Release one retainer, and then remove the HDD.
IMPORTANT: The HDD and the IOD cannot be replaced at the same time.
Figure 2-133 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Removal and replacement: Formatter and formatter cage
This document provides the procedures to remove the formatter and formatter cage assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the formatter and formatter cage.
instructions.
JC93-01538A Formatter Cage
X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA (E778xx series)
X3A92-60006 Formatter PCA - obsidian (E783xx series) (LX)
Y3K99-60005 Formatter PCA - Rock (E783xx series) (GX)
Required tools
Post service test

ENWW Main parts 235


Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.
CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.
▲ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the formatter
by the edges.
NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.
IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.
Figure 2-137 Remove the accelerator PCA
ENWW Main parts 237

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).
▲ Release one retainer, and then remove the HDD.
Figure 2-138 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Remove the Island of data (IOD)

Follow these steps to remove the Island of data (IOD).
▲ Disconnect one connector and remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.
Figure 2-139 Remove the IOD

Remove the formatter PCA
Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.
▲ Disconnect seven connectors and eight screws, and then remove formatter PCA.
Figure 2-140 Remove the formatter connectors and screws

ENWW Main parts 239

cage.


instructions.
ENWW Main parts 241

Removal and replacement: 500GB Main PCA HDD
This document provides the procedures to remove the hard disk drive (HDD) assembly.
instructions.
5851-6712 Main disk drive assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the main disk drive

Follow these steps to remove the main disk drive.
1. Remove the inner finisher or paper pass, if installed.

2. Remove two screw-caps and two screws from the power-switch cover.
Figure 2-144 Remove the power-switch cover
3. Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then remove the exit tray.
Figure 2-145 Remove screw-caps and screws
ENWW Main parts 243

4. Remove one screw and cover exit right.
Figure 2-146 Remove the cover exit right
5. Remove four screws and three screw covers. Remove the cover exit rear by pulling from the right and
rotating out.
Figure 2-147 Remove screws and cover exit rear

6. Remove four screws. Disconnect the cable and remove the main disk drive assembly.
Figure 2-148 Remove screws, disconnect cable and remove main disk drive assembly
7. Remove four screws, and then remove main disk drive from its bracket.
8. Install the new main disk drive assembly.
TIP: When reinstalling, make sure the plastic locator tabs on the rear exit cover are seated correctly.

ENWW Main parts 245

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Control panel
This document provides the procedures to remove the control panel assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the control panel (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
B5L47-60101 Control panel assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the control-panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel bezel.
1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.
ENWW Main parts 247

Figure 2-149 Remove the document feeder bezel
Remove the control-panel

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel.
2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws on
the control-panel frame.
Figure 2-150 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.
Figure 2-151 Remove the USB interconnect cable
4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control panel.
TIP: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

instructions.
ENWW Main parts 249

Removal and replacement: Keyboard
This document provides the procedures to remove the keyboard assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the keyboard (E72520-E72530).
View a video of removing and replacing the keyboard (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy
B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the control-panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel bezel.
1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-152 Remove the document feeder bezel
Remove the keyboard

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard.
1. Disconnect one FFC.
Figure 2-153 Disconnect one FFC
ENWW Main parts 251

2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.
Figure 2-154 Remove the control-panel keyboard

instructions.

Exit assemblies
View the exit assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Exit assemblies 253

Upper and lower exit
Parts diagram and parts list for the exit assemblies.
Figure 2-155 Upper and lower exit

Table 2-31 Upper and lower exit
Ref
2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) 2 Removal and replacement:

Fuser out sensor on page 256
4 JC66-02163A Gear, exit 1 Not applicable
5 JC61-07185A Spring, TS 1 Not applicable
6 JC66-04339A Actuator-bin full exit 1 Not applicable
7 JC66-02218A Lever-actuator F_D full 1 Not applicable
8 JC66-02278A Lever-act full exit 1 Not applicable
10 JC90-01132A Exit guide, upper 1 Not applicable
11 JC90-01133A Exit guide, lower 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor
This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser out sensor.
instructions.
0604-001393 Fuser-out sensor assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the fuser out sensor

Follow these steps to remove the fuser out sensor.
1. Remove two screws and two plastic guides. Lift up the right-door.

Figure 2-156 Lift right-door
2. Disconnect the connector and remove the cable from the cable guide. Remove the right-door exit. Use
caution as the springs are not retained.
Figure 2-157 Remove right-door exit
3. Remove three screws (plastic self-tapping), and then separate the right-door exit.
Figure 2-158 Remove screws and separate right-door exit

4. Disconnect the connector and remove the fuser-out sensor.
TIP: When removing the sensor lift the flag, compress the bottom tabs and push from hole, and then
rotate and release the top tabs.
Figure 2-159 Disconnect connector and remove fuser-out sensor

instructions.

Cassettes tray 2/3
View the cassettes tray 2/3 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Cassettes tray 2/3 259

Cassettes Tray 2/3
Parts diagram and parts list for the cassettes tray 2/3.
Figure 2-160 Cassettes Tray 2/3

Table 2-33 Cassettes Tray 2/3
Ref
0 JC90-01619A Cassette, Tray 2 1 Not applicable
0 5QJ98-60109 Cassette, Tray 3 1 Not applicable
ENWW Cassettes tray 2/3 261

Main frame assembly
View the main frame assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Main frame assembly 263
Main engine frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the main engine frame.
Figure 2-161 Main engine frame

Table 2-34 Main engine frame
Ref
2 JC93-00442A Drive, pickup 2 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive unit on page 275
3 JC93-00912C Drive, main 1 Removal and replacement: Main

drive unit on page 279
3-1 JC31-00123B Motor BLDC 1 Not applicable
3-2 JC31-00123A Motor, BLDC 1 Not applicable
3-3 JC93-00911C Drive, main sub 1 Not applicable
4 JC93-00449A Drive, M fuser exit 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser/exit drive assembly
on page 283
5 JC93-00450B Drive, M toner supply 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner supply drive unit
on page 266
6 JC93-00451A Drive, duct 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner duct drive unit
on page 270
8 JC93-01441A Frame, main pickup 2nd 1 Not applicable
9 JC93-00511A Frame, main pickup 1st 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive unit
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner supply drive unit assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the toner supply unit.
instructions.
JC93-00450B Toner supply drive unit assembly (E72525, E72530, E72535 models)
5QJ87-64002 Toner supply drive unit assembly (E72825, E72830. E72835 models)
Required tools
Post service test



Remove the toner supply drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive unit.
1. Loosen the PCA cage by removing the two bottom screws. This enables access to the supply drive.
2. Release the cable restraint.
3. Disconnect the connector and remove three screws (callout 1). Remove the toner supply drive unit.
Disconnect the second connector.
Figure 2-165 Remove toner supply drive unit and disconnect connector

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct drive unit
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner duct drive unit assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the toner duct drive.
instructions.
JC93-00451A Toner duct drive unit assembly (E72525, E72530, E72535 models)
JC93-01685A Toner duct drive unit assembly (E72825, E72830, E72835 models)
Required tools
Post service test



Remove the toner duct drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner duct drive unit.
1. Loosen the PCA cage. Remove two screws on the lower edge of the cage to allow access to the duct drive.
Figure 2-169 Remove screw

3. Disconnect one connector.
4. Remove four screws. Loosen the PCA by removing nine screws, enabling access to the screw located behind
the board. Remove the toner duct drive unit and disconnect the second connector.


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive unit
This document provides the procedures to remove the pickup drive unit assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the pickup drive.
instructions.
JC93-00442A Pickup drive unit assembly
Required tools
Post service test



Remove the pickup drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive unit.
▲ Release the cable restraint. Disconnect the connector and remove three screws. Remove the pickup drive
unit.
Figure 2-174 Remove screws and pickup drive unit


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main drive unit
This document provides the procedures to remove the main drive unit assembly.
instructions.
JC93-00912C Main drive unit assembly
Required tools
Post service test



Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.
2. Disconnect five connectors and release eleven cable restraints. Remove five screws and then remove the
main drive unit.
Figure 2-178 Remove screws and main drive unit


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser/exit drive assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser/exit drive assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the fuser/exit drive.
instructions.
JC93-00449A Fuser/exit drive assembly
Required tools
Post service test



Remove the fuser/exit drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the fuser/exit drive assembly.
▲ Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit.
Figure 2-182 Remove screws and fuser/exit drive unit


instructions.

Fuser exit drive
View the fuser exit drive exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Fuser exit drive 287

Fuser exit drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the fuser exit drive.
Figure 2-183 Fuser exit drive

Table 2-40 Fuser exit drive
Ref
8 JC31-00123B Motor BLDC 1 Removal and replacement:

on page 283
9 JC31-00123B Drive, motor step 1 Removal and replacement:

on page 283
ENWW Fuser exit drive 289

Registration sub-frame
View the registration sub-frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Registration sub-frame 291
Registration sub-frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the registration sub-frame.
Figure 2-184 Registration sub-frame

Table 2-41 Registration sub-frame
Ref
0 JC93-01371A Frame, sub registration 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration assembly
on page 294
1 0604-001381 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove the registration unit assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the registration assembly.
instructions.
JC93-01371A Registration unit assembly
Required tools
Post service test



avoid injury.

Remove the TCU

Remove the drum unit

Follow these steps to remove the drum unit.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the drum unit, it must be removed to remove or install the registration
unit.

Figure 2-191 Disconnect drum unit connector
2. Remove the drum unit.
Remove the registration unit

Follow these steps to remove the registration unit.
1. Remove the paper dust cleaner.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the guide feed roller.
Figure 2-193 Remove screws and guide feed roller
3. Remove four screws, two to loosen the unit and two to remove the bracket (B).
NOTE: Reinstallation note: Make sure the notches on the sheet metal bracket seat fully in the grooves on
the shaft.

4. Disconnect the connector. Remove the registration sensor.
Figure 2-195 Remove registration sensor

instructions.

Main frame pickup 1 and 2
View the main frame pickup 1 and 2 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Main frame pickup 1 and 2 301

Main frame pickup 1 and 2
Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup 1 and 2.
Figure 2-196 Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Table 2-43 Main frame pickup 1 and 2
Ref
1-4 JC93-00510A Main pickup frame 1 Not applicable
ENWW Main frame pickup 1 and 2 303

Main frame pickup
View the main frame pickup assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Main frame pickup 305
Main frame pickup
Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup.
Figure 2-197 Main frame pickup

Table 2-44 Main frame pickup
Ref
1 JC93-00540A Trays 2-x rollers 3 Removal and replacement:

Trays 2–x main rollers
on page 308
2 JC93-00511A Frame, main pickup upper 1 Not applicable
7 JC93-01441A Frame, main pickup lower 1 Not applicable
7-4 JC67–00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Trays 2–x main rollers
This document provides the procedures to remove the pickup/reverse/feed rollers.
View a video of removing and replacing the rollers.
View an additional video of removing and replacing the rollers.
instructions.
JC93-00540A Trays 2-x main rollers
Required tools
Post service test



avoid injury.

Remove the pickup/feed/reverse roller

Follow these steps to remove the pickup/feed/reverse roller.
1. Remove one screw and disconnect one connector. Remove the pickup assembly.
Figure 2-203 Remove the pickup assembly

2. Release the small tab and remove the pickup/reverse/feed roller. Note the location of the clutches and
gears.
Figure 2-204 Remove pickup/reverse/feed roller (1 of 2)
Figure 2-205 Remove pickup/reverse/feed roller (2 of 2)
NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.
3. Enter service mode. Select the “Field Replacement Unit” menu item for the pickup/reverse/feed roller
(Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit). Select “Reset” to reset the current count to “0”.


instructions.

Main frame
View the main frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Main frame 315
Main frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame.
Figure 2-206 Main frame
1-3

Table 2-46 Main frame
Ref
1-2 JC93-00466A Switch, front door open 3 Removal and replacement:

Front door open switch
on page 334
1-3 5CM76-67901 Right door damper and lever kit 1 Removal and replacement: Right
door dampener and lever kit
on page 338
3 JC93-00078C Frame sub, clean registration 1 Not applicable
6 JC66-03203A Roller idle, feed 2 Not applicable
7-1 0604-001381 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable
9 JC93-00891A Frame, HV package mono 1 Not applicable
9-1 JC92-02747A PCA, eraser mono 1 Not applicable
9-2 JC97-01401A MEA unit, terminal 1 Not applicable
10 JC93-00917A Frame, duct 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner duct on page 323
11-2 JC31-00161A Fan Type 7 developer 1 Not applicable
14-1 JC92-02622C PBA, paper size sensor 2 Removal and replacement:

Paper size sensor PCA
on page 318
Not shown JC61-04900A Registration stopper 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC93-01467A Switch, right door open 1 Removal and replacement:
Paper size sensor PCA
on page 318
Not shown JC92-02471A Sensor, toner collection unit 1 Removal and replacement:
Toner collection unit sensor
on page 320
ENWW Main frame 317

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor PCA
This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper size sensor PCA.
View a video of removing and replacing the paper size sensor.
instructions.
JC92-02622A Paper Size Sensor PCA
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the Paper Size Sensor PCA

Follow these steps to remove the Paper Size Sensor PCA.
▲ Do the following:
● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.
● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.


instructions.
ENWW Main frame 319

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit sensor
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner collection unit sensor.
View a video of removing and replacing the TCU sensor.
instructions.
Part number Paer description
JC92-02471A Toner collection unit sensor
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner cover.
1. Open the front cover. Remove the toner cartridge (callout 1) and the TCU (callout 2).

Figure 2-208 Remove the toner cartridge and TCU
2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the inner cover.
Figure 2-209 Remove the inner cover
Remove the TCU sensor

Follow these steps to remove the TCU sensor.
▲ Disconnect the connector. Remove the sensor.
ENWW Main frame 321

Figure 2-210 Disconnect connector and remove sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner duct assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the toner duct.
instructions.
JC93-00917A Toner duct assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit.
▲ Remove the toner cartridge and imaging unit.

ENWW Main frame 323


Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.
2. Disconnect five connectors and release eleven cable restraints. Remove five screws and then remove the
main drive unit.
Figure 2-214 Remove screws and main drive unit
Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.
ENWW Main frame 325

▲ Disconnect seven connectors and eight screws, and then remove formatter PCA.
Figure 2-215 Remove the formatter connectors and screws


cage.
Remove the main board

Follow these steps to remove the main board.
1. Disconnect 19 connectors, a ground wire, and three FFCs on the main board.
ENWW Main frame 327

Figure 2-219 Remove the main board connectors and screws
2. Remove nine screws, and then remove the main board.
3. Disconnect the MSOK from the removed main board, noting its orientation. Transfer the MSOK to the
replacement main board and install it using the same orientation.
TIP: The main board is marked to show the correct orientation of the MSOK when installed.
Figure 2-220 MSOK installation orientation
TIP: See the screen-printed icon on the main board to ensure that the MSOK is aligned correctly during
reinstallation.
IMPORTANT: A Shading Test for the ADF unit must be completed after replacing the ADF unit or main
board.
Remove the main board cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board cage.

1. Remove the FFC retainer at the bottom-right.
2. Pinch the ground strap (callout 1) to remove it from the top of the cage.
Figure 2-221 Remove the ground strap
3. Open seven cable retainers.
4. Remove four screws.
Figure 2-222 Remove the main board cage screws
5. Lift the main board cage up slightly to release one bracket, and then pull out to remove.
Remove the toner drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner drive unit.
ENWW Main frame 329

1. Loosen the PCA cage by removing the two bottom screws. This enables access to the supply drive.
2. Release the cable restraint.
3. Disconnect the connector and remove three screws (callout 1). Remove the toner supply drive unit.
Disconnect the second connector.
Figure 2-223 Remove toner supply drive unit and disconnect connector
Remove the toner duct

Follow these steps to remove the toner duct.
▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the toner duct.
Figure 2-224 Remove screws and toner duct

instructions.
ENWW Main frame 331

Removal and replacement: Transfer roller
This document provides the procedures to remove the transfer roller.
View a video of removing and replacing the transfer roller.
instructions.
JC82-00466A Transfer roller assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the transfer roller

Follow these steps to remove the transfer roller.

2. Hold and release both sides of the transfer roller to remove.
Figure 2-225 Remove transfer roller

instructions.
ENWW Main frame 333

Removal and replacement: Front door open switch
This document provides the procedures to remove the front cover open switch assembly.
instructions.
JC93-00466A Front Door Switch Open
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the front door open switch

Follow these steps to remove the front door open switch.

Figure 2-226 Open right door
2. Remove two screw-caps and two screws.
NOTE: Do not dislodge the power button (callout 2) when the cover is removed.
Figure 2-227 Remove screw-caps and screws
3. Open the front door. Remove the toner collection unit. Remove the toner cartridge.
4. Remove the imaging unit.
ENWW Main frame 335

5. Remove eight screws. Release the front-inner cover.
Figure 2-228 Remove screws and front-inner cover
6. Disconnect one cable, and then release one cable stay.

7. Remove one screw, and then remove the door-open switch.

instructions.
ENWW Main frame 337

Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit
Learn how to remove and replace the right door dampener.
cable.
blank).
5CM76-67901 Right door dampener and lever kit
Required tools
printer.
Post service test
Remove the right door dampener

Follow these steps to remove the right door dampener.
1. Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3.

2. Open the right door, and then release the right door stopper from the damper.
Figure 2-229 Release the right door stopper
3. Remove three screws, and then remove the right front cover.
Figure 2-230 Remove the right front cover
ENWW Main frame 339

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the front lower cover.
TIP: Slightly open Tray 4 to make removing the cover easier.
Figure 2-231 Remove the front lower cover
5. Remove two screws, and then remove the dampener cover.
Figure 2-232 Remove the dampener cover

6. Remove the dampener gear assembly.
NOTE: Do not discard the failed dampener. Return the assembly to HP for failure analysis.
Figure 2-233 Remove the dampener assembly
7. Important: Make sure that the right door stopper is reinstalled after servicing the printer. Closing the right
door without the stopper installed will damage the damper.
Figure 2-234 Install the right door stopper

ENWW Main frame 341

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door open switch
This document provides the procedures to remove the right door open switch.
instructions.
JC93-01467A Right door open switch
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the right door open switch

Follow these steps to remove the right door open switch.
1. Remove the rear cover. Remove one screw securing the sensor.
ENWW Main frame 343

Figure 2-235 Remove rear cover and screw
2. Remove the micro-switch.
Figure 2-236 Remove micro-switch


instructions.
ENWW Main frame 345

Covers
View covers exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Covers 347
Covers
Parts diagram and parts list for the covers.
Figure 2-237 Covers
16

Table 2-54 Covers
Ref
No Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure
1 JC95-02096A Cover, front 1 Not applicable
2 JC95-02082A Cover, middle right 1 Not applicable
3 JC95-02097A Cover, inner 1 Not applicable
4 JC63-05647A Cover, Control Panel Top 1 Not applicable
5 JC95-02095A Cover, left 1 Removal and replacement: Left

cover on page 349
6 JC63-05623A Cover, left upper 1 Not applicable
7 JC63-05576A Cover, scanner left 1 Not applicable
8 JC95-02208A Cover, exit 1 Not applicable
9 JC63-04536B Cover, front lower 1 Not applicable
10 JC63-04539B Cover, right front 1 Not applicable
11 JC63-04540B Cover, right rear 1 Not applicable
12 JC63-04520B Cover, right upper 1 Not applicable
13 JC63-05575A Cover, scanner right 1 Not applicable
14 JC63-05617A Cover, rear lower 1 Removal and replacement: Rear

covers on page 351
15 JC63-05618A Cover, rear upper 1 Removal and replacement: Rear

covers on page 351
16 JC63-05648A Cover, control panel bottom 1 Not applicable
17 JC63-05577A Cover, scanner rear 1 Not applicable
18 JC95-02088A Cover, rear exit 1 Not applicable
19 JC63-04567B Cover, rear dummy 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC61-04626A Strap, front cover 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC41-00964A PCA, Sub USB Host 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch 1 Not applicable
Removal and replacement: Left cover

This document provides the procedures to remove the left cover assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the left cover.
ENWW Covers 349

instructions.
SAM-JC95-02095A Left cover assembly
Required tools
Post service test

Removal and replacement: Rear covers
This document provides the procedures to remove the rear covers.
View a video of removing and replacing the rear covers.
instructions.
JC63-05618A Rear-upper cover
JC63-05617A Rear-lower cover
Required tools
Post service test

ENWW Covers 351



instructions.
ENWW Covers 353

Right door
View the right door exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Right door 355
Right door
Parts diagram and parts list for the right door
Figure 2-241 Right door

Table 2-57 Right door
Ref
1 JC63-04573B Cover, upper side 1 Not applicable
2 JC31-00160C Fan Type 6, Fuser 1 Not applicable
3 JC95-02082A Cover, right door 1 Not applicable
4 JC63-03356C Cover, front Tray 1 1 Not applicable
5 JC90-01777A Tray 1 Door 1 Removal and replacement: Right

Door, Tray 1 and Tray 1
assemblies on page 358
6 JC63-05587A Guide, duplex upper 1 Not applicable
7 JC95-01509C Right door exit 1 Not applicable
8 JC66-03220B Link, side 1 Not applicable
11 JC66-03235A Right door dampner 3 Not applicable
13 JC95-01519A Right door duplex lower 1 Removal and replacement: Right

15 JC95-02130A Right door take away 1 Not applicable
16 JC63-03361C Cover, harness 1 Not applicable
18 JC95-01510A Motor right door duplex 1 Not applicable
19 JC64-00711A Right rear lock 1 Not applicable
23 JC95-01518A Right door link rear 1 Not applicable
24 JC82-00466A Transfer roller assembly 1 Not applicable
25 JC64-00710A Right door lock 1 Not applicable
ENWW Right door 357

Removal and replacement: Right Door, Tray 1 and Tray 1 assemblies
This document provides the procedures to remove the Right Door, Tray 1 (MP), and Tray 1 assemblies.
View a video of removing and replacing the right door, Tray 1, and Tray 1 assemblies.
instructions.
JC95-02080B Right door
JC90-01777A Tray 1 (MP)
JC95-01519A Right Door Duplex Lower
JC33-00029B Solenoid Tray 1
Required tools
Post service test


ENWW Right door 359

avoid injury.

Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies

Follow these steps to remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies.
1. Open the MP tray and remove the MP roller cover. Release tabs at back of the roller cover and rotate to
release.
Figure 2-247 Remove MP front cover
ENWW Right door 361

2. Open the MP tray and release the hinge from the right, flexing the linker to remove.
Figure 2-248 Open MP tray and release link
3. Remove two screws and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 2-249 Remove screws and cable cover

4. Remove three screws and then remove the cable cover lower.
Figure 2-250 Remove screws and cable cover lower
5. Remove one screw. Prop up the hinge on the door edge to keep it out of the way.
Figure 2-251 Remove screw and prop up hinge
ENWW Right door 363


8. Remove two screws from the other side of the door.
ENWW Right door 365

10. Swing out the guide feed (C) to the right. Remove the hinge pin from the front.
Figure 2-256 Remove hinge pin
11. Gently lift up the right door.
Figure 2-257 Lift right door duplex lower

13. Disconnect three connectors near the hinge.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the connector couplers stay attached to the door.
Figure 2-259 Disconnect connectors
ENWW Right door 367

14. Remove one screw, and then remove the MP unit.
Figure 2-260 Remove screw and MP unit
15. Remove the MP-cover base.
Figure 2-261 Remove MP-cover base

16. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the gear (C).
Figure 2-262 Remove e-ring and gear
17. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bushing (D).
Figure 2-263 Remove e-ring and bushing
ENWW Right door 369

18. Remove one screw, and then remove the Bracket-Solenoid.
Figure 2-264 Remove screw and bracket-solenoid
NOTE: Reinstallation note: Route the cable before putting the cover back on during reinstallation.
19. Remove four screws, and then release the MP bracket pickup. Release the cable from the cable harness.
Figure 2-265 Release MP bracket pickup and release cable from harness

20. Release the cable from the cable retainer, and release the cable from the cable harness. Remove two
screws, and then remove the MP solenoid.
Figure 2-266 Release cable and remove MP solenoid
NOTE: Reinstallation note: When reinstalling, the paper stopper needs to be located in the appropriate
slot in the housing.

ENWW Right door 371

instructions.

Tray 1
View the tray 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Tray 1 373

Tray 1
Parts diagram and parts list for Tray 1.
Figure 2-267 Tray 1
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-4

Table 2-59 Tray 1
Ref
1 JC90-01778A Tray 1 Door 1 Removal and replacement: Right

2-4 JC67-00455A Coupler, Torque Limiter 1 Not applicable
2-5 JC62-01085A Seal, pad tray 1 3 Not applicable
3 JC90-01125B MP bracket pickup 1 Not applicable
3-1 JC33-00029B Solenoid, tray 1 1 Removal and replacement: Right

3-2 JC90-00918A MP one way clutch 1 Not applicable
3-3 JC66-00977A Clutch, one way 2 Not applicable
3-4 JC61-01288A Holder-M_idle one way 1 Not applicable
3-9 JC66-00940A Gear-M_idle PU 1 Not applicable
3-10 JC66-00977A Clutch-P_one way 1 Not applicable
3-11 JC93-00540B Frame-main pickup roller 2 Removal and replacement: Tray

1 pick/reverse/feed roller
on page 376
7 X3A92-67918 Tray 1 roller (kit) Removal and replacement: Tray

1 pick/reverse/feed roller
on page 376
Not shown JC95-02079A Right door assembly 1
ENWW Tray 1 375

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller
This document provides the procedures to remove the multipurpose (MP) pickup/reverse/feed roller.
instructions.
JC93-00540B Tray 1 Main Rollers
X3A92-67918 Tray 1 roller kit
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 rollers.
1. Open Tray 1. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the cover
NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.

Figure 2-268 Remove the cover
2. Remove the cover shown using a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the
cover.
NOTE: The flag, it will need to be moved out of the way to remove cover.
ENWW Tray 1 377

3. Release the small tab and remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller (callout 2). Move the flag (callout 1)
out of the way to release rollers.
CAUTION: Remove the rollers slowly to avoid loosening the parts behind the rollers. If these parts come
loose, they might fall into the printer and be difficult to retrieve. Note the location of all components.
NOTE: HP recommends replacing all three rollers at the same time.
Figure 2-270 Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller
4. After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
b. Select the Service menu.
c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service
access code.
d. Select the Service Tools menu.
e. Select the Supply Status menu.
f. Select Field Replacement Unit.
g. Select Tray X Rollers.
h. elect Tray 1 Roller Kit.
i. Select Reset.


instructions.
ENWW Tray 1 379

Right door exit and takeaway
View the right door exit and takeaway exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Right door exit and takeaway 381
Right door exit
Parts diagram and parts list for the right door exit.
Figure 2-271 Right door exit

Table 2-61 Right door exit
Ref
2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Duplex sensor on page 388
3 JC66-03307A Actuator, fuser out 1 Not applicable
4 6107-001737 Spring, TS 1 Not applicable
ENWW Right door exit and takeaway 383

Right door duplex
View the right door duplex exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Right door duplex 385
Right door duplex
Parts diagram and parts list for the right door duplex.
Figure 2-272 Right door duplex

Table 2-62 Right door duplex
Ref
0 JC95-01924A Right Door Duplex 1 Not applicable
5 JC66-02180A Actuator, duplex 2 1 Not applicable
6 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Duplex sensor on page 388
8 6107-001737 Spring, TS 1 Not applicable
13 JC66-02289B Roller idle 2 Not applicable
14 JC66-02354A Shaft, roller idle L 1 Not applicable
15 6107-001731 Spring, CS 2 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Duplex sensor
This document provides the procedures to remove the duplex sensor.
View a video of removing and replacing the duplex sensor.
instructions.
0604-001393 Duplex sensor assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the duplex sensor

Follow these steps to remove the duplex sensor.
1. Remove the transfer roller assembly. Push the rear side to release the pin and lift up to release the sensor.

Figure 2-273 Remove transfer roller assembly
2. Remove one self-tapping screw. Open the Guide-transfer roller Upper by releasing four plastic snaps.
Reinstallation tip: Make sure the top housing locates via the plastic locator pins on either side and snap
into place.
Make sure the plastic tabs are installed properly. Move the assembly into position from a 45° angle.
Make sure the springs are located correctly and then snap into place.
Figure 2-274 Open guide-transfer roller upper

3. Remove one screw. Turn over the Holder-DUP SNR. Disconnect the connector and remove the duplex
sensor.
Figure 2-275 Disconnect connector and remove duplex sensor

instructions.

ADF (LX models)
View the ADF (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW ADF (LX models) 391

ADF (LX models)
Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF (LX models).
Figure 2-276 ADF (LX models)

Table 2-64 ADF (LX models)
Ref
1 JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) jam
access cover (LX) on page 394
2 JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) 1 Not applicable
3 JC63-05563A ADF, front cover (LX) 1 Not applicable
4 JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) 1 Not applicable
7 JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX) on page 398
7 X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX) on page 398
7-4 JC66-04079A ADF pinion gear (LX) 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam
access cover (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC97-04853A Jam access cover (LX)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.
Figure 2-277 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws
2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.
Figure 2-278 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.
Figure 2-279 Release the top back cover.
Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.
1. Open the jam access cover, and then remove one screw.
Figure 2-280 Remove the jam access cover screw

2. Remove the pivot pin, and then pivot the cover and release the hinge to remove the jam access cover.
Figure 2-281 Remove the jam access cover

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray
(LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (E778xx series)
X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) E783xx series)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.
1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-282 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom of the
document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-283 Open the document feeder
3. Remove the document feeder front cover.
Figure 2-284 Remove the document feeder front cover



Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray.
▲ Disconnect one connector on document feeder board (callout 1), remove one screw and hinge pin (callout
2), and then remove the input tray.
NOTE: Carefully guide the cable out of the chassis while removing the tray.
Figure 2-288 Remove the input tray connector, screw, and hinge pin
1
2


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS)
JC97-04722A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E778xx series)
JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E783xx series)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test





Remove the pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the pick and feed roller assembly.
Figure 2-295 Remove four screws
2. Remove two screws on the front cover.
Figure 2-296 Remove two screws on front cover

3. Open the ADF and then remove three screw caps.
Figure 2-297 Remove three screw caps
4. Remove three screws, and then remove the front cover.
Figure 2-298 Remove three screws and front cover

5. Rotate the pick/feed roller assembly to release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame.
Figure 2-299 Release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame
6. To remove the pick/feed roller assembly lift up on the front side (callout 1) and, then slide towards the front
(callout 2) to release the pick/feed roller assembly.
Figure 2-300 Release the pick/feed roller assembly

7. Rotate the roller assembly over, and then disconnect one connectors. Remove the document feeder pick
roller assembly.
Figure 2-301 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly
Reinstallation tip: Note the four flags (callout 1) on the bottom of the pick/feed roller assembly. When
reinstalling, hold up the flags while reinstall to allow for proper installation.
Figure 2-302 Pick/Feed roller assembly four flags
Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.
1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.
Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be reinstalled in
the same orientation.

Figure 2-303 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout 2).
Figure 2-304 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin
3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main
motor (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder main motor (LX).
View a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.
View a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC31-00163A Main motor assembly (LX)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test


Remove the main motor

Follow these steps to remove the main motor.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove the tension spring (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).
Figure 2-308 Remove the main motor connector, spring, and screws
2
1
2. Carefully lift the motor out while releasing the gear belt.
Reinstallation tip:
a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.
b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.
c. Install the tension spring.
d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-309 Main motor and gear belt

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be reinstalled in
the same orientation.

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly (callout 2).
Figure 2-311 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

instructions.

ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)
View the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models) 419

ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX)
Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models).
Figure 2-312 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

Table 2-69 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)
Ref
1-1 JC92-02962A LX PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) PCA (LX)
on page 422
1-5 JC97-04528A LX, hinge r 1 Not applicable
1-6 JC97-04527A LX, hinge l 1 Not applicable
2-5 JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) pick/
feed roller assembly (LX)
on page 426
2-5-1 JC97-04099A LX pick roller 1 Not applicable
2-5-6 JC97-04860A LX feed roller 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) PCA (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC92-02962A Document feeder PCA assembly (LX)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test



Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA.
▲ Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, remove four screws, and then remove the
document feeder PCA (LX).
Figure 2-316 Document feeder PCA (LX)


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed
roller assembly (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly (LX/du models).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly (LX).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC97-04857A Pick feed roller assembly (LX)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.
Figure 2-317 Open the document feeder cover

2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.
NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)
Figure 2-318 Remove the document feeder cover screws
3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-319 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

4. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.
Figure 2-320 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly
5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on both sides
of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.
Figure 2-321 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide the
shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.
NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.
Figure 2-322 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips


instructions.

ADF main frame assembly (LX models)
View the ADF main frame assembly (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW ADF main frame assembly (LX models) 433
ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models)
Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF main frame assembly (LX models).
Figure 2-323 ADF main frame (LX models)
13

Table 2-72 ADF main frame assembly (LX models)
Ref
1-1 JC97-04586A LX separation housing 1 Not applicable
1-2 JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF)
separation roller assembly (LX)
on page 436
1-2-1 JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller Not applicable
1-3 JC69-01326A Friction pad 1 Not applicable
5-5 JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 1 Not applicable
6-2 JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out 1 Not applicable
6-3 JC66-04103A Actuator, registration 1 Not applicable
6-5 0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 1 Not applicable
7 JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (Motor, bldc type 1) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) feed
motor (LX) on page 443
13 JC31-00163A Motor - Step main 1 Not applicable
16 JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC 1 Not applicable
17 JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open 1 Not applicable
19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) 1 Not applicable
19 JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) 1 Not applicable
19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) 1 Not applicable
1
Early models only during original release. This part removed from newer models.

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF)
separation roller assembly (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (LX).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC97-04852A ADF separation roller assembly (LX)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.
Figure 2-324 Open the document feeder cover

2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.
NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)
Figure 2-325 Remove the document feeder cover screws
3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).
Figure 2-326 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

Figure 2-327 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly
5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).
Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on both sides
of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.
Figure 2-328 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide the
shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.
CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.
NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.
Figure 2-329 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips
Remove the LX document feeder separation roller

Follow these steps to remove the LX document feeder separation roller.
1. Rotate the separation roller cover up to release it, and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-330 Remove the separation roller cover

Figure 2-331 Document feeder separation roller cover and roller assembly
3. Release two claws, and then remove the separation roller assembly.
NOTE: The separation roller assembly spring under the roller is not captive.
Figure 2-332 Remove the separation roller assembly

4. When the assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly seated in the holder.
Figure 2-333 Separation roller assembly spring

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) feed
motor (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).
View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (LX) (bldc type 1)
Required tools
printer.

Post service test



Remove the feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.
1. Loosen the cables in the cable guide, remove two screws and then move the cable guide out of the way.
Figure 2-337 Feed motor cable guide

2. Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then carefully lift the motor out to remove.
Figure 2-338 Remove the feed motor

instructions.

Flow ADF (GX/z)
View the flow ADF (GX/z) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Flow ADF (GX/z) 447

ADF (GX/z)
Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF (GX/z).
Figure 2-339 ADF (GX/z)

Table 2-75 ADF/ Scanner GX/z
Ref
1 JC97-04869A GX/z ADF open cover 1 Not applicable
2 JC97-04872A GX/z ADF pickup upper 1 Not applicable
3 JC66-02270A GX/z ADF cover hinge 1 Not applicable
5 JC97-04881A GX/z ADF front cover 1 Not applicable
6 JC97-04879A GX/z ADF dummy front 1 Not applicable
8 JC97-04692A GX/z ADF damper 1 Not applicable
9 JC97-04880A GX/z ADF cover, bottom 1 Not applicable
10 JC97-04883A GX/z ADF main frame 1 Not applicable
12 JC97-04658C GX/z ADF Stacker 1 Not applicable
13 JC63-05566A GX/z ADF cover, rear 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Document feeder input tray (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the input tray assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the input tray (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
JC97-04658C Input tray assembly
Required tools
Post service test



Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the document
feeder back cover.
Figure 2-344 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws
Remove the dampening unit

Follow these steps to remove the dampening unit.
▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the damping unit.
Figure 2-345 Remove the document feeder dampening unit
Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.
1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-346 Remove 4 screws.
2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly
Figure 2-347 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly
● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.
Remove the input tray

Follow these steps to remove the input tray.
1. Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector, and then remove cable from guide.

Figure 2-348 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector
2. Lift the tray from the front, and pivot the tray outward to remove.

Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the CIS (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
0605-001246 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly
Required tools
Post service test





feeder back cover.

1. Remove 4 screws.

TIP: Re-assembly
Remove the paper path cover

Follow these steps to remove the paper path cover.
▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 2-356 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

TIP: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover for reinstallation; the cover must reinstalled
with the same orientation.
2. Do the following:
a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
b. Use a pair of needle nose pliers to pull up on the metal pin, and then slide the CIS as shown below to
remove it.

Figure 2-358 Remove the CIS

instructions.

Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)
View the flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) 465
Flow ADF open cover (GX/z)
Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF open cover (GX/z).
Figure 2-359 ADF open cover (GX/z)

Table 2-78 Flow ADF open cover
Ref
0 JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/z) 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder jam access
cover (GX) on page 468
2 JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/z) 1 Not applicable
2-5-1 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 4 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Document feeder jam access cover (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the jam access cover assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the jam access cover (E72520-E72530).
View a video of removing and replacing the jam access cover (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
JC97-04869A Jam access cover assembly
Required tools
Post service test





feeder back cover.
Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.
1. Disconnect connector at document feeder PCA and route cable out.
Figure 2-365 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect the ground wire.
Figure 2-366 Remove the jam access cover ground wire
3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove hinge (pivot) pin, and then remove door arm support (callout 2)
Figure 2-367 Remove the jam access cover door arm support
4. Remove the jam access cover.


instructions.

ADF upper pickup (GX/z)
View the ADF upper pickup (GX/z) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW ADF upper pickup (GX/z) 475
ADF upper pickup (GX/z)
Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF upper pickup (GX/z).
Figure 2-368 ADF upper pickup (GX/z)

Table 2-80 ADF upper pickup (GX/z)
Ref
2-1 JC97-04650A GX/z ADF, sub-pickup 1 Removal and replacement: Flow

document feeder pick roller
assembly (GX) on page 478
2-2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC97-04915A Document feeder separtation roller assembly 1 Removal and replacement: ADF
(GX/z models) separation roller assembly (GX)
on page 483

Removal and replacement: Flow document feeder pick roller assembly (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the flow document feeder pickup roller assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the pick roller (E77822-E77830).
Service leve: Basic
instructions.
JC97-04650A Pick roller assembly (GX/z models)
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly.
1. Open the document feeder top cover.
2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:
a. Remove 4 screws.

b. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly
3. Remove the pickup rollers:
a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-371 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover

b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the shaft
coupler.
NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.
Figure 2-372 Remove the pickup roller components
c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

instructions.


Removal and replacement: ADF separation roller assembly (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the flow document feeder separation roller assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the separation roller (E72525-E72535).
View a video of removing and replacing the separation roller (E77822-E77830).
instructions.
JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly (GX/z)
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly.
1. Open the document feeder top cover.
2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:
a. Remove 4 screws.

b. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly
3. Remove the pickup rollers:
a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.
Figure 2-376 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover

b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the shaft
coupler.
Figure 2-377 Remove the pickup roller components
c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.
4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly.
1. Slightly lift the input tray, and then remove the separation roller cover.
Figure 2-379 Remove the separation roller cover
2. Remove one plastic clip.
Figure 2-380 Remove one plastic clip

3. Slide the roller assembly to the front, and then pull up to release the claws from the shaft.
Reinstallation tip: Position the spring and shaft before attaching the claws to the shaft.
Figure 2-381 Release the separation roller

4. Remove the separation roller.
NOTE: Make sure that the sponge washer (circled in a previous step) is retained during the removal of the
roller assembly–it might fall off.
Figure 2-382 Remove the separation roller
TIP: Re-assembly tip
Put the spring to the arrow direction at the bottom of the holder.
Insert the spring at the hole carefully.
Push the separation roller assembly to the bottom (Callout 1), then insert the assembly (2 joints) to the
shaft (Callout 2)
instructions.


Flow ADF stacker (GX/z)
View the flow ADF stacker (GX/z) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Flow ADF stacker (GX/z) 491

Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)
Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX).
Figure 2-383 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

Table 2-83 Flow ADF stacker
Ref
0 JC97-04658C GX/z Flow ADF stacker 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder input tray (GX)
on page 450
6 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC82-00693A Flow ADF - stacker upper CM 1 Not applicable
ENWW Flow ADF stacker (GX/z) 493

Flow ADF main frame (GX/z)
View the flow ADF main frame (GX/z) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Flow ADF main frame (GX/z) 495
ADF main frame (GX/z)
Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF main frame (GX/z)
Figure 2-384 ADF main frame (GX/z)
1-3

Table 2-84 ADF main frame (GX/z)
Ref
1-1 JC97-04915A GX Separation Roller Assy 1 Removal and replacement: ADF

separation roller assembly (GX)
on page 483
1-2 JC97-04652A GX ADF - Separation Roller Cover 1 Not applicable
1-3 JC61-08235A Spring CS 1 Not applicable
5 JC97-04656B GX ADF scan in lower 1 Not applicable
7 0605-001246 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly 1 Not applicable
8 JC97-04681A GX ADF, pickup release drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder rear motors
(GX) on page 503
11 JC92-02964A GX ADF, PCA 1 Removal and replacement: PCA-

ADF HIC (GX) on page 526
12 JC97-04680A GX ADF, feed drive motor 4 Removal and replacement:

(GX) on page 503
13 JC97-04640A GX ADF, hinge L 1 Not applicable
14 JC97-04641A GX ADF, hinge R 1 Not applicable
16 JC61-07694A GX Fan motor housing 1 Not applicable
17 JC31-00168A Fan, ADF CIS 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder contact image
sensor (CIS) fan (GX)
on page 515
19 JC97-04679A GX ADF, lift drive 1 Removal and replacement:

(GX) on page 503
20 JC31-00177A GX Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder front motor
(GX) on page 499
21 JC31-00146A Fan type 4, ADF PCA (GX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder PCA fan (GX)
on page 512
23 JC97-04668B GX ADF - Input Tray 1 Not applicable
26 JC97-04687A GX ADF, white simplex roller 1 Not applicable
27 JC97-04830A GX ADF scan out 1 Not applicable
29 JC97-04682A GX ADF - Motor Drive Release Scan 1 Not applicable
36 6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 3 Not applicable
Not shown JC92-02965A PCA - ADF HIC (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement: Flow
ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA
(GX) on page 518

Table 2-84 ADF main frame (GX/z) (continued)
Ref
Not shown JC92-02967A PCA - ADF Receiver (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement: Flow
(GX) on page 518
Not shown JC92-02966A PCA - ADF Transmitter (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement: Flow
(GX) on page 518

Removal and replacement: Removal and replacement: Document feeder front motor
(GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the front motor assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the motor (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
JC31-00177A Front motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test


feeder back cover.
Remove the front motor

Follow these steps to remove the front motor.
▲ Remove two screws and disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor.

Reinstallation tip:
b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.
c. Install the tension spring.
d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
Figure 2-387 Remove the document feeder front motor


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder rear motors (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the rear motor assemblies.
View a video of removing and replacing the motors (E72520-E72530).
View a video of removing and replacing the motors (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
JC97-04679A Motor 1 - Flow ADF drive
JC97-04681A Motor 2 -Flow ADF drive release pickup
JC97-04680A Pickup motor
C97-04680A Pre_REGI motor
JC97-04680A Exit motor
JC97-04680A Feed motor
JC31-00177A REGI motor
Required tools
Post service test

Identify the document feeder motors
Follow these steps to identify the document feeder motors.
▲ Use the figure below to locate the motor.
Figure 2-388 Document feeder motors identification

1 2 3 4
5 6 7
Callout Description
1 Motor 1
2 Motor 2
3 Pickup motor
4 Pre-REGI motor
5 Exit motor
6 Feed motor
7 REGI motor


feeder back cover.
Remove motors 1 and 2

Follow these steps to remove motors 1 and 2.
▲ Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the motor.
Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

Figure 2-391 Remove the motor
Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors

Follow these steps to remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors.
1. Loosen the cable retainer, and then disconnect one connector from the motor.
TIP: Remove the connector harness from the retainer, and then disconnect the connector.
2. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pickup motor
off the screws to remove it.

NOTE:
● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the motor
pulley.
● Install the tension spring.
● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
Figure 2-393 Pickup motor
3. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pre-REGI motor
off the screws to remove it.
NOTE:
● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the motor
pulley.
● Install the tension spring.
● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount

Figure 2-394 Pre-REGI motor
Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.
1. Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the CIS fan.
Figure 2-395 Remove the main fan
2. Remove the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), loosen three screws, and then remove
the exit motor.

Reinstallation tip:
b. Install the tension spring.
c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
Remove the feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.
1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

2. Remove two screws, and then remove motor.
Remove the REGI motor

Follow these steps to remove the REGI motor.
2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor.
3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.
TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.
4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to remove it.
Reinstallation tip:
b. Install the tension spring.
c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder PCA fan (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA fan assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the fan (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
JC31-00146A Document feeder PCA fan assembly
Required tools
Post service test


feeder back cover.
Remove the document feeder PCA fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder PCA fan.
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then release two tabs (callout 2) to remove the fan.
Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.

Figure 2-401 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS fan assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the fan (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
JC31-00168A CIS fan
Required tools
Post service test


feeder back cover.
Remove the document feeder CIS fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder CIS fan.
▲ Remove one connector, and then remove two mounting screws to remove the fan.

Figure 2-404 Remove the document feeder CIS fan

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the sensor (E72520-E72530).
E77820-E77830:
instructions.
JC92-02965A PCA- ADF HIC (GX only)
JC92-02967A PCA- ADF Receiver (GX only)
JC92-02966A PCA- ADF Transmitter (GX only)
Required tools

Post service test





feeder back cover.

1. Remove 4 screws.

TIP: Re-assembly
Remove the document feeder paper path cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder paper path cover.
▲ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 2-412 Remove the document feeder paper path cover
Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA

Follow these steps to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA.
1. Remove the separation roller, and then remove one screw (callout 1).

2. Remove the pick/feed cover.
Figure 2-414 Remove the pick/feed cover
3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the ultrasonic sensor.
Figure 2-415 Remove the ultrasonic sensor


instructions.

Removal and replacement: PCA-ADF HIC (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA.
View a video fo removing and replacing the PCA (E72520-E72530).
View a video fo removing and replacing the PCA (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
JC92-02962A Document feeder PCA assembly
Required tools
Post service test


feeder back cover.
Remove the document feeder PCA

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder PCA.
1. Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, and then remove four screws.

Figure 2-418 Document feeder PCA
2. Remove the document feeder PCA.

instructions.

Image scanner
View the image scanner exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Image scanner 529

Image scanner
Parts diagram and parts list for the image scanner.
Figure 2-419 Image scanner

Table 2-91 Image scanner
Ref
2 JC92-02781A PCA - Scan Joint 1 Not applicable
3 JC01-00101A SSA Tempered Glass 1 Not applicable
4 JC97-04516A Image scanner open sensor 1 Not applicable
5 JC97-04521A Scanner - FR Lamp 1 Not applicable
6 JC97-04515A Image scanner, lower 1 Not applicable
7 JC31-00158A Step motor, ip 1 Not applicable
ENWW Image scanner 531

View the image scanner assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ENWW Image scanner assembly 533
Parts diagram and parts list for the image scanner assembly.
Figure 2-420 Image scanner assembly

Table 2-92 Image scanner assembly
Ref
1 JC97-04522B Image scanner scan glass 1 Removal and replacement: Scan

glass on page 536
2 JC92-02781A PCA scanner 1 Not applicable
3 JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass 1 Not applicable
4 JC97-04516A Scanner assembly-DDC and lens 2 Not applicable
5-1 JC97-04521A Image scanner lamp 1 HP LaserJet Managed MFP

E72525-E72535, E77822-
E77830 - Removal and
replacement: Scanner LED lamp
module on page 539
7 JC31-00158A Step motor, ip 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Scan glass
Learn how to remove and replace the scanner glass.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC97-04522B Scanner glass
Required tools
printer.

Post service test
Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.
▲ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.
Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right to
remove it.
Figure 2-421 Remove scanner glass


instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and
replacement: Scanner LED lamp module
This document provides the procedures to remove the LED lamp module assembly.
E72520-E72530:
E77820-E77830:
instructions.
LED lamp module assembly part number
JC97-04521A LED lamp module assembly
Required tools
Post service test


remove it.
Remove the LED lamp module

Follow these steps to remove the LED lamp module.
1. CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed. then remove the
LED lamp module.
Remove the transparent tape.
Figure 2-423 Remove transparent tape

2. Disconnect the flat cable.
Figure 2-424 Disconnect cable
3. Remove four screws. Remove the LED lamp module.
Figure 2-425 Remove screws and release LED lamp module


instructions.

Image scanner, lower (LX)
View the image scanner, lower (LX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
ENWW Image scanner, lower (LX) 543

Image scanner, lower (LX)
Parts diagram and parts list for the lower image scanner.
Figure 2-426 Image scanner, lower (LX)

Table 2-95 Image scanner, lower (LX)
Ref
1 JC97-04509A Image scanner, ffc ccd 1 Not applicable
2 JC97-04512A Image scanner guide harness 1 Not applicable
3 JC97-04507A Image scanner, APS 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner APS sensor
on page 550
4 JC97-04523B Image scanner lens 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner assembly – CCD and
lens on page 546

Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly – CCD and lens
Learn how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens.
View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens (E72525-72535).
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC97-04523B Scanner assembly -CDD and lens
Required tools

printer.

Post service test
Remove the scanner assembly CDD and lens

Follow these steps to remove the scanner assembly CDD and lens.
1. Remove four screws, and then release the imaging unit cover.
Figure 2-427 Remove screws and release imaging unit cover
2. Disconnect the flat cable.
Figure 2-428 Disconnect flat cable

3. Remove two screws and release the scanner assembly CDD and lens.
CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting only.
Figure 2-429 Remove screws and release scanner imaging unit
4. Place Imaging unit according to label number as -1/0/+1 then assemble plate-spring after assembly of FFC
into Imaging unit.
CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting only.
Figure 2-430 Place Imaging unit according to label number as -1/0/+1

remove it.


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Scanner APS sensor
This document provides the procedures to remove the APS sensor assembly.
View a video of removing and replacing the sensor (E77820-E77830).
instructions.
JC97-04507A APS sensor assembly
Required tools
Post service test

remove it.

Remove the APS sensor

Follow these steps to remove the APS sensor.
1. Remove the joint board cover.
Figure 2-433 Remove joint board cover

3. Disconnect the harness.
Figure 2-435 Disconnect harness
4. Remove two screws. Release the APS sensor.
Figure 2-436 Remove screws and release APS sensor


instructions.

Second Exit (Optional)
View the second exit repair procedures.
Remove the second eixt (Optional)

Follow these steps to remove the second eixt.
1. Open the right door, then remove the 1 screw.
Figure 2-437 Remove the screw
2. Remove 4 caps, then remove 4 screws.
Figure 2-438 Remove the screws

3. Pull the cover (callout 1) to the arrow direction carefully, and pull out the cover (callout 2) .
4. Remove 2 connectors, then remove 1 screw.
Figure 2-440 Remove the connectors and the screw
5. Pull the left side of the second exit unit (Callout 1), then remove second exit unit.
Figure 2-441 Remove the second exit unit
ENWW Second Exit (Optional) 555

Remove the return gate solenoid (Optional)
Follow these steps to remove the return gate solenoid.
1. Open the right door, then remove the 1 screw.
Figure 2-442 Remove the screw
2. Remove 4 caps, then remove 4 screws.

3. Pull the cover (callout 1) to the arrow direction carefully, and pull out the cover (callout 2) .
4. Remove 2 cables, then remove 1 screw.
Figure 2-445 Remove the connectors and the screw
5. Pull the left side of the second exit unit (Callout 1), then remove second exit unit.
Figure 2-446 Remove the second exit unit
ENWW Second Exit (Optional) 557

6. Remove 2 screws, then pull out the solenoid to the arrow direction carefully.
7. Remove 2 hooks(Callout1) and 1 plug(Callout 2). Then remove the solenoid(Callout 3)
Figure 2-448 Remove the solenoid
TIP: Reassembly tip
Be sure the wiring harness should be located under the solenoid (Callout 1)
you must assemble the arrow-shaped plastic into the hole in the solenoid (Callout 2)

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Learn about the dual cassette feeder (DCF) exploded diagrams, parts lists, and repair procedures.

DCF main
View the DCF main exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
DCF main
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF main.
Figure 2-449 DCF main

Table 2-98 DCF main
Ref
1 JC90-01666A Cassette, four Not applicable
2 JC63-04607B DCF, left cover Not applicable
8 JC90-01664A Cassette five Not applicable
9 6109-001138 Caster wheel 4 Not applicable
11 JC63-04606B DCF, front cover 2 Not applicable
16 JC93-00513A Main pickup 2 Not applicable
17 6602-003185 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable
18 JC90-01285A Right Door 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) right
door on page 564
19 JC63-04605B DCF, right cover 1 Not applicable
20 JC93-00018A Rear auto-size holder 2 Not applicable
21 JC93-00442B Drive assembly - main, (DCF pickup motor) 1 Removal and replacement:
Dual-cassette feeder (DCF)
pickup motor on page 574
22 JC93-00447A Drive Feed Assy (DCF motor) 1 Removal and replacement:

motor on page 570
26 JC39-01692A Drive Feed Assy 1 Not applicable
29 JC39-01695A Cable, DCR Size Sensor 1 Not applicable
30 JC92-02978A PCA - MX4 DCF 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
on page 567
31 JC39-01690A IF Cable 1 Not applicable
32 JC63-04604B DCF, rear cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) rear
cover on page 562
Not shown JC92-02622C PCA Paper Size Sensor 1 Not applicable
Not shown JC92-02978A PCA, dual cassette feeder (DCF) Removal and replacement:
Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
on page 567

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover
This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover assembly.
instructions.
JC63-04604B Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover.
▲ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-450 Remove the DCF rear cover
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) right door
This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door assembly.
Meant time to repair: 5 minutes
instructions.
JC90-01285A DCF right door
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the DCF right door
Follow these steps to remove the DCF right door.
1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

Figure 2-451 Remove the lower right cover
2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the tab
(callout 1).
Figure 2-452 Slide the hinge pin

3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the right to
remove it (callout 2).
Figure 2-453 Remove the DCF right door
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA assembly.
instructions.
JC92-02978A Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA assembly
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the DCF PCA
Follow these steps to remove the DCF PCA.
▲ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.
Figure 2-455 Remove the DCF PCA

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) motor
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF motor assembly.
instructions.
JC93-00447A DCF motor
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the DCF motor
Follow these steps to remove the DCF motor.
1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.
Figure 2-457 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.
Figure 2-458 Remove the feed drive unit
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.
Figure 2-459 Remove the feed motor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF pickup motor assembly.
instructions.
JC93-00442B DCF pickup motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the DCF pickup motor
Follow these steps to remove the DCF pickup motor.
▲ Disconnect the motor connector. remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup motor.
Figure 2-461 Remove the DCF pickup motor

instructions.

DCF main frame pickup 1
Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup 1.
Figure 2-462 DCF main frame pickup 1

Table 2-104 DCF main frame pickup 1
Ref
0 JC93-00513A DCF, main pickup 2 Not applicable
1 JC93-00510A Main Pickup Sub Assy 2 Not applicable
3 JC66-03288A Feed pulley 2 Not applicable
5 JC61-04717A Second pickup guide 2 Not applicable
6 JC66-03287A Idle feed roller 2 Not applicable
7 JC63-03342A Feed Mylar 2 Not applicable

DCF main frame pickup
View the DCF main frame pickup exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
DCF main frame pickup

Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF main frame pickup.
Figure 2-463 DCF main frame pickup

Table 2-105 DCF main frame pickup
Ref
0 JC93-00510A Main Pickup lower and upper 2 Removal and replacement:

pickup units on page 582
1 JC93-00540A Tray 2–x rollers 6 Not applicable
7-4 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 2 Not applicable
7-7 JC61-01367A Fixer, e-ring 2 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units assembly.
instructions.
JC93-00510A Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
Follow these steps to remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units.
1. Remove the DCF right door.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cable cover.
Figure 2-464 Remove two screws and the cable cover
3. At the front of the printer, remove five screws, and then remove two brackets.
Figure 2-465 Remove five screws and two brackets

4. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the cable guide (callout 2).
Remove eight screws (callout 3).
Figure 2-466 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws
5. Rotate both pickup units away from the feeder on the left (callout 1). Release the belt (callout 2) that
connects the two units. Slide the pickup units to the left (callout 3) to remove them.
Figure 2-467 Remove the pickup units

instructions.

DCF main frame pickup,upper
Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup upper.
Figure 2-468 DCF main frame pickup upper

Table 2-107 DCF main frame pickup upper
Ref
0 JC93-00504A Main frame pickup, upper 2 Not applicable
3 JC66-03199A Actuator, empty pickup 2 Not applicable
4 JC66-00977A Clutch one way 4 Not applicable
5 JC66-00943A Gear-m, joint 2 Not applicable
6 JC66-00941A Gear-m, one way 2 Not applicable
7 JC66-00940A Gear-m, idle 2 Not applicable
12 JC61-01288A Holder-m, idle one way 2 Not applicable

High-capacity input (HCI) tray (workgroup)
View the high-capacity input (HCI) tray (workgroup) exploded diagrams and parts lists.

HCI main
View the HCI main exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
HCI main
Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI main.
Figure 2-469 HCI main
ENWW High-capacity input (HCI) tray (workgroup) 589

Table 2-108 HCI main
Ref
3 JC90-01727A Sub-pickup (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

sub - pickup on page 591
6 JC90-01734A Takeaway (HCI) (right door) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

right door on page 601

Removal and replacement: HCI sub - pickup
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI sup-pickup.
View a video of removing and replacing the sub-pickup assembly.
Service level:
instructions.
JC90-01727A HCI sub - pickup
Required tools
printer.
Post service test
Remove the HCI rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

▲ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.
Figure 2-470 Remove the HCI rear cover
Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.
1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.
Figure 2-472 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis
3. Disconnect one connector, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.

4. Remove three screws, and then remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.
Figure 2-474 Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed
Remove the HCI right door
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI right door.
1. Remove four screw caps (if installed), and then remove four screws.
NOTE: If the feed drive assembly is removed, there are only two screws that secure this cover.

3. Lift up on the cover while rotating it away from the chassis to release three bosses.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the cover. Stop as shown below. Fully removing the cover at this
step will damage the remaining tab and boss on the cover
Figure 2-477 Release three bosses

4. If the tray was not removed prior to servicing the HCI, remove it now. Look in the tray cavity and locate the
right cover front tab. Release this tab.
Figure 2-478 Release one tab
5. Remove the HCI right cover.
NOTE: The HCI right door will not stay in the latched potion when this cover is removed.
Figure 2-479 Remove the HCI right cover

6. Rotate the right door front hinge pin out of the holder, and then slide the right door towards the front of the
HCI to release the rear hinge pin and remove the door.
Figure 2-480 Remove the HCI right door
Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley.
1. Remove two screws, and then remove the black-plastic cover.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the drive assembly - sub-pulley.
Figure 2-482 Remove the HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley
Remove the HCI belt - timing gear
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI belt - timing gear.
▲ Remove the belt from the drive gear, and then remove it.
Figure 2-483 Remove the belt - timing gear
Remove the HCI sub - pickup
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI sub - pickup.
1. Disconnect one connector, and then release three retainers.


3. Rotate the front end of the sub - pickup away from the HCI, and then slide it toward the front to remove it.
Figure 2-486 Remove the sub - pickup
instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI right door
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI right door.
View a video of removing and replacing the sub-right door.
Service level:
instructions.
JC90-01734A HCI right door
Required tools
printer.
Post service test




instructions.

HCI sub - frame
View the HCI sub - frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
HCI sub - frame

Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI sub - frame.
Figure 2-494 HCI sub - frame

Table 2-111 HCI sub - frame
Ref
2 6602-003185 Belt timing gear (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

belt - timing gear on page 608
9 6109-001138 Caster wheel (HCI) 4 Removal and replacement: HCI

caster wheel on page 623
12 JC61-04660A Plate guide post upper (HCI) 3 Removal and replacement: HCI
guide post and guide post plate
on page 625
13 JC61-04659A Plate guide post (HCI) 3 Removal and replacement: HCI

guide post and guide post plate
on page 625
23 JC92-02738G Printed circuit assembly (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

PCA on page 617
24 JC39-02600A Main electrical connector (HCI) 3 Removal and replacement: HCI

main electrical connector
on page 620

Removal and replacement: HCI belt - timing gear
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI belt - timing gear.
View a video of removing and replacing the belt - timing gear.
Service level:
instructions.
6602-003185 HCI belt - timing gear
Required tools
printer.
Post service test







Remove the HCI belt - timing gear
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI belt - timing gear.
▲ Remove the belt from the drive gear, and then remove it.
Figure 2-508 Remove the belt - timing gear

instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI PCA
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI PCA.
View a video of removing and replacing the PCA.
Service level:
instructions.
JC92-02738G HCI PCA
Required tools
printer.
Post service test

Remove the Remove the HCI PCA
Follow these steps to remove the HCI PCA.
▲ Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), remove three screws, and then remove the HCI PCA.
Figure 2-510 Remove the HCI PCA

instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI main electrical connector
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI main electrical connector.
View a video of removing and replacing the main electrical connector.
Service level:
instructions.
JC39-02600A HCI main electrical connector
Required tools
printer.
Post service test

Remove the main electrical connector
Follow these steps to remove the HCI main electrical connector.
▲ Do the following:
1. Squeeze two tabs and release one connector (callout 1; black and white wire harness) from the
chassis, and then release five retainers.
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 2; on the HCI PCA), and then release two retainers.
3. Remove one ground screw (callout 3; green wire).
4. Remove two shoulder screws (callout 4); main electrical connector), and then remove the main
connector.

Figure 2-512 Remove the HCI main electrical connector
4
instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI caster wheel
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI caster.
View a video of removing and replacing the caster.
Service level:
instructions.
6109-001138 HCI caster wheel
Required tools
printer.
Post service test
Remove the HCI caster wheel
Follow these steps to remove the HCI caster.

▲ Carefully position the HCI on its side, remove four screws, and then remove the HCI caster wheel.
Figure 2-513 Remove the HCI caster wheel
instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI guide post and guide post plate
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI guide post and guide post plate.
View a video of removing and replacing the guide post and guide post plate.
Service level:
instructions.
JC61-04660A HCI guide post
JC61-04659A HCI guide post plate
Required tools
printer.
Post service test

Remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates
Follow these steps to remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates.
1. Remove four screws, and then remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates.
Figure 2-514 Remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates
2. Separate the guide post upper (callout 1) and guide post (callout 2) plates.
Figure 2-515 Separate the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates

instructions.

HCI sub - pickup upper/lower
View the HCI sub - pickup upper/lower exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
HCI sub - pickup upper/lower

Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI sub - pickup upper/lower.
Figure 2-516 HCI sub - pickup upper/lower

Table 2-117 HCI sub - pickup upper/lower
Ref
9 JC67–00455A HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-z rollers (coupler 1 Removal and replacement: HCI
torque limiter) (HCI) kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers
on page 630
11 JC93–00504A HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-x rollers 2 Removal and replacement: HCI
(separation) (HCI) kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers
on page 630
15 JC93–00540A HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-z rollers (pick/feed) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI
(HCI) kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers
on page 630

Removal and replacement: HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers.
View a video of removing and replacing the HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers.
Service level:
instructions.
JC67–00455A HCI kit — HP LaserJet E7 tray 2–z rollers (coupler torque limiter) (HCI)
JC93–00504A HCI kit — HP LaserJet E7 tray 2–z rollers (separation) (HCI)
JC93–00540A HCI kit — HP LaserJet E7 tray 2–z rollers (pick/feed) (HCI)
Required tools
printer.
Post service test

Remove the HCI tray
Follow these steps to remove the HCI tray.
1. Pull the tray fully out of the HCI, and then at the left side of the tray release the hook lever on the tray.
TIP: Slightly pull out on the left side of the tray so that the hook lever remains unlatched.
Figure 2-517 Release the tray left side hook lever
2. At the right side of the tray push in on the slide lock (callout 1) to release it, and then pull the tray away
from the HCI (callout 2).
Figure 2-518 Release the tray right-side slide lock
2 1

3. Continue to slide the tray away from the HCI to remove it.
Figure 2-519 Remove the tray
Remove the HCI LaserJet E7 tray rollers
Follow these steps to remove the HCI E7 tray rollers.
1. Look up into the tray cavity, and locate the feed (callout 1), pick (callout 2), and separation (callout 3) rollers.
Figure 2-520 Locate the feed, pick, and separation rollers
1
2

2. Release one tab (for each roller), and then slide the roller off of the shaft.
NOTE: Open the right door before attempting to remove the rollers.
Figure 2-521 Remove the rollers
3. Slide the coupler (torque limiter) off of the separation roller shaft.
Reinstallation tip: When the coupler (torque limiter) is installed, make sure it is fully seated on the
separation roller shaft. If it is not fully seated, the separation roller will not correctly install on the shaft.
Figure 2-522 Remove the coupler (torque limiter)

instructions.

HCI drive
View the HCI drive exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
HCI drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI drive.
Figure 2-523 HCI drive

Table 2-119 HCI drive
Ref
1 JC93-00447A Drive assembly - feed (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

drive assembly - feed
on page 637
1-6 JC31-00033B Motor - feed (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

motor - feed drive
on page 641
2-3 JC31-00109A Motor - lifter drive right (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI
motor - lift drive right and motor
- lift drive left on page 646
2-3 JC31-00125A Motor - lifter drive left (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI
motor - lift drive right and motor
- lift drive left on page 646
3 JC93-01465A Drive assembly- sub-pulley (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

drive assembly - sub-pulley
on page 652
4-5 JC93-00452A Motor - step drive (HCI) (For E77822, E77825, 1 Removal and replacement: HCI
E77830) motor - step drive
on page 649
4-5 5QJ90-64002 Motor - step drive (HCI) (For E78323, E78325, 1 Removal and replacement: HCI
E78330) motor - step drive
on page 649

Removal and replacement: HCI drive assembly - feed
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.
View a video of removing and replacing the drive assembly - feed.
Service level:
instructions.
JC93-00447A HCI drive assembly - feed
Required tools
printer.
Post service test



instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI motor - feed drive
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI motor - feed drive.
View a video of removing and replacing the motor - feed drive.
Service level:
instructions.
JC31-00033B HCI motor - feed drive
Required tools
printer.
Post service test



Remove the HCI motor - feed drive
Follow these steps to remove the HCI motor - feed drive.
▲ Remove two e-rings, remove two gears, and then remove two screws to separate the HCI motor - feed
drive.
Figure 2-534 Remove the HCI motor - feed drive

instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left.
View a video of removing and replacing the motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left.
Service level:
instructions.
JC31-00109A HCI motor - lift drive right
JC31-00125A HCI motor - lift drive left
Required tools
printer.
Post service test

Remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left.
1. Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and the remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor -
lift drive left.
NOTE: It might take some force to release the assembly from the chassis.
Figure 2-536 Remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left
2. Do one or both of the following:

● To remove the right-lift drive motor (callout 1): remove three screws.
● To remove the left-lift drive motor (callout 2): remove three screws.
Figure 2-537 Remove the HCI tray right- and left-lift drive motors
instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI motor - step drive
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI motor - step drive.
View a video of removing and replacing the motor - step drive.
Service level:
instructions.
JC93-00452A HCI motor - step drive (E778xx series)
5QJ90-64002 HCI motor - step drive (E783xx series)
Required tools
printer.
Post service test

Remove the HCI motor - step drive
Follow these steps to remove the HCI motor - step drive.
▲ Disconnect the one connector, remove two screws, and remove the HCI motor - step drive.
TIP: It might be easier to disconnect the connector after the motor is removed from the bracket.
Figure 2-539 Remove the HCI motor - step drive

instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley.
View a video of removing and replacing the sub-pulley.
Service level:
instructions.
JC93-01465A HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley
Required tools
printer.
Post service test







instructions.

HCI sub - cassette
View the HCI sub - cassette exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.
HCI sub - cassette

Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI sub - cassette.
Figure 2-553 HCI sub - cassette

Table 2-125 HCI sub - cassette
Ref
2-16 JC81-07468A Bracket sensor (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

photo interrupter and sensor
bracket on page 669
2-38 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI

photo interrupter and sensor
bracket on page 669
2-39 JC90-01723A Sub-paper side right (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement: HCI
sub-paper side right
on page 662

Removal and replacement: HCI sub-paper side right
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI sub-paper side right.
View a video of removing and replacing the sub-paper side right.
Service level:
instructions.
JC90-01723A HCI sub-paper side right
Required tools
printer.
Post service test
Remove the HCI tray

2 1

Remove the HCI sub-paper side right
Follow these steps to remove the HCI sub-paper side right.
1. Look into the tray, disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.
Figure 2-557 Disconnect connector and remove one screw

2. Slide the sub-paper side right assembly to the left to release it, and then slightly lit it up.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the tray by a wire
harness and ground wire.
Figure 2-558 Release the sub-paper side right assembly
1
2
3. Remove one screw, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.
Figure 2-559 Remove one screw and release the wire harness

5. Raise the paper shelf, hold the sub-paper side right assembly up and out of the way, and then remove the
sheet-metal cover.

6. Disconnect three connectors, and then release the wire harness from the retainers.
TIP: Fully raise the paper shelf to access two connectors.
Figure 2-562 Disconnect three connectors
7. Disconnect two connectors, release the wire harnesses from the guides, and then remove the sub-paper
side right assembly.
Figure 2-563 Remove the sub-paper side right assembly

instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket.
View a video of removing and replacing the sensor and bracket.
Service level:
instructions.
0604-001393 HCI photo interrupter
JC81-07468A HCI sensor bracket
Required tools
printer.
Post service test

Remove the HCI tray
2 1

Remove the HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket
Follow these steps to remove the HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket.
▲ Raise the paper shelf, disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the HCI photo
interrupter and sensor bracket.
NOTE: It might be easier to disconnect the connector after the screw is removed.
Figure 2-567 Remove the HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket

instructions.

3 Problem solving
Learn about problem solving.
ENWW 673
Control panel messages document (CPMD)
Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).
NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.
Click here to access the complete CPMD for this printer.
Error codes
Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current printer status
or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and have a set structure
with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).
● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error. For
example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.
● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.
HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message document
(CPMD) for each printer.
The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or resolve the
error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.
The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error codes.
Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters

Error code System Component System Error Description
10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.
11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the

formatter.
13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.
15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.
17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.
20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.
21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression

error when trying to process job.
30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the

unit.
31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.
32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or

error.
33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module
(TPM) notification or error.
40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.
674 Chapter 3 Problem solving ENWW

Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically
involving (but not limited to) the fuser, the
laser scanner, or the paper path.
42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log,

Shell, System Manager, or other component.
44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.
45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the

OXPd Web Kit (communications log).
46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.
47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.
48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.
49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.
50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.
51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.
52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.
54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).
55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.
56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.
57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.
58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.
59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.
60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.
61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data
package.
62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.
Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.
63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical,

communication, etc.).
65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.
66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.
67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error
69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.
70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.
80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.
ENWW Control panel messages document (CPMD) 675

Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)
81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.
82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.
90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB,

display) or interconnection error.
98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.
99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware

install (engine or accessory), or disk error.
How to search for printer documentation

Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals.
The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP portals
GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available to call agents,
service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend on your access
credentials.
How to search WISE for printer documentation
These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users. View a
video of how to find support content in WISE.
To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to locate
CPMD list.
Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.
How to search GCSN for printer documentation
These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find support content in
GCSN, or follow the steps below.
1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:
– Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or
– On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.

Figure 3-1 GCSN home page
2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model (leave
the Model field as blank or the default).
NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.
Figure 3-2 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)

3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to bypass the
Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).
Figure 3-3 Add favorites (GCSN)
4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.
Figure 3-4 Clear search criteria (GCSN)
5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.
NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which type of
manual or guide the content might be listed.
Figure 3-5 Select search criteria (GCSN)
6. Select Submit.
7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search result is
100 documents).

NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model. All other
available content is filtered out.
Table 3-2 Information type selections
Technical information type Select this checkbox
Control panel message document (CPMD) CPMD-Map
List of all CPMDs per product Support Information
Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide
Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual
Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual
Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information
User manual or User guide User Guide
Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement

Troubleshooting process
Learn about the troubleshooting process.

Determine the problem source
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to the
situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem.
A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter
provides steps for correcting problems.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart
guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in
good condition.
ENWW Troubleshooting process 681

Power subsystem
Learn about the power subsystem.

Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and the power
switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and
solve the problem.
If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-panel
display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.
Power-on troubleshooting overview
If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:
During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place your hand
over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the scanner. If the fan is
operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer and hear the fan operating.
A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set up
functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam condition is
sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the main
motor is turned on.
If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.
1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that
delivers the correct voltage.
2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.
3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.
4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.
5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.
6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.

Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation
Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to collect as
much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.
Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:
● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).
● The control panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.
● The control panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).
Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:
● No power to the printer.
● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.
● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the connectors
are not fully seated on the formatter.
● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network PCA, USB
device, or other component).
● The formatter is defective.
● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.
● The DC controller is defective.
Following are some questions to ask the customer:
● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?
– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.
– Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?
● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?
– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?
– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?
– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?
● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.
– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?
– Is the control-panel display back light on?
– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed to
print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.
Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the printer is
getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.

If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:
1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.
TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.
2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power supply is
operational).
3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.
4. Turn the printer power off.
5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and fully
seated), and then turn the printer power on again.
6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run different
diagnostic tests.
7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check if the
contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the control-panel
display becomes visible.
8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.
NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.
9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot and is
fully seated.
NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers have third-
party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.
10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive, solid-state
drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).
● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.
IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might be
defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.
11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.
Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.
12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.
13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.
CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the formatter.
14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the control
panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics are functioning,
then replace the formatter.

Control panel checks
Learn about the control panel checks.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts
Learn about the control panel diagnostic flowcharts.
Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).
● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.
● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.
● No control panel sound.
● Home button is unresponsive.
● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
Learn about the touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image).
NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 3-6 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)
Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)
Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.
Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.
Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?
Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y
Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.
Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N
Replace the
control panel.
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Learn about how the touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

Figure 3-7 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone
Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?
Open the
Perform the
touch test.
Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?
Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.
Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?
Do not replace the

control panel.
No control panel sound

Learn what to do when there is no control panel sound.

Figure 3-8 No control panel sound
Control panel
has no
sound
Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save
Can sounds
be heard?
N
Y
Open the
Perform the sound test.
Can sounds
be heard?
Y
N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?
Home button is unresponsive
Learn what to do when the home button is unresponsive.

Figure 3-9 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.
Open the
Perform the Home
button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Turn the product power off,

and then on again.
Open the
Perform the
Home button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y
Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Learn about when the hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Figure 3-10 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)
Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Individual component diagnostics
Learn about individual component diagnostics.

Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics
LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.

Understand lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.
Figure 3-11 LEDs
1 Heartbeat LED
2 HP Jetdirect LEDs
HP Jetdirect LEDs
Learn about the HP Jetdirect LEDs.
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green
LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has
failed.
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link settings
on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.
2. Open the following menus:
● Networking
● Ethernet
● Link Speed
3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics
The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path,
noise, assembly, and timing issues.

Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the diagnostic
test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).
WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel
should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is
turned on.
Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock
Learn how to defeat the toner cartridge door interlock.
1. Open the toner cartridge door.
2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips,
and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.
Figure 3-12 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock
Defeat the front door interlock
Learn how to defeat the front door interlock.
1. Open the front door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.
TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in) strips,
and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.
Figure 3-13 Defeat the front door interlock

Tools for troubleshooting
Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.
Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
Learn about the individual component diagnostics (special-mode test).
This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.
NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
2. Select one of the following tests:
● Continuous Scan
● Run Fax Test
3. Select the component test options for the test.

Tools for troubleshooting
Learn about tools for troubleshooting.

Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.
Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

Learn how to check that the printer power is on.
1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white light. If it
is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following conditions.
● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.
● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.
2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the doors are
all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.
Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

Learn how to check the control panel for error messages.
The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.
Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.
NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual individual life or
yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other factors. Estimated life is
not an implied warranty.
Step 3: Test print functionality

Learn how to test print functionality.
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration Page item,
and then touch the Print button to print the report.
3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel to see if
paper is jammed inside the printer.
NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.
Step 4: Test copy functionality

Learn how to test copy functionality.
1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly through the
ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the paper meets
specifications for this printer.
2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.
3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small glass strip.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 701

Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality
Learn how to test the fax sending functionality.
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.
2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.
3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.
Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

Learn how to test the fax receiving functionality.
1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.
2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.
3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.
4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.
Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

Learn how to try sending a print job from a computer.
1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.
2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.
3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.
Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
Learn how to test the plug and print USB drive printing functionality.
1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the control
panel.
2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.
3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.
Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:
● The software program that you are using and its settings
● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)
● Printer processing and download time
● The complexity and size of graphics
● The speed of the computer you are using
● The USB or network connection

● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome
● The type of USB drive, if you are using one
● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity
Print menu map

Learn how to print the menu map.
To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
Print current settings pages

Learn how to print current settings pages.
Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the
troubleshooting process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Current Settings Page option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.
TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print event log
Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the Interpret
control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.
Print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the following menus:
● Troubleshooting
● Event Log
3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.
Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. Enter the following service access code for the printer:
● Access code: 04082517
4. Touch the Event Log item.
Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.
4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:
● Access code: 04082517
5. Select the trash icon to clear the event log.

Pre-boot menu options
The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization for the
entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost.
HP does not recommend this action.
TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin on page 714.
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 3-14 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2

2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.
Figure 3-15 Pre-boot menu
Use this button to see more information about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu items.
Use this button to go back to the previous menu.
Not used.
Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.
3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.
4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 3-16 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.
3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
touch the OK button.
NOTE: The printer will initialize.
NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version of the
printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support these options.
Table 3-3 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu and
continues the normal boot process.
If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds,

the printer returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting
Continue).
If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not

apply.
Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to

open the Pre-boot menu.
Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.
If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed

in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is required to sign in.
Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download process. A

USB Thumbdrive option will work on all FutureSmart printers.
USB USB or Network connections are not currently supported.
USB Thumbdrive

Table 3-3 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)
Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions.
CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
The system is not bootable after this action and a 99.09.67

error displays on the control panel. A firmware download must
be performed to return the system to a bootable state.
Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the
firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is
downloaded and saved).
CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data

except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation prompt
is not provided.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations

and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and
settings are lost).
This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the

firmware image from the active directory without having to
download new firmware code (printer remains bootable).
Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password.
Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from
the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually
cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the
password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm
the action.
When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK button

to clear the password.

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an external device for
job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the Boot
(continued) device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is
displayed.
Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to
this printer.
The secure disk already locked to this printer will remain

accessible to this printer. Use this function to have more than
one encrypted disk accessible by the printer when using them
interchangeably.
The data stored on the secure disk locked to this printer always
remains accessible to this printer.

Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an
unlocked mode for a single service event. The secure disk that
is already locked to this printer will remain accessible to this
printer and uses the old disk's encryption password with the
new disk.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer remains

accessible to this printer.
Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the non-
secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet-to-
be installed secure disk.
CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.
Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk for
this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk in
future sessions.
Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk
and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is a one-pass
overwrite, which erases the entire disk including firmware. The
disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all data

on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain access to
it from any printer.
reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.
Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or
get a status about the internal device.
(continued) (continued)
Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire
disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of

the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the user to gain
access to it from any printer.
reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk is
erased.
External Device Select the External Device item to erase the external device or
get status about the external device.
Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.
reinstalled.
The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk,

including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of

the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
access to it from any printer.
reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes
a non-encrypted disk.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [DHCP] The network can be configured to obtain the network
settings from a DHCP server or as static.
(continued) NOTE: This
configuration is only Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the
active when the Pre- DHCP server.
boot menu is open.
IP Mode [STATIC] Use this item to manually assign the network addresses.
IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.
Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can
be set for the next time the printer is turned on and
(continued) initializes to the Ready state.
Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision item to
allow the printer to initialize and show the firmware version
when the printer reaches the Ready state.
Once the printer power is turned on the next time, the Show
Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is
not shown.
Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all
customer settings. (This item also returns all settings to
factory defaults.)
NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.
Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third-
party applications.
Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer calibration for the
very next power-initialization cycle only.
Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service
menu access (both in the Pre-boot menu and the Device
Maintenance menu).
Service personnel must have the administrator remove the

Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu.
Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/ScanVolume

during startup.
Administrator Startup Options First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the printer to
initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.
(continued) (continued)
For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time
settings like date/time, language, and other settings.
Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the
printer power is turned on.
When the printer power is turned on the next time, this item
is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used
during configuration, and the first-time setting prompt is not
used.
Embedded Jetdirect Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the
Off embedded HP Jetdirect.
By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is

always enabled.
WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless
accessory.

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are useful to diagnose

hardware components and their interface
(continued) connections. Use these items to
troubleshoot specific hardware
components, and the interface between
them and other components.
Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic when executing multiple
diagnostics.
Short Use the Short item to select a brief memory

test.
NOTE: This test requires about four

minutes to execute.
Long Use the Long item to select an extended

memory test.
NOTE: This test requires about twenty

minutes to execute.
Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Disk
diagnostic when executing multiple
diagnostics.
Short Use the Short item to select a brief firmware

self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about two or

three minutes to execute.
Long Use the Long item to select an extended

firmware self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about sixty

minutes to execute.
Optimized Use the Optimized item to select a test that

checks the active sectors on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about thirty

minutes to execute.
Raw Use the Raw item to select a test that

checks every sector on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about fifty

minutes to execute.
Smart Use the Smart item to select a very brief

test that checks the drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting technology (SMART)
status—the drive detects and reports
reliability indicators to help anticipate disk
failures (SMART status).
CPB Use the CPB item to verify the integrity of

the copy processor board (CPB) and the
formatter PCA connections.

Interconnect Use the Interconnect item to verify the

integrity of the interconnect PCA (ICB) and
its connections.
Run Selected Select the Run Selected item to execute a

selected test.
NOTE: If more than one test is selected,

they are executed in sequence.
Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
(continued) navigate the menu selections from a remote location.
IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.
This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the Remote

Admin function, see Remote Admin on page 714.
Stop Telnet
Refresh IP
System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting menu
is not accessible, then use the System Triage item to copy
the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive at the next printer
start up.
The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.
Change Svc PWD Use this item to change the Service menu personal
identification number (PIN).
Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number (PIN)
has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the original
PIN.
Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.
Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.
Developer Tools Netexec

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The printer
functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any computer (with
telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and interact with the Pre-boot
menu.
IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security reasons
the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the printer.
This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

Required software and network connection
Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and enabled, on
the remote telnet client computer.
NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a Windows®
operating system.
HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are other operating
systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and configuring the telnet
network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that operating system.
Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet client
function might not be enabled by default.
NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system. Screens and
menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.
1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.
Figure 3-17 Open the Control Panel
2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.
Figure 3-18 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the box to
select it, and then click the OK button.
TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the Cancel
button.
Figure 3-19 Enable the telnet client feature
Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin function
to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the printer. The Remote
Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access network security
programs.
If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network (VPN)
connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection
Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.
Start the telnet server function at the printer
For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.
NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how the
printer is configured.
1. Turn the printer on.
2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.
3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-20 Select the +3:Administrator item
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-21 Select the +A:Remote Admin item
5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 3-22 Select the 1:Start Telnet item
6. Do one of the following
● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.

Figure 3-23 Telnet connecting message
● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.
Figure 3-24 Telnet error message
a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.
b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.
○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use DHCP
instead.
○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.
c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.
7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the information on
this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.
NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.
● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.
● Port: The standard telnet port (23).
● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
Figure 3-25 Telnet server function initialized
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer
The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.
1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the OK
button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 3-26 Open a command window
2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 3-27 Start a telnet session
3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.
NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet
server function at the printer on page 717.
TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall or on a
different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection on page 716.
Figure 3-28 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer on page 717 at
the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer terminates the
Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See Start the
telnet server function at the printer on page 717.
Figure 3-29 Enter the PIN
5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options
on page 705.
NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection, the
following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.
● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.
Figure 3-30 Remote Admin window
Disconnect a remote connection
Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.
The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet client
computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote telnet
client computer.
1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 3-31 Access the administrator menu
2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press the
Enter key.
Figure 3-32 Access the remote admin menu
3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the Enter
key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer terminates.
IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present at the
printer do the following:
● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 3-33 Terminate the telnet connection

Control panel menus
You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for more
advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host name in the
address bar of a web browser.
Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 3-10 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire control
panel system and the selected
View values for each setting.
Current Settings Page Print Shows a summary of the current

settings for the printer. This might
View be helpful if you plan to make
changes and need a record of the
present configuration.
Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings and

installed accessories.
View
How to Connect Page Print Shows the network information

typically needed to connect the
View printer to a network.
Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate remaining

life for the supplies; reports
View statistics on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial number,
page counts, and maintenance
information.
HP provides approximations of the

remaining life for the supplies as a
customer convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels might be
different from the approximations
provided.
Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper sizes

that have passed through the
View printer; lists whether they were
simplex, duplex, monochrome, or
color; and reports the page count.
File Directory Print Shows the file name and folder

name for files that are stored in the
View printer memory.
Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web Services
for the printer.
View
Color Usage Job Log Print Shows color jobs completed by the
printer.
View

Table 3-10 Reports menu (continued)
Fax Reports (MFP fax models only) Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes that have
been sent from or received by this
View printer.
Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes that

have been used for outgoing faxes.
View This report shows how many sent
faxes were billed to each code.
Blocked Fax List Print A list of phone numbers that are

blocked from sending faxes to this
View printer.
Speed Dial List Print Shows the speed dials that have
been set up for this printer.
View
Fax Call Report Print A detailed report of the last fax

operation, either sent or received.
View
Other Pages Demonstration Page Print Prints a demonstration page.
RGB samples Print Prints color samples for different

RGB values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.
CMYK samples Print Prints color samples for different

CMYK values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.
PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.
PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.
Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
Table 3-11 Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description
General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and to
YYYY/MMM/DD configure date/
time settings.
Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.

Table 3-11 Settings menu (continued)
Date/Time Date Select the time zone Select the time

from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.
Time Select the date from a

pop-up calendar.
Time Zone Select the time from a

pop-up keypad.
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled + (Add) Use to configure

events displays. the printer to
Edit automatically wake
up or go to sleep at
Delete specific times on
specific days. Using
this feature saves
energy.
NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.
New event Event Type Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time and
the days for the
wake or sleep
event.
Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.
Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.
Sleep Settings Auto Off After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number of
Sleep minutes minutes after
which the printer
Sleep After Default = 0 minutes enters Sleep or
Inactivity Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
HP Auto Off/Auto number to open
On the virtual keypad,
and then increase
Shut Down or decrease the
number of
minutes.
Wake/Auto On to All Events*

These Events
Network port
Power button only

Display Settings Display Brightness Automatic* The Manual setting Use to specify the
uses a slider to intensity of the LCD
Manual manually control the control panel
display brightness. display.
System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you hear a
Off sound when you
touch the screen or
press buttons on
the control panel.
Language Settings Language Select from a list of Use to select a

languages that the different language
printer supports. for control panel
messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.
Keyboard Layout Each language has a Select the default

default keyboard keyboard layout
M681z/M682z layout. To change it, that matches the
only select from a list of language you want
layouts. to use.
Information Screen Show connection Use this menu item

information* to display or hide
connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.
DisplayDate and Show Date and Time* Select whether to

Time display or hide the
Hide Date and Time date and time on
M681/M682 only the control panel
Home screen.
Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 seconds between any
activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.

Clearable Warnings On Use this feature to

set the period that
Job* a clearable warning
displays on the
control panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job that
generated the
warning and
disappear from the
display when the
next job starts.
Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 Use this option to

seconds)* configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to continue when the printer
encounters certain
errors. If the Auto-
continue (10
seconds) option is
selected, the job
will continue after
10 seconds. If the
Touch OK to
continue option is
selected, the job
will stop and
require the user to
touch the OK
button before
continuing.

Jam Recovery Auto* This printer

provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:
Auto: The printer

attempts to reprint
jammed pages
when sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default setting.
Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used to
store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.
NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs out
of paper and the
job is being printed
on both sides,
some pages can be
lost.
On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to store
the last few pages
printed. This might
cause a decrease in
overall
performance.
Auto Recovery Enabled The printer

attempts to reprint
Disabled* jammed pages
when sufficient
memory is
available. This is
the default setting.

Hold Off Print Job Enabled* Enable this feature

if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating a
copy job from the
control panel. Held
print jobs start
printing after the
copy job is finished,
provided that no
other copy job is in
the print queue.
Restore Factory Restore Use to restore all

Settings printer settings to
Cancel their factory
defaults.
Copy/Print Copy Settings Image Preview Display a preview

of the image before
printing it.
Enable Device USB Enabled Enables the printer

to open a file from
Disabled* a USB drive.
Manage Stored Job Sort Order Job Name* This option allows
Jobs you list the jobs
Date either
alphabetically or
chronologically.
Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which

Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.
Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored in
the printer
memory.
The Temporary Job

Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Temporary Stored 1-300 Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
the printer
memory.
The Temporary
Stored Job
Retention feature
specifies the
number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
Standard Stored 1-300 Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
the printer
memory.
The Temporary
Stored Job
Retention feature
specifies the
number of
standard jobs that
can be stored on
the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.
Default Print Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default

Options number of copies for a
Default = 1 copy job. This default
applies when the Copy
function or the Quick
Copy function is
initiated from the
printer Home screen.
Paper Selection Select from a list Configures the default

of sizes that the paper size used for
printer supports. print jobs.
Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the default

Paper Size inches paper size that is used
when the user selects
Default = 8.5 Custom as the paper
inches size for a print job.
Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches
Default = 14
inches
Use Inches Enabled*
Disabled

Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the original
2-sided document is printed
on one or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or both
sides. For example,
select the 1-sided
original, 2-sided
output option when
the original is printed
on one side, but you
want to make two-
sided copies.
Staple None Sets the position of

the staple on the
Top left page.
Top right
Top left or right
Output Bin Automatically select
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
Resolution FastRes1200 Sets the resolution

for sent
1200x1200dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they
show more detail.
Lower resolution
images have fewer
dots per inch and
show less detail,
but the file size is
smaller. Some file
types, for example
a file that will be
processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.

PCL and PostScript Courier Font Regular* Select which

Settings version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be used
if a heavier Courier
font is needed.
Wide A4 Enabled Changes the

printable area of
Disabled* A4-size paper. If
you enable this
option, eighty 10-
pitch characters
can be printed on a
single line of A4
paper.
Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature to

select whether a
Disabled* PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.
Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.
Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific printer
language, the
printer does not
automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the user-
Disk resident soft default font.
The list of available
options varies
depending on the
installed printer
options.
Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font

number for the
Default = 0 user-soft default
font using the
source that is
specified in the
Font Source menu.
The printer assigns
a number to each
font and lists it on
the PCL font list.
The font number
displays in the Font
# column of the
printout.
Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source

option and the Font
Default = 10 Number setting
indicate a contour
font, then use this
feature to select a
default pitch (for a
fixed-spaced font).
PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is a
set of printer
commands that HP
developed to
provide access to
printer features.
Use the Form

Length feature to
select the user-soft
default vertical
form length.
Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select the
Portrait option if
the short edge is at
the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of

symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel. A
symbol set is a
unique grouping of
all the characters in
a font. The factory
default value for
this option is PC-8.
Either PC-8 or
PC-850 are
recommended for
line-draw
characters.
Append CR to LF No* Configure whether

a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended to
each line feed (LF)
encountered in
backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return. The
default setting is
No. Some
environments, such
as UNIX, indicate a
new line by using
only the line-feed
control code. This
option allows the
user to append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.
Suppress Blank No* This option is for

Pages users who are
Yes generating their
own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that
would cause blank
pages to be
printed. When the
Yes option is
selected, form
feeds are ignored if
the page is blank.

Media Source Standard* Use to select and

Mapping maintain input
Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:
Standard: Tray
numbering is based
on newer
HP LaserJet
models.
Classic: Tray
numbering is based
on HP LaserJet 4
and older models.
Print Quality Adjust Color Tonal Range Highlights
Midtones
Shadows
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
Image Registration Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be

adjusted
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Depends upon
number of trays
installed

Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin

Horizontal Shift alignment to center
the image on the
Front-side Vertical page from top to
Shift bottom and from
left to right. You
Back-side can also align the
Horizontal Shift image on the front
with the image
Back-side Vertical printed on the
Shift back.
The direction that is

perpendicular to
the way the paper
passes through the
printer is referred
to as X. This is also
known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. X2 is the
scan direction for
the first side of a
two-sided page.
The direction that

the paper feeds
through the printer
is referred to as Y.
Y1 is the feed
direction for a
single-sided page
or for the second
side of a two-sided
page. Y2 is the feed
direction for the
first side of a two-
sided page.
Use the Adjust Tray

<X> menu to adjust
the registration
settings for each
tray. Before
adjusting these
values, print a
registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides in
the X and Y
directions so you
can determine
which adjustments
are necessary. You
can adjust values
for X1 Shift, X2
Shift, Y1 Shift, and
Y2 Shift.

Print Test Page Use the Print Test

Page option to
print a page to test
the image
registration. It
provides alignment
guides in the X and
Y directions so you
can determine
which adjustments
are necessary.
Auto Sense Tray 1 Sense every page

Behavior
Sense first page
Sense transparency
ony
All Other Trays Sense first page
Sense transparency
only
Adjust paper types Select from a list of

paper types
Reset Paper Types
Optimize Normal Paper
Heavy paper
Envelope control
Tray 1
Background
Background 1
Uniformity Control
Tracking Control
Registration
Transfer Control
Moisture Control
Reset Optimize
Edge Control Off
Light
Normal
Maximum

Manage Trays Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a specific
input tray. Two
options are
available:
Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that a
specific tray should
be used, even if
that tray is empty.
First: The printer

pulls from another
tray if the specified
tray is empty, even
though the user
specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.
Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether a

Prompt prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified tray
and the printer
pulls from the
multipurpose tray
instead. Two
options are
available:
Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.
Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.

Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a tray is
closed. Two options
are available:
Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.
Do not display:
Prevents the tray
configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.
Use Another Tray Enabled* Use to turn on or

off the control
Disabled panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty. Two
options are
available:
Enabled: When this

option is selected,
the user is
prompted either to
add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.
Disabled: When this

option is selected,
the user is not
given the option of
selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts the
user to add paper
to the tray that was
initially selected.

Alternative Disabled* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
Enabled preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing to
one side of the
sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you would
for printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with the
printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the speed
required for
printing on both
sides.
Duplex Blank Auto* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Yes two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:
Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs the
printer not to
process blank
pages.
Yes: Disables Smart

Duplexing and
forces the duplexer
to flip the sheet of
paper even if it is
printed on only one
side. This might be
preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size

paper when an A4
No job is sent but no
A4-size paper is
loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job is
sent but no letter-
size paper is
loaded). This option
will also override
A3 with ledger-size
paper and ledger
with A3-size paper.
Scan/Digital Send E-mail Settings E-mail Setup Use to configure

settings that apply
Network Folder NOTE: Email to sending
Settings Settings only documents
through email or
SharePoint saving documents
Settings to a folder on the
network or on a
Scan to USB Drive USB multi-drive.
Settings
The E-mail Setup
NOTE: The same Wizard feature
options are configures the
available for each printer to send
of these features, scanned images as
except where email attachments.
noted. To open the printer
HP Embedded Web
Server and set up
the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating the
job, the default
options are used.
For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded Web
Server by typing
the IP address of
the printer into a
Web browser.
Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether this
feature is available
on the printer.
Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.
Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.
Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Default File Name The printer is

shipped with a
factory default file
name of [Untitled]
for any scanned
files that are sent
or saved. Use this
feature to specify a
different default
file name. If you are
saving a file to a
network folder or
USB storage printer
and a file with the
default file name
already exists, a
number is
appended to the
file name, for
example,
[Untitled]001.

Document File Select from a list of file PDF provides the

Type types. best overall image
and text quality.
JPEG is a good
choice for most
graphics. Most
computers have a
browser that can
view .JPEG files.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
TIFF is a standard
file format that
many graphics
programs support.
This file type
produces one file
per page.
MTIFF: stands for

multi-page TIFF.
This file type saves
multiple scanned
pages in a single
file.
XPS (XML Paper

Specification)
creates an XML file
that preserves the
original formatting
of the document
and supports color
graphics and
embedded fonts.
NOTE: OCR file

types are not
supported on this
printer unless
attached to DSS.

Optimize Text/ Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the

Picture output for a
Text particular type of
content. You can
Printed picture optimize the
output for text,
Photograph printed pictures, or
a mixture.
Manually Adjust:
Use to manually
optimize the
setting for text or
for pictures.
Text: Use to
optimize the text
portion of the copy
when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted
images, such as
magazine clippings
or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Output Quality High (large file) Use to select the

quality for the
Medium* output. Higher-
quality images
Low (small file) require a larger file
size than lower-
quality images.
Larger files take
more time to send,
and some
recipients might
have trouble
receiving larger
files.

Original Sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side
2-sided of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.
Then touch the
Orientation setting
to indicate whether
the original has
portrait or
landscape
orientation. If it is
printed on both
sides, also select
the 2-sided format
that matches the
original document.
Orientation Automatically detect For some features

to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.

2-Sided Format Book-style Book-style: The

back side of the
Flip-style original is printed
right-side-up, and
the back side of the
copy is printed the
same way. Use this
option for originals
and copies that are
bound along the
left edge.
Flip-style: The back

side of the original
is printed upside-
down, and the back
side of the copy is
printed the same
way. Use this
option for originals
and copies that are
to be bound along
the top edge.
Resolution 400 dpi Sets the resolution

for sent
300 dpi documents. Higher
resolution images
200 dpi have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they
150 dpi* show more detail.
Lower resolution
75 dpi images have fewer
dots per inch and
show less detail,
but the file size is
smaller. Some file
types, for example
a file that will be
processed with
OCR, require a
specific resolution.
When these file
types are selected,
the Resolution
setting might
automatically
change to a valid
value.

Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features

Orientation to work correctly,
Portrait* you must specify
the way the
Landscape content of the
original document
is placed on the
page. Portrait
orientation means
the short edge of
the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means
the long edge of
the page is along
the top. In the
Orientation area,
select whether the
original document
has a portrait or
landscape
orientation.
2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure

the default style for
Flip-style 2-sided print jobs.
If the Book-style
option is selected,
page is printed the
right way up. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the left edge.
If the Flip-style
option is selected,
page is printed
upside-down. This
option is for print
jobs that are bound
along the top edge.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or

disable color
Color scanning.
Black/Gray Automatically
detect:
Black Automatically
scans documents
in color if at least
one page has color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file
size.
Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

supported sizes. page size of the
original document.
Notification Do not notify* Configure to

receive notification
Notify when job about the status of
completes a sent document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify:

Turns off this
Print feature.
E-mail Notify when job

completes: Select
to receive
notification for this
job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
only if the job is not
sent successfully.
Print: Select to
print the
notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
receive the
notification to an
email account.

Include Thumbnail NOTE: When

sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Notification E-mail E-mail: Select to

address receive the
notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of
the copy.
Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or
decrease the
amount of white
and black in the
colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between
the lightest and
darkest color on
the page.
Background Adjust the

Cleanup Background
Cleanup setting if
you are having
trouble copying a
faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the

Sharpness setting
to clarify or soften
the image. For
example,
increasing the
sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but
decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic Tone The printer

automatically
adjusts the
Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings to
the most
appropriate for the
scanned document.
Default Select this to make

the selected Image
Adjustment setting
the default value.
Job Build Job Build off* Use to combine

several original
Job Build on documents into
one job. Also use to
scan an original
document that has
more pages than
the document
feeder can
accommodate at
one time. The
printer temporarily
saves all the
scanned images.
After you have
scanned all the
pages for the job,
touch Finish to
finish the job.
Cropping Options Do not crop* Use this menu item

to automatically
Crop to content crop the scan for
digital sending. Use
Crop to paper the Crop to content
option to scan the
smallest possible
area that has
detectable content.
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item

to remove
Back side erase blemishes, such as
dark borders or
Front side erase staple marks, by
cleaning the
specified edges of
the scanned image.
In each of the text
boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or
inches, for how
much of the top
edge, bottom edge,
left edge, and right
edge to clean.

Multi-feed Disabled This setting stops

Detection the scanning
Enabled* process if it detects
multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Blank Page Disabled* Use to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the
Enabled original document
from being
included in the
output document.
Create Multiple Disabled* Enable this item to

Files scan pages into
Enabled separate files
based on a
specified page
limit.
A page is one side

of an original
document.
JPEG and TIFF have

a limit of one page
per file.
Digital Sending Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how the

Software Setup Server printer interacts
Enabled* with the HP Digital
Allow Transfer to Sending Software
New DSS server (DSS) server.
HP DSS handles
digital sending
tasks, such as
faxing, emailing,
and sending
scanned
documents to a
network folder or
USB storage device.
Use the Allow Use

of a DSS Server and
Allow Transfer to
New DSS server
options to
configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.
Fax Internal Fax

Modem Setup
Fax Send Settings Image Preview

Fax Dialing Fax Dial Volume Off These settings

Settings control how the fax
Low* modem dials the
outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.
Dialing Mode Tone*
Pulse
Redial Interval 1-5 Minutes
Default = 5 minutes
Fax Send Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Dialing Prefix
Detect Dial Tone
Redial on Error Range: 0-9
Default = 2
Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0
Redial on Busy Range: 0-9
Default = 3
General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature is

Settings Confirmation enabled, you must
Disabled* enter the fax
number twice.
PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users who

have the correct
Disabled driver installed to
send faxes through
the printer from
their computers.

JBIG Compression Enabled* The JBIG

compression
Disabled reduces fax-
transmission time,
which can result in
lower phone
charges. However,
using JBIG
compression
sometimes causes
compatibility
problems with
older fax machines.
If this occurs, turn
off the JBIG
compression.
Error Correction Enabled* When error-

Mode correction mode is
Disabled enabled and an
error occurs during
fax transmission,
the printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.
Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend or

overlay the fax
Overlay header page.
Fax Number Speed Enabled Use this item to

Dial Matching match the fax
Disabled* number that you
type to numbers
that are saved as a
speed dial.

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes

Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the user
to enter the billing
code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.
You can also use

the billing codes
report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used for
faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.
Default Billing Specify a default

Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in the
Billing Code field
when the user
sends an outgoing
fax. If this field is
blank, no default
billing code is
provided for the
user.
Minimum Length Range: 1-16 Specify the

required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can be
between 1 and 16
characters long.
Allow users to edit Off

billing codes
On*
Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ringer Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.
High

Rings To Answer Range: 1-6
Default = 1
Fax Receive Speed Fast*
Medium
Slow
Ring Interval Range: 220-600 ms
Default = 600 ms
Ring Frequency Range: 1-200
Default = 68hz
Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about the
Always print faxes* security of private
faxes, use this
Use Fax Printing feature to store
Schedule faxes rather than
having them
automatically print.
Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.
Schedule + (Add) Print incoming faxes If you are using a

fax printing
Touch this to set Edit Store incoming faxes schedule, use this
up a fax printing menu to configure
schedule if you Delete (trash can) Time when to print
selected the Use faxes.
Fax Printing Event Days
Schedule option.

Blocked Fax Fax Number to The blocked fax list

Numbers Block can contain up to
30 numbers. When
the printer receives
a call from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax. It
also logs the
blocked fax in the
activity log along
with job-
accounting
information.
Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number to
Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.
To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.
To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.
You also can use

the Blocked Fax List
report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure to

Options receive notification
Notify when job about the status of
completes a sent document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify:

Turns off this
feature.
Notify when job

completes: Select
to receive
notification for this
job only.
Notify only if job

fails: Select to
only if the job is not
sent successfully.
Print E-mail: Select to

receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.
Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a thumbnail
image of the first
page of the fax in
your notification.
Notification E- Touch this text

mail address field, provide the
email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.
Stamp Received Enabled Use this option to

Faxes add the date, time,
Disabled* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

Fit to Page Enabled* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger than
Disabled Letter-size or A4-
size so that they
can fit onto a
Letter-size or A4-
size page. If this
feature set to
Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.
Paper Tray Automatic*
Select from a list of

the trays.
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the

layout for each side
2-sided of the original
document. First
select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.
Fax Forwarding Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding received faxes to
Enabled another fax
machine.
Type of Fax Job to All faxes Use to select the

Forward type of fax jobs
Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes
Fax Forwarding Provide the

Number forwarding phone
number, and then
touch the OK
button.
Clear Fax Activity Clears all events

Log from the fax
activity log.

Manage Supplies Low Warning Black Cartridge 1-100% Set the estimated
Thresholds percentage at
Cyan Cartridge Default = 5% which the printer
notifies you when a
Magenta toner cartridge is
Cartridge very low.
Yellow Cartridge
Low Warning On Displays a message

Threshold on the control
Message Off panel when a
cartridge is very
low.
Very Low Behavior Black Cartridge Stop
Color Cartridges Continue
Transfer Kit Prompt to continue
Fuser Kit
Document Feeder
Kit
Staples Stop
Prompt to continue
Restrict Color Use Enable Use this feature to

enable, restrict, or
Disable Color disable color
printing or copying.
Color if allowed*

Color/Black Mix Auto Instructs the

printer when to
Mostly Color Pages switch between
color and
Mostly Black Pages monochrome
printing modes for
the best overall
performance.
Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for the
first page of the
job. If necessary,
the printer
switches modes
during the middle
of a job and then
stays in that mode
until the job is
finished.
Mostly Color Pages:

The printer uses
color mode for all
jobs, even if the job
contains no color
pages.
Mostly Black Pages:

The printer uses
monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back to
monochrome
mode when it
detects a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.

Store Usage Data On supplies The Store Usage

Data provides a
Not on supplies way to suppress
the toner
cartridges from
storing most of the
information
gathered
exclusively for the
purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select the
On supplies setting
to store the data on
the toner cartridge
memory chip.
Select the Not on
supplies setting to
suppress the
information from
being stored on the
memory chip.
Cartridge Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Cartridges protect cartridges
so that they can be
used only in this
product or fleet of
products.
Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized HP

to allow only
Authorized HP genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.
Manage Stapler/ Operation Mode Mailbox

Stacker
Stacker
Function Separator
Job Offset On
Off
Networking Ethernet Information Print Security Yes Yes: Prints a page

Report that contains the
No* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.
No: A security
settings page is not
printed.

TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow buttons An alphanumeric

to edit the host name. string, up to 32
characters, used to
NPIXXXXXX* identify the printer.
This name is listed
on the HP Jetdirect
configuration page.
The default host
name is NPIxxxxxx,
where xxxxxx is
the last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.
IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the

method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
Auto IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
Manual
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.
DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server. If
selected and a
DHCP lease exists,
the DHCP Release
menu and the
DHCP Renew menu
are available to set
DHCP lease
options.
Auto IP: Use for

automatic link-local
IPv4 addressing. An
address in the form
169.254.x.x is
assigned
automatically.
If you set this

option to the
Manual setting, use
the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP

address to default
Legacy to when the print
server is unable to
obtain an IP
address from the
network during a
forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration (for
example, when
manually
configured to use
BootP or DHCP).
NOTE: This
feature assigns a
static IP address
that might interfere
with a managed
network.
Auto IP: A link-local

IP address
169.254.x.x is set.
Legacy: The
address
192.0.0.192 is set,
consistent with
older HP Jetdirect
printers.
Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx a Primary Domain
Name System
(DNS) Server.
Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.
IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to

enable or disable
On* IPv6 operation on
the print server.
Off: IPv6 is
disabled.
On: IPv6 is enabled.
Address Manual Settings Use this item to

enable and
Enable manually configure
a TCP/IPv6 address.
Address

DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified:

The stateful auto-
Router Unavailable* configuration
method to be used
Always by the print server
is determined by a
router. The router
specifies whether
the print server
obtains its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.
Router Unavailable:
If a router is not
available, the print
server should
attempt to obtain
its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.
Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx a Primary Domain
Name System
(DNS) Server.
Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

Proxy Server Select from a provided Specifies the proxy

list. server to be used
by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.
To specify a proxy
server, enter its
IPv4 address or
fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.
For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.
Proxy Port Default = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server for
client support. The
port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.
Idle Timeout Default = 0270 The time period, in

seconds, after
which an idle TCP
print data
connection is
closed (default is
270 seconds, 0
disables the
timeout).
Copy menu (MFP only)

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.

Table 3-12 Copy menu (MFP only)
First level Second level Third level Values Description
Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether the

original document is printed
2-sided on one or both sides.
Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether the

copies should be printed on
2-sided one or both sides.
Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy should

be printed.
Color
Automatically detect: Prints
Black/Gray color documents in color,
and black and white
documents in black and
white. For mixed
documents, the printer will
determine whether to print
in color or black and white.
Color: Prints documents in

color.
Black: Prints documents in

black and white or
grayscale.
Quick Sets and Defaults Load
Save
Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided
2-sided
Output Sides 1-sided
2-sided
Color/Black Automatically detect* Select how the copy should

be printed.
Color
Automatically detect: Prints
Black/Gray color documents in color,
and black and white
documents in black and
white. For mixed
documents, the printer will
determine whether to print
in color or black and white.
Color: Prints documents in

color.
Black: Prints documents in

black and white or
grayscale.
Staple None Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled
Top right angled

Table 3-12 Copy menu (MFP only) (continued)
Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the user

to scan pages from a book.
Book Mode
2–sided ID allows the user
2–sided ID to scan both sides of an
identification card onto one
sheet.
Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the size of the

document up or down.
Manual Select one of the predefined
percentages, or select the
Scaling field and type a
percentage between 25 and
400. The Auto option
automatically scales the
image to fit the paper size in
the tray.
NOTE: To reduce the

image, select a scaling
percentage that is less than
100. To enlarge the image,
select a scaling percentage
that is greater than 100.
Original Size Select from a list of sizes Describes the page size of
that the printer supports. the original document.
Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and image
quality, select the
Paper Type appropriate paper type from
the control panel menu or
Paper Tray from the print driver.
Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or more

pages onto one sheet of
paper so you can fold the
sheets in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages in the
correct order. For example,
if the original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on the
same sheet.
Content Orientation Auto Detect For some features to work

correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of the
original document is placed
Landscape on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the long
edge of the page is along
the top. In the Orientation
area, select whether the
original document has a
portrait or landscape
orientation.

Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages onto

one sheet of paper.
Two (2)
NOTE: Before using this
Four (4) screen, use the Content
Orientation screen to
describe the original
document orientation.
Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness setting

to clarify or soften the
image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.
Darkness Use to improve the overall

quality of the copy.
Adjust the Darkness setting

to increase or decrease the
amount of white and black
in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.
Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.
Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a
particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or
Mixed a mixture.
Printed picture Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the
Photograph setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize the

text portion of the copy
where text and/or pictures
are on the original.
Printed picture: Use for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.

Erase Edges Front Side Use inches Use this menu item to
remove blemishes, such as
Apply same width to all dark borders or staple
edges marks, by cleaning the
specified edges of the
Top edge scanned image. In each of
the text boxes enter the
Bottom edge measurements, in
millimeters or inches, for
Left edge how much of the top edge,
bottom edge, left edge, and
Right edge
right edge to clean.
Back Side Use inches
Mirror front side
Top edge
Bottom edge
Left edge
Right edge
Collate Collate on (Sets in page If you are making more than

order)* one copy, select the Collate
on (Sets in page order)
Collate off (Pages grouped) option to assemble the
pages in the correct order in
each set of copies.
Select the Collate off (Pages

grouped) option to group
the same pages together.
For example, if you are
making five copies of an
original document that has
two pages, all five first
pages would be grouped
together and all five second
pages would be grouped
together.
Multi-feed Detection Enabled* This setting stops the

scanning process if it
Disabled detects multiple-page feeds
through the document
feeder.
Standard bin
Upper bin
Middle bin
Scan menu (MFP only)

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.

Table 3-13 Scan menu (MFP)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Scan to Email
Scan to Network Folder Folder Paths
File Name
Quick Sets and

Defaults
Options File Type and

Resolution
Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether
the original document
is printed on one side
or both sides. Then
touch the Orientation
setting to indicate
has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

disable color scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if
Black at least one page has
color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

original document.

Table 3-13 Scan menu (MFP) (continued)
Content Orientation Orientation Automatically Detect For some features to

work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area, select
document has a
orientation.

overall quality of the
copy. Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or decrease
the amount of white
and black in the colors.

setting to increase or
decrease the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.
Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
Cleanup settings to the
most appropriate for
the scanned
document.

Default Select this to make the

selected Image
Adjustment setting the
default value.
Optimize Text/Picture
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to

remove blemishes,
Back side erase such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
Front side erase cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
image. In each of the
text boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
for how much of the
top edge, bottom
edge, left edge, and
Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item to

automatically crop the
Crop to content scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop
Crop to paper to content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that has
detectable content.
Automatically
Straighten
Blank Page Disabled Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.
Multi-feed Detection Disabled This setting stops the

Enabled* detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Create Multiple Files Disabled Enable this item to

scan pages into
Enabled separate files based on
a specified page limit.
A page is one side of

an original document.
JPEG and TIFF have a

limit of one page per
file.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off

this feature.
Print
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.
Notify only if job fails:

Select to receive
notification only if the
job is not sent
successfully.
Print: Select to print

the notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
receive the notification
to an email account.
Include Thumbnail Select Include

Thumbnail to receive a
thumbnail image of
the first page of the job
in your notification.
Notification Email E-mail: Select to

in an email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Scan to USB Drive Destination
Job Name
Options File Type and

Resolution

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the

layout for each side of
2-sided the original document.
First select whether
the original document
is printed on one side
or both sides. Then
setting to indicate
has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

disable color scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if
Black at least one page has
color.
Color: Scans
documents in color.
Black/Gray: Scans
documents in
grayscale.
Black: Scans
documents in black
and white with a
compressed file size.

original document.
Content Orientation Automatically detect For some features to

work correctly, you
Portrait* must specify the way
the content of the
Landscape original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In the
Orientation area, select
document has a
orientation.


overall quality of the
copy. Adjust the
Darkness setting to
increase or decrease
the amount of white
and black in the colors.

setting to increase or
decrease the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background
most appropriate for
the scanned
document.

selected Image
Adjustment setting the
default value.

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the

output for a particular
Text type of content. You
can optimize the
Printed picture output for text, printed
pictures, or a mixture.
Photograph
Manually Adjust: Use to
setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy when text and/or
pictures are on the
original.
Printed picture: Use for

line drawings and
preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.
Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.
Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to

remove blemishes,
Back side erase such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
Front side erase cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
image. In each of the
text boxes enter the
measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
for how much of the
top edge, bottom
edge, left edge, and
Cropping Options Do not crop Use this menu item to

automatically crop the
Crop to content scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop
Crop to paper to content option to
scan the smallest
possible area that has
detectable content.
Automatically
Straighten
Blank Page Disabled Use to prevent blank

Suppression pages in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.

Multi-feed Detection Disabled This setting stops the

Enabled* detects multiple-page
feeds through the
document feeder.
Create Multiple Files Disabled Enable this item to

scan pages into
Enabled separate files based on
a specified page limit.
A page is one side of

an original document.
JPEG and TIFF have a

limit of one page per
file.
Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off

this feature.
Print
Notify when job
E-mail completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.
Notify only if job fails:

Select to receive
notification only if the
job is not sent
successfully.
Print: Select to print

the notification at this
printer.
E-mail: Select to
to an email account.
Include Thumbnail Select Include

thumbnail image of
the first page of the job
in your notification.
Notification Email E-mail: Select to

in an email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then type the email
address for the
notification.
Scan to Job Storage Folder
Job Name

Fax menu (fax models only)
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.
Table 3-14 Fax menu (fax models only)

Dialing Prefix
Fax Recipients
Quick Sets and Defaults
Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe the layout

for each side of the original
2-sided document. First select
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then
setting to indicate whether
the original has portrait or
landscape orientation. If it is
printed on both sides, also
select the 2-sided format
that matches the original
document.
Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi)* Select the resolution for

outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution,
faxes might be clearer but
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) they could transmit more
slowly. Some file types, for
example a file that will be
processed with OCR, require
a specific resolution. When
these file types are selected,
the Resolution setting might
be automatically changed to
a valid value.
Original Size Select from a list of sizes Use to describe the page
that the printer supports. size of the original
document.
Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to work

correctly, you must specify
Landscape the way the content of the
original document is placed
on the page.
Portrait: This setting means

the short edge of the page
is along the top.
Landscape: This setting

means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Table 3-14 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)
Image Adjustment Darkness Use to improve the overall

quality of the copy.
Adjust the Darkness setting

amount of white and black
in the colors.
Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a
faint image.

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.
Automatic Tone The printer automatically

adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
most appropriate for the
scanned document.

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output for a
particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or
Printed picture a mixture.
Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to

setting for text or for
pictures.
Text: Use to optimize the

text portion of the copy
where text and/or pictures
are on the original.
Printed picture: Use for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.
Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.
Blank Page Suppression Disabled* Prevents blank pages in the

original document from
Enabled being included in the output
document.
Multi-feed Detection Disabled Use this feature to prevent

multiple pages being fed
Enabled* through the document
feeder during document
scans.
Notification Do not notify* Use to receive notification

about the status of a sent
Notify when job completes document.
Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.
Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.
Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.
Print Print: Select to print the

notification at this printer.
E-mail
E-mail: Select to receive the
notification in an email.
Touch the text box following
Email Address, and then
enter the email address for
the notification.

Include Thumbnail When sending an analog

fax, select Include
thumbnail image of the first
page of the fax in your
notification.
Notification E-mail address Provide the email address

that will receive
notifications.
2-Sided Format Book-style* Use to configure the default

style for 2-sided print jobs.
Flip-style If the Book-style option is
selected, the back side of
the page is printed the right
way up. This option is for
print jobs that are bound
along the left edge. If the
Flip-style option is selected,
the back side of the page is
printed upside-down. This
option is for print jobs that
are bound along the top
edge.
Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.
Table 3-15 Print Options menu
Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the printer.
Stored Faxes
Print from USB Drive Stored Job to Print Choose file to print on USB drive. Print a job stored on a USB drive.
Fax Polling Fax Polling Number
Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.
Table 3-16 Supplies menu

First level Values Description
Supplies Summary

Table 3-16 Supplies menu (continued)
First level Values Description
Black Cartridge Status
Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part
Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed
Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining
Toner Collection Unit Status
Transfer Kit Order HP Part
Fuser Kit
Document Feeder Kit
Stapler 1
Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.
Table 3-17 Trays menu
Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list of Choose the paper size for the tray
supported sizes.
Tray 2–x
Type Select paper type from a list of Choose the paper type for the tray.
supported types.
Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the Troubleshooting
menu.

Table 3-18 Troubleshooting
Configuration/Status ● Settings Menu Select the

Pages Map configuration/Status
reports to review,
● Current and then touch the
Settings Page Print or View button.
● Configuration
Page
● How to
Connect Page
● Supplies
Status Page
● sage Page
● File Directory
Page
● Web Services
Status Page
● Color Usage
Job Log
Reports
Other Pages ● Demonstration

Page
● RGB Samples
● CMYK Samples
● PCL Font List
● PS Font List
Event Log Print Prints the 50 most

recent events in the
Event Log. For each
event, the printed
log shows the error
number, page count,
error code, and
description or
personality.
Paper Path Page View Shows how many

pages were printed
Print from each tray.
Fax (Fax is optional) Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print or
configure the fax T.
30 trace report. T.30
is the standard that
specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and error
correction between
fax machines.

Table 3-18 Troubleshooting (continued)
When to Print Never automatically Configure the T.30

Report print* report to print after
certain events. You
Print after every fax can choose to print
the report after
Print only after fax every fax job, every
send jobs fax job sent, every
fax job received,
Print after any fax every send error, or
error every receive error.
Print only after fax

send errors
Print only after fax

receive errors
Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable V.34

modulations if
Off several fax failures
have occurred or if
phone line
conditions require it.
Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a technician

to evaluate and
Diagnostic diagnose fax issues
by listening to the
sounds of fax
modulations
Fax Log Entries On The standard fax log

includes basic
Off* information such as
the time and
whether the fax was
successful. The
detailed fax log
shows the
intermediate results
of the redial process
not shown in the
standard fax log.
Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you resolve
problems with print
quality.
Diagnostic Tests
Continuous Scan 2-sided
Run Fax Test Start Use this menu to

perform a test on
specific components
within the product to
determine whether
the components are
functioning
correctly.

Table 3-18 Troubleshooting (continued)
Retrieve Diagnostic Insert a US drive into Create files that

Data the USB port. The contain information
exported data might about the product
contain personally that can help
identifiable identify the cause of
information. problems.
Generate Debug Start

Data

Maintenance menu
Learn about the Maintenance menu.
Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select Support Tools and then Maintenance, and then select the Backup/
Restore menu.
Table 3-19 Backup/Restore menu
Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backups Backup Time Enter a time
Days Between Backups Enter the number of days
Backup Now
Export Last Backup
Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup file.
Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/Cleaning
menu.
Table 3-20 Calibrate/Cleaning menu

Calibration/Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning page

that was created by using the
Create Cleaning Page menu. The
process takes up to 1.5 minutes.

Table 3-20 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (continued)
Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various times.
However, you can calibrate the
product immediately if you see
problems with print quality. Use this
feature to perform a full calibration,
which can take up to three minutes.
Use this calibration if the color
layers seem to be shifted on the
page.
Before calibrating the product,

make sure that the Ready indicator
displays on the control-panel
display. If a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that job is
complete.
Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On No Delay Controls the timing of power-on

calibration when the product wakes
Delay 15 minutes up or is turned on.
Wake: Select if you are not using the

feature and want to print jobs
immediately when the product
wakes up or is turned on, before
calibration begins.
No: The product will calibrate

immediately when it wakes up or is
turned on. The product will not print
any jobs until it finishes calibrating.
Yes: Enables the product that is

asleep to accept print jobs before it
calibrates. It might start calibrating
before it has printed all the jobs it
has received. This option allows
quicker printing when coming out of
sleep mode or when you turn the
product on, but print quality might
be reduced.
NOTE: For the best results, allow

the product to calibrate before
printing. Print jobs performed
before calibration might not be of
the highest quality.
USB Firmware Upgrade menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB Firmware
Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Clear paper jams
Learn about clearing paper jams.
Paper jam locations

Learn about paper jam locations.
3
1 Tray 1
2 Tray 2
3 Tray 3
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam

Learn about A1 tray 1 paper jams.
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the Tray 1. When a jam
occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A1.XX Jam in tray 1
ENWW Clear paper jams 789

1. Gently remove the jammed paper.
2. Open and then close the front door to resume

printing.
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam

Learn about A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jams.
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown here.

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.

3. Close the right door.
4. Open the tray.

5. Gently remove any jammed paper.
6. Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI

Learn about clearing paper jams in the bottom HCI.
1. Open the HCI.

2. Remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the HCI.

Service mode (tech mode)
Learn about service mode (tech mode).
In service (tech) mode, the technician can check the printer and perform various tests to isolate the cause of a
malfunction. While in service mode, the printer still performs all normal operations.
Entering service mode

Learn about entering service mode.
1. From the control panel, select Support tools and then Service.
2. Enter the Service PIN ID.
● 04072517
3. Select Service tools.
Figure 3-34 Service tools view
Service mode menu tree

Learn about the service mode menu tree.
ENWW Service mode (tech mode) 795

Figure 3-35 Information
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Information General Engine Board Serial Number
Supply Status Customer Replacement Unit Toner (K)
Field Replacement Unit Imaging Unit (K)
Development Unit (K)
TCU
Paper transfer belt (PTB)
Fuser
Tray x rollers
ADF Pickup Roller
ADF Separation Roller
Software Version System Firmware Version
Main Firmware Version
Engine Firmware Version
Boot ROM Version
File System Version
ADF Firmware Version
Finisher Version
Scanner Version
Scan Control Version
Tray 2-5 Version
Fuser Version

Transfer Version
Toner Version
Print CMS Version
Copy CMS Version
Scan CMS Version
Print Reports Supplies Information
Usage Counter
Error Information
Fax Protocol Dump (Line 1)
Fax Protocol Dump (Line 2)
Fax Diagnostics (Line 1)
Fax Diagnostics (Line 2)
Auto Color Registration
Job Duty
Auto Toning History
Full Auto Color Registration
ID Calibration History
Maintenance
Toner Event
Export Reports RTF Format
XML Format
PDF Format

Figure 3-36 Maintenance counts
Maintenance counts Part Replacement Count Toner Cartridge (K)
Imaging Unit (K)
Development Unit (K)
Paper Transfer Belt (PTB)
Fuser
Tray x rollers
ADF Pickup Roller
ADF Separation Roller

Figure 3-37 Diagnostics
Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics
Engine NVM Read/Write
Engine Test Routines
Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write
Fax Test Routines
Scanner Diagnostics Scanner Diagnostics Shading Test Shade and Print Report
Print Last Shade Report
Shade and Print Report (ADF)
P Print Last Shade Report (ADF)
Scanner/ADF NVM Read/Write
Scanner/ADF Test Routines Chose from a list of tests.
Adjustment Print Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Image Position
Print Test Patterns
Copy Adjustment Image Position
Scan Area Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Manual Adjustment
ADF Adjustment Automatic Adjustment
Manual Adjustment
ACS ACS Page Adjustment
Image Management Auto Tone Adjustment Activation Normal

Full
Auto Tone Adjustment Normal
Full
Print Test Patterns Skew Pattern
Figure 3-38 Service functions
Service Functions Debug Log Info
Job Status
TR Control Mode TR Control Mode Paper Group/Paper Side/Paper

Direction/T2 PWM
Vertical Streak Correction
Drain Off
On
Low Temperature Idling Mode
Capture Log All
Period Start Date/End Date
IP Setting IP address (manual entry)
Subnet Mask (manual entry)
Default Gateway (manual entry)
Footer
FW Upgrade

File Dump Mode Enable Dump Generate RGBa
Generate Raw File
Generate CMYK
No Print Mode
Debugging Mode
Max Output file No 10
Enable
Retrieve Dump Image Safely Remove USB
Retrieve Dump Image
Delete Dump Image Delete Dump Image
Disable Dump Disable
Copy Original Thickness Thin (42-60 g/m2)
Normal*
Thick (163-220 g/m2)
Scan Original Thickness Thin (42-60 g/m2)
Normal*
Thick (163-220 g/m2)
Altitude Adjustment Normal (~1,000 m/3,280 ft)*
High 1 (~2,000 m/6562 ft)
High 2 (~3000 m/9842 ft)
High 3 (~4000 m/13123 ft)
High 4 (~5000 m/16404 ft)
Humidity Normal*
High 1
High 2
High 3
Vapor Mode
Booklet Sub Tray
Event Logging

Information
Learn more service mode information.
General
Learn general information about the menus.
Information > General
This menu displays the following information:
● Printer serial number
● Ethernet IP address
● Ethernet Mac address
● Optional Ethernet IP address
● Optional Ethernet Mac address
● Total printed impressions
● Installed date and time
Supply status
Learn about supply status.
Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit
● This menu displays the printer’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit.
Field replacement unit (FRU)
Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit
● This menu displays the printer’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check
the information of the selected unit.
In this menu, there are five columns: Item, Threshold, Status, Count, and Maximum Life.
● Status: This column shows the current status of the selected item.
– OK: The current count is smaller than the default warning value.
– Check: The current count is bigger than the default warning value.
– OFF: The current count exceeds the maximum life.
● Count: This column shows the current count of the selected item.
● Maximum Life: This column shows the maximum capacity of the selected item.
The technician can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.
Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to zero after replacing the unit.

Software version
Learn about the software version.
Information > Software Version
● This menu displays the version of the software installed on the printer.
Print reports
Learn how to print reports.
Information > Print Reports
This menu displays reports that can be printed from the system. The following reports are available to print:
● Supplies Information
● Auto Toning History
Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History
NOTE: TRC means Tone Reproduction Curve.
This report shows a history of execution of the TRC control. The TRC control preserves color consistency against
changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The purpose of the history report is
to check if the TRC control is working normally.
● If the TRC control performs normally, Pass count must be a non-zero value and Fail count must be zero.
● If Fail count is not zero, check the image density sensor.

Maintenance counts
Learn about Maintenance counts.
Part replacement count

Learn about part replacement count.
This section provides detailed information about the service mode Maintenance Counts tab
Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count
● This menu displays fault counts. The technician can select one fault group and press OK to see detailed
fault descriptions. The detailed fault description window displays engine diagnostic codes, descriptions of
the fault, and the number of occurrences.
The following table shows the fault groups defined for the system:
Table 3-21 Fault Count
Item Item Item
A1 Motor H2 Output (Bins) System S3 Scan System
A2 Fan M1 Input (Trays) System S5 UI System
A3 Sensor M2 Media Path System S6 Network System
C1 Toner Cartridge Unit M3 Output (Bins) System S7 HDD System
C3 Imaging Unit M4 ADF System U1 Fusing Unit
C7 Fusing Unit S1 Video System U2 Laser Scanner Assembly Unit
H1 Input (Trays) System S2 Engine System
Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count
● This menu displays the replacement counts for the system parts. Users can select one group and press OK
to see the exact name of the part and the occurrence of the replacement.
The following table shows replaceable parts groups of the system:
Table 3-22 Part Replacement Count

Unit Item Sensing Method
Toner Cartridge Toner (Black) Auto Sensing
Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (Black) Auto Sensing
Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing
Transfer Roller Transfer Roller Count Clear
Roller Tray 2 Roller Count Clear
ADF Roller ADF Pick Roller Count Clear

Table 3-22 Part Replacement Count (continued)
Unit Item Sensing Method
ADF Roller ADF Separation Roller Count Clear
Filter Ozone filter

Diagnostics
Learn about diagnostics.
Engine diagnostics
Learn about the engine diagnostics.
Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization
● This menu initializes all engine NVM values to the default.
Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write
Table 3-23 Engine Diagnostics (Engine NVM Read/Write)
Purpose To change a configuration value for the engine firmware
Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can
navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and saved
values.
Users can also input a code through the text box to find a
configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, press the Edit button to open an

interface for user input.
Table 3-24 Engine NVM Read/Write codes

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min
109–0200 Standby Center Temperature offset 10 10
109–0201 Standby Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0205 Warmup Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0255 Thin Center Temperature offset
109-0256 Thin Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0265 Plain Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0266 Plain Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0275 Heavy Center Temperature offset 10
109-0276 Heavy Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0280 Extra Heavy Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0281 Extra Heavy Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0300 Envelopes Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0301 Envelopes Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0305 Labels Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0306 Labels Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0310 Thick Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0311 Thick Side Temperature offset 10 10

Table 3-24 Engine NVM Read/Write codes (continued)
Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min
109-0315 Recycled Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0316 Recycled Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0320 Special Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0321 Special Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0325 1200 dpi_thin Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0326 1200 dpi_thin Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0330 1200 dpi_plain Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0331 1200 dpi_plain Side Temperature offset 10 10
109-0335 1200 dpi_thick Center Temperature offset 10 10
109-0336 1200 dpi_thick Side Temperature offset 10 10
111–0030 Toner Vcon Black Toner Vcon Black 100/100 100/100
Engine test routines
● Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines
Table 3-25 Engine Diagnostics (Engine Test Routines)
Purpose To perform test routines for the engine
Operation procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users can
navigate through the list of routines and descriptions that
display. Users can directly input an EDC code through the text
box to search for a routine. A maximum of three routines can be
selected at the same time.
After selecting one or more routines, press the OK button to

open the test window. The selected routines will display and
users can start/start the selected test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference See the following table.
Table 3-26 Engine Test Routines codes

Code Display Meaning
100-000 Main BLDC Motor Main BLDC Motor is On/Off

0
100-000 Main BLDC Motor Slow Main BLDC Motor Slow On/Off
1
100-001 Main BLDC Motor Ready Detects if Main BLDC Motor is running at normal speed
0

Table 3-26 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)
100-004 Black Drum Motor Black Drum motor is on/off

4
100-004 Black Drum Motor Ready Detects if black drum motor is running at normal speed
9
100-007 Ozone Suction Fan Run Start/Stop Ozone Suction Fan run
6
100-007 Ozone Suction Fan Ready Detects if Ozone Suction Fan is running at normal speed
7
100-012 Exit Motor Forward Fast Exit Motor Forward Fast On/Off
0
100-013 Exit Motor Forward Slow Exit Motor Forward Slow On/Off
0
100-014 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex motor forward on/off

0
100-014 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow on/off
1
100-016 Duplex Fan 1 Run Start/stop duplex fan 1 run

0
100-018 Duplex Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if duplex fan 1 is running at normal speed
0
100-020 Tray 2 Elevating Motor Tray 2 elevate motor on/off

0
100-021 Tray 3 Elevating Motor Tray 3 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

0

0
100-024 Waste Toner LED Waste Toner LED on/off

1
100-025 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detects if the Waste Toner is full
0
100-026 SMPS Fan Run Start/stop SMPS fan run

0
100-027 SMPS Fan Run Ready Detects if SMPS fan is running at normal speed
0
100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 motor is on/off

0
100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 2 motor slow on/off

1

0


1
100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 3 motor slowest on/off

2

0

1
100-039 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 4 motor slowest on/off

2

0

1
100-041 Registration Motor Slow Registration motor slow on/off

1
100-041 Registration Motor Slowest Registration motor slowest on/off

2
100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Exit 2 motor is on/off

0
100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slow Exit 2 motor slow on/off

1
100-044 Exit 2 Motor Backward Exit 2 Motor is On/Off

0
100-044 Exit 2 Motor Backward Slow Exit 2 Motor Slow Backward On/Off
1
100-047 DCF Feed Motor DCF Feed Motor is On/Off

0
100-047 DCF Feed Motor Slow DCF Feed Motor Slow is On/Off
1
100-048 Duct Motor Duct Motor On/Off

0
100-048 Duct Motor Sensor Duct Motor Rib Sensing

1
101-005 Registration Clutch Engages drive to registration roller

0
101-012 Tray 2 Feed Motor Slow Tray 2 Feed Motor Slow On/Off
1
1
1

1
101-019 Out bin Full Sensor Detects when paper is at Out bin Full Sensor
0
101-019 Out-bin 2 Full Sensor Detects when paper is at Out-bin 2 Full Sensor
1
101-027 Tray 1 Clutch Tray 1 Clutch On/Off

0
101-027 Tray 1 Solenoid Tray 1 Solenoid On/Off

1
101-028 Return Gate Solenoid Return Gate Solenoid On/Off

0
102-000 Tray 2 Home Position Detects when Tray 2 is closed

0
102-001 Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 2

0
102-004 Tray 2 Paper Size Read Detects size of paper in Tray 2

1
102-005 Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 2 is elevated to the sensor
0

0

0

1
0

0

0

1
0
102-021 Tray 5 Home Position Detect when Tray 5 is closed

0

0
102-025 Tray 5 Size Read Detects paper size in Tray 5

1

0

0
102-028 Tray 1 Paper Size Read Detects paper size in Tray 1

1
102-029 Feed 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at the Feed 1 sensor

0
102-030 Tray 3 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 3 Feed sensor (Optional)
0
0
0
102-036 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the registration sensor

0
102-036 Fuser Out Sensor Detects when paper is at the fuser out sensor.
1
102-037 Exit 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at exit 2 sensor.

1
102-038 Duplex Jam 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 1 sensor.
0
102-043 Front Cover Sensor Detects status of front cover

5
102-043 Side Cover Sensor Detects status of side cover

6
104-000 Waste Install Sensor Detects if waste is installed

0
106-020 HVPS Installed Detect HVPS unit

0
107-016 Black Eraser On Black eraser lamp on/off

5
107-016 Black Eraser Detect Detect black eraser status

9
109-003 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser motor forward on/off

0
109-003 Fuser Motor Backward Fuser Motor Backward On/Off

1
109-003 Fuser Motor Ready Detects if Fuser Motor runs at each speed
4
109-004 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detects if the fuser press is located Home position
0

109-020 Detect Fuser Relay Detect fuser relay status

0
109-021 Detect Zero Cross Period Detect zero cross period

0
109-030 Fuser Installed Detect fuser unit

0
110-000 LSU Motor 1 Run Ready Detects if LSU motor 1 runs at normal speed
0
110-006 LSU Motor 1 Run LSU motor 1 on/off

0
110-017 LSU HSync 4 DetectsLSU HSync 4 (black)

0
111-003 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off
0
111-007 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank

0
111-014 Toner Control Voltage Black Black toner voltage on/off

0
112-034 Center ID Sensor P Read Show center ID sensor P value

0
112-035 Center ID Sensor S Read Show center ID sensor S value

0
113-000 Finisher Present Sensor Detect if the finisher is in place

0
113-035 Finisher Entrance Sensor Detects when paper is at entrance sensor

0
113-036 Finisher Exit Sensor Detects when paper is at exit sensor

0
113-036 Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect when a paper is at compile sensor
1
113-037 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detects paddle home position

0
113-038 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor Detects lift tamper home position
0
113-039 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor Detects right tamper home position
0
113-041 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor Detects if stapler door cover is closed
0
113-042 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor Detects if jam door cover is closed
0
113-043 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detects stapler home position

0

113-044 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detects stapler level

0
113-045 Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect stapler ready sensor

1
113-046 Finisher Ejector 1 Home Sensor Detect ejector 1 home position

1
113-046 Finisher Ejector 2 Home Sensor Detect ejector 2 home position

2
113-046 Finisher Ejector 2 Encoder Sensor Detect ejector 2 encoder Sensor

3
113-047 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor Detects main tray home position
0
113-047 Finisher Main Tray Beam Sensor Detect main tray beam sensor
1
113-047 Finisher Main Tray Low Limit Sensor Detect main tray low limit sensor
2
113-047 Finisher Main Tray Encoder Sensor Detect main tray encoder sensor
3
113-048 Finisher Paper Support Sensor Detect paper support home sensor
1
113-049 Finisher Traverse Front Sensor Detect traverse front home sensor
1
113-049 Finisher Traverse Rear Sensor Detect traverse rear home sensor
2
113-050 Finisher Entrance Motor Finisher entrance motor on/off

1
113-050 Finisher Exit Motor Finisher exit motor on/off

2
113-051 Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher paddle motor on/off

0
113-052 Finisher Left Tamper Motor Finisher left tamper motor on/off
0
113-053 Finisher Right Tamper Motor Finisher right tamper motor on/off
0
113-055 Finisher Staple Unit Motor Finisher staple unit motor on/off
0
113-056 Finisher Ejector 1 Motor Finisher ejector 1 motor on/off

1
113-056 Finisher Ejector 2 Motor Finisher ejector 2 motor on/off

2
113-056 Finisher Ejector 2 Reverse Motor Finisher ejector 2 reverse direction on/off
3

113-057 Finisher Main Tray Motor Finisher main tray motor on/off
0
113-057 Finisher Paper Support Motor Finisher paper support motor on/off
1
113-058 Finisher Traverse Motor Finisher staple unit traverse motor on/off
1
113-059 Finisher Paper Hold Solenoid Finisher paper hold solenoid on/off
1
Scanner diagnostics
Learn about the scanner diagnostics.
Shading test
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test

Table 3-27 Scanner Diagnostics (Shading Test)
– To check the quality of scanned images, especially if there might be defects in optical devices such as
the lens, mirror, or lamp.
– Check the quality problem as shown below:
Purpose
Operation For the Image Scanner Unit

Procedure
Press Shade and Print report to see if the current shading value is correct. Mono, red, green, and blue gray
shading values will be shown on the printed report. When the previous shading value is needed, press “Print
Last Shade Report”.
For the Flow ADF unit
1. Load the shading sheet on the ADF tray.
2. Enter SCV mode. Select the following menu items:
Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test > Shade and Print Report (ADF)
Press Print Last Shade Report (ADF) for the previous shading value report.
3. Check if the printed results are correct.
NOTE:
– When executing ADF shading, use only the shading sheet (JC63–05055A).
– A Shading Test for the ADF unit must be completed after replacing the ADF unit or main board.
Verification Look at the bottom of the report page for a "RESULTS : OK" message.
Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write

Table 3-28 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write)
Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and ADF memory.
Operation Procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can
navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and saved
values. Users can also directly input a code through the text box
to search for an NVM.
After selecting a code, the Edit button will be enabled only if the
code is writable.
If the selected code is writable and the Edit button is enabled,

press the button to configure the desired value for the code.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Table 3-29 Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write codes
Code NVM description Default Flow ADF ADF
05-0000 Pick Up Count 0 O O
05-0001 Separation Roller Count 0 O O
05-0030 Simplex Registration Value 0 X O

(Registration 1)
05-0040 Duplex Registration Value 0 O

(Registration 2)
05-0050 Width Guide Max Value Depends on ADF O O
05-0060 Width Guide Min Value Depends on ADF O O
Scanner/Flow ADF test routines
● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines
Table 3-30 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines)
Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and Flow ADF.
Operation Procedure When the main Scanner/ADF Test Routines window displays, users can navigation
through the list of routines and descriptions that display. Users can input a code
through the text box to search for a routine.
After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the selected
routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A

Table 3-31 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes
Code Name Value Flow ADF ADF
06-0000 Scanner Original Size High/Low O O

Detecting Sensor 1
06-0001 Scanner Original Size High/Low O O

Detecting Sensor 2
06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/ High/Low O O

Close Sensor 1
06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/ High/Low O O

Close Sensor 2
06-0020 Scanner Platen Motor Start/Stop O O

Forward
06-0030 Scanner Platen Motor Start/Stop O O

Backward
06-0040 Scanner Platen Home High/Low O O

Position Sensor
05-0000 Document Length .1 High/Low O O

Sensor
05-0001 Document Length .2 High/Low O O

Sensor
05-0020 Document Cover Open High/Low O O

Sensor
05-0040 Document Detect High/Low O O

Sensor
05-0050 Document Feed Sensor High/Low O O
05-0060 Document Simplex High/Low O O

Registration Sensor
05–0061 Document Duplex X

Registration Sensor
05-0070 Document Scan Read High/Low O O

Sensor 1
05-0071 Document Scan Read High/Low O X

Sensor 2
05-0080 Document Exit Sensor High/Low O
05-0110 Document Motor Start/Stop O

Forward
05-0111 Document Motor Start/Stop O

Backward
05-0123 Document width 1 MSO High/Low

Sensor

Sensor

Sensor

Table 3-31 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes (continued)
05-0130 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop

Forward
05-0131 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop

Backward
05-0140 Document Pickup Roller High/Low O O

Detect Sensor
05-0151 Document Stacker Lift High/Low O

Lower Sensor
05-0152 Document Stacker Lift

Home Position Sensor
05-0153 Document Scan-ln

Release Sensor
05-0154 Document Separation

Up Down Sensor
05-0160 Document Registration Start/Stop O X

1 Motor Forward
05-0162 Document Registration Start/Stop O X

1 Motor Backward
05-0170 Document Registration Start/Stop

2 Motor Forward
05-0171 Document Registration Start/Stop

2 Motor Backward
05-0180 Document Stacker Lift Start/Stop

Motor Forward
05-0181 Document Stacker Lift Start/Stop

Motor Backward
05–0182 Document Exit Motor

Forward
05–0183 Document Exit Motor

Backward
05–0184 Document Pickup

Release Motor Forward
05–0185 Document Pickup

Release Motor
Backward
05–0186 Document Scan ln

Release Motor Forward
05–0187 Document Scan ln

Release Motor
Backward
05-0190 Document Width Guide 10Bit (0~1023) O O

ADC Sensor
05–0191 Document USM ADC

Sensor

Table 3-31 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes (continued)
05–0192 Document USM

Calibration Test
05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Start/Stop O O

Speed Simplex
05-0230 Document Jig Test High Start/Stop O O

Speed Simplex
Adjustment
Learn about the print adjustment.
Print adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position
Table 3-32 Print Adjustment (Image Position)
Manually adjust the position of the printed image on the paper

Purpose in the print engine.
Operational Procedure 1. Select a tray to adjust.
2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - buttons,

then press the OK button to save the changes.
○ Simplex Leading Edge
○ Simplex Side Edge
○ Duplex Leading Edge
○ Duplex Side Edge
NOTE:
○ Adjustment must be done for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3,

4, and MP).
○ Do not choose ALL for the tray selection.
○ Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.
3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image is

adjusted. If not, repeat Step 2.
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Margin Test
This menu is used to print out the test pattern manually.
Copy adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position

Table 3-33 Copy Adjustment (Image Position)
Purpose Manually adjust the position of the copied image on the paper in the copy engine.
Operation Procedure NOTE: Before copy adjustment:
– Make sure that the initial values of margin adjustment are the same as the
values of the print adjustment.
– Perform an adjustment for each tray. Do not choose All for tray selection, as this
can confuse the adjustment.
NOTE:
– Complete adjustment for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and MP).
– Do not choose All for tray selection.
– Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.
1. Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass.
2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - button, and then press OK to save
the changes.
○ Simplex Leading Edge
○ Simplex Side Edge
○ Duplex Leading Edge
○ Duplex Side Edge
3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image has moved. If not, repeat Step
2.
Scan area adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Table 3-34 Scan Area Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)

To correct the image position and magnification of scanned
Purpose images automatically.
Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.

Table 3-34 Scan Area Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)
To correct the image position and magnification of scanned

Purpose images automatically.
Note that the Lead Edge arrows point to the left side of the
scanner glass and are placed face down. The Scanner A/S
Chart comes in two sizes, A4 and Letter.
2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically

calculate the proper value based on the scanning result of
the chart.
3. The new value saves to the system.
4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart
must be scanned from the scanner glass.
5. To check the image position, compare the position of the

scale marks (a, b) from the chart to the scanned image.
6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c

from the chart to the scanned image.
NOTE: Specifications:
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment
Table 3-35 Scan Area Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)
Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.
Operation Procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
○ Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)
2. Select one item and press the Edit button.
3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.
4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press +, otherwise press
-.
5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -, otherwise, press +.
6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.
7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the scanner glass.
8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart to the
scanned image.
9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the scanned image.
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

ADF adjustment
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > ADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Table 3-36 ADF Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)
To correct the image position and magnification of images scanned with the Flow ADF/ADF
Purpose automatically.
Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart on the ADF tray.
2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the proper value
based on the scanning result of the chart.
3. The new value saves to the system.
4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the
Flow ADF/ADF.
5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the
chart to the scanned image.
6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
NOTE: After executing the ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to
Scanner Diagnostics.
● Diagnostics > Adjustment > ADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment
Table 3-37 ADF Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)

Operation 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
procedure

Table 3-37 ADF Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)
○ Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)
○ Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)
2. Select one item and press the Edit button.
3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.
4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press +, otherwise press -.
5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -, otherwise, press +.
6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.
7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the Flow ADF/ADF.
8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart to the scanned
image.
9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the scanned image.
○ a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm
○ c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
NOTE: After executing the ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to Scanner Diagnostics.
Image management
Learn about image management.
Auto tone adjustment activation
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal
Table 3-38 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Normal)

To correct image quality when density of the image is poor.
Normal TRC Control is recommended after changing a unit, such
as a toner cartridge, imaging unit, and PTB, or after restarting
Purpose the printer.
Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Normal TRC Control execution.
○ Off: Normal TRC Control will not execute.
○ On: Normal TRC Control will execute during the

determined conditions,
2. Change the execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.
○ Page Count: The system executes Normal TRC

Control based on the count of printed pages since
the last execution.
○ Time Left Alone: The system executes Normal TRC

Control when the system returns from a power save

Table 3-38 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Normal) (continued)
To correct image quality when density of the image is poor.

Normal TRC Control is recommended after changing a unit, such
as a toner cartridge, imaging unit, and PTB, or after restarting
Purpose the printer.
mode and the rest time exceeds the configured

value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has
recovered.
● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full
Table 3-39 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Full)
To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced, the life
of the OPC drum is changed, the density of the image is poor, or
Purpose the temperature and/or humidity in the room changes suddenly.
Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Full TRC Control execution.
○ Off: Full TRC Control will not execute.
○ On: Full TRC Control will execute during the

determined conditions,
2. Change the execution condition(s) of Full TRC Control.
○ Page Count: The system executes Full TRC Control

based on the count of printed pages since the last
execution.
○ Time Left Alone: The system executes Full TRC

Control when the system returns from a power save
mode and the rest time exceeds the configured
value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has
recovered.
Print test patterns

Learn about the print test patterns.
Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns >Skew Pattern
● The skew pattern stored in the machine will be printed out as the selected size.

Service functions
Learn about service functions.
Main memory clear

Learn about the main memory clear.
Service Functions > Main Memory Clear
● This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. This function can be
used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. User configured
values return to the default values.
To clear the main memory, select the country/region where the system is located, and restart the printer.
Debug log
Learn about the debug log.
Service Functions > Debug Log
● This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options:
– Off: This option disables the logging option.
– Job Status: This option only enables the logging of user created jobs.
– Details: This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. This option
might affect the performance of certain system operations. Use this option when the system
performs abnormally and engineers need to investigate the problem.
Capture log
Learn about the capture log.
Service Functions > Capture Log
● This function copies all the saved logs in the system to a USB flash drive as a .zip file. The size of the
system log could reach up to 1 GB. If the system log size becomes very large, it will take a longer time to
copy to the USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the printer.
2. Tap the Service Mode app.
3. Go to Service Functions > Debug Log and change the debug log level to INFO.
4. Go to Service Functions > Capture Log.
5. Select All or Period. If selecting Period, enter the start and end date.
6. Press the Capture Log button.
7. Once the log is completed, a completion message will display. Restore the debug log level to JOB
STATUS.

NOTE: If the system log size becomes very large, it will take longer to copy to the USB flash drive.
8. Check that the Log File has been saved to the USB flash drive.
Transfer assembly control mode

Learn about the transfer assembly control mode.
Service Functions > Transfer Assembly Control Mode

● Table 3-40 Transfer Assembly Control Mode
To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the transfer value to
Purpose optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.
Operation Procedure – T2 Control Mode
○ Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.
○ Adjust PWM value based on the problem type.
● Blur: Increase PWM value
● Poor Transfer: Increase PWM value
● Re-transfer: Decrease PWM value
● White Spot: Decrease PWM value
● OPC Cylic Ghost: Decrease PWM value
Verification Print a test job and make sure the transfer problem has been resolved.
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Envelope rotate
Learn about the envelope rotate function.

Service Functions > Envelope Rotate
● This menu enables rotation when printing on an envelope. The machine usually guides loaded envelopes
with SEF direction. If this function is enabled, the user can load an envelope with LEF direction and the
machine will rotate the image for printing on the envelope.
This function provides the following setting options:
– Off (default): Load envelope SEF direction
– 90 degrees: Load envelope LEF direction.
– 180 degrees: Load envelope SEF direction with flap on bottom side.
NOTE: If the paper source is Auto, the device will feed from the Tray 1 because the LEF envelope can only
be loaded in the Tray 1 according to paper specification.
If the length of envelope is over the maximum size of the custom width, the device will not rotate the image
and determine that the direction of the envelope is SEF. For example, the A4 model supports custom sizes
like W 98–216 ~ L148–356. This model does not support C5 Env (162x229) DL Env (110x220), No 9 Env
(98x225), No 10 Env (105x241) rotation.

Print quality troubleshooting guide
Learn about print quality troubleshooting.

Image quality problems and solutions
Learn about print-quality troubleshooting.
Print quality defects can be caused by printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external
software applications, and environmental conditions.
To successfully troubleshoot print quality problems, eliminate as many variables as possible.
First, generate prints using printable pages using laser paper. Use paper from an unopened ream that has been
acclimated to room temperature. Make sure that genuine HP toner is installed in the printer.
Figure 3-39 A/S chart (A3)
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 829

Figure 3-40 A/S chart
Table 3-41 A/S chart

Item Description Use
[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and magnification
[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error
[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of the

barcode
[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions, and so

on.
[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K 50%)
[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution
[C, D, E] Images For checking color reproduction
[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction
[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and

uniformity
[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of seven

colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/10~100%)
[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of color,

mono text
[J] Multilingual feature For checking the reproduction of small text

Table 3-41 A/S chart (continued)
Item Description Use
[K] White gap pattern For checking color to color, color to mono
white gap
[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit:

cm)
[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error (unit:

inch)
How to analyze image defects
See the following flowchart.
TIP: Depending on the remaining life of the part, the cause of the defect can vary. Check the remaining life of
the part.
Check for defects even if the defect is not repeated.

Figure 3-41 Defect analysis flowchart
Vertical black lines

Learn about vertical black lines.

Figure 3-42 Typical faulty images
Table 3-42 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action
1 Check the OPC for scratches or contamination in a vertical Replace the drum unit.
direction.
2 Check the Charge Scorotron in the Developer unit for Clean the Scorotron with the Cleaning bar.
contamination.

Table 3-42 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)
3 Check the Charge Scorotron for defects. Replace the Drum unit.
4 Scanner unit is contaminated (ADF glass/mirror/CCD Wipe the surface of the contaminated parts with a soft
sensor) cloth.
Vertical light or white lines

Learn about vertical light or white lines.

1 A foreign substance is between the magnetic roller and Remove the foreign substance.
the blade.
No toner on magnetic roller.
Make the hook (transparency sheet is recommended.)
Put the hook into the gap between magnetic roller and
blade.
Pull out foreign substances.
2 The developer in the developer unit is empty or the ● Check the life remaining of the developer unit on the
developer unit life has expired. supply information report.
– If its life has expired, replace the developer

unit.
● Check if the developer layer on magnetic roller is

uniform.
– If the developer layer is short, replace the

developer unit.

3 The laser beam path is blocked. Clean the laser scanner assembly window.
(Foreign substance is on the laser scanner assembly

window.)
4 The OPC is scratched or contaminated in a vertical Replace the drum unit.

direction.
Horizontal periodic black lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic black lines and dots.

1 Poor connection between the CR terminal and Set. Wipe clean the surface of the contaminated CR terminal.
Typical faulty images
2 Poor charge voltage of HVPS (MHV). Check the connection between the MHV terminal and the
connector.
Replace the HVPS.
Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic light/dark lines and dots.

1 Horizontal periodic bands (OPC, 94.2 mm) This problem is likely to resolve itself over time.
● OPC was exposed for too long. If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.
● Damage was caused by a high voltage in a short

amount of time.
2 Poor charge voltage of HVPS (MHV) Replace developer unit.
Blurred image
Learn about blurred images.

Step Cause Action
1 High humidity and/or the quality of the paper. Use new, high quality paper.

Step Cause Action
2 THV transfer voltage is low. Increase the THV transfer voltage.
3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between THV high voltage
terminal and HVPS THV terminal is correct.
Check if the connection between the HVPS and TR is

correct.
Foggy image
Learn about foggy images.
Step Cause Action
1 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Replace the drum unit.
2 Toner is over supplied by abnormal TC sensor. Replace the toner cartridge.
3 Transfer assembly voltage is abnormally high. Check the HVPS connection.
● Connection of transfer rollers in THV and TR.
Replace HVPS.
4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace HVPS.
HVPS is damaged or broken.
Light image
Learn about light image.

Step Cause Action
1 A poor transfer has occurred. Replace HVPS.
2 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Replace HVPS.
● Color density decreases.
3 TC sensor operates abnormally. Replace the toner cartridge.
Uneven pitch and jitter image

Learn about uneven pitch and jitter image.

Step Cause Action
1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Remove foreign substance from the drive gears.
occurred.
Grease the drive gears.
● Toner cartridge gears

Step Cause Action
● OPC unit gears.
● Main drive unit gears.
Replace abnormal units.
● Toner cartridge
● Drum unit
● Main drive unit
2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands have Check if the laser scanner assembly is assembled
occurred. correctly. If not, replace the screws.
Replace the laser scanner assembly.
Skewed image
Learn about skewed images.

1 Is the tray properly installed? Reinstall the tray correctly.
2 Is too much paper loaded in the tray? Remove some paper.
3 Are the paper guides properly set? Adjust the paper guides.
4 Is the surface of the pickup/reverse/feed Clean or replace the contaminated roller.

roller dirty?
5 Is the Flow ADF installed and adjusted Reinstall the Flow ADF unit.
properly?
Adjust the Flow ADF skew.
6 Is the intermediate transfer belt installed Reinstall the ITB unit.

properly?
Poor fusing performance

Learn about poor fusing performance.

Step Cause Action
1 Check the paper type. Check that the paper type displayed on the control panel is
the same type of paper being used for the print job.
Depending on what type of paper is used, print speed
varies.
● Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/): Full Speed
● Heavy weight (106~175g/): Half Speed
● Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/): Half Speed
2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.
3 Check the surface of the fuser belt and pressure roller for Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.
4 Check the temperature control system for problems. Check the non-contact thermistor sensor
● Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally
● Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally
Check the halogen lamp.
If parts are broken, replace the broken parts or the fuser

unit.
5 Check if the pressure control system operates properly. Check the pressure control system.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
6 Paper is wrapped on the heating roller. Remove the wrapped paper and print a test page.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
Stain on the paper back side

Learn about the stain on the paper back side.

Step Cause Action
1 Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Clean or replace the transfer roller assembly.
2 Is the fuser belt or pressure roller dirty? Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.
3 Check the pressure roller surface for damage or scratches. Replace the fuser unit.

Other errors
Learn about other errors troubleshooting.
Image problem
Learn about image problems.
● Toner cartridge detection error
● Paper edge contamination
Toner cartridge detection error
Symptom
● Toner cartridge is installed, but the Not Installed message displays.
Cause
● Toner cartridge is not properly installed.
● Toner cartridge CRUM harness is defective.
● CRUM PCA or CRUM Chip is defective.
● CRUM connection (modular connector) is defective.
● CRUM joint PCA is defective.
● Bad connection between the main board and the CRUM Joint PCA.
Troubleshooting
● Toner cartridge installation problem:
– Check if the toner cartridge is properly installed.
– If the cartridge comes out automatically, check the cartridge fixing hook.
– If the cartridge fixing hook is damaged, replace the cartridge cap or cartridge.
● CRUM harness problem:
– Make sure the CRUM harness is correctly connected.
Check the modular jack for damage or abnormal assembly.
– If the modular jack harness is defective, replace it with a new one.
If the modular jack has moved into the toner cartridge, remove it.
● CRUM PCA problem or CRUM data problem:
– Replace the toner cartridge.
● CRUM connection (modular connector) installation problem:

– Open the front cover. Remove the toner cartridge.
– Make sure that the CRUM connection (modular connector) is correctly installed.
– If the modular connector is not installed correctly, open the rear cover and reinstall.
● CRUM joint PCA problem:
– If the CRUM joint PCA, modular jack pin, or main board interface connector are damaged, replace the
PCA (see the previous step).
● Bad connection between the main board and the CRUM joint PCA:
– Check the connection between the main board and the CRUM joint PCA. If the connection is bad,
replace the harness, the CRUM joint PCA, or the main board.
Paper edge contamination
Symptom
● Paper tail edge is contaminated by toner. Contamination positions correspond to paper guide rib positions.
Figure 3-53 Paper edge contamination
Cause
● The paper guide rib can be contaminated by splattered toner from the Development unit after long term
use of the printer. The paper tail edge contamination cab occur when the paper edge touches the paper
guide rib.
Troubleshooting
● This problem can occur after long term use. (150,000 images or more).
● The service technician must clean the contaminated paper guide ribs when replacing the transfer roller unit.
Cleaning the contaminated paper guide ribs will prevent paper edge contamination.

Figure 3-54 Paper guide rib contamination
Fuser problem
Learn about fuser problems.
● Acoustic noise in fuser unit
Acoustic noise in fuser unit
Symptom
● Acoustic noise from the fuser assembly in the early stages of printing.
Cause
● The fuser gear is damaged.
Troubleshooting
● Replace the fuser unit.
Scanner and ADF problem

Learn about scanner and ADF problems.
● How to resolve CCD lock due to spring-wire
● Noise of ADF hinge/Crack of ADF hinge/ADF will not stay open
● ADF paper jam (multi-feed)
● Scanner locked
● How to adjust image distortion
● Paper jam occurs due to registration ROLLER-IDLE of ADF
● ADF is not recognized. An S3–3211 error occurs or copying must be performed from the scanner glass.
● During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occur.

How to resolve CCD lock because of spring wire
Symptom
● The control panel displays a CCD Lock message when turning on the printer. The FR Carriage cannot move
on the rail.
Figure 3-55 CCD lock
Cause
● The printer is tilted more than 20 degrees.
● When completing a scan with the FR pushed.
Troubleshooting
● Open the top cover to access the scanner glass.
● Bend the spring as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-56 Bend FR carriage spring
Noise of ADF hinge/Crack of ADF/ADF does not stay open
Symptom
● A noise comes from the ADF hinges when it is opened or closed.
● The ADF hinge is cracked.
● When the ADF is opened to access the scanner glass, the unit should remain at a 50° angle (±10°). The ADF
does not remain open as expected.
Troubleshooting
1. Remove the ADF connector cover.
Figure 3-57 Remove ADF connector cover

2. Remove the connector and one screw.
Figure 3-58 Remove connector and screw
3. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the ADF to remove it.
Figure 3-59 Remove ADF unit
4. Remove four screws from the hinge unit. Remove and replace the hinge unit.
5. Reassemble the ADF.
ADF paper jam (multi-feed)
Symptom
● Paper stops between the ADF roller and the registration roller causing a paper jam.

Troubleshooting
● When a registration out jam occurs during multi-feeding, the guide pickup must be replaced. This also
stabilizes the paper path.
NOTE: The friction pad must be replaced at the time that the guide pickup is replaced.
Replacement procedure
1. Open the ADF assembly cover.
Figure 3-60 Open ADF assembly cover
2. Remove the ADF separation pad. Replace with a new separation pad.
3. Update the firmware to the latest version.
Scanner locked/#U1–2115 error
Symptom
● Paper stops between the ADF roller and the registration roller causing a paper jam.
Cause
● All 24V channels output voltage is off (24V output voltage is nearly 0V) and 5V channels output is normal.

Troubleshooting
1. Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) whether or not 24V voltage occurs.
Figure 3-61 Check all 24V output channels
2. If 24V voltage does not occur, check the “24V on/off signal pin” on the main board.
Figure 3-62 Check 24V on/off signal pin
The voltage at “24V on/off signal pin” is 0V: Main board and signal is normal.
The voltage at signal pin 4~5.3V: Main board and signal is abnormal.
3. If the main board and signal is normal, and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check out parts (such as
the Fuser motor, scanner harness, etc.) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the LVPS.
4. If the main board and signal is normal, and only 1–3 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the
harness from the abnormal 24V output channel(s) before replacing the LVPS.
5. If the main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the harness,
connector, and main board.

How to adjust image distortion
Symptom
● Image distortion occurs when paper is fed from the ADF.
Troubleshooting
1. Loosen the four screws on the left hinge, and then loosen the four screws on the right hinge. Adjust the
ADF.
2. Perform a copy job from the ADF and check if image distortion occurs. Repeat steps 1 and 2 if there is
distortion.
3. If the problem is resolved, tighten the screws on the hinges.
Paper jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of ADF
Symptom
● Paper jam occurs due to Registration ROLLER-IDLE of ADF.
When a paper jam occurs during original document scanning, the registration sensor and spring tension
need to be checked. Otherwise, the Registration ROLLER-IDLE needs to be checked.
Cause
● A screw was tightened too much during ADF cover assembly. The cover presses the Registration ROLLER-
IDLE and it cannot rotate smoothly, causing a paper jam.
Troubleshooting
1. Open the ADF cover.
2. Rotate the Registration ROLLER-IDLE by hand. If the Registration ROLLER-IDLE is too close to a screw, it will
not rotate smoothly.
3. If the roller does not rotate smoothly, loosen the screw until the roller does rotate smoothly.
4. If loosening the screw does not resolve the problem, remove the ADF cover and scrape the contact point
with a knife or sharp edge until the roller rotates smoothly. Install the ADF and adjust the screw.
– Remove the ADF cover.
– Remove the ADF pickup assembly.
– Use a razor knife to shave the cover area which is in contact with the Registration ROLLER-IDLE.
ADF is not recognized. An S3–3211 error occurs or copying must be performed from the scanner glass
Symptom
● The ADF installation is not recognized.
● S3–3211 error occurs and a copy job must be performed using the scanner glass.
Cause
● The ADF power cable fails.

Troubleshooting
1. Reassemble the ADF power cable. If the problem is not resolved, replace the power cable.
2. Adjust the harness and fix it with a cable tie.
3. If the roller does not rotate smoothly, loosen the screw until the roller does rotate smoothly.
During copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occur
Symptom
● During a copy or scan job, the original paper JAM and U3–3213 error occur.
Troubleshooting
● Make sure the “Sponge-Damper Separation” is moved to other position.
Figure 3-63 Check Sponge-Damper Separation position
● If the “Sponge-Damper Separation” is in other position, do the following:
– Remove three screws.

– Remove the linker that has the upper side pressed to the inner direction. Remove the front cover.
Figure 3-65 Remove linker and front cover
– Remove four screws.
– Remove the Pickup Assembly.
Figure 3-67 Remove pickup assembly
– Replace the flow ADF-HOUSING SEPARATION.
Figure 3-68 Replace housing separation
Drive unit problem

Learn about drive unit problems.

● Machine makes noise during print job
Machine makes noise during print job
Symptom
● Machine makes noise during a print job.
Cause
● The gear train needs to be greased.
● An old type gear is assembled.
Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode.
2. Perform a fuser motor test.
Service Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > Fuser Motor Forward
3. Remove the fuser unit and execute the fuser motor test again.
4. If the printer still makes a noise during a print job, replace the DRIVE-FUSER EXIT assembly.
5. If the problem is not resolved, replace the fuser unit.
Feeding system problem

Learn about feeding system problems.
● How to resolve tray locking
● Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper
● Printer cannot feed paper

How to resolve tray locking
Symptom
● Tray does not open or does not open easily.
Figure 3-69 Tray does not open
Cause
● Tray operation is not smooth because toner powder is attached to the tray locker.
Troubleshooting
1. Wipe away the toner powder that is attached to the tray locker.
Figure 3-70 Remove toner powder
2. Apply a small amount of grease to the tray locker.

HANARL grease
– Product name: HANARL SN-250
– Manufacturer: KANTO KASEI, Inc.
– Appearance: Orange
– Directions: Soak the object in HANARL, or apply HANARL to the object using a brush.
– After the object has dried for 30 minutes, apply HANARL to the assembly.
Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper
Symptom
● Tray 1, Tray 2, and Tray 3 cannot pick up paper.
Cause
● Bad harness connection on the main board.
● Connector defect of the main board.
Troubleshooting
1. Check the harness connection. Reconnect the harness if it is not connected correctly.
2. Check the pickup connector on the main board.
If the connector has a problem with the soldering, replace the main board.
Printer cannot feed paper
Symptom
● The printer cannot feed paper from Tray 2 or Tray 3.
Cause
● Feed motor problem
● Feed motor connection problem
● Main board defect
Troubleshooting
● Check the feed motor operation.
– Open the right door and push the cover switch forcibly.

Figure 3-71 Open right door and push cover switch
– Enter service mode.
Press the 1, 2, and 3 keys simultaneously and enter the password (1934).
– Select the following menu items:
EDC Mode > Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routine > Feed motor > On/Off
Check the operating status of the two feed rollers.
Figure 3-72 Check feed rollers
– If the feed rollers cannot rotate, open the rear cover and check the motor and gears.
● Check the connection between the main board (CN27) and the feed motor.
● If the problem persists, replace the main board.

Laser scanner assembly problem
Learn about laser scanner assembly problems.
● Laser scanner assembly motor makes a loud noise
Acoustic noise in fuser unit
Symptom
● The laser scanner assembly motor makes a loud noise while in printing mode.
Cause
● The laser scanner assembly motor is defective.
Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode and execute the laser scanner assembly motor test.
2. If the laser scanner assembly motor running sound is loud, replace the laser scanner assembly.
Electrical circuit problem

Learn about electrical circuit problems.
● Right door recognition error
● LVPS output voltage drop error
● HDD makes a loud noise
● Network not functioning
● Control panel malfunction
● Different language displays on control panel when installing printer
● Home screen icon not visible or control panel is broken
● No power problem
● Active NFC does not detect NFC tag
Right door recognition error
Symptom
● The right door is closed but the right door open message displays on the control panel.

Cause
● The right door open sensor spring plate is damaged by the right door stopper.
Figure 3-73 Right door sensor spring plate is damaged
Troubleshooting
● Replace the right door open sensor assembly, or manually reshape the spring plate.
Figure 3-74 Right door open sensor assembly
LVPS output voltage drop error
Symptom
● A error message occurs on the OPE (C3–1312, S3–3121, M1–4111, M1–4211).
Cause
● 24V channel output voltage drops to under 21.6V and 5V channel output is normal.

Troubleshooting
1. Check all 24V output channels (24VS1, 24VS2, 24VS3, 24VS4) for 24V voltage.
Figure 3-75 Check all 24V output channels
2. If 24V voltage does not occur, check the “24V on/off signal pin” on the main board.
The voltage at “24V on/off signal pin” is 0V: Main board and signal is normal.
The voltage at signal pin 4~5.3V: Main board and signal is abnormal.
Figure 3-76 Check 24V on/off signal pin
3. If the main board and signal is normal, and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, check out parts (such as
the Fuser motor, scanner harness, etc.) driven by 24V voltage before replacing the LVPS.
4. If the main board and signal is normal, and only 1–3 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the
harness from the abnormal 24V output channel(s) before replacing the LVPS.
5. If the main board and signal is abnormal and all 24V output channels are nearly 0V, inspect the harness,
connector, and main board.

Hard Disk Drive (HDD) makes a loud noise
Symptom
● The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) makes a loud noise.
Cause
● The HDD has defects.
Troubleshooting
● Replace the HDD.
Networking not function
Symptom
● Network is not functioning.
Cause
● Network line itself is not working properly.
● Network configuration is wrong.
● Some related electronic components in the main board have defects.
Troubleshooting
1. Connect a network line to the PC and complete a ping test.
2. Complete a ping test after connecting the network line. If the connection is working, check the network
configuration which might have been set incorrectly.
3. If the ping test does not have a result, open the rear cover and check the main board for visible defects on
the network related components such as the connector (CN16), capacitor (C192), and other close
components. Surge voltage from the outside can cause defects.
4. If any of the components have visible defects, then replace the main board.
Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew

Learn about adjusting the ADF/ADF skew.
1. Open the ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.
ENWW Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew 863

Figure 3-77 Open ADF and loosen screws
2. Adjust the position of the ADF hinge according to the skew status.
Figure 3-78 Adjust ADF hinge
a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Figure 3-79 Adjust hinge
ENWW Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew 865

b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the arrow. (1
scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)
Figure 3-80 Adjust hinge
3. Detach the ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the ADF sponge on the scanner glass. Close the ADF
unit to attach the sponge.

4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams
Learn about the electrical-mechanical diagrams.
PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU).
ENWW PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 867

Figure 4-1 Formatter
Engine Controller
Board (ECB)
CN1, MAC0
JC82-00540A MX0P
MX0N
1
2
MX1P 3
8GR94-60003 MX2P
MX2N
4
5 JC39-02567A
MX1N 6
MX3P 7
MX3N 8
LED1 9
3.3V_SLP 10
LED0 11
3.3V_SLP 12
CN16, PCIe
SDA3_TIGER 1
DGND 2
SCL3_TIGER 3
PEX_TX_P 4
DGND 5
PEX_TX_N 6
PEX_RX_P 7
DGND 8 JC39-02552A
PEX_RX_N 9
PEX_REFCLK_P_TIGER 10
DGND 11
PEX_REFCLK_N_TIGER 12
N.C 13
DGND 14
nRST_DRAGON 15
WAKE_DRAGON 16
DGND 17
nEN_PCIe 18
EN_SYSPWR_DRAGON 19
CN17, GPIO
nSENS_PAPER_DSDF_TIGER 1
nRST_REQ_TIGER 2
COVER_OPEN_PLATEN1_TIGER 3
DGND 4
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT_TIGER 5
ZEROCROSS_TIGER
nTRAY_OPEN_TIGER
6
7 JC39-02553A Formatter
N.C 8
DGND
DGND
9
10
X3A92-60006(dn)
EN_WKUP_PWR
RESERVED_OUT1
nTIGER_PCIeRDY
11
12
13
Y3K99-60005(z)
DGND 14
RESERVED_IN_2 15
nDRAGON_PCIeRDY 16
HP
Formatter
ECB
LVPS
FDB
Red color text for 77822, 77825, 77830

Blue color text for 78323, 78325, 78330
868 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams ENWW

Figure 4-2 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) and Fuser Drive Board (FDB)
JC82-00540A Engine Controller
8GR94-60003 Board (ECB)
CN4, FDB Interface
Formatter 1 ZEROCROSS_IN
2 DGND
3 DGND
4 ON_SMPS_RELAY
5 24V1
6 ON_FUSER_RELAY
ECB 7 FUSER 24V
8 DGND
9 ON_FUSER_SIDE
10 ON_FUSER_CENTER
11 OUT_FAN_DEVE
LVPS FAN 12 nDETECT_FAN_DEVE_CON
13 DGND
14 nEN_24V_SMPS2_O
15 DGND
16 TRAY OPEN1
17 DGND
18 ADC_PAPER_SIZE1
19 1.8V
20 TRAY OPEN2
1.8V/24V 21 DGND
22 ADC_PAPER_SIZE2
LVPS 23 1.8V
24 OUT_FAN_SMPS1
FDB 25 nDETECT_FAN_SMPS1_CON
26 DGND
27 ADC_SMPS1_TEMP_CON
28 nEN_24V_SMPS1_O
29 DGND
30 N.C
CN2, LVPS TYPE5H
1 5V1
2 5V2
3 24V1
JC39-02564A 4 24V2
5 24V3
5V/24V 6 24V4
8GR94-50002 7 DGN D
8 DGN D
9 DGN D
10 DGN D
11 DGN D
12 DGN D
JC39-02558A
24V 1.8V 1.8V 24V
LVPS FAN PAPER SIZE1 PAPER SIZE2 DEVE FAN
24V 24V 5V/24V

10
11
12
10
3
9
4
2
7
8
6
1
3
n EN_24V_SM PS_O 2
1
9
4
2
8
7
6
1
TYPE5H SIG N A L
LVPS TYPE 5H
ON_FUSER_CENTER
ON_FUSER_RELAY
ON_SMPS_RELAY
ZERO_CROSS_IN
ON_FUSER_SIDE
FUSER_24V
MAIN IF
HEATER I/F
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
D G ND
D G ND
24V1
24V2
24V3
24V4
JC39-01584A
5V1
5V2
1
DGND
DGND
DGND
24V1
HEATER HEATER
2
Fuser Drive Board LVPS TYPE5H

JC39-01583A
HEATER S/W (FDB) JC44-00250A, V2
JC 39-01585A
FDB / LVPS FDB / LVPS

1
8GR94-60002, V2 JC44-00249A, V1
HEATER S/W 2 LIVE 1
HEATER S/W 1 LIVE
3 8GR94-60001, V1 NEUTRAL 2
DGND
DGND
DGND
5V5
5V4
5V3
2 NEUTRAL
4
LVPS TYPE 5H
M A IN SW ITC H
M A IN SW ITC H
1
6
2
5
4
3
3 CO M M O N
2 N EU TRA L
1 LA M P1
2 LA M P2
FU SER
IN LET
1 LIVE
JC39-02558A
2
3
1
DGND
DGND
DGND
5V4
5V3
5V2
LVPS TYPE 5H
JC39-02076A JC39-01582A
JC39-01581A
GND
M A IN S/W
INLET
Formatter
AC

ENWW PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 869

Figure 4-3 High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)
Engine Controller Board (ECB)

CN37, HVPS PWR
JC82-00540A
LSU SHUT/SKEW MOT 8GR94-60003
1 24V1_LP
2 24V1_LP
3 24V1_LP
4 24V1_LP
5 3.3V_LP
6 DGND
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 DGND
10 DGND
11 A_LSU_SHUT(N.C)
12 nA_LSU_SHUT(N.C)
13 B_LSU_SHUT(N.C)
14 nB_LSU_SHUT(N.C)
3.3V/24V 15 5V2_LP(N.C)
16 DGND(N.C)
17 nSENS_LSU_SHUT1(N.C)
18 5V2_LP(N.C)
19 DGND(N.C)
20 nSENS_LSU_SHUT2(N.C)
21 A_SKEW_Y(N.C)
22 nA_SKEW_Y(N.C)
23 B_SKEW_Y(N.C)
24 nB_SKEW_Y(N.C)
25 A_SKEW_M(N.C)
26 nA_SKEW_M(N.C)
27 B_SKEW_M(N.C) CN25, HVPS COLOR
28 nB_SKEW_M(N.C)
29 A_SKEW_C(N.C) 1 PWM_DEV_DC_Y_CON
30 nA_SKEW_C(N.C) 2 PWM_ITHV_Y_CON
31 B_SKEW_C(N.C) 3 PWM_AC_VPP_Y_CON
32 nB_SKEW_C(N.C) 4 nEN_AC_Y_CON
5 PWM_AC_PREQ_CON
6 PWM_MHV_Y_CON
7 PWM_FUSER_BIAS_CON
8 PWM_SAW_CON
9 PWM_THV_CON
10 PWM_THV_CLEAN_CON
CN29, LSU COLOR 11 ADC_THV_P_CON
12 ADC_HVPS_24_CON
1 DGND 13 PWM_DEV_DC_K_CON
2 DGND 14 PWM_DEV_DC_C_CON
3 nVDO_Y_B1_DN_CON 15 PWM_DEV_DC_M_CON
4 nVDO_Y_B1_DP_CON 16 PWM_ITHV_K_CON
5 DGND 17 PWM_ITHV_C_CON
HVPS 6 nHSYNC_Y_DN 18 PWM_ITHV_M_CON
1
JC39-02561A 7 nHSYNC_Y_DP 19 ADC_MHV_K_CON
JC44-00212C . 8 DGND 20 ADC_MHV_C_CON
. 8RG94-50001 9 nSH_LSU_Y_1B_OUT 21 ADC_MHV_M_CON
JC44-00212D . 10 nLDON_Y_OUT 22 ADC_MHV_Y_CON
. 3.3V/24V 11 DGND 23 PWM_MHV_K_CON
. 12 PWM_LD_POWER_Y_OUT 24 PWM_MHV_C_CON
32 13 DGND 25 PWM_MHV_M_CON
14 nVDO_M_B1_DN_CON 26 PWM_AC_VPP_K_CON
27 PWM_AC_VPP_C_CON
35
. Flexible Flat Cable (FFC) 15
16
nVDO_M_B1_DP_CON
DGND 28 PWM_AC_VPP_M_CON
. 29 nEN_AC_K_CON
. JC39-02114A 17
18
nSH_LSU_M_1B_OUT
nLDON_M_OUT 30 nEN_AC_C_CON
.
19 DGND 31 nEN_AC_M_CON
.
20 PWM_LD_POWER_M_OUT 32 ADC_ITHV_K_CON
1 5V/24V 33 ADC_ITHV_C_CON
1
21 DGND
.
34 ADC_ITHV_M_CON
.
22 nVDO_C_B1_DN_CON
.
35 ADC_ITHV_Y_CON
.
23 nVDO_C_B1_DP_CON
.
50
24 DGND
25 nSH_LSU_C_1B_OUT
26 nLDON_C_OUT
5V/24V 27 DGND
28 PWM_LD_POWER_C_OUT
29 DGND
Laser Scanning Unit 30 nVDO_K_B1_DN_CON
31 nVDO_K_B1_DP_CON
(LSU) 32 DGND
33 nHSYNC_K_DN
LSU 34
35
nHSYNC_K_DP
DGND
JC97-04864A 36
37
nSH_LSU_K_1B_OUT
nLDON_K_OUT
38 DGND
39 PWM_LD_POWER_K_OUT
40 DGND
41 ADC_LSU_TEMP_CON
42 5V2_LP_LSU
43 5V2_LP_LSU
44 CLK_LSU_OUT
45 nREADY_LSU_IN
46 nSTART_LSU_OUT
47 DGND
48 24V3
49 24V3
50 nDETECT_LSU


Figure 4-4 Temp/Humidity sensor
Engine Controller Board
(ECB)
CN31, HUMIDITY
ADC_OUT_TEMP 1
DGND 2 JC39-02583A
ADC_OUT_HUMI 3
3.3V_SLP 4
3.3V
3.3V
4
Temp/Humidity sensor 3
2
JC32-00015A 1
Exit section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the exit section.
ENWW Exit section 871

Figure 4-5 Exit section
JC39-01607A
3
2
1
1
2
3
5V 5V
1
2
JC39-02089B 3 EXIT1 FULL

(ECB)
CN6, EXIT
1 5V2_LP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT1
5V 4 5V2_SLP
5 DGND
6 nSENS_P_BINFULL_EXIT1
7 A_EXIT2
8 nA_EXIT2
9 nB_EXIT2
10 B_EXIT2
11 PWM_RETURN_DUPLEX
12 24V3
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 nSENS_T1_POS
16 5V2_LP
17 DGND
18 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT2
19 5V2_SLP
20 DGND
22 nDETECT_EXIT2
23 DGND
24 DGND
25 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
26 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE
27 OUT_FAN_FUSER
28 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER_CON
29 DGND
30 N.C
Drive section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the drive section.

Figure 4-6 Main drive assembly
MAIN BLDC 10
9
MOTOR 8
7
6
5
4 24V
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
REGI CLUTCH 4 24V
3
24V 2
1
MP CLUTCH
24V
OPC BLDC
24V MOTOR
FEED
CLUTCH
CN47, PH DRIVER
1 DIR_BLDC_MAIN
JC39-02095A 2 CLK_BLDC_MAIN
3 nREADY_BLDC_MAIN
4 nEN_BLDC_MAIN
24V 5 GAIN_BLDC_MAIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_MAIN
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V1_LP
10 24V1_LP
11 DGND
12 nSENS_PAPER_FEED1
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 nSENS_P_REGI
16 5V2_LP
24V 17 REGI_CLUTCH_CON
18 24V1_LP
24V 19 MP_CLUTCH_CON
20 24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
24V 22 24V1_LP
23 A_T1
24 nA_T1
25 nB_T1
26 B_T1
27 DIR_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
28 CLK_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
29 nREADY_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
30 nEN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
24V 31 GAIN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
32 BRAKE_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
33 DGND
34 DGND
35 24V1_LP
36 24V1_LP
ENWW Drive section 873

Figure 4-7 Fuser and Exit drive assembly

CN40, FUSER
1 5V2_LP
2 FUSER_CRUM
3 nSENS_FUSER_POS1
4 DGND
5 SDA2_CRUM_FUSER
6 SCL2_CRUM_FUSER
7 DGND
8 NC_C_TD
9 NC_C_TC
10 THERM_SIDE2
11 THERM_SIDE1
EXIT DRIVE ASSY 12 DGND
13 NC_S_TD
14 NC_S_TC
15 DIR_BLDC_FUSER
16 CLK_BLDC_FUSER
17 nREADY_BLDC_FUSER
FUSER DRIVE ASSY 4
24V 24V 18 nEN_BLDC_FUSER
3
2
19 GAIN_BLDC_FUSER
1 20 BRK_BLDC_FUSER
21 DGND
22 DGND
23 24V3
EXIT1 STEP 24 24V3
JC39-02089B
MOTOR 25 A_EXIT1
26 nA_EXIT1
27 nB_EXIT1
24V 28 B_EXIT1
FUSER REDUCTION GEAR 10
9
8
7
FUSER BLDC 6
5
MOTOR 4 24V
3
2
1

Figure 4-8 Duct drive assembly
24V
1
2
3
4
JC39-02094A

TCU MOTOR (ECB)
CN7, Toner
1 A_DUCT
24V 2 nA_DUCT
3 nB_DUCT
4 B_DUCT
5 DGND
6 nA_TONER_DC_K
7 5V2_LP
8 DGND
9 TONER_COUNT_K_CON
TCU COUNT 10 5V2_LP
11 ON_ERASER_K
Engine Controller Board 12 3.3V_CRUM
3 (ECB) 13 SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_K
2 14
1
SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_K
CN49, Front Mono 15 DGND
5V
1 DGND
2 nCOVER_FRONT_CON
3 5V1_SLP
JC39-02737A 4 DGND
5 nDETECT_WASTE_INST_CON
6 DGND
7 ADC_WASTE_LEVEL_CON
8 EN_WASTE_LED
9 5V_LP
10 OUT_FAN_FUSER
12 DGND
5V 13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 DUCT_COUNT
16 DGND
17 TC_VIN_K
18 24V1_LP
19 TSEN_VCONT_K
20 3.3V_CRUM
21 SDA_CRUM_DEVE_K
22 SCL_CRUM_DEVE_K
23 DGND
24 N.C

Figure 4-9 Toner supply drive assembly
TONER K
2
DC MTR 1
24V
TONER K
COUNT
3
2
1
5V

(ECB)
CN7, Toner
JC39-01665A
1 A_DUCT
2 nA_DUCT
3 nB_DUCT
4 B_DUCT
1 5 24V 5 DGND
2 4 6 nA_TONER_DC_K
24V JC39-02737A 7 5V2_LP
3 3 8 DGND
4 2
5V 5 1
5V 9 TONER_COUNT_K_CON
10 5V2_LP
11 ON_ERASER_K
12 3.3V_CRUM
13 SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_K
14 SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_K
15 DGND

Figure 4-10 Paper pickup drive assembly
Pickup drive 1
4
3
2
1
24V
Pickup drive 2
4
3
2
1
24V
CN46, PICKUP
1 5V2_LP
2 DGND
3 PAPER_EMPTY1
4 5V2_LP
5 DGND
6 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT1
7 A_PICKUP1
24V
8 nA_PICKUP1
JC39-02093A nB_PICKUP1
9
10 B_PICKUP1
11 A_FEED
12 nA_FEED
13 nB_FEED
14 B_FEED
15 5V2_LP
16 DGND
17 PAPER_EMPTY2
18 5V2_LP
19 DGND
20 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT2
21 DGND
23 5V2_LP
24 A_PICKUP2
25 nA_PICKUP2
26 nB_PICKUP2
24V 27 B_PICKUP2
28 N.C

Paper handling section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper handling section.
Figure 4-11 First & Second pickup assembly

(ECB)
CN46, PICKUP
1 6
2 5 1 5V2_LP
5V
3 4 2 DGND
JC39-01588A
4 3 3 PAPER_EMPTY2
5 2
6 1 5V 4 5V2_LP
EMPTY2 SENSOR 5 DGND
5V 3 6 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT2
2
3 1
7 A_PICKUP1
5V 2 8 nA_PICKUP1
1 LIFT2 SENSOR 9 nB_PICKUP1
10 B_PICKUP1
11 A_FEED
12 nA_FEED
JC39-02093A 13 nB_FEED
14 B_FEED
5V
15 5V2_LP
16 DGND
17 PAPER_EMPTY3
18 5V2_LP
19 DGND
5V 20 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT3
1 6 21 DGND
2 5 22 nSENS_PAPER_FEED2
3 4 23 5V2_LP
JC39-01588A
4 3
5 2 24 A_PICKUP2
6 1 25 nA_PICKUP2
EMPTY3 SENSOR 26 nB_PICKUP2
3 27 B_PICKUP2
5V 28
2 N.C
3 1
5V 2
1 LIFT3 SENSOR

Figure 4-12 Registration assembly
REGISTRATION
SENSOR 3
2
1 5V

(ECB)
CN47, PH DRIVER
1 DIR_BLDC_MAIN
2 CLK_BLDC_MAIN
JC39-01473A 3 nREADY_BLDC_MAIN
4 nEN_BLDC_MAIN
5 GAIN_BLDC_MAIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_MAIN
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V1_LP
10 24V1_LP
FEED1 SENSOR DGND
1 6 5V 11
5V 2 5 12 nSENS_PAPER_FEED1
3 4 13 5V2_LP
JC39-02085A 4 3
JC39-02095A
1 3 14 DGND
2 2 5V 5 2
15 nSENS_P_REGI
3 1 6 1 5V 16 5V2_LP
17 REGI_CLUTCH_CON
18 24V1_LP
19 MP_CLUTCH_CON
20 24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
22 24V1_LP
23 A_T1
24 nA_T1
25 nB_T1
26 B_T1
31 GAIN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
33 DGND
34 DGND
35 24V1_LP
36 24V1_LP
ENWW Paper handling section 879

Frame section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the frame section.

Figure 4-13 Front frame
FRONT
COVER OPEN
SWITCH
3.3V 2
1
JC39-01610A
4
5V 3
2
JC39-01295A 1
TCU LEVEL
1
2
1
2
3.3V
3 5V
2
1
2
4
3
1
TCU WASTE
1
2
4
3
INSTALLATION Engine Controller Board

5V (ECB)
CN49, Front Mono
3.3V 1 DGND
2 nCOVER_FRONT_CON
5V 3 5V1_SLP
JC39-02094A 4 DGND
5 nDETECT_WASTE_INST_CON
6 DGND
7 ADC_WASTE_LEVEL_CON
8 EN_WASTE_LED
5V 9 5V_LP
10 OUT_FAN_FUSER
12 DGND
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 DUCT_COUNT
16 DGND
17 TC_VIN_K
18 24V1_LP
19 TSEN_VCONT_K
20 3.3V_CRUM
21 SDA_CRUM_DEVE_K
22 SCL_CRUM_DEVE_K
23 DGND
24 N.C
ENWW Frame section 881

Figure 4-14 Rear frame
RIGHT DOOR
SWITCH
3 3.3V
2
1
JC39-01610A

(ECB)
3
2
1
CN6, EXIT
1
2
3
3.3V 1 5V2_LP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT1
4 4 5V2_SLP
3
2 5 DGND
1 1.8V
7 A_EXIT2
AUTO SIZE1 8 nA_EXIT2
4
3 9 nB_EXIT2
2 10 B_EXIT2
1 JC39-02089B 11 PWM_RETURN_DUPLEX
1.8V 12 24V3
AUTO SIZE2 13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 nSENS_T1_POS
Engine Controller Board 16 5V2_LP
17 DGND
CN4, FDB IF 18 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT2
19 5V2_SLP
1 ZEROCROSS_IN 20 DGND
2 DGND 21 nSENS_P_BINFULL_EXIT2
3 DGND
JC39-02564A 22 nDETECT_EXIT2
4 ON_SMPS_RELAY
5 23 DGND
24V1
6 ON_FUSER_RELAY 3.3V 24 DGND
7 FUSER 24V 25 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
8 DGND 26 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE
9 ON_FUSER_SIDE 27 OUT_FAN_FUSER
10 ON_FUSER_CENTER 28 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER_CON
11 OUT_FAN_DEVE 29 DGND
12 nDETECT_FAN_DEVE_CON
13
30 N.C
DGND
14 nEN_24V_SMPS2_O
15 DGND
16 TRAY OPEN1
1.8V 17 DGND
18 ADC_PAPER_SIZE1
19 1.8V
20 TRAY OPEN2
1.8V 21 DGND
22 ADC_PAPER_SIZE2
23 1.8V
24 OUT_FAN_SMPS1
25 nDETECT_FAN_SMPS1_CON
26 DGND
27 ADC_SMPS1_TEMP_CON
28 nEN_24V_SMPS1_O
29 DGND
30 N.C

Figure 4-15 Feed sensor
< MAIN FRAME >
FEED SENSOR 1 (ECB)
3
2 CN46, PICKUP
1
1 5V2_LP
5V 2 DGND
3 PAPER_EMPTY1
4 5V2_LP
5 DGND
1 3 6 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT1
JC39-01589A
2 2
5V 3 1 7 A_PICKUP1
8 nA_PICKUP1
JC39-02093A 9 nB_PICKUP1
10 B_PICKUP1
11 A_FEED
3 12 nA_FEED
2
1
5V 5V 13 nB_FEED
14 B_FEED
FEED SENSOR 2 15 5V2_LP
16 DGND
17 PAPER_EMPTY2
18 5V2_LP
19 DGND
20 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT2
21 DGND
Engine Controller Board 22 nSENS_PAPER_FEED2
23 5V2_LP
(ECB)
24 A_PICKUP2
JC39-02085A
CN47, PH DRIVER 25 nA_PICKUP2
26 nB_PICKUP2
1 DIR_BLDC_MAIN 27 B_PICKUP2
2 CLK_BLDC_MAIN 28 N.C
3 nREADY_BLDC_MAIN
4 nEN_BLDC_MAIN
5 GAIN_BLDC_MAIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_MAIN
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V1_LP
10 24V1_LP
1 6 11 DGND
2 5 JC39-02095A
5V 3 4 5V 13 5V2_LP
4 3 14 DGND
5 2 15 nSENS_P_REGI
6 1 16 5V2_LP
17 REGI_CLUTCH_CON
18 24V1_LP
19 MP_CLUTCH_CON
20 24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
22 24V1_LP
23 A_T1
24 nA_T1
25 nB_T1
26 B_T1
31 GAIN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
33 DGND
34 DGND
35 24V1_LP
36 24V1_LP
Fuser section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the fuser section.
ENWW Fuser section 883

Figure 4-16 Fuser frame lower part
(ECB)
CN40, FUSER
4
1 5V2_LP
3 2 FUSER_CRUM
2
3 nSENS_FUSER_POS1
4 DGND
NC THERMISTOR 0 5 SDA2_CRUM_FUSER
6 SCL2_CRUM_FUSER
7 DGND
1
2 14 8 NC_C_TD
3 13 9 NC_C_TC
12 THERM_SIDE2 (Mono only)
4
11
10
10 11
6
7 9 JC39-02089B 12 DGND
8 8 13 NC_S_TD
9 7
6 14 NC_S_TC
10
JC39-01638A 11 5 15 DIR_BLDC_FUSER
12 4 16 CLK_BLDC_FUSER
3
13
2
14
1 18 nEN_BLDC_FUSER
15
19 GAIN_BLDC_FUSER
20 BRK_BLDC_FUSER
21 DGND
22 DGND
23 24V3
24 24V3
25 A_EXIT1
THERMISTOR 26 nA_EXIT1
3
SIDE 1
27 nB_EXIT1
28 B_EXIT1

Figure 4-17 Fuser frame upper part
FUSER POSITION JC39-01613A (ECB)
5V 3
SENSOR
2
1 CN40, FUSER
JC39-01336A
4
1 5V2_LP
3 2 FUSER_CRUM
2
1 5V 3 nSENS_FUSER_POS1
2
5V 3
6
5
4 DGND
4 5 SDA2_CRUM_FUSER
3
5V JC39-02089B
FUSER 2 6 SCL2_CRUM_FUSER
1
7 DGND
EEPROM 1
14 8 NC_C_TD
2
3 13 9 NC_C_TC
4
11
10
5
10
5V 11 THERM_SIDE1 (Mono only)
6
7 9 12 DGND
8 8 13 NC_S_TD
9 7
6 14 NC_S_TC
10
11 5 15 DIR_BLDC_FUSER
12 4 16 CLK_BLDC_FUSER
3
13
2
14
1 18 nEN_BLDC_FUSER
15
19 GAIN_BLDC_FUSER
20 BRK_BLDC_FUSER
21 DGND
22 DGND
23 24V3
24 24V3
25 A_EXIT1
26 nA_EXIT1
27 nB_EXIT1
28 B_EXIT1
MP right door section

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the MP right door section.
ENWW MP right door section 885

Figure 4-18 Right door assembly
(ECB)
CN36, SIDE
5V2_SLP 15 1
1 14 2
DGND 2 13 3
12 4
nSENS_P_MP_EMPTY 3 11 5
10 6
MP_SOL_CON 4 9 7
8 8
24V3 5
24V 7
6
9
10
A_DUP 6 5 11
4 12
nA_DUP 7 3 13
nB_DUP 8 2 14
1 15
B_DUP 9 30 16
JC39-02088A 29 17
5V2_LP 10 28 18
27 19
DGND 11 26 20
nSENS_P_FUSER_OUT 12 5V 25 21
24 22
23 23
OUT_FAN_DUPLEX2 13 22 24
nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX2_CON 14 21 25
20 26
DGND 15 19 27
(N.C) 16 24V 18
17
28
29
16 30
(N.C) 17
(N.C) 18 JC39-02615A
5V2_LP 19
DGND 20
nSENS_CURL2 21
5V2_LP 22 24V 3
DGND 23 2
3 1
nSENS_JAM_DUPLEX 24
2
OUT_FAN_DUPLEX1 25 24V 1 DUPLEX1 FAN
nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX1_CON 26 MOTOR
24V
DGND 27 DUPLEX2 FAN
1.8V 28 MOTOR
ADC_MP_SIZE 29
DGND 30
5V 3
2
1
FUSER OUT
4
3
2
24V 1
DUPLEX STEP
MOTOR

Figure 4-19 MP tray assembly
24V
TRAY1(MP) SOLENOID
3
2
TRAY1(MP) 1
EMPTY 5V
JC39-01604A
CN36, SIDE
5V 1 30
2 29
5V 1 3 3 28 1 5V2_SLP
2 2
5V
3 1
4 27 2 DGND
JC39-02615A 5 26 JC39-02088A 3 nSENS_P_MP_EMPTY
. .
1 2 24V . .
2 1 . . 4 MP_SOL_CON
24V 30 1
24V 5 24V3
6 A_DUP
7 nA_DUP
8 nB_DUP
9 B_DUP
10 5V2_LP
11 DGND
12 nSENS_P_FUSER_OUT
13 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX2
14 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX2_CON
15 DGND
16 (N.C)
17 (N.C)
18 (N.C)
19 5V2_LP
20 DGND
21 nSENS_CURL2
22 5V2_LP
23 DGND
24 nSENS_JAM_DUPLEX
25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX1
27 DGND
28 1.8V
29 ADC_MP_SIZE
30 DGND
ENWW MP right door section 887

Figure 4-20 Right door duplex
5V 3
2
1
DUPLEX JAM
Engine Contorller Board
(ECB)
CN36, Side (Right door)
1 5V2_SLP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_P_MP_EMPTY
4 MP_SOL_CON
5 24V3
6 A_DUP
7 nA_DUP
8 nB_DUP
9 B_DUP
10 5V2_LP
11 DGND
12 nSENS_P_FUSER_OUT
JC39-01654A 13 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX2
15 DGND
16 (N.C)
1 30 17 (N.C)
. . 18 (N.C)
. . 19 5V2_LP
. . 20 DGND
1 5 . . 21 nSENS_CURL2
2 4 . .
5V 22 5V2_LP
5V 3 3 5V 22 9 23 DGND
4 2 23 8 24 nSENS_JAM_DUPLEX
5 1 JC39-02615A 24 7 JC39-02088A 25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX1
. . 27 DGND
. . 28 1.8V
. . 29 ADC_MP_SIZE
30 1 30 DGND

Figure 4-21 Right door output
5V 3
2
1
FUSER OUT
JC39-01604A
Engine Contorller Board

(ECB)
CN36, Side- SIDE
CN36 (Right door)
1 5V2_SLP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_P_MP_EMPTY
4 MP_SOL_CON
5 24V3
1 30 6 A_DUP
. . 7 nA_DUP
. .
8 nB_DUP
. .
9 B_DUP
1 3 JC39-02615A 10 21 JC39-02088A 10 5V2_LP
2 2 11 20 11 DGND
5V 3 1 5V 12 19 5V 12 nSENS_P_FUSER_OUT
. . 13 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX2
. . 14 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX2_CON
. . 15 DGND
30 1 16 (N.C)
17 (N.C)
18 (N.C)
19 5V2_LP
20 DGND
21 nSENS_CURL2
22 5V2_LP
23 DGND
24 nSENS_JAM_DUPLEX
25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX1
27 DGND
28 1.8V
29 ADC_MP_SIZE
30 DGND
Scanner section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the scanner section.
ENWW Scanner section 889

Figure 4-22 Scanner assembly (1 of 2)
CN14, CCDM I/F
50 GND
49 MCLKP
48 MCLKN
47 GND
46 SEN
45 SCLK
44 SDI
43 GND
42 TRIG
41 RESETb
40 SDO
39 GND
38 LVDO4N
37 LVDO4P
LVDO4N
LVDO3N
LVDO2N
LVDO1N
LVDO0N
LVDO4P
LVDO3P
LVDO2P
LVDO1P
LVDO0P
36 GND
RESETb
MCLKN
MCLKP
LVCKN
LVCKP
35 LVDO3N
SCLK
TRIG
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
SDO
SEN
10V
10V
10V
10V
SDI
34 LVDO3P
5V
5V
5V
5V
CCD PCA
33 GND
32 LVCKN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
31 LVCKP
30 GND
29 LVDO2N
28 LVDO2P
27 GND
26 LVDO1N
25 LVDO1P
24 GND
23 LVDO0N
22 LVDO0P
21 GND
JC39-02119A 20 3.3V
19 3.3V
18 3.3V
17 3.3V
16 3.3V
15 3.3V
14 3.3V
13 3.3V
12 GND
11 GND
10 5V
9 5V
8 5V
7 5V
Platen Cover Open2 Sensor 6 GND
5V JC97-04516A 5 GND
Platen Scanner 4 10V
Scan Joint 3 10V
Home Detect Step Motor 2 10V
PCA JC31-00158A 1 10V
Sensor
JC92-02781A
5V
24V CN13, Scanner I/F
34 SCAN_MTR_MS1
33 SCAN_MTR_MS2
32 PWM_SCAN_MTR
31 24V
30 SCAN_MTR_DIR
29 24V
28 nEN_MTR_PLS
27 24V
26 SCAN_MTR_PLS
25 24V
JC39-02129A 24 PWM_WLED_CTL
23 GND
22 nFLAT_COVER_OPEN2
21 5V
20 nFLAT_COVER_OPEN1
19 5V
5V 5V JC39-02128A 18 nCCD_HOME
24V 17 GND
16 nAPS_SENOSR2
15 5VS
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cover open/ Home Sensor
14 nAPS_SENSOR1
Step Motor
nFLAT_COVER_OPEN2
13 GND
nB_SCAN_MTR
nA_SCAN_MTR
B_SCAN_MTR
A_SCAN_MTR
12 nDETECT_ADF
11 3.3V
10 nSENS_PAPER_ADF
Scan Joint PCA 9 GND
nCCD_HOME
24V
24V
8 nSENS_P_POS1
JC92-02781A 7 GND
6 TXD_DADF
GND
GND
5 GND
5V
5V
4 RXD_DADF
3 GND
2 nRST_DADF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 nSENS_P_POS2
nFLAT_COVER_OPEN2
nFLAT_COVER_OPEN1
nSENS_PAPER_ADF
PWM_SCAN_MTR
PWM_WLED_CTL
SCAN_MTR_MS1
SCAN_MTR_MS2
Scanner I/F
SCAN_MTR_PLS
nAPS_SENSOR1
nAPS_SENOSR2
nSENS_P_POS1
nSENS_P_POS2
SCAN_MTR_DIR
nEN_MTR_PLS
nDETECT_ADF
nCCD_HOME
nRST_DADF
RXD_DADF
TXD_DADF
3.3V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
24V
24V
24V
24V
5VS
5V
5V

Figure 4-23 Scanner assembly (2 of 2)
SSA Interface sub board
Scan Joint PCA, JC92-02781A
Cover open Sensor
JC39-02132A 3.3V WLED / APS / Cover sensor
APS SENSOR
5V
JC39-02130A
5V
5V WLED
APS sensor1 JC39-02131A
0604-001453 6.6V
5V
LED 6.6V APS sensor2, 0604-001453

(Lamp for scanner
JC97-04521A) JC39-02120A
3.3V
Platen_Cover_Open
Sensor
(magnetic)
Document feeder section

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the document feeder section.
ENWW Document feeder section 891

Figure 4-24 Document feeder (1 of 2)
5V
3
2
5V Paper Lenth 3 Sensor
1 3 0604-001393
RADF PCA Paper Width 1 2 3
5V
JC92-03002B Sensor 1 2
0604-001393 1
3
Paper Width 2 Sensor 2 5V 3
5V 0604-001393 Paper 1 2 5V
Lenth 2 Sensor 1
0604-001393 Paper Lenth 2 Sensor

0604-001393
Exit Sensor
0604-001393
0
Scan Joint PCA RADF PCA I/F Length , width Sensor

JC92-02781A -2mm / 10x2p -1.5mm / 15x1p
24V 1 1 24V 5V 1 5V
24V 2 2 24V GND 2
24V 3 3 24V nSENS_P_LENGTH1 3
24V 4 4 24V
24V 5 5 24V 5V 4 5V
GND 6 6 GND GND 5
5V 7 7 5V nSENS_P_LENGTH2 6
5V 8 8 5V
GND 9
JC39-02133A 9 GND 5V 7 5V
5VS 10 10 5VS GND 8 JC39-01625A
nRESET_ADF 11 24V 11 nRESET_ADF nSENS_P_WIDTH1 9
RXD 12 12 RXD
TXD 13 13 TXD 5V 10 5V
POS1 14 14 POS1 GND 11
nDETECT_P_ADF 15 15 nDETECT_P_ADF nSENS_P_WIDTH2 12
nDETECT_ADF 16 16 nDETECT_ADF
GND 17 17 GND 5V 13 5V
GND 18 18 GND GND 14
GND 19 19 GND nSENS_P_WIDTH3 15
GND 20 20 GND
EXIT SENSOR
-2mm / 3x1p RADF PCA
5V 3 5V 1 5V JC92-03002B
2 2 GND
JC39-01623A 3 nSENS_P_EXIT
JC39-02451A 1

Figure 4-25 Document feeder (2 of 2)
24V
5V 5V 5V
Regi Clutch 3 3 3
JC47-00033G 2 5V2 2
1 1 1
Cover Open Detect ADF Motor
Sensor Sensor JC31-00156C
0604-001393 Regi Sensor 0604-001393
9
0604-001393 8
7
6
5
3.3V
24V 4
3
2
Exit Idle 1
3 Sensor Pickup
2
1 0604-001393 Clutch
5V JC47-00033G 24V
EXIT SOLENOID
JC33-00007A
(;,7,'/(6(1625 5HJL&RYHURSHQGHWHFW6HQVRU
-1.5mm / 3x1p -1.5mm / 9x1p
͢ ͦ· 5V
JC39-01622A ͢ ͦ· ͣ ͸Ϳ͵
JC39-01627A ͣ ͸Ϳ͵ ͤ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐ΃Ͷ͸ͺ͢
5V ͤ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐͶΉͺ΅ΐͺ͵ͽͶ
ͥ ͦ· 5V
ͦ ͸Ϳ͵ JC39-01627A
ͶΩΚΥ͑ΤΠΝΖΟΠΚΕ ͧ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐʹ΀·Ͷ΃ΐ΀΁ͶͿ
-2mm / 2x1p
͢ ΁Έ;ΐͶΉͺ΅ΐ΄΀ͽ
ͨ ͦ· 5V
ͩ ͸Ϳ͵
ͣ ͣͥ· ͪ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐ͵Ͷ΅Ͷʹ΅
24V
RADF PCA
JC92-03002B
΄ΔΒΟ͑ΤΖΟΤΠΣ͑͠ΡΚΔΜΦΡ͝΃ΖΘΚ͑ʹΝΦΥΔΙ
-1.5mm / 7x1p ;ΠΥΠΣ
-1.5mm / 9x1p
͢ ͦ·
ͣ ͸Ϳ͵ ͢ ͷ͸ʹͼ͢
ͤ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐ΄ʹͲͿ ͣ ͹Έ͢
ͤ ͹·͢
24V ͢ ͣ 24V ͥ ͣͥ· ͥ ͹Ά͢ JC39-01621A
ͣ ͢ ͦ ΁ͺʹͼΆ΁ΐʹͽΆ΅ʹ͹ΐʹ ͦ ͸Ϳ͵
ͧ ͤͤ͟·
3.3V
JC39-01627A ͧ ͣͥ· ͨ Έ͢
͢ ͣ ͨ ΃Ͷ͸ͺΐʹͽΆ΅ʹ͹ΐʹ ͩ ·͢
ͣ ͢ 24V ͪ Ά͢
24V
Image formation section

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the image formation section.
ENWW Image formation section 893

Figure 4-26 Deve crum
24V
4
3
9 8A 2
-020 1
39
JC DEVE CRUM

(ECB)
CN49, Front Mono
1 DGND
2 nCOVER_FRONT_CON
3 5V1_SLP
1 8 4 DGND
2 7 JC39-02094A 5 nDETECT_WASTE_INST_CON
24V 3 6 6 DGND
4 5 7 ADC_WASTE_LEVEL_CON
5 4 8 EN_WASTE_LED
6 3 9 5V_LP
7 2 10 OUT_FAN_FUSER
8 1 11 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER_CON
12 DGND
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 DUCT_COUNT
16 DGND
17 TC_VIN_K
18 24V1_LP
24V 19 TSEN_VCONT_K
20 3.3V_CRUM
21 SDA_CRUM_DEVE_K
22 SCL_CRUM_DEVE_K
23 DGND
24 N.C

Figure 4-27 TC sensor
4
3
TC SENSOR 2
1
3.3V
(ECB)
CN49, Front Mono
A
98
20
-0
1 DGND
39
2 nCOVER_FRONT_CON
JC
3 5V1_SLP
8 1 4 DGND
7 2 5 nDETECT_WASTE_INST_CON
6 3 6 DGND
5 4 7 ADC_WASTE_LEVEL_CON
4 5 8 EN_WASTE_LED
3 6 JC39-02094A 9 5V_LP
3.3V 2 7 10 OUT_FAN_FUSER
1 8 11 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER_CON
12 DGND
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 DUCT_COUNT
16 DGND
17 TC_VIN_K
18 24V1_LP
19 TSEN_VCONT_K
20 3.3V_CRUM
21 SDA_CRUM_DEVE_K
22 SCL_CRUM_DEVE_K
3.3V 23 DGND
24 N.C
ENWW Image formation section 895

Figure 4-28 Toner crum
(ECB)
CN7, Toner
1 A_DUCT
2 nA_DUCT
3 nB_DUCT
4 B_DUCT
5 DGND
6 nA_TONER_DC_K
7 5V2_LP
8 DGND
9 TONER_COUNT_K_CON
10 5V2_LP
11 ON_ERASER_K
12 3.3V_CRUM
4 JC39-02737A
3 13 SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_K
2 14 SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_K
1
3.3V 3.3V
15 DGND
TONER CRUM
Optional dual-cassette feeder (DCF)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the optional dual-cassette feeder (DCF).

Figure 4-29 Pickup motor 1/2, feed motor, paper size sensor 1/2 and cover open sensor (DCF)
DCF PCA (JC92-02978A) JC39-01690A
Engine Controller
CN7, Engine interface
Board (ECB)
CN3, Side cover open

24V4 1 24V
nSIDECOVER_OPEN 2
CN5, Motor interface

N.C 1
N.C 2
A_FEED 3
nA_FEED 4 24V
nB_FEED 5
B_FEED 6
N.C 7
N.C 8
A_PICKUP1 9
nA_PICKUP1 10 24V
nB_PICKUP1 11 JC39-01691A
B_PICKUP1 12 Cover open sensor
A_PICKUP2 13 with harness 24V
nA_PICKUP2 14 24V (JC39-01696A)
nB_PICKUP2 15
B_PICKUP2 16
N.C 17
Pickup motor 1 4
CN9, Paper size 1,2 3
(JC93-00452A), 2
nCASSETTE1_OPEN 1 1
24V
GND 2 4
ADC_P_SIZE1 3 3.3V Pickup motor 2 3
(JC93-00452A) 2 24V
3.3V 4 1
nCASSETTE2_OPEN 5 6
GND 6 4
ADC_P_SIZE2 7 3 24V
3.3V 1
3.3V 8
Feed motor
JC39-01695A
(JC31-00033B)
3.3V
4
3
2
Paper size sensor 1
1 (JC93-00018B)
4
3 Paper size sensor 2
3.3V
2 (JC93-00018B)
1
ENWW Optional dual-cassette feeder (DCF) 897

Figure 4-30 Feed sensor 1, empty sensor 1, and lift sensor 1 for Tray 4 (DCF)
Feed sensor 1
(0604-001381) Pickup assembly for tray 4
3
5V 2
1
DCF PCA
(JC92-02978A)
CN6, Sensor interface
5V 1 5V_SUSP
1 9
2 GND
2 8
3 7
3 nSENS_P_EMPTY1
4 6 4 5V_SUSP
5V 5
5 5 GND
JC39-01692A
6 4 6 nSENS_LIFT1_LIMIT
7 3 7 GND
JC39-01693A 8 2 8 nSENS_P_FEED1
9 1 5V
9 5V_SUSP
10 5V_SUSP
11 GND
12 nSENS_P_EMPTY2
13 5V_SUSP
14 GND
15 nSENS_LIFT2_LIMIT
16 GND
17 nSENS_P_FEED2
18 5V_SUSP
3
5V
2
1
5V 3 Empty
2 sensor 1
1 Lift (0604-001393)
sensor 1
(0604-001393)

Figure 4-31 Feed sensor 2, empty sensor 2, and lift sensor 2 for Tray 5 (DCF)
Feed sensor 2
(0604-001381) Pickup assembly for tray 5
3
2
5V 1
DCF PCA
(JC92-02978A)
CN6, Sensor interface
1 5V_SUSP
2 GND
3 nSENS_P_EMPTY1
4 5V_SUSP
5 GND
6 nSENS_LIFT1_LIMIT
7 GND
8 nSENS_P_FEED1
JC39-01693A 9 5V_SUSP
1 9
2 8 5V
10 5V_SUSP
3 7 11 GND
4 6 12 nSENS_P_EMPTY2
5 5 JC39-01692A 13 5V_SUSP
6 4 14 GND
7 3 5V 15 nSENS_LIFT2_LIMIT
8 2
9 1 16 GND
17 nSENS_P_FEED2
5V 18 5V_SUSP
3
2 5V
3 1
2 Empty
5V sensor 2
1 Lift
sensor 2 (0604-001393)
(0604-001393)
Optional high-capacity input (HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the optional high-capacity input (HCI).
ENWW Optional high-capacity input (HCI) 899

Figure 4-32 Pickup, feed and lift motors, cover and cassette sensors (HCI)
Cover open sensor

with harness 24V
Pickup/lift 1 motor
4
24V 3 (JC93-00452A)
3 5V
2
2
1
1
Cassette installation
sensor
(0604-001393)
6
Feed motor
24V 4 (JC31-00033B)
3
1
JC39-02601A Shift motor
Lift 2 motor
(JC31-00109A) (JC31-00125A)
24V 2 2 24V
JC39-02282A 1 1
CN601 CN901
B_PICK_LIFT1 1 3.3V 1
nB_PICK_LIFT1 2 SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2
nA_PICK_LIFT1 3 24V SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3
A_PICK_LIFT1 4 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4
B_FEED 5 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5
nB_FEED 6 SENS_P_SUB_END 6
nA_FEED 7 24V SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7 JC39-02286A
A_FEED 8 HCI PCA SENS_SOL_HOME 8

DGND 9 (JC92-02738G) NC 9
nSIDE_C_OPEN_IN 10 24V SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11
CN902 GND 12
LIMIT_SW_OUT 1 24V OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13
OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2 2 24V 14
NC 3 VCC 15
5V
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT1 4 24V DGND 16
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT2 5 SENS_NO_CST 17
NC 6

Figure 4-33 PCA, sub PCA and ECB (HCI)
HCI PCA (JC92-02738G)

CN301
nSYNC_TRAY 1
nCMD_REQ_TRAY 2
DETECT_TRAY_OPEN 3
NC 4
nDETECT_TRAY (DGND) 5
DGND 6
DGND 7 Engine
DGND 8 Controller
DGND 9 JC39-02600A
Board
24V 10
24V 11
(ECB)
24V 12
5V 13
5V 14
5VS 15
nRST_TRAY 16
RXD_ENG2TRAY 17
TXD_TRAY2ENG 18
CN901 CN5
3.3V 1 8 3.3V
SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2 9 nP_EMPTY_R
7 7
SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3 6 6 10 HOME2
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4 5 5 11 nP_LEVEL2_F
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5 4 4 12 nP_LEVEL1_F
3 3
SENS_P_SUB_END 6 13 END
2 2
SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7 JC39-02286A 1 1 JC39-02356A 14 HOME1
SENS_SOL_HOME 8 7 7 1 SOL_HOME
6 6 2 GND
NC 9
5 5
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10 4 4 3 nP_LEVEL2_R
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11 3 3 4 nP_LEVEL1_R
GND 12 2 2 5 GND
1 1
OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13 6 SOL_A
24V 14 7 SOL_B
VCC 15
DGND 16
HCI sub PCA
SENS_NO_CST 17 (JC92-02792A)

Figure 4-34 Feed, limit, empty and main sensors (HCI)
Feed sensor
(0604-001393)
Limit switch 3
2
with harness 1 5V
5V
Main limit sensor

(0604-001393)
3
5V 2
1
3
5V 2
1 Empty main
sensor
(0604-001393)
JC39-02602A
HCI PCA (JC92-02738G)

CN502
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
1 14 3 SENS_P_EMPTY_MAIN
2 13
3 12 4 VCC
4 11 5V
5 GND
5 10
6 9 6 SENS_P_MAIN_LIMIT
7 8 JC39-02280A 7 GND
8 7
8 SENS_PREFEED
9 6
10 5 9 VCC
11 4 10 GND
12 3 5V
13 2 11 SENS_PATH
14 1 12 VCC
5V 13 LIMIT_SW_IN
14 LIMIT_SW_OUT

Figure 4-35 Level and home sensors (HCI)
CN6 HCI sub PCA

1 SOL_B (JC92-02792A)
2 NC CN4
24V
3 SOL_A VCC 1
GND 2 3.3V
CN1 nP_LEVEL1_R 3
1 VCC VCC 4
1 3 3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 5
2 2
3 1 3 nP_LEVEL1_F nP_LEVEL2_R 6
JC39-02352A
4 3 4 VCC VCC 7
5 2 5 GND GND 8 3.3V
6 1 3.3V
6 nP_LEVEL2_F SOL_HOME 9
JC39-02351A JC39-02355A
Level1 front Level1 rear sensor

sensor (0604-001393)
(0604-001393) 3
3
3.3V 3.3V 3
3.3V 2 3.3V
2 24V Solenoid 3 1 2
1 with harness 2 1
3 (JC33-00031B) 1 Level2 rear
2 Solenoid
3.3V 1 Level2 front sensor sensor
home
(0604-001393) (0604-001393)
sensor
(0604-001393)

Figure 4-36 Empty and end sensors (HCI)
HCI sub PCA (JC92-02792A)
CN2 CN 3
1 VCC VCC 1
3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 2
3 HOME1 nP_EMPTY_R 3
4 VCC VCC 4
3.3V 3.3V
5 GND GND 5
6 END HOME2 6
NC 7
JC39-02352A
End sensor JC39-02352A
3.3V 3
2 (0604-001393) Home 2 sensor
1
(0604-001393)
3.3V 3 3.3V
3 2
2 3 1
1 Home1 sensor Empty sensor 2
(0604-001393) 1 3.3V
(0604-001393)

5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)
Learn about the stapler/stacker and booklet maker.
ENWW 905
Product specification and description
Learn about product specifications and descriptions.
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Figure 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher - front view

C1
C4
C3
C2
Figure 5-2 Booklet finisher - front view
C3’
C5
Table 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - front view
Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)
C1 Front door JC90-01444B
C2 Caster cover JC63-04985B (*)
C3 Left lower cover (Stapler/stacker) JC63-05001B (*)
C3' Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B (*)
C4 Left upper cover JC90-01475B (*)
C5 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B, JC63-04978B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.
906 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) ENWW

Figure 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view
C6
2
C7
C8
Table 5-2 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view
C6 Top Output tray JC63-04996B
JC63-05003B (*)
C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B
C8 Rear cover JC63-04988B (*)

Figure 5-4 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view
C9
C10
Table 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view
C9 Top cover JC90-01446B
C10 Top door JC90-01445B (*)

ENWW Product specification and description 907

Figure 5-5 Booklet finisher – front-right view
C11
C14 C12
C13
Table 5-4 booklet finisher - front-right view
C11 Right upper cover JC90-01448B (*)
C12 Front cover JC63-04986B
C13 Front lower cover JC63-04987B
C14 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B

Specification
Learn about the specifications of the stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Finisher
Table 5-5 Finisher specifications

Item Stapler/stacker Finisher Booklet Finisher
Speed PPM 18.3~70,(90ppm) 18.3~70,(90ppm)
Stack Capacity (A4/ Main 3,000 sheets 2,000 sheets

Letter 80gsm)
Top 250 sheets 250 sheets
Paper Size Main 98mm - 320mm x 139.7mm - 457.2mm Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457
(3.86in - 12.59in x 5.5in - 18in)
Top 98mm - 320mm x 148.0mm - 430.0mm 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200)
(3.86in - 12.59in x 5.83in -16.93in)
Paper Weight Main 52 ~ 350 gsm 52 ~ 350 gsm
Top 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

Table 5-5 Finisher specifications (continued)
Item Stapler/stacker Finisher Booklet Finisher
Offset (Non Staple) 15mm(minimum) 15mm(minimum)
※Exception SRA3 and larger size.
Staple Clinching position ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat) ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat)
● Dual ● Dual
Paper weight 52~256 gsm 52~256 gsm
Capacity 65 sheets (90gsm) 65 sheets (90gsm)
Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge 5,000 clinching/cartridge
Offline Yes Yes
Hole Punch Paper weight 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm
available unit (Auto NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish

change)
Booklet
Table 5-6 Booklet maker Specification
Item Description
Set Speed PPM 18.3~70(90ppm)
Paper size B5 SEF ~ 12'' x 18''
Paper weight 60 ~ 120 gsm
Staple + Fold Capacity(80gsm) 25 sheets
Fold Capacity(80gsm) 5 sheets
Tray Capacity 5 sets / 25 sheets
Staple Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge
C - Folding 3 sheets
Letter SEF, A4 SEF
Physical
Table 5-7 Physical
Option Size Module Weight Packed Weight
Module (Reference) W X D X H [mm] [Kg] [Kg]
Stapler/stacker Finisher 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 40 62
Booklet Finisher 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 62 84.5
Hole Punch 80 x 485 x 235 2.8 4.1

Paper size
Table 5-8 Paper size specification

Name Paper size Orientat Out put Staple position Punch Booklet C-
ion Maker Folding
mm Inches directio Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
n 2/4H h 4H
52-35 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

0g fs H H H H
et
A5 210 8.3X5. LEF X X X F/R X X X X

X14 8
8
State 216 8.5X5. LEF X X X F/R X X X X

ment X14 5
0
Latter 279 11X8. LEF X X X F/R X X X X X X

X21 5
6
A4 297 8.3X1 LEF X X X F/R X X X X X X

X21 1.7
0
B5(JIS) 257 10.1× LEF X X X F/R X X X X X

X18 7.2
2
B5(ISO 250 9.8×6. LEF X X X F/R X X X X X

) X17 9
6
Execut 267 10.5X LEF X X X F/R X X X X X X

ive X18 7.3
4
No 9 98X 3.9X8. SEF X

Env 225 9
Monar 98. 3.9×7. SEF X

ch Env 4×1 5
90.
5
PostC 101 4.0×6. SEF X

ard . 0
6×1
4x6 52.
4
A6 105 4.1X5. SEF X

X14 8
8
No 10 105 4.1×9. SEF X

Env ×24 5
1
DL Env 110 4.3×8. SEF X

×22 7
0

Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)
ion Maker Folding
n 2/4H h 4H
52-35 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

0g fs H H H H
et
C6 Env 114 4.5×6. SEF X

×16 4
2
B6 128 5.0x7. SEF X

x18 2
2
State 140 5.5X8. SEF X X X X

ment X21 5
6
A5 148 5.8X8. SEF X X X X

X21 3
0
C5 Env 162 6.4×9. SEF X

×22 0
9
B5(ISO 176 6.9×9. SEF X X X F/R X X X

) ×25 8
0
B5(JIS) 182 7.2X1 SEF X X X F/R X X X X

X25 0.1
7
Execut 184 7.3X1 SEF X X X F/R X X X X

ive X26 0.5
7
16k 195 7.7X1 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X

X27 0.6
0
A4 210 8.3X1 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X X

X29 1.7
7
Legal 216 8.5X1 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X

X35 4
6
Letter 216 8.5X1 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X X

X27 1
9
Folio 216 8.5X1 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X

X33 3
0

Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)
ion Maker Folding
n 2/4H h 4H
52-35 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

0g fs H H H H
et
Oficio 215 8.5×1 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X

. 3.5
9×3
42.
9
C4 Env 229 9.1X1 SEF X

×32 2.8
4
Tabloi 254 10 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X X

d X37 X14.7
4
B4 257 10X14 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X X X

X36 .3
4
8K 270 10.6X SEF X X X F/R X X X X X X X

X39 15.4
0
Ledge 279 11X17 SEF X X X F/R X X X X X X X

r X43
2
A3 297 11.7X SEF X X X F/R X X X X X X X

X42 16.5
0
Tabloi 304 12×18 SEF X X X

d .
8×4
Extra 57.
2
SRA3 320 12.6× SEF X X

×45 17.7
0
13"x1 330 13x19 SEF X

9.2" x48 .2
7
Custo W9 W3.86 - X NA O NA NA NA N N N N NA NA NA
m 8-3 -12.5 A A A A
20 9
L13 L5.5-1
9.7 8
-45
7.2

* F/R means Front side and Rear side can be supported.
Media performance
Table 5-9 Media performance

Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM
Cover Content C-Fold
Plain (71-90 g/m2) X X X X X X X
Thick (91-105 g/m2) X X X X X
Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) X X X X X
Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 X X X X X

g/m²)
Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 X X X X X

g/m2)
Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 X X X X

g/m2)
Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 X

g/m2)
Thin (60-70 g/m2) X X X X X X X
Cotton (75-90 g/m2) X X
Colored (75-90 g/m2) X X X X X X X
Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) X X X X X X X
Recycled (60-90 g/m2) X X X X X X X
Bond X X X X X X
Archive (75-105 g/m2) X X X X X X
Letter Head X X X X X X
Pre-Punched X X X
Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) X X X X
Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) X X X
Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) X X X
Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 X X

g/m²)
Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 X

g/m2)
Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) X X X X X
Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) X X X X
Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) X X X X
Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X

Table 5-9 Media performance (continued)
Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM
Cover Content C-Fold
Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) X
Transparency (138~146 gsm) X X X
Labels (120~150 gsm) X
Tab X X X

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system
Learn about the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system.
Overview
Learn about the overview of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Work flow
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher work flow
Figure 5-6 Work flow overview

6. Top output tray
14. Paper holding 5. Top exit
4. Tray diverter
13. Main output tray
3. Punch
2. Entrance
7. Main exit 1. Bridge
8. Paddle
10. Tamper
12. Ejector
9. End fence 15. Buﬀer
11. Stapler
16. Booklet entrance

19. Booklet presser
24. Booklet exit
23. Booklet diverter 21. Booklet stapler
17. Booklet paddle
22. Booklet fold
20. Booklet tamper
25. Booklet output tray
18. Booklet end fence
Table 5-10 work flow overview

Item Unit Description
1 Bridge unit Moves paper from the printer to the finisher.
2 Entrance unit Allows paper to move into the finisher.
3 Punch unit(optional) Holes in a specific location on paper sheet.
4 Tray diverter unit Changes the paper direction whether it is main output tray or top output tray.
5 Top exit unit Moves paper from the diverter to the top output tray.
6 Top output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.

Table 5-10 work flow overview (continued)
7 Main exit unit Moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit with forward direction or to the buffer
unit with backward direction.
8 Paddle unit Pushes to the end fence to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.
9 End fence unit Sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.
10 Tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper.
11 Stapler unit Staples a bundle of an aligned documents.
12 Ejector unit Transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the output tray.
13 Main output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.
14 Paper holding unit Keeps paper static and controls the output tray movement.
15 Buffer unit Maintains paper inside the unit for a while or moves it to the booklet maker.
16 Booklet entrance unit Receives the paper into the booklet maker.
17 Booklet paddle unit Pushes to the booklet end fence.
18 Booklet end fence unit Supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper to the
designated position for folding and stapling.
19 Booklet presser unit Presses paper that enters to the booklet tamper unit to prevent paper shuffled.
20 Booklet tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper to make booklet.
21 Booklet stapler unit Staples a bundle of aligned documents to make a booklet.
22 Booklet fold unit Fold a bundle of aligned documents as a booklet.
23 Booklet diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the booklet exit unit or the location to make c-fold.
24 Booklet exit unit Moves paper to the booklet output tray.
25 Booklet output tray unit Stacks the bundle of booklet.

Sensor
Figure 5-7 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1
S12
S11 S1
S10 S2
S9
S3
S8 S4
S5
S7
S6
Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description
S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into the
sensor bridge entrance unit.
S2 Bridge door 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Photo interrupter Checks whether the bridge door is
sensor opened.
S3 Bridge exit 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes into the
sensor bridge exit unit.
S4 Tray diverter 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Photo interrupter Checks whether the tray diverter
home sensor locates at the home position.
S5 Main exit cam 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Photo interrupter Check whether the main exit CAM
S6 Front tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Photo interrupter Checks whether the front tamper
S7 End fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Photo interrupter Checks whether the end fence locates
sensor at the home position.
S8 Paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paddle locates at
sensor the home position.
S9 Rear tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Photo interrupter Checks whether the rear tamper
S10 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into the
main exit unit.
S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Photo interrupter Checks whether paper comes into the
top exit unit.
S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into the
entrance unit.

Figure 5-8 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2
S35 S13
S34
S14
S33
S15
S32 S16
S31
S17
S30 S18
S29
S19
S28 S20
S21
S27
S26 S22
S23
S25
S24
Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2
S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Paper sensor Checks whether paper exits out of the
buffer unit
S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Paper sensor Checks whether paper is on the
ejector or not.
S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the top output tray is
paper full sensor full or not.
S16 Buffer home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Photo interrupter Checks whether the buffer roller and
sensor the idle roller whether attached or
detached.
S17 Front Paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Photo interrupter Checks whether the location of the
holding sensor paper holding actuator for controlling
the position of the main output tray.
S18 Front door switch JC39-02309A 113-2182 Switch Check whether the front door is open.
S19 Manual staple 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Photo interrupter Check whether the paper comes into
sensor the manual staple position.
S20 Main output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 LED IR, Photo TR Check whether the main output tray
top of stack reaches the top of stack.
sensor
S21 Stapler front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Photo interrupter Makes the stapler positioned in
sensor accordance with the manual stapling
position.
S22 Paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Photo interrupter Checks whether the paper holding
home sensor actuator locates at the home position.

Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2 (continued)
S23 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector2 motor is
sensor operational.
S24 Stapler mid front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Photo interrupter Make the stapler positioned at the
sensor exact stapling position.
S25 Stapler mid rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Photo interrupter Make the stapler positioned at the
sensor exact stapling position.
S26 Main output tray 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Photo interrupter Checks whether the lower limit of the
lower limit output tray (=output tray is full).
sensor
S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 motor is
sensor operational.
S28 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 locates
sensor at the end position.
S29 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector1 locates
S30 Stapler rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Photo interrupter Checks whether the stapler locates at
sensor the home(rear) position.
S31 Rear paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Photo interrupter Checks whether the location of the
holding sensor paper holding actuator for controlling
the position of the main output tray.
S32 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Photo interrupter Checks whether the ejector2 locates
S33 Main output tray 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Photo interrupter Checks whether the Main output tray
motor sensor motor is operational.
S34 Main output tray JC39-02316A 113-2190 Switch Checks whether the main output tray
top of stack reaches at the top of stack.
switch
S35 Top door switch JC39-02310A 113-2181 Switch Checks whether the top door is open.

Figure 5-9 Sensor – Booklet finisher
S46
S36 S37
S45
S44 S38
S39
S43 S40
S41
S42
Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher
S36 Booklet entrance 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Photo Checks whether paper comes into
sensor interrupter the bridge entrance unit.
S37 Booklet presser 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Photo Checks whether the booklet presser
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.
S38 Booklet tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Photo Checks whether the booklet tamper
S39 Booklet c-fold 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Photo Checks whether the booklet c-fold
blade home interrupter blade locates at the home position.
sensor
S40 Booklet diverter 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Photo Checks whether the booklet diverter
S41 Booklet paddle 0604-001393 (*) 113-3090 Photo Checks whether the booklet paddle
S42 Booklet end 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Photo Checks whether the booklet end
fence home interrupter fence locates at the home position.
sensor
S43 Booklet output JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether paper goes out on
tray sensor the booklet output tray.
S44 Booklet exit JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the booklet exit unit.
S45 Booklet blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Photo Checks whether the booklet blade
S46 Booklet tamper JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the booklet tamper unit.

Figure 5-10 Sensor – Paper path
S15 S11 S10 S4
S12
S1
S13 S3
S20
S36
S26
S43
S46
S44
S43

Motor and solenoid
Figure 5-11 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher
M13 M14
M12
M11
M10 M1
SL1
M9 M2
M3
M8
M7 M4
M5
M6
Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher
M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the paddle and moves the
paddle pusher up and downward at
the same time.
M2 Main exit cam JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Step motor Rotates the main exit cam to detach
motor the exit roller from the exit idle roller.
M3 End fence motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Step motor Moves front and rear end fence
depending on paper size(width) so
that paper is well arranged at the
end fence.
M4 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Step motor Moves the front tamper unit.
motor
M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 DC motor Moves the ejector2 and grabs paper.
M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 DC motor Moves the ejector1 forward and
backward
M7 Paper holding JC93-01156A (*) 113-2510 Step motor Moves paper holding actuator up
motor when paper goes out to the output
tray
M8 Stapler position JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Hybrid Step Moves the stapler.
motor motor
M9 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Step motor Moves the rear tamper unit.
motor
SL1 Buffer Solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Solenoid Holds paper not to fall out to the
booklet maker during buffering task.
M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Step motor Moves paper to the buffer space or
the booklet maker.

Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher (continued)
M11 Main output tray JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 DC motor Moves the main output tray up and
motor down.
M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Hybrid Step Operates the entrance roller, middle
motor roller, and top middle roller when
driving in the forward and moves the
diverter cam when driving in the
backward.
M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Hybrid Step Rotates the main exit roller and the
motor top exit roller.
M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Hybrid Step Rotates the bridge entrance roller,
motor the bridge middle roller and the
bridge exit roller.
Figure 5-12 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher
M23 M15
M16
M22
M17
M21
M18
M19
M20 SL2 71
Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher

M15 Booklet entrance JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Step motor Rotates the booklet entrance roller.
motor
M16 Booklet presser JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Step motor Operates the booklet presser.
motor
M17 Booklet C-fold JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Step motor Drives the booklet c-fold blade and
blade motor the moving guide.
M18 Booklet diverter JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Step motor Drives the booklet diverter
motor
M19 Booklet paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the booklet paddle.
motor

Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher (continued)
M20 Booklet end JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Step motor Moves the booklet end fence up and
fence motor down.
M21 Booklet Fold JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 BLDC motor Rotates the booklet fold roller, the
motor booklet c-fold roller, and the booklet
exit roller.
M22 Booklet blade JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 BLDC motor Drives the booklet blade.
motor
M23 Booklet tamper JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Step motor Moves the booklet tamper unit.
motor
SL2 Booklet end JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 Solenoid Operates the gripper of the booklet
fence solenoid end fence to grip paper that comes
in the booklet end fence.
NOTE: The motor sensor which is mounted near the driving motor detects whether the motor is operating or
not. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an event code only for the motor will occur. On the other hand, the home
position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference position or location when the specific unit is
operating.
Figure 5-13 Motor sensor in the ejector unit
Motor sensor
Motor
Figure 5-14 Home sensor in the stapler unit
Home sensor

Roller
Figure 5-15 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

R9
R1
R2
R8
R3
R7
R4
R6 R5
Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description
R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
bridge unit.
R2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
bridge unit.
R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit
R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Entrance motor Moves paper from the entrance unit to the
exit unit
R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Entrance motor Moves paper from the entrance unit to the
exit unit
R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Buffer motor Moves paper to the booklet maker, and
makes the gap between the buffer roller
and the idle roller so that paper stays for
the buffering.
R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Exit motor Main Moves paper to the ejector unit or the
exit cam motor buffer unit and makes the gap between the
main exit roller and the idle roller so that
paper stays for the buffering.
R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Entrance motor Moves paper to the top output tray.
R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Exit motor Moves paper to the top output tray.

Figure 5-16 Roller – Booklet finisher
R10
R13
R11
R12
Table 5-17 Roller – Booklet finisher
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description
R10 Booklet entrance JC66-04717A Booklet Moves paper from the machine to the
roller entrance motor bridge unit.
R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Booklet fold Presses a stack of paper to fold completely.
motor
R12 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A (*) Booklet fold In case of c-fold, presses a stack of paper to
motor fold completely.
R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Booklet fold Moves paper to the booklet output tray unit
motor

PCA
Figure 5-17 PCA
P1
P3
P2
Table 5-18 PCA
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Description
P1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and
accepts the button input for manual staple.
P2 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02789B (*) This PCA controls the booklet maker module and
consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
P3 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A (*) This PCA controls the finisher modules and
consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
Not Hole punch PCA - This PCA controls the hole punch module and
shown consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
Bridge unit
The Bridge Unit is the asset to transfer paper from the printer to the finisher. The bridge entrance sensor (S1)
detects paper entering the bridge unit from the printer. In the same way, the bridge exit sensor (S3) checks that
the paper leaves from the bridge unit to the finisher. The bridge motor (M14) drive the bridge entrance roller,
bridge middle roller, and bridge exit roller. It makes paper moves through the bridge unit. The jam removal door
locating at the front side of the unit helps user to remove the jammed paper.

Figure 5-18 Bridge unit overview
R1
R2
M14 R3
S1
S2
S3
Figure 5-19 Bridge unit detail view

R3 R2 R1
M14
S2
S1
U1
S3
Table 5-19 Bridge unit parts information
No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description
U1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B (*) Moves paper from the printer to the finisher.
S2 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Detects if the bridge door is open.
S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Checks whether paper comes into the bridge
sensor entrance unit.
S3 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Checks whether paper move out of the
bridge unit.
M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the bridge
middle roller and the bridge exit roller.
R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the bridge
roller unit.

Table 5-19 Bridge unit parts information (continued)
R2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the bridge
unit.
R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the bridge unit to the
finisher entrance unit.
Entrance unit
Entrance unit moves paper from the bridge unit to the inside of the finisher.The Entrance sensor (S12) installed
at the right side of the unit senses that the paper is entering the unit. The Entrance motor (M12) rotates forward
to drive the entrance roller and the middle roller to move paper to the exit unit.
Figure 5-20 Entrance unit overview
M12 S12
R4
R5
Figure 5-21 Entrance unit detail view - front
R4
R5
R3
R4

Figure 5-22 Entrance unit detail view - rear
M12
Figure 5-23 Entrance unit detail view - right
S12
Table 5-20 Entrance unit parts information
S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Detects whether paper enters at the
entrance unit.
M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Operates the entrance roller and middle
roller when driving forward.
R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to the
exit unit.
R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to the
exit unit.
Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
positioned right after the entrance unit.

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory —Y1G10A
● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory — Y1G11A
● HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory — Y1G12A
NOTE: Puncher types are various depending on the country.
In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
forward, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make the holes on
the paper. When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the backward direction and the inner gear rotates to the
left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the hole-punches are detected and controlled by the 3
punch position sensors.
Figure 5-24 Punch unit overview
Figure 5-25 Punch unit detail view

5 6 1 2
5 4 3
Table 5-21 Punch unit parts information
Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description
U1 Punch unit
2-3 hole Y1G10A (*)
2-4 hole Y1G11A (*)
Swedish hole Y1G12A (*)
1 Punch scan home sensor 113-4000 Detects the home position of the
punch unit

Table 5-21 Punch unit parts information (continued)
3 Punch scan edge sensor 113-4010 Check the paper width to make
hole on the right position of paper.
113-4011
113-4012
113-4013
2 Punch scan motor 113-4500 Transmits the force to move the

punch unit in the horizontal
direction.
4 Punch position sensor 113-4020 Detects the travel distance and

position of the hole-punches.
113-4030
113-4031
5 Punch motor sensor 113-4040 Checks whether the punch motor

is operational
6 Punch motor 113-4510 Transmits the force to make holes

on the paper
(*) This part is in system.
Punch unit operation
1. A paper enters into the punch unit, and it is aligned to drill holes.
2. The motor rotates forward or backward, then the punch rail in the punch unit moves in order to move the
punch hole makers (callout 1).

3. The punch position sensors determine the punch rail location (callout 2). It drives the punch hole makers up
and down to make holes (callout 3).
4. In some paper size, paper might be jammed in a place where punch hole maker is located. Therefore, the
punch unit moves left and right (callout 4).
Tray diverter unit

Learn about the Tray diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The tray diverter unit is responsible for determining the paper feed direction so that paper can be ejected to the
main output tray or top output tray.

The entrance motor (M12) rotates this unit. When the entrance motor rotates backward, the phase of the
divertor cam (callout1) changes so that the paper path direction changes. The tray diverter home sensor (S4)
checks whether the tray diverter is located at the home position or not. (callout2).
Figure 5-26 Tray diverter unit overview
M12 1
S4
Figure 5-27 Tray diverter unit detail view – front-top
Figure 5-28 Tray diverter unit detail view – rear
S4

Table 5-22 Tray diverter unit parts information
1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either

the main output tray or the top
output tray
2 Tray diverter cam JC66-04560A 113-2520 Changes the paper path
S4 Tray diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Checks whether home position of
sensor the tray diverter
M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) Operates the tray diverter cam
when driving in the backward
direction.
Tray diverter unit operation
1. When printing or copying documents, the entrance motor operates backward so that the diverter cam
(Callout 2) can be rotate.
2. The direction of the tray diverter(callout1) is changed to the main output tray or the top output tray by the
tray diverter cam(callout2).
2
7RSRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ 0DLQRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ
Top exit unit

Learn about the Top exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The top exit unit sends paper from the tray diverter unit to the top output tray unit.
The top exit sensor(S11) detects paper entry into the top exit unit. The entrance motor(M12) drives the top
middle roller, and the exit motor(M13) transmit the force to rotate the top exit roller so that paper moves to the
top output tray unit.

Figure 5-29 Top exit unit overview
M13 M12
S11
R8
R9
Figure 5-30 Top exit unit detail view – front-top
S11
R9
Table 5-23 Top exit unit parts information
S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Checks whether paper has entered
at the top exit unit
M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Rotates the top middle roller when
driving in the forward direction.
M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the top exit roller
R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Moves paper to the top output tray
R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Moves paper to the top output tray
Top output tray unit

Learn about the Top output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The top output tray unit loads discharged paper from the finisher.

It has the paper pull sensor(S15) to detect whether the tray is full with paper.
Figure 5-31 Top output tray unit overview

S15
Figure 5-32 Top output tray unit detail view – front-left
S15
1
Table 5-24 Top output tray unit parts information
1 Top output tray JC63-04996B Loads ejected paper
JC63-05003B (*)
S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 Detects whether paper is
paper full sensor fully staked on the output
(receiver, led) tray.
Main exit unit

Learn about the Main exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The main exit unit delivers paper from the tray diverter unit to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

The main exit sensor (S10) detects whether paper comes in from main exit unit. The exit motor (M13) drives the
main exit roller to send the paper to the ejector unit or buffer unit.
Figure 5-33 Main exit unit overview
M13
S5
M2
R7
S10
Figure 5-34 Main exit unit detail view – (front-rear)
M13
R7
S5
M2
Table 5-25 Main exit unit parts information

S10 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Detects whether paper entered at
the main exit unit

Table 5-25 Main exit unit parts information (continued)
M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the main exit roller
R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit or
the buffer unit
1 Main exit cam Adjusts the gap between the main

exit roller and the idle roller for the
buffering. (*Please refer to ‘buffer
unit’)
S5 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Detects the home position of the
sensor main exit cam
M2 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Rotates the main exit cam.
Main exit unit operation
1. The exit motor(M13) drives forward so that paper will moves towards the ejector unit.
2. On the other hand, if the exit motor rotates backwards paper moves towards the buffer unit.

Paddle unit
Learn about the Paddle unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The paddle unit rotates the rubber paddles mounted on the shaft to move paper to the end fence unit, allowing
paper to be arranged well for the next job. The paddle presser is mounted behind the rubber paddles and
presses the end of paper to help paper be stacked well at the end fence unit. The Paddle home sensor (S8)
checks the home position to drive the paddles. And the paddle motor(M1) drives the paddle and paddle presser.
Figure 5-35 Paddle unit overview
Figure 5-36 Paddle unit detail view - front
Figure 5-37 Paddle unit detail view - left

Table 5-26 Paddle unit parts information
1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence

unit
2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper

helps paper to be loaded well at
the end fence unit
S8 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Detect the home position of the
paddle
M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2600 Rotates the paddle, and moves the
paddle presser up and downward
at the same time
Paddle unit operation
1. A paper falls downward by exit unit.
2. The paddles rotate to make a paper moves into the end fence unit. (callout 1)
3. The paddle presser presses the end of a paper so as not to be scattered. (callout 2).
End fence unit

Learn about the End fence unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to
be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.
End fence motor(M3) operates the two end fences and adjust width of them in order to stack paper correctly. The
end fence home sensor(S7) detects the home position of the end fence.

Figure 5-38 End fence unit overview
Figure 5-39 End fence unit detail view – front
Figure 5-40 End fence unit detail view - left
Table 5-27 End fence unit parts information

1 End fence Aligns top and bottom side of

paper.
S7 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Detects the home position of the
end fence

Table 5-27 End fence unit parts information (continued)
M3 End fence motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Moves front and rear end fence
depending on paper size(width) so
that paper arranged well at the
end fence
End fence unit operation
1. The end fence motor(M3) moves the front and rear end fences in the arrow direction (callout 1) depending
on paper width.
2. Paper goes into the end fence unit by the paddle unit. (callout 2)
3. At the same time the end fence unit aligns paper to the direction of yellow line. (callout 3)
Tamper unit
Learn about the Tamper unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper. When a certain amount of paper
is collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly.
Each tamper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The tamper home sensors are
mounted on the back side of the unit to check the home position of the tamper unit.

Figure 5-41 Tamper unit overview
2 S9
M4
S6 1
Figure 5-42 Tamper unit detail view - left
Figure 5-43 Tamper unit detail view - left-right

M9
2 1
S9
S6 M4

Table 5-28 tamper unit parts information
1 Front tamper JC82-00901A (*) Aligns left and right side of paper.
S6 Front tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Detects the home position of the
sensor tamper unit.
M4 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Moves the front tamper unit.
2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A (*) Aligns left and right side of paper.
S9 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Detects the home position of the
sensor tamper unit.
M9 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Moves the front tamper unit.
Tamper unit operation
1. A stack of paper is arranged at the end fence unit.
2. The left and right tampers arrange them.
3. In case of offset printing, the tamper unit arranges the next bundle to be shifted. (callout 3)

Stapler unit
Learn about the Stapler unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Stapler unitis a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents. Documents are
collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then stapler assembly staples the
bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.
Figure 5-44 Stapling options
The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor(M8) installed inside. The one home sensor (rear sensor, S30) and
two position sensors (mid-front,S24 and mid-rear sensor,S25) are mounted so that the stapler can be positioned
in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on the left, the right, or at the center of the document.
Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler assembly.
In addition, manual staple feature is available on the front-upper side of the finisher. The manual staple
sensor(S19) detects whether a stack of paper comes into the manual staple location or not. The front sensor
(stapler front sensor, S21) makes the stapler moves at the manual staple location.

Figure 5-45 Stapler unit overview
Figure 5-46 Stapler unit detail view - front
Figure 5-47 Stapler unit detail view

M8
S21
S30 S25 S24
Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information

1 Stapler unit JC82-00894A (*) Staples a bundle of paper
2 Staple cartridge JC81-09882B (*) 113-2115 Staple cartridge
113-2116
S21 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Detect the stapler at the manual
stapling position
S24 Stapler mid-front sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Detect the stapler location

Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information (continued)
S25 Stapler mid-rear sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Detect the stapler location
S30 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Detect the home position of the
stapler
S19 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Detect paper when manual
stapling
M8 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Moves the stapler

Stapler unit operation
1. The stapler position motor drives the stapler assembly to direction 1.
2. The stapler assembly moves through the rail using three stapler position sensors (callout2) and staples a
stack of paper.
3. In case of staple cartridge replacement, the stapler moves to direction 3.
4. For manual stapling, the stapler moves in direction 4.

Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The ejector unit ejects a bundle of paper out to the main output tray. The ejector unit consists of ejector1 and
ejector2.
The ejector1 moves a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this process, the
ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And ejector1 motor sensor checks the ejector1
motor operation. And the ejector1 home sensor detects the home position of the ejector1. The ejector1 end
sensor detects the end position of the ejector1.
When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the ejector2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the main
output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor helps it to be
controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home sensor checks the location of the ejector2.
Figure 5-48 Ejector unit overview
1
2
M5
S23
S32
M6
S27

Figure 5-49 Ejector unit detail view - left
1
S32
S23
S27 M6 M5
Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information
Ejector unit JC90-01409A (*)
S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Detects whether paper is

on the ejector or not.
1 Ejector1 Moves the stack of paper

from the end fence to the
ejector2
S29 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector1
S28 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Detects the end position
sensor of the ejector1
S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Detects whether the

sensor Ejector1 motor rotates
M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 Moves the ejector1

forward and backward
2 Ejector2 Moves paper from the

ejector1 to the main
output tray
S32 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector2
S23 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Detects the ejector2

sensor motor rotation

Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information (continued)
M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 Moves the ejector2 and

grabs paper
Ejector unit operation
1. The ejector1(callout1) pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector2 unit(callout2).
S28
1
S29 S14
S27
M6
2. The ejector2(callout2) picks up paper, then moves forward to the main output tray direction.
S23
S32
M5

Main output tray unit
Learn about the Main output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
Printouts are stacked on the main output tray (C7). The main output tray moves up and down along the rails
inside the finisher, and the main output tray motor (M11) controls those movements according to the signals of
the front & rear paper holding sensor. Main output tray motor sensor (S33) checks whether the main output tray
motor rotates properly.
When main output tray hits the lower limit sensor of the main output tray (S26), the machine detects that paper
tray is full. The main output tray top of stack sensor(S20) detects that the main output tray is on the top.
Figure 5-50 Main output tray unit overview
M11
S34
S33
S20
C7
S26

Figure 5-51 Main output tray unit detail view - left
S20
C7
S26
Figure 5-52 Main output tray unit detail view - rear
S33
M11
Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information

C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B Stacking plate for ejected paper
S20 Main output tray top of JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 Checks the upper limit of main
stack sensor (receiver, output tray
led)
S6 Main output tray lower 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Detects the lowest position of the
limit sensor output tray

Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information (continued)
S33 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Detects whether the main output
sensor tray motor rotates
M11 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 Moves the main output tray up
and down
JC90-01415B (*)
S34 Main output tray top of JC39-02316A 113-2190 Checks the upper limit of main
stack switch output tray so that detects
abnormal movement of output
tray
Paper holding unit

Learn about the Paper holding unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The paper holding unit holds printouts on the main output tray. It has a sensor that detects the height of stacked
paper so that the output tray moves up and down to stack paper in a stable manner.
The paper holding motor(M7) lifts the paper holding actuator when printouts come out to the main output tray.
The paper holding home sensor(S22) detects the location of paper holding actuator at the home position. The
front & rear paper holding sensor (S17, S31) checks the volume of printouts on the main output tray and makes
the main output tray move downward
Figure 5-53 Paper holding unit overview
S31
S17
M7 S22

Figure 5-54 Paper holding unit detail view - left
1
S17 S31
S22
Figure 5-55 Paper holding unit detail view - left
M7
Table 5-32 paper holding unit parts information
1 Paper holding actuator Control the height of the main

output tray and hold printouts so
as not to be scattered
S17 Front paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Detects stacked paper position
sensor
S31 Rear paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Detects stacked paper position
sensor
S22 Paper holding home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Detects the home position of
sensor paper holding actuator
M7 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A (*) 113-2510 Lift paper holding actuator up
when printouts delivered to the
main output tray
2 Left upper cover JC90-01475B


paper holding unit operation
1. When printouts are delivered to the main output tray, a paper holding motor moves paper holding actuator
upward to create a paper path to prevent jam (callout1).
2. When printouts are stacked on top of the main output tray, the paper holding actuator goes down to hold
them(callout2).
3. As paper stacks up on the main output tray, the paper holding actuator is lifted by papers. The front & rear
paper holding sensors make the main output tray moves downward to store more printouts. (callout3)

4. As printouts are stacked on the main output tray, the tray goes down. When it reaches at the end of its
moving range (callout 4), the main output tray touches the lower limit sensor. The sensor detects that the
main output tray is full of printouts.
Buffer unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.
The buffer unit keeps paper inside the unit or moves them to the booklet maker.
The buffer diverter creates a paper path so that paper can move to the buffer unit, and the buffer sensor detects
whether paper moved out from the buffer unit. The buffer motor controls buffer roller, and buffer home sensors
checks the location of buffer rollers. The buffer solenoid holds papers so that they do not fall into the booklet
maker while buffering.
NOTE: buffering: It is to maintain print speed when users print multiple copies continuously.
The 1st page of a print job stays in the buffer unit for a moment while the previous job is being ejected. After the
previous print job was ejected, the 1st and 2nd page of the job move to the ejector unit together.

Figure 5-56 Buffer unit overview
SL1
M10
R6
S13
S16
Figure 5-57 Buffer unit detail view - front
S16
R6
Figure 5-58 Buffer unit detail view - rear
M10

Figure 5-59 Buffer unitdetail view - top
SL1
Table 5-33 Buffer unit parts information
1 Buffer diverter JC61-07204A Makes the way to the buffer space
S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Detects whether paper has moved
out from the buffer unit
S16 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Detects the home position of the
buffer roller.
M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Moves paper to the buffer space or
the booklet maker
SL1 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Holds paper to prevent them from
falling out to the booklet maker
during buffering
R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Moves paper to the booklet maker

or makes the gap so that paper
stays in this space.
Buffer unit operation
1. When the buffer motor rotates backward to move the cam, the buffer roller(R6) can have gap and then
paper can stay inside the buffer unit
1. When the exit motor rotates backward to drive the main exit roller(R7), paper moves to the buffer unit
through the buffer diverter(callout1).

2. The main exit cam motor moves the main exit cam so that the main exit roller(R7) is separated with
the idle roller to have a gap, and then paper can stay in this place for a while.
3. When the next sheet comes to the main exit unit, the main exit motor turns the man exit cam so that
the main exit roller is attached to the idle roller.
4. he exit motor rotates forward and operates the main exit roller. It makes 2 paper moves to the ejector
together.

2. In case of booklet job, the buffer unit moves paper to the booklet maker.
1. The buffer motor rotates, the buffer roller(R6) is attached to the idle roller.
2. When paper arrives at the main exit unit, the exit motor rotates backward and moves the main exit
roller(R7) so that paper moves to the buffer unit through the buffer diverter.
3. The buffer motor rotates the buffer roller to move paper to the booklet maker.
Booklet entrance unit

Learn about the Booklet entrance unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet entrance unit receives paper into the booklet maker. The entrance sensor(S36) detects whether the
paper enters the entrance unit. The entrance motor(M15) drives the booklet entrance roller(R10) to move the
paper.

Figure 5-60 Booklet entrance unit overview
Figure 5-61 Booklet entrance unit detail view
Table 5-34 Entrance unit parts information
S36 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Detects whether paper has come
into the booklet entrance unit
M15 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Drives the booklet entrance roller
R10 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet
maker
Booklet paddle unit

Learn about the Booklet paddle unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet paddle unit pushes paper to the booklet end fence by rotating the rubber paddles. The booklet
paddle motor (M19) rotates two booklet paddles, and the booklet paddle home sensor(S41) connected to the
lower booklet paddle checks the home position of the booklet paddle.

Figure 5-62 Booklet paddle unit overview
Figure 5-63 Booklet paddle unit detail view
Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit
1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit
JC61-07225A (*)
JC66-04719A (*)

Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information (continued)
S41 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2590 Check the home position of the
sensor booklet paddle
M19 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Drives two booklet paddles
Booklet end fence unit

Learn about the Booklet end fence unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet end fence unit supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper to the
designated position for folding and stapling. The Booklet end fence motor (M20) moves the booklet end fence up
and down. The booklet end fence home sensor (S42) checks the home position of the booklet end fence. The
booklet end fence solenoid (SL2) drives the clamp to hold paper that comes into the booklet end fence.
Figure 5-64 Booklet end fence unit overview
Figure 5-65 Booklet end fence unit detail view - left

Figure 5-66 Booklet end fence unit detail view - right
Table 5-36 booklet end fence unit parts information
1 Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Supports paper, then moves it to

the designated location to fold or
staple
S42 Booklet end fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet end fence
M18 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Moves the booklet end fence up
and down
Sl2 Booklet end fence JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 drives the clamp to hold paper
solenoid that comes into the booklet end
fence
Booklet end fence unit operation
1. The booklet end fence is located at the home position (callout1). When the booklet maker starts its job, the
end fence goes to the direction 2.

2. The booklet end fence unit supports paper comes from the booklet paddle unit and holds paper so as not
to be scattered(callout3). Then it moves to the certain location to fold or staple it (callout 4).
Booklet presser unit

Learn about the Booklet presser unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet presser unit sort print pages that enter to the booklet maker in order.The Booklet presser motor
(M16) moves the booklet presser, and the booklet presser home sensor (S37) checks whether the booklet
presser is at the home position.
Figure 5-67 Booklet presser unit overview

Figure 5-68 Booklet presser unit detail view
Table 5-37 Booklet presser unit parts information
1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the

entrance unit not to be shuffled
S37 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet presser
M16 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Drives the booklet presser
Booklet presser unit operation
1. Paper comes into the booklet presser unit (callout1). At this time the presser is located on the left side of
the finisher (callout 2).

2. After paper exits the entrance roller, the booklet presser hits the end of paper. (callout 3).
3. When a next sheet arrives at the unit, it will fall on the left side of the previous sheet pushed by the booklet
presser (callout 4).
Booklet tamper unit

Learn about the Booklet tamper unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet tamper unit aligns the left and right side of documents for stapling or folding.
The booklet tamper motor(M23) adjusts the booklet tampers’ width according to paper size. The booklet tamper
home sensor(S38) checks the home position of the booklet tamper.

Figure 5-69 Booklet tamper unit overview
Figure 5-70 Booklet tamper unit detail view
Table 5-38 Booklet tamper unit parts information

1 Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Aligns documents for stapling or

folding.

Table 5-38 Booklet tamper unit parts information (continued)
S38 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet tamper
M23 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Drives the booklet tamper
S46 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110

Booklet tamper unit operation
▲ When a certain amount of paper is collected, the booklet tamper unit hits the left and right sides of the
paper to align the paper correctly.
Booklet stapler unit

Learn about the Booklet stapler unit of the booklet finisher.
Booklet stapler unitis a device installed inside the booklet maker that staples a bundle of aligned documents as a
booklet.
There is only 1 option to make a bundle. If the user selects the option, this unit staples at the two location in the
middle of stacks.
Figure 5-71 Booklet staple option

Figure 5-72 Booklet stapler unit overview
Figure 5-73 Booklet stapler unit detail view
Table 5-39 Booklet stapler unitparts information
1 Booklet stapler JC81-08274B
2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881B (*) 113-3020
113-3030
Booklet stapler unit operation
1. When a stack of sheets is collected in booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout2) changes its
location to be stapled.

2. The booklet stapler(callout1) staples at the middle of stacks.
Booklet fold unit

Learn about the Booklet fold unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet fold unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that folds a bundle of aligned documents as a
This unit consists of 2 types of blades: blade and c-fold blade. So, it creates two types of output.
Figure 5-74 Fold options
The booklet blade motor (M22) drives the booklet blades and lightly folds the stack of paper. The folded paper
passes through the booklet fold rollers to be fully folded. The booklet blade home sensor (S45) checks the home
position of the booklet blade, and the booklet fold motor (M21) drives the rollers that enable folding.
In case of c-fold, the booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade and lightly folds the stack of
paper once more. The folded paper passes through the booklet c-fold roller to be fully folded. The booklet c-fold
blade home sensor(S39) checks the home position of the c-fold blade.

Figure 5-75 Booklet fold unit overview – right-rear
Figure 5-76 Booklet fold unit overview – left-front

Figure 5-77 Booklet fold unit detail view - right
Figure 5-78 Booklet fold unit detail view – left
Figure 5-79 Booklet fold unit detail view – left-front

Table 5-40 Booklet fold unit parts information
1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold.
S45 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet blade.
M22 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 Drives the booklet blade
M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet roller and c-fold
blade
R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be fully

folded
2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold for

the c-fold task
S39 Booklet c-fold blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Checks the home position of the
home sensor booklet c-fold blade
M17 Booklet c-fold blade JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Drives the booklet c-fold blade
motor
R12 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A (*) In case of c-fold, presses a stack of
paper to fold completely.
Booklet fold unit operation
1. In case of v-fold.
1. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1) moves
to a designated location.
2. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push the center of paper.
3. Paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely folded
between the rollers.
4. The folded paper stack is discharged to the booklet output tray via the booklet exit roller(R13).

2. In case of c-fold
1. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1) is
moved to a designated location.
2. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push one-third of paper.
3. he paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely folded
between the rollers.
4. The folded sheets move to s location where they will be c-folded by a booklet diverter.
5. The booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade(callout3), pokes two-thirds of
paper.
6. Paper enters between the booklet c-fold roller(R12) and the booklet fold roller by the booklet c-fold
blade and it is completely folded between the rollers.
Booklet diverter unit

Learn about the Booklet diverter unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet diverter unit determines a paper path to allow the stack of folded paper to exit to the booklet output
tray during the v-fold. In case of c-fold, it makes another paper path so folded sheets can move to a location that
can be c-folded. The booklet diverter motor(M18) drives the booklet diverter, and the booklet diverter home
sensor(S40) checks whether the booklet diverter is at the home position

Figure 5-80 Booklet diverter unit overview
M18
S40
Figure 5-81 Booklet diverter unit detail view – left-front
M18
S40

Table 5-41 Booklet diverter unit parts information
1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for

either the booklet exit unit or the
location for c-fold
S40 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Checks the home position of the
sensor booklet diverter
M18 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Drives the booklet diverter
Booklet diverter unit operation
1. In case of v-fold, the booklet diverter(callout1) determines the paper path so that the folded sheets exit to
the booklet exit unit and into the booklet output tray.
2. On the other hand, in c-fold, it makes another paper path to fold it by c-fold blade(callout2).
Booklet exit unit

Learn about the Booklet exit unit of the booklet finisher.
The booklet exit unit ejects a stack of v-fold paper to the booklet output tray unit. The booklet exit sensor(S44)
detects paper entry into the booklet exit unit, and the booklet fold motor(M19) drives the booklet exit roller(R4)
to discharge paper.

Figure 5-82 Booklet exit unit overview – front-right
Figure 5-83 Booklet exit unit detail view
Table 5-42 Booklet exit unit parts information
S44 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Check whether paper has come
into the booklet unit
M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet exit roller
R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Moves paper to the booklet output
tray unit
Booklet output tray unit

Learn about the Booklet output tray unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet output tray unit is the place where the ejected paper is stacked. The booklet output tray sensor(S43)
detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray or not.
Figure 5-84 Booklet output tray unit overview
Figure 5-85 Booklet output tray unit detail view
Table 5-43 Booklet output tray unit parts information

1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B (*) Stores paper stacks from the
booklet exit unit
JC63-04978B (*)

Table 5-43 Booklet output tray unit parts information (continued)
S43 Booklet output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 Detects whether paper is on the
sensor booklet output tray.pa
How to print large number of booklets
Y1G07A Booklet finisher is support available to print a large number of booklets.
1. Remove the booklet output tray (Callout 1).
2. Install the booklet sub tray at the booklet output (Callout 2).
NOTE:
– The booklet sub tray is included in the Booklet finisher product box. If a user misses the part, order
and use the new part.
– Booklet sub tray part number : JC61-07088A

3. Install a box to store printouts(Callout 3).
PCA connection information

Learn about the PCA connection information.

Figure 5-86 Stapler / Stacker finisher system - PCA connection information
Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information
Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics
CN1 MainPCA
interface
CN2 Front door switch(S35) 113-2181
CN3 Top door switch(S18) 113-2182
CN4 Entrance 113-2570 Buffer sensor(S13) 113-2100

motor(M12)
Entrance sensor(S12) 113-2080
Tray diverter home 113-2020

sensor(S4)
Buffer home sensor(S16) 113-2210
Top exit sensor(S11) 113-2091
Main exit sensor(S10) 113-2090
CN5 Rear tamper 113-2640 Front tamper home 113-2120 Manual staple
motor(M9) sensor(S6) PCA(P3)
Buffer 113-2660 Paddle home sensor(S8) 113-2060

motor(M10)
Paddle 113-2600 Top output tray paper full 113-2145

motor(M1) sensor(S15)

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)
End fence 113-2590 Rear tamper home 113-2130

CN6 Bridge 113-2560 Bridge entrance 113-2070

Bridge door sensor(S2) 113-2180
Bridge exit sensor(S3) 113-2143
CN7 Punch unit
CN8 Exit motor(M13) 113-2580 Main output tray motor 113-2143

sensor(S33)
Main output tray 113-2610 Top output tray paper full 113-2145
CN9 Main output tray top of 113-2190

stack switch(S34)
CN10 Staple clinch Staple home sensor

motor
Stapler position 113-2620 Staple ready sensor

motor (M8)
Staple low sensor
Stapler rear sensor(S30) 113-2110
Stapler mid front 113-2112

sensor(S24)
Stapler mid rear 113-2111

sensor(S25)
CN11 Ejector2 113-2540 Ejector2 motor 113-2041

Ejector1 113-2530 Ejector1 motor 113-2032

Ejector2 home 113-2040

sensor(S32)
Ejector sensor(S14) 113-2170
Ejector1 end sensor(S28) 113-2030
Ejector1 home 113-2031

sensor(S29)
CN12 Front tamper 113-2630 Manual staple 113-2160

End fence home 113-2050

sensor(S7)
Stapler front sensor(S21) 113-2113
CN13 Paper holding 113-2510 Booklet output tray 113-2150


Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)
CN14 Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)
Rear paper holding 113-2142

sensor(S31)
Front paper holding 113-2141

sensor(S17)
Paper holding home 113-2010

sensor(S22)
Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)
CN15 Booklet
interface
CN16 Log
CN17 Main exit cam 113-2500 Main exit cam home 113-2000
Buffer 113-2670
solenoid(SL1)
Figure 5-87 Booklet finisher system - PCA connection information
Table 5-45 Booklet finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information
Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor Diagnostics Switch, Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics
CN1 Stapler/
Stacker
interface
CN4 Booklet staple motor Booklet entrance 113-3100

sensor(S36)
Booklet staple low

sensor

Table 5-45 Booklet finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)
Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor Diagnostics Switch, Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics
Booklet staple home

sensor
CN5 Booklet presser 113-2580 Booklet presser home 113-3130

Booklet entrance 113-2100

motor(S13)
CN6 Booklet tamper 113-3540 Booklet blade home 113-3040

Booklet tamper home 113-3080

sensor(S38)
Booklet tamper 113-3110

sensor(S46)
CN7 Booklet paddle 113-3580 Booklet paddle home 113-3090

Booklet diverter 113-3560 Booklet diverter home 113-3060

CN8 Booklet c-fold blade 113-3590 Booklet exit 113-3120

Booklet c-fold blade 113-3050

home sensor(S39)
CN9 Booklet end fence 113-3530 Booklet end fence 113-3000 Booklet end fence
motor(M20) home sensor(S42) solenoid(SL2)
CN10 Booklet fold 113-3510 113-3520

motor(M21)
Booklet blade 113-3550

motor(M22)

Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under the
weight of the product.


electric shock.
insulated parts.

original positions.
Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
insulated parts.
original positions.

Learn about releasing plastic latches.
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully. To
remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

● Remove all paper from the product.
● Turn off the power using the power button.
● Remove the toner cartridges.
● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.
ESD precautions


Post-service test
Print-quality test
defects.

Ordering
Table 5-46 Ordering
Orderable parts
orderable.

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and
booklet finishers)
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers)
NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work at an ESD-
protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to
provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by
placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers) 993
Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)
Learn about parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)

Cover & hanress
Cover & hanress
Parts diagram and parts list for the cover and hanress.
Figure 5-88 cover
2 21
18
12
17
6
19 16
7 5
13
13
9 14
20 22
8 24
3 14
23
15-1
15-2

Table 5-47 cover
Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable
2 Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)
3 Caster cover JC63-04985B 1 (*)
4 Front cover JC63-04986B 1 (*)
5 Front lower cover JC63-04987B 1 (*)
6 Rear cover JC63-04988B 1 (*)
7 Top output tray upper JC63-04996B 1 (*)
8 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)
9 Top output tray lower JC63-05003B 1 (*)
12 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)
13 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)
14 Left lower cover (Stacker-stapler) JC90-01771B 1 (*)
14 Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B 1 (*)
15-1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B 1 (*)
15-2 Booklet output tray cover JC63-04978B 1 (*)
16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)
17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)
18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)
19 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)
20 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)
21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)
22 Hinge JC66-04767A 1 (*)
23 Caster JC61-07452A 4 (*)
24 Caster fix nut JC61-07444A 4 (*)
Table 5-48 harness
Not shown Harness, finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher rear upper JC39-02312A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front upper JC39-02313A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher punch relay JC39-02314A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher staple relay JC39-02315A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher eject relay JC39-02317A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front lower JC39-02318A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K finisher stack relay JC39-02319A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3k finisher exit path JC39-02322A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Sub JC39-02327A 1 (*)
Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Pa JC39-02328A 1 (*)
Not shown Stack full harness JC39-02331A 1 (*)

Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the front door, top door, top cover, right upper cover.
Figure 5-89 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
16
17
16-1
18 21
18-1
18-2
18-3
18-4

Table 5-49 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)
16-1 Cover link JC63-05004A 1 (*)
17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)
18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)
18-1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B 1 (*)
18-2 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)
18-3 Manual staple button LED JC64-00996A 1 (*)
18-4 Manual staple button JC64-00995A 1 (*)
21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)
Bridge unit
Upper bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, upper bridge.
Figure 5-90 Bridge unit, Upper bridge
2-2
2-1
3
2-3

Table 5-50 Bridge unit, Upper bridge
1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)
2 Upper bridge unit JC90-01406B 1
2-1 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
2-2 Spring JC61-07431A 4 (*)
2-3 Spring JC61-07430A 2 (*)
3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1
Lower bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, lower bridge.
Figure 5-91 Bridge unit, Lower bridge

3-2
3-1
3-3
3-4 3-6
3 3-5
3-7

Table 5-51 Bridge unit, Lower bridge
3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1
3-1 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A 1
3-2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A 1 (*)
3-3 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A 4 (*)
3-4 Bridge exit actuator JC66-04569A 2 (*)
3-5 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 1
3-6 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
3-7 Bridge motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)
Entrance unit
Entrance unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit.
Figure 5-92 Entrance unit

4
7
9
5
10
3
1
11
6

Table 5-52 Entrance unit
1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)
2 Entrance roller JC66-04722A 1 (*)
3 Middle roller JC66-04724A 1 (*)
4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)
5 Gear JC66-04656A 3
6 Gear JC66-04546A 1
7 Belt 6602-003646 1
8 Belt 6602-003647 1 (*)
9 Belt 6602-003645 1 (*)
10 Bushing 6601-001478 2 (*)
11 Bushing 6601-002584 2 (*)
Entrance unit, Entrance motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit, entrance motor.
Figure 5-93 Entrance unit, Entrance motor
4 4-1
1
1-1
1-2

Table 5-53 Entrance unit, Entrance motor
1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)
1-1 Spring JC61-07408A 2 (*)
1-2 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)
4-1 Entrance motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)
Tray diverter unit
Tray diverter unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the tray diverter unit.
Figure 5-94 Tray diverter unit

6
8
1
4
3 9
5
2

Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit
1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)
2 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)
4 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)
5 Belt 6602-003639 1 (*)
6 Top door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)
7 Frame mount JC61-06663A 1 (*)
8 Frame mount side bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)
9 Clutch JC90-01474A 1 (*)
Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
Parts diagram and parts list for the tray jam cover, tray diverter CAM.
Figure 5-95 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
1-6
1-4
1-5
1-1
1
1-7
1-2
1-3

Table 5-55 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)
1-1 Seal JC62-01328A 1 (*)
1-2 Spring JC61-07417A 1 (*)
1-3 Spring JC61-07415A 1 (*)
1-4 Spring JC61-07410A 1 (*)
1-5 Spring JC61-07409A 1 (*)
1-6 Tray diverter JC61-07205A 1 (*)
1-7 Tray jam cover JC61-07196A 1 (*)
3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)
3-1 Pin JC70-40360A 1 (*)
Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the top output tray unit, top exit unit, main exit unit.
Figure 5-96 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
1
6 3
4
13
8
12
5
9
14
12
10 7
11

Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
1 Top output tray JC63-04995B 1 (*)
2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)
3 Top exit roller JC66-04727A 1 (*)
4 Top middle roller JC66-04725A 1 (*)
5 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)
6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)
7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)
8 Gear JC66-04657A 2
9 Clutch JC90-01404A 1 (*)
10 Gear JC66-04602A 1 (*)
11 Front door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)
12 Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)
13 Top-brush exit JC67-00818A 1 (*)
14 Belt 6602-003649 1 (*)
Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the top lower cover, exit motor, main exit CAM motor.
Figure 5-97 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
2-4
2-2
2-1
2-3
6
6-1 7
7-1
7-2

Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)
2-1 Top exit actuator JC66-04525A 1 (*)
2-2 Spring JC61-07411A 1 (*)
2-3 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
2-4 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)
6-1 Exit motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)
7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)
7-1 Main exit CAM motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)
7-2 Main exit CAM home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the main exit unit, paddle unit, end fence unit.
Figure 5-98 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
23
2 1
3
4
18
19
16
17
14
11
15
5
12 13
6
7
8
20
10 9
22
21

Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
1 Main exit CAM guide JC90-01451A 1 (*)
2 Main exit CAM JC66-04561A 3
3 Main exit CAM shaft JC66-04715A 1
4 Pin JC70-40360A 3 (*)
5 Main exit roller JC66-04726A 1 (*)
6 Paddle pesser JC61-07206A 1 (*)
7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)
7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)
7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)
8 Brush JC67-00819A 1 (*)
9 Brush JC67-00820A 1 (*)
10 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)
11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)
11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
12 Paddle home gear JC66-04558A 1
13 End fence motor JC90-01467A 1 (*)
14 Belt 6602-003270 1 (*)
15 Belt 6602-003640 1 (*)
16 CAM JC66-04562A 1
17 CAM guide JC66-04526A 1 (*)
18 End fence JC90-01466A 1 (*)
19 Spring JC61-07414A 2 (*)
20 Main output tray top of stack switch guide JC61-07189A 1 (*)
21 Main output tray top of stack switch lower guide JC61-07192A 1 (*)
22 Ground JC63-04984A 1 (*)
23 Brush JC67-00817A 1 (*)
Paddle, Paddle motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the paddle, paddle motor.
Figure 5-99 Paddle, Paddle motor
11
11-1
7-1
7-2 11-2

Table 5-59 Paddle, Paddle motor
7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)
7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)
7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)
11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)
11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA
Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA
Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit, ejector unit, stapler unit, main PCA.
Figure 5-100 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA
6 5

Table 5-60 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA
1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)
2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)
3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)
4 Stapler unit JC82-00894A 1 (*)
5 Stapler cartridge JC81-09882B 1 (*)
6 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A 1 (*)
7 Roller JC66-04523A 1 (*)
Tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit.
Figure 5-101 Tamper unit

1-2
1-3
1-4
1-1
2-2
2-3
2-1

Table 5-61 Tamper unit
1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)
1-1 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-2 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
1-3 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-4 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)
2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)
2-1 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
2-2 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
2-3 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)
Ejector unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the ejector unit.
Figure 5-102 Ejector unit

3
3-5
3-1 3-2
3-7
3-3
3-9
3-6
3-4
3-10
3-8

Table 5-62 Ejector unit
3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)
3-1 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
3-2 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-3 Ejector1 end sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-4 Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-5 Ejector1 motor assembly JC90-01411A 1 (*)
3-6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)
3-7 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-8 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
3-9 Ejector2 motor assembly JC90-01410A 1 (*)
3-10 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)
Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit
Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the paper holding unit, main output tray unit.
Figure 5-103 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit
11
4 10
8
9
12
3 6
2 1

Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit
2 Left lower cover(Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)
2 Left lower cover(Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)
3 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)
4 Main output tray motor aseembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)
5 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A 1 (*)
6 Belt 6602-003652 2 (*)
7 Gear JC66-04663A 4
8 Gear JC66-04605A 1
9 Gear JC61-07305A 1
10 Spring JC61-07429A 1
11 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)
12 Main output tray support JC61-06668A 2 (*)
Left upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left upper cover.
Figure 5-104 Left upper cover
1-3
1-5 1-2

1-1
1-6 1-4
1-7
1-7

Table 5-64 Left upper cover
1-1 Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-2 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-3 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-4 Left upper cover JC63-04999B 1 (*)
1-5 Spring JC61-07428A 1 (*)
1-6 Spring JC61-07427A 1 (*)
1-7 Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)
Left lower cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left lower cover.
Figure 5-105 Left lower cover

2 2
stapler-stacker booklet ﬁnisher
2-3
2-1 2-3
2-2 2-1
2-2
2-5
2-4

Table 5-65 Left lower cover
2 Left lower cover (Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)
2 Left lower cover (Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)
2-1 Main output tray lower limit switch 0604-001415 1 (*)
2-2 Main output tray lower limit actuator JC81-07930A 1 (*)
2-3 Spring JC81-09396A 1 (*)
2-4 Spring (Booklet finisher) JC61-07407A 1 (*)
2-5 Booklet output tray sensor (Booklet finisher) JC82-01039A 1 (*)
Main output tray motor, Paper holding motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the main output tray motor, paper holding motor.
Figure 5-106 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor

5
4
4-1
4-5 5-1
4-4
4-2
4-3
5-2

Table 5-66 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor
4 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)
4-1 Pin JC70-40542A 1 (*)
4-2 Gear JC81-07637A 1 (*)
4-3 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B 1 (*)
4-4 Bearing 6601-001478 1 (*)
4-5 Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
5 Paper holding motor assembly JC90-01414A 1 (*)
5-1 Paper holding motor JC93-01156A 1 (*)
5-2 Gear JC66-04604A 1 (*)
Cover & hanress
Buffer unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer unit.
Figure 5-107 Buffer unit
3-1
6
7
4
10
9

Table 5-67 Buffer unit
1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)
2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)
3 Budder roller assembly JC90-01672A 1 (*)
3-1 Buffer roller JC66-05161A 1
4 Buffer solenoid JC90-01675A 1 (*)
5 Buffer motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)
6 Gear JC66-04582A 1 (*)
7 Belt 6602-003641 1
8 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
9 Manual staple actuator JC66-04528A 1 (*)
10 Buffer jam cover JC90-01450A 1 (*)
Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer diverter, front jam cover.
Figure 5-108 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
2-2
1
1-4
2-1
1-2 2
1-5
1-3 1-1

Table 5-68 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)
1-1 Spring JC61-07413A 2 (*)
1-2 Spring JC61-07409A 2 (*)
1-3 Bufer diverter JC61-07204A 1 (*)
1-4 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-5 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)
2-1 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)
2-2 Spring JC61-07418A 1 (*)
Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher)
Learn about parts, diagrams (booklet finisher)
Booklet maker
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker.
Figure 5-109 Booklet maker
2
4
5
3

Table 5-69 Booklet maker
1 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)
2 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)
3 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02790B 1 (*)
4 Rail 6102-003369 2 (*)
5 Harness guide JC90-01477A 1 (*)
Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit
Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance unit, booklet presser unit.
Figure 5-110 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

1

Table 5-70 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit
1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1
2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)
3 Booklet entrace roller JC66-04717A 1 (*)
4 Booklet presser unit JC61-07237A 1
Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance, booklet entrance-presser motor.
Figure 5-111 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor

1
2-3 2-1
1-2
1-5 1-1
1-4
2-2
1-3

Table 5-71 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor
1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1
1-1 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
1-2 Booklet entrance actuator JC66-04520A 1 (*)
1-3 Booklet presser guide JC61-07331A 1
1-4 Booklet presser guide actuator JC66-04644A 1 (*)
1-5 Bushing JC61-02372A 2 (*)
2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)
2-1 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)
2-2 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)
2-3 Booklet presser home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet stapler unit.
Figure 5-112 Booklet stapler unit
1
2

Table 5-72 Booklet stapler unit
1 Booklet stapler unit JC81-08274B 1 (*)
2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881B 2 (*)
3 Spring JC61-07398A 1 (*)
4 Spring JC61-07397A 2 (*)
Booklet tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet tamper unit.
Figure 5-113 Booklet tamper unit
1-3
1-1
1-4 1-2

Table 5-73 Booklet tamper unit
1 Booklet tamper unit JC90-01431A 1
1-1 Booklet tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-2 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)
1-3 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
1-4 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)
Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit
Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold unit, booklet diverter unit, booklet exit unit.
Figure 5-114 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit
12
10
6
5
11
4
3

Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit
1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)
2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)
3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)
4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)
5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)
6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)
7 Gear JC66-04573A 1 (*)
8 Bushing 6601-003037 3
9 Bushing JC61-00426A 1 (*)
10 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)
11 Bushing JC61-02372A 1 (*)
12 Gear JC90-01479A 1 (*)
Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet c-fold blade, booklet exit, booklet diverter.
Figure 5-115 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
1-1
1-2-1
1-3
1-2
2
3
2-2
2-3
2-4
3-1
2-1

Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)
1-1 Booklet sub exit roller assembly JC90-01395A 1 (*)
1-2 Booklet c-fold blade JC90-01394A 1 (*)
1-2-1 Spring JC61-07391A 2 (*)
1-3 Jam guide sheet JC63-05044A 3 (*)
2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)
2-1 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A 1
2-2 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A 1 (*)
2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 4 (*)
2-4 E-ring 6044-000129 2 (*)
3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)
3-1 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)
Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet diverter motor, booklet c-fold motor, booklet fold motor.
Figure 5-116 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
6
6-3
6-1
6-2
5-1
5-3
5-2
4-1
4-2

Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)
4-1 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A 1 (*)
4-2 Booklet diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)
5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)
5-1 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A 1 (*)
5-2 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
5-3 Gear JC66-04579A 1 (*)
6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)
6-1 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)
6-2 Gear JC66-04592A 1 (*)
6-3 Gear JC66-04593A 1 (*)
Booklet fold roller
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold roller.
Figure 5-117 Booklet fold roller
2-1
2

Table 5-77 Booklet fold roller
1 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A 2 (*)
2 Booklet fold exit JC90-01399A 1 (*)
2-1 C-ring 6044-000159 1 (*)
Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet blade motor, booklet blade.
Figure 5-118 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
1 1
1-3
1-2
1-1
2-1 2
2-2
2-3

Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
1 Booklet blade motor assembly JC90-01435A 1 (*)
1-1 Gear JC66-04595A 1 (*)
1-2 Gear JC66-04594A 1 (*)
1-3 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)
2 Booklet blade assembly JC90-01437A 1 (*)
2-1 Gear JC66-04591A 1 (*)
2-2 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)
2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 2 (*)
Booklet paddle unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet paddle unit.
Figure 5-119 Booklet paddle unit
4
2
4-1
2
4
2-2
2-1

Table 5-79 Booklet paddle unit
1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A 1 (*)
2 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A 1 (*)
2-1 Lower booklet paddle wing JC61-07225A 1 (*)
2-2 Lower booklet paddle mid JC66-04719A 1 (*)
3 Booklet paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
4 Booklet paddle motor assembly JC90-01430A 1 (*)
4-1 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet end fence unit.
Figure 5-120 Booklet end fence unit
1-5 1-2
1 1-3 1-4
1-6
1-7
1-1

Table 5-80 Booklet end fence unit
1 Booklet end fence unit JC90-01432A 1
1-1 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)
1-2 Spring JC61-07403A 1 (*)
1-3 Spring JC61-07401A 1 (*)
1-4 Solenoid JC33-00038A 1 (*)
1-5 Booklet end fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)
1-6 Spring JC61-07400A 1 (*)
1-7 Gear JC66-04583A 1 (*)
Booklet maker base
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker base.
Figure 5-121 Booklet maker base
1-1
1-2
2
2

Table 5-81 Booklet maker base
1 Booklet maker base JC90-01476A 1 (*)
1-1 Spring JC61-07392A 1 (*)
1-2 Booklet maker base support JC61-07279A 1 (*)
2 Booklet output jam cover JC90-01433A 1 (*)
Bridge unit

Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor (S1)
Learn how to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.
○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel display is
blank).
○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
https://parts.hp.com.
JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor
Required tools
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.
○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.
○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.
○ Turn the printer power on.
Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.
Remove the bridge from the machine
Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.
1. Open the front door (callout 1)
Figure 5-122 Open the front door
2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)
Figure 5-123 Pull the locker out

3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)
Figure 5-124 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors
4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer
Figure 5-125 Pull out the bridge unit
Remove the bridge rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.
▲ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.
Figure 5-126 Remove the bridge rear cover
Remove the bridge door
Follow these steps to remove the bridge door.
1. Remove four screws(callout 1) and remove the metal holders each side then disconnect one
connector(callout 2)
Figure 5-127 Remove the screws and a connector

2. Lift the bridge door up(callout 1) and then remove the bridge door(callout 2)
Figure 5-128 Remove the bridge door
Remove the bridge paper guide
Follow these steps to remove the bridge paper guide.
▲ Remove thirteen screws(callout 1~3) and remove the bridge paper guide(callout 4) from the bridge door
Figure 5-129 Remove the bridge paper guide
Remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1)
Follow these steps to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1).
1. Unplug one connector (callout 1)
Figure 5-130 Unplug one connector
2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1, callout 1)
Figure 5-131 Remove the bridge entrance sensor

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Bridge motor (M14)
Learn how to remove and replace the bridge motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC31-00163B Bridge motor
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the bridge rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.
▲ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.

Figure 5-136 Remove the bridge rear cover
Remove the bridge motor (M14)
Follow these steps to remove the bridge motor (M14).
1. Remove three screws(callout 1)
2. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)
NOTE: It located on the bottom of the bridge
3. Remove the belt (callout 1)
Figure 5-139 Remove the belt

4. Remove the Bridge motor (M14, callout1)
Figure 5-140 Remove the Bridge motor
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor (S3)
Learn how to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3)
Follow these steps to remove the bridge exit sensor (S3).
1. Unplug one connector
NOTE: Bridge exit sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge

2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge exit sensor(S3, callout1)
Figure 5-147 Remove the bridge exit sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor (S2)
Learn how to remove and replace the bridge door sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge door sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Bridge door sensor
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the bridge door sensor (S2)
Follow these steps to remove the bridge door sensor (S2).
1. Bridge door sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge
Figure 5-152 Location of the bridge door sensor
2. Open the bridge door to remove the bridge door sensor (S2)
Figure 5-153 Open the bridge door

3. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge door sensor(S2, callout 1)
Figure 5-154 Remove the bridge door sensor
instructions.
Covers

Removal and replacement: Right upper cover
Learn how to remove and replace the right upper cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right upper cover on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01448B Right upper cover
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).
▲ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove three
sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the cover away
from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).
TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-155 Remove the right upper cover

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Top cover
Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top cover of the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01446B Top cover
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).
1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and then
remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.
Figure 5-157 Remove six screws
2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two machine
screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.
Figure 5-158 Remove five screws
3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout
2).
Figure 5-159 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Front door
Learn how to remove and replace the front door.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front door for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01444B Front door
Required tools
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver
Post service test

2).
Remove the front door (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).
1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-164 Lift the top hinge pin
2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.
Figure 5-165 Remove the top hinge pin
3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate it away
from the finisher.
Figure 5-166 Release the lower hinge pin
4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.
Figure 5-167 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove the
front door.
Figure 5-168 Remove the front door
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Rear cover
Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear cover for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC63-04988B Rear cover
Required tools
Post service test

2).
Remove the rear cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).
1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw caps
and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-173 Remove seven screws
2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.
TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Figure 5-174 Remove the rear cover
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover
Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC63-04986B Front cover
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.
Remove the front cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).
1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.
Figure 5-184 Remove the jam-access knob
2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.
4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.
Figure 5-186 Remove the front cover
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower cover
Learn how to remove and replace the front lower cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front lower cover for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC63-04987B Front lower cover
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.

Remove the front lower cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the front lower cover (finisher).
▲ Remove three machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front lower cover.
Figure 5-199 Remove the front lower cover
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster cover
Learn how to remove and replace the caster cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the caster cover on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC63-04985B Caster cover
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the booklet output tray
Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.
1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove it.
Figure 5-200 Remove the booklet output tray
2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation instructions.
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly
Special installation instructions: booklet output tray
Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.
Figure 5-201 Install the booklet output tray

Remove the caster cover
Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.
1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two machine
screws (callout 2).
2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the left
(callout 2) to remove it.
TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when reinstalling the
caster cover.
Figure 5-203 Remove the caster cover
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover
Learn how to remove and replace the left lower cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left lower cover on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01771B Left lower cover (for stapler/stacker finisher)
JC90-01417B Left lower cover (for booklet finisher)
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).

caster cover.
Remove the left lower cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).
1. Remove four screws (callout 1).
NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.
2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from the
finisher (callout 3).
CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the shield.
TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-223 Release the lower shield
3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.
Figure 5-224 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower cover.
Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-225 Remove the left lower cover
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Left upper cover
Learn how to remove and replace the left upper cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left upper cover on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01475B Left upper cover
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).
1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1) and
gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and lower the tray
(callout 2) to the lowest position.
Figure 5-248 Lower the output tray
2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).
TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.
Figure 5-250 Release the shield
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.
5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper cover.
Figure 5-252 Remove the left upper cover
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher front cover
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet front cover.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet front cover on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01478B Booklet front cover
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the booklet front cover
Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.
▲ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and then
slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws (callout 4),
and then remove the booklet front cover.
Figure 5-253 Remove five screws and the cover

instructions.
Entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M12)
Learn how to remove and replace the feed entrance motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the entrance motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01459A Entrance motor assembly
JC31-00163B Entrance motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).
Remove the entrance motor (M12)
Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor (M12).
▲ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws (callout
3), and then remove the entrance motor.
TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling the
motor.

Figure 5-260 Remove the entrance motor
instructions.
Punch unit

Removal and replacement: Dummy feed guide
Learn how to remove and replace the dummy feed guide.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the dummy feed guide on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01161A Dummy feed guide
Y1G10-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory
Y1G11-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory
Y1G12-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the dummy feed guide (finisher).
▲ At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the dummy feed guide (callout
2).
Figure 5-267 Remove two screws and the feed guide
instructions.

Tray diverter unit
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-
E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top jam access cover
Learn how to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

Remove the exit motor (M13)
Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).
3), and then remove the exit motor.
motor.
Figure 5-282 Remove the exit motor
Remove the top jam access cover
Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

2. Remove the top jam access cover.
Figure 5-284 Remove the top jam access cover
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter
Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC61-07205A Tray diverter
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the tray diverter
Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter.
1. Remove two screws(callout 1) to take out the exit motor (callout 2)
Figure 5-291 Take out the exit motor
2. Remove two screws (callout 1)

3. Pull the top jam cover assembly out.
Figure 5-293 Pull the top jam cover assembly out
4. Remove the tray diverter (callout 1) from top jam cover assembly.
Figure 5-294 Remove the tray diverter

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor (S4)
Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.
Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4)
Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4).
1. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)

2. Remove the green handle (callout 1)
Figure 5-308 Remove the green handle
3. Remove the belt (callout 1)
4. Remove two screws(callout 1) and remove the bracket (callout 2) to reach out the tray diverter home
sensor
Figure 5-310 Remove two screws and remove the bracket

5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4, callout 1)
Figure 5-311 Remove the tray diverter home sensor
instructions.
Top exit unit

Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.

motor.

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).
1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and then tilt
the motor aside to access the screws under it.

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector
(callout 2).
Figure 5-330 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector
3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).
4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.
Figure 5-332 Remove the top lower feed assembly
5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector (callout
2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement part.
Figure 5-333 Locate sensors and connector


instructions.
E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor (S11)
Learn how to remove and replace the top exit sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top exit sensor for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Top exit sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

motor.

(callout 2).

Remove the top exit sensor(S11)

Follow these steps to remove the top exit sensor(S11).
1. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the top lower feed assembly.
Figure 5-356 Remove one screw and then top lower feed assembly
2. Remove harness(callout 1) and top exit sensor(S11, callout 2)
Figure 5-357 Remove harness and then top exit sensor
instructions.

Top output tray unit
Removal and replacement: Top output tray
Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC63-04995B Top output tray
Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.
Post service test

Remove the top output tray
Follow these steps to remove the top output tray.
▲ Raise the end of the top output tray (callout 1), and then lift it away from the finisher (callout 2) to remove
it.
Figure 5-358 Remove the top output tray
instructions.
E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Top output tray paper full sensor (S15)
Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor for the
finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15)
Follow these steps to remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2) and then remove
the sensor assembly (callout 3)
Figure 5-373 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy
2. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- detector (callout 1).
Figure 5-374 Remove top output tray paper full sensor

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).
4. Remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2), and then remove the sensor assembly
(callout 3).
Figure 5-376 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy
5. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- emitter (callout 1).
Figure 5-377 Remove top output tray paper full sensor
instructions.

Main exit unit
Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor (S10)
Learn how to remove and replace the main exit sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit sensor for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC32-00020A Main exit sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

motor.

(callout 2).

Remove the main exit sensor(S10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit sensor(S10).
▲ Remove one screw (callout 1) and main exit sensor (S10; callout 2) at the top lower feed assembly.
Figure 5-400 Remove the main exit sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M13)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01459A Exit motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test

2).
motor.

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor (M2)
Learn how to remove and replace the main exit cam motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit cam motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2)
Follow these steps to remove the Main exit cam motor (M2).
1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-415 Disconnect two connectors and then two screws

2. If you are replacing the gear, slide it off of the shaft
Figure 5-416 Slide the gear off of the shaft
3. If you are replacing the sensor (callout 1), remove it from the motor housing.
Figure 5-417 Remove the sensor
4. If you are replacing the motor, do the following.
a. Remove two screws (callout 1)
b. Lower the motor (callout 1) and then pull it away from the housing (callout 2) to remove it.

instructions.
Paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Paddle
Learn how to remove and replace the paddle.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01462A Paddle mid
JC90-01463A Paddle wing
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.

Remove the paddle (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the paddle (finisher).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

3. Do not remove the frame (callout 1) but pull it one side.
Figure 5-434 Pull it one side
4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1)

5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).
6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch
(callout 1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.(S11)
Figure 5-437 Pressing to the right to release the clutch
8. Remove two screws (callout 1)

9. Take supporter of top output bin (callout 1) forward and put it down.
Figure 5-440 Take supporter of top output bin forward and put it down.
10. Remove three paddles (callout 1) from shaft
Figure 5-441 Remove the paddle
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor (S8)
Learn how to remove and replace the paddle home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle home sensor for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Paddle home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.

Remove the paddle home sensor (S8)
Follow these steps to remove the paddle home sensor (S8).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)
Figure 5-454 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors
2. Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor
Figure 5-455 Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor

3. Remove paddle home sensor (S8; callout1)
Figure 5-456 Remove paddle home sensor
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Paddle motor (M1)
Learn how to remove and replace the paddle motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle motor for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly
JC93-01001A Paddle motor
Required tools

Post service test

2).
from the finisher.

front door.

Remove the paddle motor (M1)
Follow these steps to remove the paddle motor (M1).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)
Figure 5-469 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors
2. Remove two screws (callout 1) and then remove paddle motor (M1; callout 2)
Figure 5-470 Remove the paddle motor
instructions.

End fence unit
Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor (S7)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 End fence home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.


Remove the ejector unit (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).
1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.
Figure 5-498 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).
3. Remove two screws (callout 1).
4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).
5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from the
Figure 5-502 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).
7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.
Figure 5-504 Remove the front tamper shaft
8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-505 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove one
shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.
Figure 5-507 Remove the rear tamper shaft
11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).
13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws (callout 1).

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.
Figure 5-512 Lift the edges of the tampers
16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward the rear
of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the sheet metal
frame.
Figure 5-513 Remove the ejector unit
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.
Special installation instructions: Ejector unit
a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft in the
notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will drop
notch (callout 1).
Remove the front tamper unit
Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.
▲ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it
Figure 5-514 Remove the front tamper
Remove the end of fence home sensor(S7)
Follow these steps to remove the end of fence home sensor(S7).
▲ At the front tamper, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove end fence home sensor(S7, callout 2)
Figure 5-515 Remove end fence home sensor
instructions.

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence motor for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01467A End fence motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.

Remove the end fence motor(M3)
Follow these steps to remove the end fence motor(M3).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect connector(callout 2)
Figure 5-528 Remove two screws and disconnect connector
2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and end fence motor (M3, callout 1)
Figure 5-529 Remove end fence motor

instructions.
Tamper unit

Front tamper
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-
E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Front tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper unit on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC82-00901A Front tamper
Required tools

Post service test

2).
from the finisher.

front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.






frame.
notch (callout 1).

notch (callout 1).
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S6)
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.







frame.
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
Remove the front tamper home sensor(S6)
Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor(S6).
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at front tamper.

2. Remove one screw (callout 1)
3. Remove front tamper home sensor(S6, callout 1)
Figure 5-620 Remove front tamper home sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M4)
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01001A Front tamper motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.







frame.
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
Remove the front tamper motor (M4)
Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor (M4).

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the front tamper motor.
TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.
Figure 5-666 Release the belt and remove the motor
instructions.

Rear tamper
Removal and replacement: Rear tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper unit on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC82-00898A Rear tamper
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.






frame.
notch (callout 1).

notch (callout 1).
Remove the rear tamper unit
Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.
▲ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it
NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
Figure 5-710 Remove therear tamper
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S9)
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.







frame.
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
Remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9)
Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9).

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the rear tamper.
2. Remove one screw in front side(callout 1)
3. Remove rear tamper home sensor(S9, callout 1)
Figure 5-757 Remove rear tamper home sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M9)
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.







frame.
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
Remove the rear tamper motor (M9)
Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor (M9).

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the rear tamper motor.
TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.
Figure 5-803 Release the belt and remove the motor
instructions.

Stapler unit
Removal and replacement: Stapler unit
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler unit on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC82-00894A Stapler unit
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

Remove the stapler unit
Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.
1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.
Figure 5-818 Move the staple unit to the front
2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to remove it
(callout 2).
Figure 5-819 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then
remove two screws (callout 3).
Figure 5-820 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws
4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).
Figure 5-821 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws
5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.
Figure 5-822 Remove the staple unit
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor (S21)
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler front sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler front sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Stapler front sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


(callout 2).

Remove the stapler front sensor(S21)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler front sensor(S21).
▲ Remove stapler front sensor from staple unit.
Figure 5-842 Remove the stapler front sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front sensor (S24)
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Stapler mid-front sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


(callout 2).

Remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24).
1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)
Figure 5-862 Disconnect the connector
2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.
Figure 5-863 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-rear sensor (S25)
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Stapler mid-rear sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


(callout 2).

Remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25).
1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)
2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.
Figure 5-884 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler rear sensor (S30)
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Stapler rear sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


(callout 2).

Remove the stapler rear sensor(S30)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler rear sensor(S30).
1. Remove stapler rear sensor(callout 1, S30) from staple unit.
Figure 5-904 Remove stapler rear sensor from staple unit.
2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from stapler rear sensor.
Figure 5-905 Disconnect the connector from stapler rear sensor.
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor (S19)
Learn how to remove and replace the manual staple sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the manual staple sensor for the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001415 Manual staple sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.

Remove the manual staple sensor(S19)
Follow these steps to remove the manual staple sensor(S19).
▲ At the front of the finisher, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove manual staple sensor(S19,
callout 2).
Figure 5-918 Remove the manual staple sensor

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M8)
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler position motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC31-00163A Stapler position motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

(callout 2).

Remove the stapler position motor(M8)
Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor(M8).
1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

2. Remove stapler position motor(M8, callout1) from staple unit.
Figure 5-939 Remove stapler position motor
instructions.
Ejector unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector unit
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector unit on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01409A Ejector unit
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.







frame.
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
instructions.

Ejector1
Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor sensor (S27)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001415 Ejector1 motor enor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.






frame.
notch (callout 1).

notch (callout 1).
Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27)
Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27).
1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(callout 2, M6) of ejector unit.
2. Remove two screws(callout 1).
3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove the
ejector1 motor sensor(S27, callout 2)
Figure 5-1028 Remove the ejector1 motor sensor

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor (M6)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01168A Ejector1 motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.






frame.
notch (callout 1).

notch (callout 1).
Remove the ejector1 motor(M6)
Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor(M6).
1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(M6, callout 2) of ejector unit.
3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)
Figure 5-1074 Remove the ejector1 motor

instructions.
Ejector2 unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 home sensor (S32)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001415 Ejector2 home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.







frame.
notch (callout 1).
notch (callout 1).
Remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32)
Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32).
1. Remove sensor(callout 1, S32) using tweezers from the ejector unit.
Figure 5-1118 Remove sensor

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 home sensor.
Figure 5-1119 Disconnect the connector from ejector2 home sensor
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor sensor (S23)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.






frame.
notch (callout 1).

notch (callout 1).
Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23)
Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23).
3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove the
ejector2 motor sensor(S23, callout 2)
Figure 5-1165 Remove the ejector2 motor sensor

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor (M5)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.






frame.
notch (callout 1).

notch (callout 1).
Remove the ejector2 motor(M5)
Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor(M5).
3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)
Figure 5-1211 Remove the ejector2 motor

instructions.
Main output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor (S20)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor on the
finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.



Remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20)
Follow these steps to remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20).
▲ Remove detector and emitter sensor(S20, callout 1)
Figure 5-1239 Remove detector and emitter sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch (S34)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch on the
finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34)
Follow these steps to remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34).
1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).
2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).
3. Do not remove the frame(callout 1) but pull it one side.
Figure 5-1256 Pull it one side

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1)
5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws(callout 1).
6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch
(callout 1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position
Figure 5-1259 Pressing to the right to release the clutch

9. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)
Figure 5-1262 Separate two parts
10. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)
Figure 5-1263 Separate two parts
11. Disconnect the connector (callout 1) And switch(callout 2, S34)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor (S26)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor on the
finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor
Required tools

Post service test

2).
from the finisher.

front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.

Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26)
Follow these steps to remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26).
▲ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S26, callout 2) from the lower shield assembly.
Figure 5-1287 Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor (S33)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor on the
finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33)
Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33).
1. Disconnect the connector (callout 1)
2. Remove the tape using tweezers and remove the sensor (S33, callout 1).
Figure 5-1295 Remove the sensor


instructions.
E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor
(M11)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01415B Main output tray motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the main output tray motor (M11)
Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor (M11).
(callout 2) to the lowest position
Figure 5-1302 Lower theoutput tray
2. Open two retainers (callout 1), and then release the green wires (callout 2).
Figure 5-1303 Open two retainers

3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).
4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then thread the cable up through the opening in the top of the
bracket.
5. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor assembly.
Figure 5-1306 Remove four screws and the motor assembly
6. Carefully pull the motor assembly away from the printer to remove it.
Figure 5-1307 Remove the motor assembly
Special installation instructions: Main tray moving motor (M11)
a. Before installing the motor assembly, slide the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.

b. Align the flat edges on the bushing with the flat edges on the opening in the motor assembly bracket,
and then install the bushing.
c. Position the bushing over the shaft, and then install the motor assembly.
instructions.

Paper holding unit
Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor (S22)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.


Remove the paper holding home sensor(S22)
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding home sensor(S22).
▲ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S22, callout 2) from the upper shield assembly.
Figure 5-1335 Remove the paper holding home sensor

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Paper holding front sensor (S17)
Learn how to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.

Remove the paper holding sensor (S17)
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor (S17).
▲ Remove the sensor(callout 1, S17) from the upper shield assembly.
Figure 5-1358 Remove the paper holding sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding rear sensor (S31)
Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.
front door.


screws (callout 2).
caster cover.

Remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31)
Follow these steps to remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31).
▲ Remove the sensor(S31, callout 1) from the upper shield assembly.

Figure 5-1381 Remove the rear paper holding sensor
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Paper holding Motor (M7)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding Motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding Motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01414A Paper holding motor assembly
JC93-01156A Paper holding motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

from the finisher.

front door.

screws (callout 2).

caster cover.

Remove the paper holding Motor (M7)
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding Motor (M7).
1. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).
2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor and bracket.

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.
Figure 5-1406 Remove two screws and the motor
Special installation instructions: paper holding Motor (M10)
When installing the motor and bracket, align the tab and slot on the motor bracket with the tab and slot in
the printer.
Figure 5-1407 Install the motor and bracket
instructions.

Buffer unit
Removal and replacement: Buffer motor (M10)
Learn how to remove and replace the buffer motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01152A Buffer motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the main exit cam motor(M10)
Follow these steps to remove the main exit cam motor(M10).
2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1)

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid (SL1)
Learn how to remove and replace the buffer solenoid.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer solenoid on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1)
Follow these steps to remove the buffer solenoid(SL1).
1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

3. Remove top jam cover assembly (Callout 1)
Figure 5-1424 Remove top jam cover assembly
5. Disconnect the connector(Callout 1) and remove the buffer solenoid(Callout 2)
Figure 5-1426 Remove the buffer solenoid
instructions.

Booklet maker
Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC82-00905A Booklet maker
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the booklet maker
Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.
1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.
Figure 5-1433 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher
2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).
Figure 5-1434 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.
Figure 5-1435 Release the metal bracket
4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right side
of the booklet maker.
5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.
Figure 5-1437 Slide the right rail
6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher slightly to
clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1439 Remove the booklet maker
Special installation instructions: booklet maker
When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1440 Position the hooks
9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.
Figure 5-1441 Align arrows
10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the finisher
rail.

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.
Figure 5-1443 Extend the right rail
instructions.
Booklet entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor (M15)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01152A Booklet entrance motor
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the booklet entrance motor (M15)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance motor (M15).
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2). Lift the motor away from the
booklet maker and release the belt (callout 3) from the back of the motor.

Figure 5-1445 Remove the booklet entrance motor
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor (S36)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.

Remove the booklet entrance unit
Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.
1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)
Figure 5-1463 Remove two screws then remove the black cover
2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)
Figure 5-1464 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)
Figure 5-1466 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit
5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)
Figure 5-1467 Remove the booklet entrance unit
Remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36).
1. Entrance unit (callout 1)
Figure 5-1468 Entrance unit

3. Use a tweezer to remove the entrance sensor (S36, callout1)
Figure 5-1470 Remove the entrance sensor
instructions.
Booklet paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor (M19)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01001A Booklet paddle motor
JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).

2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1473 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor (S41)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).
3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.
Figure 5-1483 Remove the right lower shield
Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).
2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1485 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector
Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41).
1. Remove one e-clip on top of the white washer and then remove the white washer(callout 1)
Figure 5-1486 Remove white washer

2. Remove two belts (callout 1)
Figure 5-1487 Remove two belts
3. Remove the black actuator (callout 1)
Figure 5-1488 Remove the black actuator
5. Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor (S41, callout 1) from the left side
Figure 5-1490 Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence unit
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01432A Booklet end fence unit
Required tools
Post service test

2).



Remove the fold stopper unit
Follow these steps to remove the fold stopper unit.
1. On the left side of the booklet maker, remove two screws through access openings in the jam access cover
(callout 1).
2. Raise the jam access cover.
Figure 5-1502 Raise the jam access cover

3. Raise the booklet width guide.
Figure 5-1503 Raise the booklet width guide.
4. On the right side of the booklet maker, open two retainers (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors
(callout 2).
6. Release the tab (callout 1) on the guide arm, and then slide the guide off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove
it.
Figure 5-1506 Release the guide arm

7. Lower the width guide to the lowest position.
Figure 5-1507 Lower the width guide
8. On the right side of the booklet maker, remove one screw (callout 1).
9. Lift the right lower corner (callout 1) to clear the cable guide, and then slide the assembly to the right
Figure 5-1509 Remove the fold stopper unit
NOTE: Continue to reverse theremoval steps to finishinstalling theassembly.
Special installation instructions: Fold stopper unit
Loosen the two alignment screws (callout 1) and move the fold unit side to side to until the alignment
gauge is positioned on the center line. Tighten the screws and run a folded job through the finisher and
verify that the fold is correct. If the fold is not correct, loosen the screws, adjust the alignment, and run
another fold job. Continue this process until the fold is correct.
Figure 5-1510 Adjust the alignment gauge

instructions.
Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the booklet end fence motor (M20)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet end fence motor (M20).
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet end
fence motor.

Figure 5-1515 Remove the booklet end fence motor
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor on the
finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)
Follow these steps to remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42).
1. Unplug one connector(callout 1) at the left of the booklet make

2. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42, callout 1) at the right of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1521 Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor

instructions.

Booklet presser unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet presser
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC61-07237A Booklet presser
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.

Remove the booklet entrance unit
Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.
1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)
Figure 5-1539 Remove two screws then remove the black cover
2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)
Figure 5-1542 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit
5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)
Figure 5-1543 Remove the booklet entrance unit
Remove the booklet presser

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser.
1. Remove three screws (callout 1)
2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove the motor unit (callout 2)
Figure 5-1545 Disconnect one connector and remove the motor unit

3. Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear (callout 1)
Figure 5-1546 Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear
4. Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush (callout 1)
Figure 5-1547 Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush
5. Band (callout2) the booklet presser (callout 1) out to make it easy to pull out (callout 3)
Figure 5-1548 Band the booklet presser out to make it easy to pull out
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37) .

2. Use a tweezer to remove booklet presser home sensor (S37, callout 1)
Figure 5-1551 Remove booklet presser home sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser motor (M16)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01155A Booklet presser motor
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the booklet presser motor (M16)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser motor (M16).
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet presser
motor.

Figure 5-1554 Remove the booklet presser motor

instructions.
Booklet tamper unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper unit on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01431A Booklet tamper unit
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.

Remove the booklet maker middle right shield
Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.
Figure 5-1576 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1577 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker
Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.
1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)
2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then remove
the board cover.
Figure 5-1579 Remove the board cover
4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).
Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit
Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.
1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).
Figure 5-1583 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker
2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).
Figure 5-1584 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper unit
Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.
1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)
2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.



the board cover.


Remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38).
1. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)
2. Use a tweezer to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38, callout 1)
Figure 5-1626 Remove booklet tamper home sensor

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor (M23)
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.




the board cover.

Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper motor (M23).
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1662 Remove two screws and unplug one connector
2. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23, callout 1)
Figure 5-1663 Remove the booklet tamper motor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler unit
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet stapler unit.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet stapler unit on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC81-08274B Booklet stapler unit
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit
Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.
1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker
2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to reach
out to the screw.
Figure 5-1683 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1684 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker
4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1685 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker
5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1686 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker
Remove the booklet stapler unit
Follow these steps to remove the booklet stapler unit.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

2. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.
3. Remove the metal frame (callout 1)
Figure 5-1689 Remove the metal frame
4. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to remove the board cover (callout 2)
5. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug the connector (callout 2) at the rear of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1691 Remove four screws and unplug the connector
7. Remove the connector cover (callout 1).
Figure 5-1693 Remove the connector cover

10. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker and pull the metal bracket (callout 2) out
each side.
11. Remove one screw(callout 1) and remove one screw(callout 2) (Remove two screws each side)
Figure 5-1697 Remove two screws each side
12. Remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the black cover (callout 2) and pull the stapler unit (callout 3)
out
Figure 5-1698 Pull the stapler unit

instructions.
Booklet fold unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC93-01163A Booklet blade
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.



the board cover.


Remove the booklet blade
Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect one connector (callout 2)
2. Remove 7 screws (callout 1) and remove the booklet blade (callout 2)
Figure 5-1733 Remove 7 screws and remove the booklet blade
NOTE: Be sure to make the scale when you reassemble with the new blade

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor (S45)
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.




the board cover.

Remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45).
▲ Disconnect one connector(callout 1) and remove the Booklet blade home sensor (S45, callout 2)
Figure 5-1767 Disconnect one connector and remove the Booklet blade home sensor

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor (M22)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet blade motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly
JC31-00144A Booklet blade motor
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the booklet blade motor (M22)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade motor (M22).
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet blade
motor.

Figure 5-1772 Remove the booklet blade motor
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor (M21)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet fold motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet fold motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly
JC31-00144A Booklet fold motor
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the booklet fold motor (M21)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet fold motor (M21).
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the folding roller
motor.
Figure 5-1779 Remove the booklet fold motor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.

out to the screw.

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade
Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade.
▲ Remove four screws(callout 1) to remove the booklet c-fold blade
Figure 5-1803 Remove four screws to remove the booklet c-fold blade
NOTE:
● Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.
● Make sure the metal located on the home position when you reassemble the unit.
You can make it by rotating the gear to the left direction.
TIP: Rotate the white gear (callout 1) to the left direction to make the metal (callout 2) to the home
postion.

instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor on the
finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.

out to the screw.

Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39).
1. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1827 Remove three screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Take motor unit (callout 1) out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1828 Take motor unit out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector
3. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39, callout 1)
Figure 5-1829 Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
https://parts.hp.com..
JC93-01154A Booklet c-fold blade motor
JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17).
1. Note the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1). These
arrows must be aligned in these positions when the motor is reinstalled.
Figure 5-1831 Check arrow alignment

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).
Figure 5-1833 Remove four screws (callout 1).
4. Remove one e-clip (callout 1) on top of the white gear. Remove the white gear (callout 2) and release the
belt (callout 3).
Figure 5-1834 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt
5. Remove the bracket and motor from the booklet maker.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft might
become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet maker PCA shield
and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.
Figure 5-1835 Remove the bracket and motor

6. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the C fold motor.
Special installation instructions: C fold motor
a. When installing the motor, install one screw (callout 1) to hold the bracket in place while installing the
gear and belt.
b. Check the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1).
c. If the arrows are not aligned, slightly pull up on the belt to create some slack around the gear (callout
1), and then rotate the gear (callout 2) until the arrows align.

instructions.
Booklet diverter unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01398A Booklet diverter
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.

out to the screw.

Remove the booklet diverter
Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1860 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover
2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the connector.
3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1862 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

5. Remove the white bush
Figure 5-1864 Remove the white bush
6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make sure
not to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.
Figure 5-1865 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator
7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1867 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker
instructions.
Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor (S40)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor
Required tools
Post service test

Remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40).
2. Unplug one connector (callout 1) and remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40, callout 2)
Figure 5-1870 Remove the booklet diverter home sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor (M18)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly
JC93-01153A Booklet diverter motor
Required tools
Post service test
Remove the booklet diverter motor (M18)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter motor (M18).
▲ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet diverter
motor.

Figure 5-1872 Remove the separate pawl motor
instructions.
Booklet exit unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet exit sensor (S44)
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet exit sensor.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet exit sensor on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.

out to the screw.

Remove the booklet diverter
Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.
1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout 2).
Figure 5-1896 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover
2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the connector.
3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)
Figure 5-1898 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

5. Remove the white bush
6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make sure
not to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.
Figure 5-1901 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator
7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.
Figure 5-1903 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker
Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet exit sensor (S44).
3. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44, callout 1)
Figure 5-1906 Remove the booklet exit sensor
instructions.

Booklet output tray unit
Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet output tray.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet output tray on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC61-07253B Booklet output tray
JC63-04978B Booklet output tray cover
Required tools
Post service test

instructions.

PCA
Removal and replacement: Main PCA
Learn how to remove and replace the main PCA.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main PCA on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC92-02968A Finisher mainPCA
Required tools
Post service test

2).

Remove the controller PCA
Follow these steps to remove the controller PCA.
▲ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA.
TIP: Refer to the figure below for correct positioning and connection of the cables.
Figure 5-1915 Remove the controller PCA
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher PCA
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA.
Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA on the finisher.
instructions.
blank).
JC92-02789B Booklet finisher PCA
Required tools
Post service test

2).



rail.
rail.
Remove the booklet maker PCA
Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker PCA.

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the metal cover.
Figure 5-1934 Remove one screw and the metal cover
3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet maker PCA.
Figure 5-1935 Remove four screws and the PCA
instructions.

Problem solving
Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).
Refer to Error codes on page 674 for more details.
ENWW Problem solving 2177

Clear paper jams
Learn about clearing paper jams.

Clear paper jams in the Booklet maker
Learn how to clear paper jams in the Booklet maker.
Clear jams in the top output area
Learn how to clear jams in the top output area.
1. Open the top cover.
2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.
Clear jams in the booklet maker paper path
Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker paper path.

1. Open the booklet maker door.
2. Release the lever.

3. Turn the knob.
4. Remove the jammed paper.
Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area
Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area.

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.
3. Turn the knob to advance the jammed paper.
4. Remove the jammed paper/booklet from the output area.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area
Learn how to clear paper jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper-area.


3. Open the vertical tray by pulling outward on the green tab.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area
Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-middle-area.

3. Pull the green tab.

5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.
Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area
Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-lower area.

3. Open the roller door.
5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.
Clear jams in the IPTU
Learn how to clear jams in the IPTU.
1. Lift the IPTU cover and clear any jammed paper inside the IPTU.

2. Close the IPTU cover.
Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF)
Learn how to clear jams in the inner finisher (IF).
1. Open the staple cartridge access door.

2. Rotate the lever to the left to release the hooks that secure the inner finisher (they hold the IF in place).
3. Slide the inner finisher partially out.
4. Release the lever to open the right cover on the inner finisher.

5. Lift the inner finisher jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper inside the rear of the inner
finisher.
6. Close the inner finisher jam access cover.
7. Close the inner finisher right cover.
8. Open the output side jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
9. Close the output side jam access cover.
10. Slide the inner finisher in until it clicks into place.
11. Close the staple cartridge access door.
Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher

Learn how to clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher.

2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.
Finisher system diagram

Learn about the finisher system diagram.
Finisher system consists of the FINISHER PCA, BOOKLET MAKER PCA, SWITCH PCA, and HOLE PUNCH PCA.
ENWW Finisher system diagram 2191

Figure 5-1936 Finisher system diagram
PCA function
● FINISHER PCA
This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
● SWITCH PCA
This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the button input for manual staple operation.
● BOOKLET MAKER PCA
This PCA controls the booklet maker module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
● HOLE PUNCH PCA
This PCA controls the hole punch module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

6 Diagrams
Learn about the electrical-mechanical diagrams.
Diagrams (connection)
Learn about the connection diagram.
NOTE: The connection diagram includes the harness part code as shown below.
● Blue text harness codes are for both color and mono models.
● Green text harness codes are for mono models.
● Red text harness codes are for color models.
Figure 6-1 Connection diagram
E-LABEL
E-LABEL
ENWW Diagrams (connection) 2193

Diagrams (FUSER EXIT)
Learn about the fuser exit diagram.
Figure 6-2 Fuser exit diagram

HDD
FUSER
1. 6
FUSER
. .
FUSER POS EEPROM . .
. .
6 1
*X4300:Drawer
K4350:W allconnector
SATA POW ER ,YW 396-02F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
1. N
FUSER ,2-292229
-8
NC THERM ISTOR 0 . .
SATA SIGNAL,
CN40 -FUSER
67800-5001
. . 5V1_LP
1
. . 3_3V_CRUM
2
CN20-SATA SIGNAL
CN16-SATA POW ER
. .
M ono only.
THERM ISTOR . .
3 nFUSER_POS1
GND
SIDE 4
N 1
SATA_RX_P
SATA_RX_N
SDA1_CRUM _FUSER
SATA_TX _P
5
SATA_TX_N
5V2_SLP
6 SCL1_CRUM _FUSER
Coloronly.
DGND
DGN D
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
7 GND
NC
NC
8 NC0_TD_OUT
NC THERM ISTOR 1 9 NC0_TC_OUT
10 THERM _SIDE2
11 THERM _SIDE1
GND
EXIT ,3-292229
-0
12
13 NC1_TD_OUT CN6 -EXIT
10
9 14 NC1_TC_OUT 5V1_LP (N.C)
1
8 15 DIR_BLDC_FUSER GND (N.C)
7 2
FDB 16 CLK_BLDC_FUSER nPAPER_EXIT1 (N.C)
FUSER BLDC BLDC 6
5
4
nEN_BLDC_FUSER
3
4 5V1_SLP
18 5 GND
3 GAIN_BLDC_FUSER
2 19 6 nBIN_FULL_EXIT1
1 20 BRAKE_BLDC_FUSER A_EXIT2
7
21 GND nA_EXIT2
8
22 GND nB_EXIT2
9
23 24V3 B_EXIT2
10
24 24V3 PW M _RETURN_DUPLEX
11
25 A_EXIT1 24V3
12
EXIT1 STEP 26 nA_EXIT1
nB_EXIT1
13 5V1_LP
27
28 B_EXIT1
14
15
GND
nDETECT_T1_POS1
5V1_LP
M AIN PBA
16
17 GND
18 nPAPER_EXIT2
19 5V1_SLP
20 GND
21 nBIN_FULL_EXIT2
OPTION 22
23
24
nDETECT_EXIT2
GND
GND
25 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
26 nCOVER_OPEN_SI DE
27 OUT_FAN_FUSER
28 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER
EXIT2 STEP EXIT1 FULL
1 3 29
30
GND
NC
1 7 2 2
2 6 3 1
3 5
4 4
5 3
6 2
7 1
SOL
DUPLEX RETURN 1 8
Coloronly. 2 7
3 6
T1 POSITON 4 5
5 4
6 3
7 2
8 1
1 8
EXIT2 2 7
3 6
4 5
5 4
EXIT2 FULL 6 3
7 2
8 1
1 3
SIDE 2 2
COVER OPEN 3 1
Coloronly.
FUSER FA
Diagrams (PICKUP/PH DRIVE/SIDE)

Learn about the pickup/ph drive/side diagram.
2194 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW

Figure 6-3 Pickup/PH drive/side diagram
10
9 PH DRIVER ,3-292229-6
8
7
M AINBLDC BLDC 6
5
4
1
CN47 -PH DRIVER
DIR_BLDC_M AIN
3 2 CLK_BLDC_M AIN
2 3 nREADY_BLDC_M AIN
1 4 nEN_BLDC_M AIN
5 GAIN_BLDC_M AIN
1 6
6 BRAKE_BLDC_M AIN
FEED1 2 5 7 GND
3 4
8 GND
4 3 9 24V1_LP
1 3
REGI 5 2
2 2 10 24V1_LP
6 1
3 1 11 GND
12 nPAPER_FEED1
REGICLUTCH
CL 13
14
5V1_LP
GND
M P CLUTCH 15 nPAPER_REGI
M ono only.
CL 16
17
5V1_LP
REGI_CLUTCH _CON
FEED CLUTCH 18 24V1_LP
CL 19
20
M P_CLUTCH_CON
24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
22 24V1_LP
Coloronly. 23
24
A_T1
nA_T1
25 nB_T1
T1 STEP STEP 26
27
B_T1
DIR_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
28 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
29 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
10
9 30 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
8 31 GAIN_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
7 32 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
OPC BLDC(@M ONO)/
ITBBLDC(@C OLOR)
BLDC 6
5
4
33
34
GND
GND
3 35 24V1_LP
2
36 24V1_LP
1
1 6
PAPER _EM PTY1 2 5
3 4 PICKUP,2-292229-8
4 3
5 2 CN 46-PICKUP
PAPER _LIF
T1 6 1 1 5V1_LP
2 GND
3 nPAPER_EM PTY1
4 5V1_LP
5 GND
6 nPAPER_LIFT1
PICKUP1 STEP STEP 7
8
A_PICKUP1
nA_PICKUP1
SIDEUnit
1 3 9 nB_PICKUP1
M P_EM PTY 2
3
2
1 Coloronly. 10
11
B_PICKUP1
A_FEED
12 nA_FEED
STEP
SOL
M P SOLENOID 1 2
13 nB_FEED
2 1 FEED STEP 14 B_FEED
HYBRID 15 5V1_LP
16 GND
17 nPAPER_EM PTY2
18 5V1_LP
19 GND
DUPLEX STEP STEP PAPER_EM PTY2
1
2
6
5
20
21
nPAPER_LIFT2
GND
3 4 22 nPAPER_FEED2
4 3 23 5V1_LP
PAPER_LIF
T2 5 2 24 A_PICKUP2
6 1
25 nA_PICKUP2
1 3 26 nB_PICKUP2
FUSER OU T 1 3
2 2 27 B_PICKUP2
FEED2 2 2
3 1 28 NC
3 1
SIDE,3-292229-0
M ono only. CN36 -SIDE
1 3
CTD CTD
CTD 2
3
2
1
PICKUP2 STEP STEP 1
2
5V1_SLP
GND
3 nPAPER_M P_EM PTY
4 PW M _M P_SOL
Coloronly
CURL1
. 1
2
9
8
5
6
24V3
A_DUP
3 7 7 nA_DUP
4 6 8 nB_DUP
5 5 9 B_DUP
6 4 10 5V1_LP
7 3 11 GND
CURL2 1 30 12 nPAPER_FUSER_OUT
8 2 . .
9 1 13 ADC_INNER_TEM P(N.C)
. .
14 GND(N .C)
. . 15 NC
1 5 . .
16 5V_ACR (5V1_SLP)
2 4 . . 17 CTD_LED_CENT(GND)
DUPLEX JAM 3 3 30 1
18 CTD_P_MON O(nPAPER_CURL1)
4 2 19 5V1_SLP
5 1 20 GND
21 nPAPER_CURL2
22 5V1_SLP
1 3 23 GND
DUPLEX 2 2 24 nPAPER_JAM _DUPLEX
FAN 3 1 25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX
26 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX
27 GND
28 3.3
V
29 ADC_M P_SIZE
1 4
M P SIZE 1 3 30 GND
2 3
2 2
SENSOR 3 2
3 1
4 1
MAIN PC A
Diagrams (laser scanner assembly/HVPS)

Learn about the laser scanner assembly/HVPS diagram.
ENWW Diagrams (laser scanner assembly/HVPS) 2195

Figure 6-4 Laser scanner assembly/HVPS diagram
Diagrams (toner)
Learn about the toner diagram.
2196 Chapter 6 Diagrams ENWW

Figure 6-5 Toner diagram
Color only. TO NER DC ,3-292229-6
CN 15 TON ER
1 4 BO TTLE
2 5 1 nA_TON ER_DC _K
TO NER K 3 3 2 GN D
DC M TR DC TO NER K
4 2 3 5V1_LP
5 1 4 GN D
CO UN T 5 TO NER _COUN T_K
6 nA_TON ER_DC _C
1 4 7 GN D
TO NER C 2 5 8 5V1_LP
DC M TR DC TO NER C
3
4
3
2
9 GN D
10 TO NER _COUN T_C
CO UN T 5 1 11 3_3V_CRU M
12 SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
TO NER K
13 SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
CRU M 14 GN D
TO NER C 15 3_3V_CRU M
16 SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_C
CRUM 17 SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_C
TO NER M 1 4 18 GN D
DC M TR DC TO NER M
2
3
5
3
19 nA_TON ER_DC _M
20 GN D
CO UN T 4 2 21 5V1_LP
5 1 22 GN D
23 TO NER _COUN T_M
TO NER Y 24 nA_TON ER_DC _Y
DC M TR DC 1 4 25 GN D
TO NER Y 2
3
5
3
26
27
5V1_LP
GN D
M ono only.
CO UN T 4 2 28 TO NER _COUN T_Y TO NER, 1-292230-5
5 1 29 3_3V_CRU M
TO NER M 30 SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_
CN 7 TO NER
CRU M A_DU CT
31 M 1
nA_DUC T
32 SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_M 2
TO NER Y nB_DUC T
33 GN D 3
CRUM B_DU CT
34 3_3V_CRU M 4
GN D
35 SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_Y 5
nA_TO NER_DC _K
36 SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_Y 6
DUC T STEP GN D 7
5V1_LP
GN D
8
TO NER_COUN T_K_CO
9
N
10
5V_LP
11
O N_ERASER_K
1 4 12
3_3V_CRU M
TO NER DC M TR DC 2
3
5
3
13
14
SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
4 2 15
GN D
5 1
TO NER CN T
1 2 SHUTTER , PW M -0002-
ERA SER 2 1 Color only. CN 22 009-A1TTER
SHU
TO NER ACR GN D
CR UM SHU TTER DC 1
2
DM O T_ACR SHU TTER
5V_LP
AC R 3 GN D
4 nSENS_ACR _SHU TTER_H
SHUTTER OME
5
6 GN D
W ASTE 1 3 7 AD C_W AST E_LEVE L_C
ON
LEVEL 2 2 8 ID SENSO R ,2-292229-
3 1 9 O N_W ASTE_LED
5V_LP 2
CN 12 ID SENSO R
1 CTD_P_REAR
CTD REAR 2 5V_AC R
CTD 3 GN D
4 CTD_LED_REAR
5 CTD_P_FRON T
CTD FRO NT CTD 6 5V_AC R
7 GN D
8 CTD_LED_FRON T
9 CTD_P_CENT
CTD CENTER CTD 10 5V_AC R
11 GN D
12 CTD_S_CENT
13 CTD_LED_CENT
INNER TEMP 14 ADC _INN ER _TEM P
15 GN D
16 NC
Diagrams (FDB/LVPS)
Learn about the FDB/LVPS diagram.
ENWW Diagrams (FDB/LVPS) 2197

HEATER S/W
Diagrams (UI)
2198 Chapter 6 Diagrams

MAIN SWITCH
HEATER
AC
Learn about the UI diagram.

Figure 6-6 FDB/LVPS diagram
INLET
4
3
2
1
2
FUSER F
MAIN I
FU SER M A IN IF
1 LAMP 1 ZERO_CROSS_I N 1
2 LAM P2 DGN D 2
1 HEATER
3 COMM O N DGND 3
ON_MA IN_R ELA Y 4
HEATER S/W
GND
24V1 5
HEATER IF
HEATER S/W
ON_FUSER_RELAY 6
FU SER _24V 7
DGND 8
MAIN SWI TCH ON_FU SER _M AIN 1 9 SMPS TYPE5 12P
ON_FUSER_MAI N2 10
FDB CN30
1 5V1
1 2 5V2
MAIN PCA
2 MAIN SWITCH 3 24V1

4 24V2
3 5 24V3
4 6 24V4
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 DGND
10 DGND
11 DGND
TYPE5 12 DGND
INLET
INLET TYPE5
1 LIVE LIVE 1
2 NEUTR AL NEUTRAL 2
FDB IF ,2-292229-8
CN4 -FDB IF
1 ZERO CROSS IN
2 GND
3 GND
4 ON MAIN REL AY
TYPE 5 SIGNAL 5 24V1
6 ON FUSER RELAY
TYPE5 SIGNAL 7 FUSER 24V
8 GND
DGND 9 ON FUSER MAIN1
1
FAN
nEN _24V_SMP S 10 ON FUSER M AIN 0

SMPS
2 11 O UT FAN SMPS
_O 12 nDETECT_FAN_SMPS
3
DGND 13 GND
14 NC
15 nEN_24V_SMPS_O
16 GND
17 nPAPER_SIZE1
18 GND
PAPER
SIZE1
19 ADC_PAPER_SI ZE1
20 3.3V_SLP
SMPS TYP E 5 21 nPAPE R _SIZE2
22 GN D
PAPER
SIZE2
SMPS TYPE 5 23 ADC_PAPER_SI ZE2

5V1 1 24 3.3V_SLP
25 ADC OUTER TEMP
5V2 2 26 GND
24V1 3 27 ADC OUTER HUMI
28 3.3V_SLP
24V2 4
Mono
only.
HUMI DITY
OUT TEMP/
24V3 5
24V4 6
SMPS TYPE5
DGND 7
4
3
2
1
DG N D 8
LIVE
DGND 9
only.
TYPE5
1
2
3
4
Color
DGND 10
HUMI DITY
NEUTRAL
OUT TEMP/
DGND 11
D GND 12
TYPE5
2
1
ENWW
Figure 6-7 UI diagram
OPTION
USB IF
1
2
VBUS
DM
HUB JOINT
3 DP
4 GND WIFIIF HUB IF
NC 6 1 RESET_WIFI
3.3V
DM
DP
5
4
3
2
3
4
3.3V
DM
DP
WIFI
GND 2 5 GND
NFC IF
GND 1 6 GND
7 HOSTWAKE
VBUS
3.3V
GND
DM
DP
5
4
3
2
1
NFC IF
VBUS
3.3V
GND
DM
DP
NFC
1
2
3
4
5
UI
USB HOST3
CN8 SPEAKER
nRST_USB_HUB
nKEY_SOFT_PW
nWA KEUP_EUI
USB HOST4
nWAKEUP_ENG
CB POWER
SP EAKER
CN7 USB HOST3

MCB
CN5 USB HOST4

SPEAKER
SPEAKER
nRST_UI
SPEAKER
SPEAKER
1 VBUS_USB_HOST2
1 VBUS_USB_HOST2
POWER
2 DM_HOST3
_MCB
2 DM_HOST4
GND
M CN2
5VS
5VS
5VS
GND
GND
3 DP_HOST3
3 DP_HOST4
R
4 GND
4 GND
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
MCB USB IF
USB HOST2
nKEY_S O FT_PW
CN1 MCB USB IF

nWAKEUP_ENG
5VS
nWAKEUP_UI
1
POWER
CN6 USB HOST2

CN2 OPE
2 DM_MCB
nRST _U I
3 DP_MCB 1 VBUS_USB_HOST1
POWER
4 GND 2 DM_HOST2
GN D
GND
5VS
5VS
GND
5VS
3 DP_HOST2
OPE
5 GND
R
6 GND 4 GND
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7 GND
8 GND
9 GND
CN5 USB HOST1
VBUS_USB_HOST1
USB HO ST1
D M _HO ST 1
DP_HOST1
GND
USB HUB
1
2
3
4
OPE POWER ,1-

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
292230-4
OPE USB ,MNC2Y-
CN8 FRONT USB HUB
CN14 OPE
GND 1
5K5P10
GND 2
DM_FRONT_HUB
DP_FRONT_HUB
GND 3
WKUP2OPE 4
nWKUP2MCB 5
5V_OPE
5V_OPE 6
nKEY_SOFT_PWR_AVR 7
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5V_OPE 8
5V_OPE 9
5V_OPE 10
RST_USB_HUB_OPE 11
nRST_UI 12
GND 13
GND 14
MAIN PCA
Diagrams (FRONT/OPC)
Learn about the front OPC diagram.
ENWW Diagrams (FRONT/OPC) 2199

FRONT ,2-292 229
-4
3
2
1
CN49 FRO N T M O N O
1 GN D
FRO N T
1
2
3
2 CO VER_OPEN _FRON T
COVER OPEN
3 3.3V_SB
4 GN D
M ono only.
5 nDETECT_W ASTE_IN ST
M A IN P C A
IN ST
4
3
2
1
W ASTE
6 GN D
7 ADC_W ASTE_LEVEL
8 EN _W ASTE_LED
LEVEL

1
2
3
4
W ASTE
9 5V_LP
10 O U T_FAN _FUSER
11 nDETECT_FAN _FUSER_CO N
FAN
12 GN D
FUSER
13 5V_LP
14 GN D
15 DUCT_CO UNT
16 GN D
DU CT
17 TC_VIN _K
CO U N T
18
8
1
24 V1_LP
.
.
19 TSEN _VCO NT_K FRO N T ,2-29222 9
-6
TC SEN SO R
Diagrams (scanner)
20 3.3V_CRUM
1
8
.
.
21 SDA_CRUM _DEVE0 CN32 FRO N T CO LO R
4
3
2
1
CRU M
DEVE
22 SCL_CRUM _DEVE0 1 GN D
23 GN D 2 TC_VIN _K
Color only.
24 NC
1
2
3
4
3 24 V1_LP
4 TSEN_VCO NT_K
5 GN D
6 CO VER_OPEN _FRON T
Figure 6-8 Front/OPC diagram
Color only.
7 3.3V_SB
8
TC K SEN SO R FRO N T
GN D
9 nDETECT_W ASTE_IN ST
CO VER O PEN
Learn about the scanner diagram.

10 A_W AS TE
11 nA_W ASTE
12
IN ST
nB_W ASTE
W ASTE
13 B_W ASTE
14 GN D
15 TC_VIN _C
16 24 V2
STEP
17 TSEN_VCO NT_C
18 GN D
19 TC_VIN _M
4
3
2
1
20 24 V2
21 TSEN_VCO NT_M
22 GN D
1
2
3
4
23 TC_VIN _Y
W TB STEP TC C SEN SO R
24 24 V2
4
3
2
1
25 TSEN_VCO NT_Y
26 NC
1
2
3
4
TC M SEN SO R
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
TC Y SEN SO R
O PC SENSOR ,3-29222 9
-6
ERASER K
PBA
M odular
CN19 O PC SEN SO R
O PC DRIVE ,4-29222 9
-0 1 5V_LP
CRU M
10
D EVE K
9 2 ON _ERASER_K
8 CN22 OPC DRIVE 3 3.3V_CRUM
Coloronly.
7 1 DIR_BLDC_O PC_K
6 4 SDA_CRUM _DEVE_K
5 2 CLK_BLDC_O PC_K 5 SCL_CRUM _DEVE_K
BLDC
O PC K
ERASER C
4 3 nREAD Y_BLDC_O PC_K

PBA
6 GN D
BLDC
3 4 nEN _BLDC_O PC_K

M odular
2 7 5V_LP
1 5 GAIN _BLDC_O PC_K 8 O N _ERASER_C
CRU M
DEVE C
6 BRAKE_BLDC_O PC_K 9 3.3V_CRUM
7 GN D 10 SDA_CRUM _DEVE_C
8 GN D 11 SCL_CRUM _DEVE_C
9 24V2 12 GN D
10 10 24 V2
OP C K
13 5V_LP
PHASE
9
8 11 DIR_BLDC_O PC_C 14 GN D
7 12 CLK_BLDC_O PC_C 15 O PC_PHASE_K
6 13 nREAD Y_BLDC_O PC_C
5 16 5V_LP
BLDC
O PC C
4 14 nEN _BLDC_O PC_C 17 GN D

BLDC
OP C C
3
PHASE
15 GAIN _BLDC_O PC_C 18 O PC_PHASE_C

2 16 BRAKE_BLDC_O PC_C
1 19 5V_LP
17 GN D 20 ON _ERASER_M
18 GN D 21 3.3V_CRUM
19 24V2 22 SDA_CRUM _DEVE_M
20 24 V2 23 SCL_CRUM _DEVE_M
ERASER M
21 DIR_BLDC_O PC_M 24 GN D
PBA
10 22 CLK_BLDC_O PC_M 25 5V_LP

M odular
9 23 nREADY_BLDC_O PC_M
8 26 ON _ERASER_Y
CRU M
DEVE M
7 24 nEN _BLDC_O PC_M 27 3.3V_CRUM

6 25 GAIN _BLDC_O PC_M 28 SDA_CRUM _DEVE_Y
5 26 BRAKE_BLDC_O PC_M
BLDC
O PC M
4 29 SCL_CRUM _DEVE_Y
BLDC
3 27 GN D 30 GN D
2 28 GN D 31 5V_LP
ERASER Y
1
PBA
29 24 V2 32 GN D
M odular
30 24V2 33 O PC_PHASE_M
31 DIR_BLDC_O PC_Y 34 5V_LP
32 CLK_BLDC_O PC_Y 35 GN D
33 nREADY_BLDC_O PC_Y 36 O PC_PHASE_Y
10 34 nEN _BLDC_O PC_Y
9
D EVE Y OPC M
35 GAIN _BLDC_O PC_Y

CRU M PHASE
8
7 36 BRAKE_BLDC_O PC_Y
6 37 GN D
5
BLDC
38 GN D
OP C Y
4
BLDC
3 39 24 V2
OP C Y
PHASE
2 40 24 V2
1
ENWW
Figure 6-9 Scanner diagram
DSD F
Scanner Unit
CCD M IF , DSDF DC IS ,4-292229-0

SCAN IF ,3-292229-4 05002HR-H50G 4 CN 24 DSDF DC IS
CN 3 SCAN IF CN 9 CCD M IF SCAN_VCLK_2_P 1
1 SC AN_M TR _M S1 GN D 1 SCAN_VCLK_2_N 2
2 PW M _SC AN_M O T SCAN_VCLK_1_P 2 GN D 3
3 SC AN_M TR _DIR SCAN_VCLK_1_N 3 LVDO _D CIS_4_P 4
4 nEN_SCAN_M TR GN D 4 LVDO _D CIS_4_N 5
5 SC AN_M TR _PLS SLO AD_AFE 5 GN D 6
6 PW M _W HITE_LED SCLK_AFE 6 LVDO _D CIS_3_P 7
7 nFLAT_CO VER_O PEN2 SDI_AFE 7 LVDO _D CIS_3_N 8
8 nFLAT_CO VER_O PEN1 GN D 8 GN D 9
9 nCCD _HO M E PITG 1 9 LVDO _D CIS_2_P 10
10 nAPS _SEN SO R2 nRST_CCD _AFE 10 LVDO _D CIS_2_N 11
11 nAPS _SEN SO R1 SDO _AFE 11 GN D 12
12 nDETECT_DADF GN D 12 LVCK_DC IS_P 13
13 nDETECT_PAP ER_DAD F LVDO 4_N 13 LVCK_DC IS_N 14
14 nSCAN_READ 1 LVDO 4_P 14 GN D 15
15 DADF_TXD GN D 15 LVDO _D CIS_1_P 16
16 DADF_R XD LVDO 3_N 161 LVDO _D CIS_1_N 17
17 nRST_DADF LVDO 3_P 7 GN D 18
18 nSCAN_READ 2 GN D 18 LVDO _D CIS_0_P 19
19 GN D LVCK_N 19 LVDO _D CIS_0_N 20
20 GN D LVCK_P 20 GN D 21
21 GN D GN D 21 GN D 22
22 GN D LVDO 2_N 22 SDI_DC IS 23
23 3.3V_LP LVDO 2_P 23 SCLK_DC IS 24
24 GN D GN D 24 SDO _DC IS 25
25 5V1_W KSRC _SCAN LVDO 1_N 25 SLO AD_DICS 26
26 GN D LVDO 1_P 26 GN D 27
27 5V_LP GN D 27 GN D 28
28 5V_LP LVDO 0_N 28 PITG 2 29
29 GN D LVDO 0_P 29 GN D 30
30 24V3 GN D 30 3.3V_A1000 31
31 24V3 3.3V_LP 31 3.3V_A1000 32
32 24V3 3.3V_LP 32 3.3V_A1000 33
33 24V3 3.3V_LP 33 3.3V_A1000 34
34 SC AN_M TR _M S2 3.3V_LP 34 3.3V_A1000 35
3.3V_LP 35 3.3V_A1000 36
3.3V_LP 36 3.3V_A1000 37
3.3V_LP 37 3.3V_A1000 38
3.3V_LP 38 GN D 39
GN D 39 GN D 40
GN D 40
5V2_LP 41
5V2_LP 42
5V2_LP 43
5V2_LP 44
GN D 45
GN D 46
10V_CC D 47
10V_CC D 48
10V_CC D 49
10V_CC D 50
Diagrams (Dual Cassette Feeder)

Learn about the Dual Cassette Feeder diagram.
ENWW Diagrams (Dual Cassette Feeder) 2201

FEED2
FEED1
EMPTY2
EMPTY1
COVER OPEN
LIFT2
LIFT1
OPTION

2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
OPTION
nSI
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
24V4
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
CN6 SENSORIF
SENSORIF
nSENS_P_FEED2
nSENS_P_FEED1
nSENS_LFIT2_LMIIT
nSENS_LFIT1_LMIIT
nSENS_P_EMPTY2
nSENS_P_EMPTY1
DECOVER_OPEN
INNER
SIDE COVEROPEN
FINISHER
CN3 SIDE COVER OPEN

FINISHER3K
MINICUBE2
MT R IF
CN1
CN5 M TR IF 3.3V 1
1 N.C nRESET 2
2 N.C SOF3_DEBUG 3
3 A_FEED 3.3V 4
4 nA_FEED SIF3_DEBUG 5
5 nB_FEED nSCKF3_DEBUG 6
FEED STEP
STEP
6 B_FEED HS_DEBUG 7
Figure 6-10 2x520 sheet feeder diagram
7 N.C FLMD1 8
8 N.C FLMD0 9
9 A_PICKUP1 NC 10
10 nA_PICKUP1
11 nB_PICKUP1
STEP
12 B_PICKUP1
PICKUP1STEP
13 A_PICKUP2
14 nA_PICKUP2 ENGINE IF
15 nB_PICKUP2
16 B_PICKUP2
MO LEX
17 N.C CN7 ENGINE IF 55515-1605/
NC 1
nCMD_REQ 2
NC 3
STEP
NC 4
PICKUP1STEP
GND 5
M OLEX
GND 6 54678-1619/
GND 7
GND 8
GND 9
24V4 10
TYCO
TYCO
24V4 11
2-292249-2/
2-292246-2/
24V4 12
5V_SUSP 13
5V_SUSP 14
5V_SUSP 15
2x520 sheet feeder

nRST_DCF 16
RXD 17
TXD 18
DUBUG
USB
CN2 DEBUG
3.3V 1
CN4 USB TXD_DEBUG 2
1 NC RXD_DEBUG 3
2 DM GND 4
3 DP
4 GND
GND
GND
3.3V
3.3V
FINISHER ,PW W-0002-016-A1

DCF,1-2922230-8
CN28 -FINISHER
ADC_P_SZIE2
ADC_P_SZIE1
CN27 -DCF 1 nRST_FNIISHER

1 DCF_RXD 2 FINISHER_TXD
2
3 FINISHER_RXD
CN9 PAER SIZE1,
2 DCF_TXD
nCASSETTE2_OPEN
nCASSETTE1_OPEN
3 nRST_DCF 4 nCMD_REQ_FI NISHER

PAERSIZE1,2
4 5V1_SLP 5 NC
5 5V1_SLP 6 nDETECT_FNIISHER
7 5V1_SLP
MAIN PCA
6 5V1_SLP
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7 24V1 8 DGND
8 24V1 9 24V4
9 24V1 10 24V4
10 DGND 11 24V4
11 DGND 12 24V4
12 DGND 13 DGN D
13 DGND 14 DGND
14 nDETECT_DCF 15 DGND
15 NC 16 DGND
16 NC
17 nCMD_REQ_DCF
18 NC
PAPERSIZE2
PAPERSIZE1
ENWW
7 Inner finisher
Learn more about the inner finisher.
ENWW 2203
Product specification and description
Learn about product specifications and descriptions.
Inner finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the inner finisher.
Front & rear view
Figure 7-1 Inner finisher system - front view
Figure 7-2 Inner finisher system - rear view
Table 7-1 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information

C1 Front cover JC90-01321B (*)
C2 Top cover JC90-01323B (*)
C3 Middle cover JC90-01322B (*)
C4 Punch cover JC90-01343B (*)
2204 Chapter 7 Inner finisher ENWW

Table 7-1 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information (continued)
C5 Output tray JC90-01337B (*)
C6 PCA cover JC63-04792B (*)
C7 Left cover JC90-01324B (*)
C8 Rear cover JC63-04750B (*)
1 Lock release handle JC66-04233A (*)
2 Main interface harness JC39-02169A (*)
Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A (*)

NOTE: Exit bin full is included in the box
Specification
Learn about the specifications of the inner finisher.
Table 7-2 General specifications

Item Description
Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm
Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open
Media Sizes ● Main: 98mm - 320mm x 139.7mm - 457.2mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.5in - 18in)
● Top: 98mm - 320mm x 148.0mm - 430.0mm(3.86in - 12.59in x 5.83in - 16.93in)
Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/Glossy/

Envelope
Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)
● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)
Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)
Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)
Weight 15 kg (33 lb.)
Tray1 Finishing Capacity 50 Sheets @ 80gsm

Item Description
Tray1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Center)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)
Tray2 Finishing Capacity 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm
Table 7-3 Paper Size Specification

Name Paper size Orientatio Output Staple position
n
mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL
52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat
A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O
Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O
Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O
No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X
Monarch Env 98.4 x 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X

190.5
PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X

152.4
A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X
No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X
DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X
C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X
B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X
Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X
A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X
C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X
B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X
16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Table 7-3 Paper Size Specification (continued)
Name Paper size Orientatio Output Staple position

n
mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL
52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat
Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O
Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9
C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X
Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O
Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

457.2
SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O O X X X X
Custom W 98-320 W3.86-12. — O X O X X X

~ 59 ~
L L 5.5-18
139.7-457.
2
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.
Table 7-4 Punch specifications

Name Paper size Orientation Punch
mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
2H 3H 2H 4H 4H
A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O
Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O
Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O
A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O
B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O
B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O
Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O
No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X
Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

Env

Table 7-4 Punch specifications (continued)
Name Paper size Orientation Punch
mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish
2H 3H 2H 4H 4H
PostCard 101.6 x 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

4X6 152.4
A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X
No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X
DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X
C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X
B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X
Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X
A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O
C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X
B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O
B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O
Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O
16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O
A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O
Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O
Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O
Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O
Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O

342.9
C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X
Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O
B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O
8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O
Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O
A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O
Tabloid 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X

Extra 457.2
SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X
Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ - X X X X X
L 140-1200 L 5.5-47

Table 7-5 Media performance
Paper Type Function
Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch
Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O
Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O
Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 g/m²) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 g/m2) O O O O
Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 g/m2) X O X X
Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 g/m2) X O X X
Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O
Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O
Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O
Bond O O O O
Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O
LetterHead O O O O
Pre-Punched O O O X
Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O
Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X
Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X
Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 g/m²) X O X X
Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 g/m2) X O X X
Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O
Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X
Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O X X X
Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X
Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) O X X X
Tab O X X O
Perforated Paper (75-90 g/m2) X O X X

Inner finisher system
Learn about the inner finisher system.
Overview
Learn about the overview of the inner finisher.
Work flow
Figure 7-3 Inner finisher system - work flow overview
Table 7-6 Inner finisher system - work flow overview
1 Punch unit holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper
2 Entrance unit allows paper to move into the finisher
3 Diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can stay out for seconds while the stapled
bundle of paper moves to the output tray
4 Exit unit moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit
5 Paper support unit prevents paper from being fallen down or bent when the long length paper such as A3 is
ejected from the exit unit
6 Main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle
7 Sub paddle unit moves paper to the end fence
8 End fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper
9 Tamper unit aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper
10 Stapler unit performs stapling to a bundle of aligned documents
11 Ejector 1 unit transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit
12 Ejector 2 unit grips a stack of paper up and ejects it onto the output tray
13 Output tray unit stacks the job ended paper
14 Paper holding unit controls the output tray movement

Sensor
Figure 7-4 Inner finisher system - sensor
Table 7-7 Inner finisher system - sensor

S1 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Photo emitter, Checks paper comes into the
detector entrance unit
S2 Stapler position 0604-001393 113-0491 Photo interrupter Makes the stapler be positioned in the
sensor exact stapling position
113-0492
S3 Front cover JC39-01610A 113-0410 Cover open Checks whether the front cover is
switch switch closed or opened
S4 Main paddle 0604-001393 113-0370 Photo interrupter Checks the main paddle locates at the
home sensor home position
S5 Front tamper 0604-001393 113-0390 Photo interrupter Checks the front tamper locates at
home sensor the home position
S6 Output tray 0604-001393 113-0473 Photo interrupter Checks the output tray motor is
motor sensor operational
S7 Output tray lower JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Lower limit Checks the lower limit (=Output tray
limit switch switch assembly is full) of the output tray
S8 Output tray top 0603-001309 (*) 113-0471 Photo TR Checks the upper limit of output tray
of stack sensor
(receiver)
S9 Paper holding 0604-001393 113-0470 Photo interrupter Checks the location of the paper
sensor holding actuator
S10 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 113-0462 Photo interrupter Checks the ejector 2 locates at the
sensor home position.
S11 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393 113-0463 Photo interrupter Checks the ejector 2 motor is
sensor operational

Table 7-7 Inner finisher system - sensor (continued)
S12 Paper support 0604-001393 113-0481 Photo interrupter Checks the paper support locates at
home sensor the home position
S13 Output tray top 0601-003440 113-0471 LED IR Checks the upper limit of output tray
of stack sensor
(led)
S14 Rear tamper 0604-001393 113-0380 Photo interrupter Checks the rear tamper locates at the
home sensor home position
S15 Top cover switch JC39-01610A (*) 113-0420 Cover open Checks whether the top cover is
switch closed or opened
S16 Ejector 1 home 0604-001393 113-0461 Photo interrupter Checks the ejector 1 locates at the
sensor home position
S17 End fence sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Photo emitter, Check paper comes into the end
detector fence unit
S18 Punch waste box 0604-001393 113-0620 Photo interrupter Detects the punch waste box is
sensor installed
S19 Punch waste full 0604-001381 (*) 113-0621 Photo emitter, Checks the punch waste box is full
sensor detector
S20 Finisher docking 0604-001393 113-0000 Photo interrupter Checks the finisher is installed
sensor
S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Photo interrupter Checks paper comes into the exit unit
Figure 7-5 Inner finisher system - Photo interrupter (0604-001393)
Figure 7-6 Inner finisher system - Photo emitter, detector (0604-001381)

Motor and solenoid
Figure 7-7 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid
Table 7-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid

Motor
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type sensor Description
M1 Stapler JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Step motor Drives the stapler unit
position motor
M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Step motor Drives the exit roller and the sub
paddle unit
M3 Main paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-0510 Step motor Home Drives the main paddle unit
motor
assembly
M4 Output tray JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 DC Motor Encoder Drives the output tray unit
motor
assembly
M5 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Step motor Home Drives the rear tamper unit
motor
assembly
M6 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-0562 DC Motor Home, Drives the ejector 2 unit
assembly encoder
M7 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A 113-0561 Step Motor Home Drives the ejector 1 unit
assembly
M8 Paper support JC93-00802B 113-0571 Step Motor Home Drives paper support unit
motor
assembly

Table 7-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid (continued)
Motor
No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type sensor Description
M9 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Step Motor Home Drives the front tamper unit
motor
assembly
M10 Entrance JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Step Motor Drives the entrance roller and the
motor middle roller
assembly
SL1 Paper holding JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Solenoid Drives paper holding unit
solenoid
The sensor mounted at the driving motor detects motor operation. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an event
code only for the motor will pop up.
Figure 7-8 Inner finisher system - motor sensor
The home position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference point when the specific unit is
operating.
Figure 7-9 Inner finisher system - home sensor

Roller
Figure 7-10 Inner finisher system - roller
Table 7-9 Inner finisher system - roller
R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward
R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward
R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Roller Moves paper forward


PCA
Figure 7-11 Inner finisher system - PCA
Table 7-10 Inner finisher system - roller
1 Main PCA JC92-02774B (*)
2 Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A (*) Joint PCA between main PCA and
several parts punch, stapler,
entrance, and front door
Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the inner finisher.
The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is located
immediately before the entrance unit and punches holes onto a paper.
● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/3 Punch : Y1G02-67901
● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/4 Punch : Y1G03-67901
● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch : Y1G04-67901
NOTE: Puncher types vary depending on the country/region.
In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
clockwise, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make holes. When
making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the inner gear rotates to the left to drill
two holes. The travel distance and position of the motor are detected and controlled by the hole punch home
sensor and the hole punch motor sensor.

Figure 7-12 Inner finisher system - punched hole location and pair
For more information, go to the HP WISE support portal and search for HP LaserJet Managed MFP - How to use
the hole punch (c05450959).
Figure 7-13 Inner finisher system - punch unit overview

Figure 7-14 Inner finisher system - punch unit detail view
Table 7-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information
- Hole 2/3 Punch Y1G02-67901 (*) Punch unit assembly for hole 2/3
Hole 2/4 Punch Y1G03-67901 Punch unit assembly for hole 2/4
Swedish Punch Y1G04-67901 Punch unit assembly for Swedish
Punch cover JC90-01343B Punch cover (for the finisher punch

is not installed)
1 Punch motor - 113-0610 Drives the entrance roller

connected by a belt
2 Punch motor sensor - 113-0600 Detects punch motor operation
3 Punch home sensor - 113-0612 Detects punchers’ home position
Not Punch PBA 2-4 hole SS465-67001 (*)

shown
Not Punch PBA 2-3 hole SS467-67001 (*)

shown
Not Punch PBA Swedish SS466-67001 (*)

shown
(*) This part is in system.

Figure 7-15 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (3 holes)
Figure 7-16 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (2 holes)
Entrance unit
Learn about the entrance unit of the inner finisher.
The entrance unit is located right after the punch unit. This unit is driven by entrance motor which is installed on
the rear of the finisher. This motor is connected to the entrance roller by a belt, which transfers driving force to
move paper from the printer to the finisher inside. If an error such as paper jam occurs in the entrance unit, the
entrance sensor detects the error and generates an event code (13.60.xx).
Figure 7-17 Inner finisher system - entrance unit overview

Figure 7-18 Inner finisher system - entrance unit detail view
Table 7-12 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information
S1 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Detects paper if it comes into the
entrance unit
M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Drives the entrance roller
assembly connected by a belt
- Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)
R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Moves paper forward

Diverter unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the inner finisher.
The diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can wait for a few seconds until the stapled bundle
moves to the output tray. The diverter unit is used to change paper path, which is done by a spring mounted on
the diverter unit. When paper exit from the unit, it goes through the upper path of the diverter. When the paper
rolls back, it passes the lower paper path created by the diverter. Here, the paper sits for a while until the next
paper is ready to come out together.

Figure 7-19 Inner finisher system - diverter unit overview
Figure 7-20 Inner finisher system - diverter unit detail view
Table 7-13 Inner finisher system - diverter unit parts information
M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-501 Drives the feed roller connected by
assembly a belt
Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)
R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Drives paper forward installed in

front of the diverter
1 Diverter JC61-06392A Changes paper path when paper

goes backward
2 Diverter spring JC61-07269A Pulls the diverter to upward so

that it makes paper path to the
lower of the diverter
Diverter unit operation
1. Paper goes forward to the output tray.

2. Exit roller stops after paper passes by the diverter unit.
3. Paper goes backward under the diverter unit.
Exit unit
Learn about the exit unit of the inner finisher.
The exit unit is the part that moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit. The exit unit is powered by an
exit motor installed on the front of the finisher. The motor and the exit roller are connected by a single belt. The
exit motor rotates in both the forward and reverse directions, since it serves to return paper to a new paper path

created by the diverter unit. The exit sensor is installed right in front of exit roller. It generates an event code
when a paper jam occurred.
Figure 7-21 Inner finisher system - exit unit overview
Figure 7-22 Inner finisher system - exit unit detail view
Table 7-14 Inner finisher system - exit unit parts information

1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path
2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path

Table 7-14 Inner finisher system - exit unit parts information (continued)
3 Exit sensor actuator JC66-04199A (*) 113-0360 Makes the sensor on and off by
checking paper
S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Detects paper if it passes through
the exit unit
M2 Exit motor assembly JC90-01331A 113-0502 Drives the exit roller connected by
a belt
Exit motor JC31-00169B (*)
R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit

Exit unit operation
1. When rotating the exit motor counter clockwise, paper goes forward to the output tray.
2. When rotating the exit motor clockwise, paper goes backward to the end fence unit.

Paper support unit
Learn about the paper support unit of the inner finisher.
Paper support unit works to prevent the paper from falling out or being folded. Also, the newly printed paper will
not scatter papers already sitting on the output tray. Paper guides are installed on each front and rear side of the
finisher, these guides move towards the output tray when the paper exits, then the guides return to the original
position after the support operation is completed. The paper support home sensor confirms the original position
of the guide.
Figure 7-23 Inner finisher system - paper support unit overview
Figure 7-24 Inner finisher system - paper support unit detail view
Table 7-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information
1 Rear paper support JC90-01311A (*) Supports paper not to be bended
2 Front paper support JC90-01310A (*) Supports paper not to be bended
S12 Paper support home 0604-001393 113-0481 Detects the paper support guides
sensor locate at the home position

Table 7-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information (continued)
M8 Paper support motor JC93-00802B 113-0571 Drives paper support guides from
assembly the home position to the forward
direction
Paper support motor JC31-00149A

Paper support unit operation
Paper support unit is extended to the arrow direction to help paper is bent of fallen to the output tray.
Figure 7-25 Inner finisher system - paper support unit operation
Paddle unit
Learn about the paddle unit of the inner finisher.
The paddle unit consists of two paddle systems, a main paddle and a sub paddle. First, when paper is discharged
from the exit unit, the main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle. Then the sub paddle unit moves paper to
the end fence unit so that it can be ready to be stapled.
The main paddle unit is operated by the main paddle motor. The main paddle sensor detects the main paddle
position. The sub paddle unit rotates by the exit motor.

Figure 7-26 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (main paddle unit)
Figure 7-27 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (sub paddle unit)
Figure 7-28 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (1/2)

Figure 7-29 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (2/2)
Table 7-16 Inner finisher system - paddle unit parts information
1 Main paddle JC90-01327A (*) Moves paper to the sub paddle

unit
1-a Main paddle kit JC82-01038A (*)
1-b Main paddle A JC63-04957A (*)
1-c Main paddle B JC63-04958A (*)
1-d Main paddle holder JC81-07560A (*)
2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A (*) Gets paper move to the end fence
and arrange them to be stapled
correctly
S4 Main paddle home 0604-001393 113-0370 Detects the home position of the
sensor main paddle
M3 Main paddle motor JC90-01331A (*) 113-0510 Drives the main paddle unit
assembly connected by a belt
Main paddle motor JC31-00149A
M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Drives the sub paddle unit
connected by a belt
Paddle unit operation
1. Main paddles get paper moves to the sub paddle unit.

2. Sub paddle unit gets paper goes to the end fence unit.
Tamper unit
Learn about the tamper unit of the inner finisher.
The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper in order to staple it to the correct
position. When a certain amount of paper for stapling is collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and
right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly.
Each temper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The temper unit sensors are
mounted on the back side of the unit, to check the position of the temper unit.

Figure 7-30 Inner finisher system - tamper unit overview
Figure 7-31 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (1/3)
Figure 7-32 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (rear) (2/3)

Figure 7-33 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (front) (3/3)
Table 7-17 Inner finisher system - tamper unit parts information
1 Front tamper JC82-00899A (*) Aligns left and right side of paper
2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A (*) Aligns left and right side of paper
M5 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Drives the rear temper unit
assembly
Rear tamper motor JC31-00149A
S14 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 113-0380 Detects the reference position of
sensor the tamper unit
M9 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Drives the front tamper unit
assembly
Front tamper motor JC31-00149A
S5 Front tamper home 0604-001393 113-0390 Detects the reference position of

sensor the tamper unit
Tamper unit operation
1. Paper is arranged at the end of the end fence unit.
2. The left and right tampers arrange a stack of paper.

End fence unit
Learn about the end fence unit of the inner finisher.
The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to
be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper. The end fence is fixed onto the finisher, and the end fence
sensor can sense any paper entering the end fence unit.
Figure 7-34 Inner finisher system - end fence unit overview

Figure 7-35 Inner finisher system - end fence unit detail view
Table 7-18 Inner finisher system - end fence unit parts information
1 End fence JC61-06428A Aligns paper toward top and

bottom direction
2 End fence sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Detects paper whether paper
exists in the end fence unit
End fence unit operation
1. Paper goes into the end fence unit through the main paddle unit and sub paddle unit. At the same time the
end fence unit is aligned paper to the direction of yellow line.
2. The end fence sensor is checking whether paper goes into the end fence sensor.

Stapler unit
Learn about the stapler unit of the inner finisher.
Stapler unit is a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents. Documents are
collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then stapler assembly staples the
bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.
Figure 7-36 Inner finisher system - stapling options
The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The four stapler position sensors are mounted so
that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on the left, the right, or at
the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler assembly.
Figure 7-37 Inner finisher system - stapler unit overview

Figure 7-38 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (1/2)
Figure 7-39 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (2/2)
Table 7-19 Inner finisher system - stapler unit parts information
1 Stapler assembly JC59-00040A (*) Staples a bundle of paper
1-a Staple cartridge JC81-07408B (*) Staple cartridge
S2 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0491 Detects and moves the staple
assembly position to make a
113-0492 bundle of paper at the exact
location
M1 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Gets the staple assembly move
toward top and down direction of
paper
Stapler unit operation
1. The stapler position motor delivers the stapler assembly to the horizontal direction (yellow line).

2. The stapler assembly checks front and rear home position and moves where the stapler position sensors
are located depending on stapling types.
Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the inner finisher.
The ejector unit moves a bundle of stapled paper out. The ejector unit consists of ejector1 and ejector2. The
Ejector1 transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this process, the
ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And the ejector1 home position sensor controls
the movement of the ejector1. When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the ejector2 grabs a stack of paper
and ejects it onto the output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor
sensor helps it to be controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home position sensor is mounted to check the
location of the ejector2.

Figure 7-40 Inner finisher system - ejector unit overview
Figure 7-41 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (1/3)

Table 7-20 Inner finisher system - ejector unit parts information
NA Ejector SS456-61001 (*)
1 Ejector2 Not applicable Moves paper from the ejector 1 to

the output tray
2 Ejector1 Not applicable Moves the stack of paper from the

end fence to the ejector2
S10 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0462 Detects the home position of the
ejector2
S16 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0461 Detects the home position of the
ejector1
3 Ejector motor assembly JC90-01309A Moves the ejector1 and ejector2
M6 Ejector2 motor assembly JC93-01168A (*) 113-0562 Moves the ejector2 forward and
backward
Ejector2 motor JC31-00175A Detects the ejector2 motor

rotation
S11 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0463
M7 Ejector1 motor assembly JC93-00998A (*) 113-0561 Grabs a stack of paper, then move
it to the output tray
Ejector1 motor JC31-00009C

Ejector unit operation
1. Ejector 1 pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.

2. Ejector 2 grabs paper, then moves forward to the output tray unit direction.
3. Ejector2 draws off paper on the output tray.

Output tray & paper holding unit
Learn about the output tray & paper holding unit of the inner finisher.
The output tray moves up and down along the rails inside the finisher, and the output tray motor controls those
movement according to the signals sent from the paper holding sensor. As paper stacks up on the output tray,
the paper holding unit is lifted by papers. When the paper holding sensor is touched, the output tray moves
downward.
The machine detects when the output tray is full as the output tray hits the lower limit switch. The output tray
top of stack sensor is mounted on both left and right sides for the case that the paper holding sensor breaks
down.
The paper holding solenoid lifts the paper holding actuator up when a new bundle of paper come to the output
tray.
Figure 7-44 Inner finisher system - output tray unit overview

Figure 7-45 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (1/2)
Figure 7-46 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (2/2)
Table 7-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information
1 Output tray JC90-01337B (*) Stacking plate for ejected paper
M4 Output tray motor JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 Moves the output tray up and
assembly down
Output tray motor JC31-00178B (*)
S6 Output tray motor 0604-001393 113-0473 Detects if the output tray motor is
sensor operational
2 Output tray frame JC90-01319A (*)
S7 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of the
switch output tray
3 Output tray lower JC66-04200A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of the
actuator output tray
4 Output tray top of stack JC82-01039A (*) 113-0471 Detects abnormal movement of
sensor kit output tray (Output tray top of
stack sensor receiver + led)
S8 Output tray top of stack 0603-001309 (*)

sensor (receiver)

Table 7-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information (continued)
S13 Output tray top of stack 0601-003440

sensor (led)
Figure 7-47 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit overview
Figure 7-48 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit detail view
Table 7-22 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information
1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A (*) Controls the output tray height,
and grabs stacked paper not to be
scattered
2 Paper holding kit JC90-01314A (*) Paper holding solenoid + Paper

holding sensor
SL1 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Moves paper holding actuator up
when paper goes out to the output
tray

Table 7-22 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information (continued)
S9 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 113-0470 Detects stacked paper position

Inner finisher system - output tray & paper holding unit operation
1. Paper holding unit helps paper stores stable on the output tray. Besides it detects amount of stacked paper
and get the output tray moves downward.
2. When paper goes out to the output tray, paper holding solenoid forcibly make paper holding actuator goes
upward to create the paper passage not to be jammed by the paper holding actuator.
3. As the paper accumulates, output tray moves downward. When it reaches at the end of the moving range,
output tray lower limit switch is pressed. The switch detects paper stacks full on the output tray.

4. In case of fatal error in the output tray unit and paper holding unit, output tray top of stack sensor makes
the machine emergency stop so that output tray unit does not move upward.
PCA connection information

Learn about the PCA connection information.

Figure 7-49 Inner finisher system - PCA connection information
Table 7-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information
Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid
CN No. Connector name (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)
CN1 Rear sensor ● Punch waste box

sensor (113-0620)
● Finisher docking
sensor (113-0000)
● Entrance sensor
(113-0350)
CN2 Rear ● Rear tamper motor ● Rear tamper home ● Top cover switch
(113-0520) sensor (113-0380) (113-0420)
● Paper support motor ● Output tray top of

(113-0571) stack sensor
(113-0471)
● Exit sensor
(113-0360)
● End fence sensor

(113-0361)
● Paper support home

sensor (113-0481)

Table 7-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)
CN3 Rear joint ● Stapler motor ● Stapler low ● Front cover switch
(113-0550) sensor(113-0440) (113-0420)
● Stapler position motor ● Stapler ready sensor

(113-0581) (113-0451)
● Entrance motor ● Stapler home

(113-0501) sensor(113-0430)
● Punch motor ● Stapler position

(113-0610) sensor (front home)
(113-0491)
● Stapler position
sensor (rear home)
(113-0492)
● Punch waste full

sensor (113-0621)
● Punch motor
sensor(113-0600)
● Punch home sensor

(113-0612)
CN4 Ejector ● Ejector2 motor ● Ejector2 motor sensor

(113-0562) (113-0463)
● Ejector1 motor ● Ejector2 home sensor

(113-0561) (113-0462)
● Ejector1 home sensor

(113-0461)
CN5 Main (to the main PBA)
CN6 Output tray lower limit ● Output tray lower limit

switch switch (113-0472)
CN7 Front ● Exit motor (113-0502) ● Output tray motor

sensor (113-0473)
● Main paddle motor
(113-0510) ● Main paddle home
sensor (113-0370)
● Output tray motor
(113-0570) ● Front tamper home
sensor (113-0390)
● Front tamper motor
(113-0530) ● Paper holding sensor
(113-0470)
● Output tray top of

stack sensor
(113-0471)

Table 7-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)
CN9 Paper holding solenoid ● Paper holding solenoid

(113-0591)
CN10 Stapler position sensor ● Stapler position

sensor (mid front) (-)
● Stapler position
sensor (mid rear) (-)

Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.
CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach under the
weight of the product.


electric shock.
insulated parts.

original positions.
Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PCA.
insulated parts.
original positions.

Learn about releasing plastic latches.
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them carefully. To
remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

● Remove all paper from the product.
● Turn off the power using the power button.
● Remove the toner cartridges.
● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.
ESD precautions


Post-service test
Print-quality test
defects.

Ordering
Table 7-24 Ordering
Orderable parts
orderable.

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)

Parts and diagrams (inner finisher)
View inner finisher exploded diagrams and parts lists.
Inner finisher (main)

Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main).
Figure 7-50 Inner finisher (main)
6-1
6-2
ENWW Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher) 2255

Table 7-25 Inner finisher (main)
Ref Part number Description Qty
Complete Y1G00-67901 Inner finisher whole unit 1
1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1
2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1
3 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit assembly 1
4 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit assembly 1
5 SS456-61001 Ejector 1
6 JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1
6-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1
6-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1
7 JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit 1
8 JC90-01337B Output tray 1
10 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1
11 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1
Not shown JC39-02169A Main interface harness 1

Inner finisher (covers)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (covers)
Figure 7-51 Inner finisher (covers)

Table 7-26 Inner finisher (covers)
1 JC90-01321B Front cover 1
2 JC90-01322B Middle cover 1
3 JC90-01323B Top cover 1
4 JC90-01324B Left cover 1
4-1 JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit 1
5 JC63-04750B Rear cover 1
6 JC63-04792B PCA cover 1
7 JC90-01546A Exit bin full 1

Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit,
and output tray unit).
Figure 7-52 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
23-1
23
23-2
8-1
8-2
20
15-2
15-1
24

Table 7-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
1 0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor 2
2 JC92-02774B Main PCA 1
4 6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt 1
5 JC82-01038A Paddle kit 1
5-1 JC63-04957A Paddle A 2
5-2 JC63-04958A Paddle B 2
5-3 JC81-07560A Paddle holder 4
8-1 JC66-04243A Entrance roller 1
8-2 JC66-04243A Middle roller 1
10 JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly 1
13 JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator 1
14 JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator 1
15 JC90-01314A Paper holding kit 1
15-1 JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid 1
15-2 0604-001393 Paper holding sensor 1
16 JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch 1
16-3 JC66-04200A Output tray lower limit switch actuator 1
17 JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly 1
17-1 JC31-00149A Main paddle motor 1
19-1 JC66-04244A Exit roller 1
19-2 JC61-07449A Front compile guide 1
19-3 JC61-07450A Rear compile guide 1
20 JC90-01331A Exit motor assembly 1
20-1 JC31-00169B Exit motor 1
21 JC90-01319A Output tray frame 1
22 JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA 1
23 shown JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1
23-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1
23-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1
24 0604-001415 Exit sensor 1

Inner finisher (paper support unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (paper support unit).
Figure 7-53 Inner finisher (paper support unit)
2-2
2-1
1 2

Table 7-28 Inner finisher (paper support unit)
1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1
2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1
2-1 0604-001393 Paper support home sensor 1
2-2 JC93-00802B Paper support motor assembly 1

Inner finisher (tamper unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (tamper unit).
Figure 7-54 Inner finisher (tamper unit)
2 2-1
2-2
1-1
1-2

Table 7-29 Inner finisher (tamper unit)
1 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit 1
1-1 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1
1-2 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly 1
2 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit 1
2-1 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1
2-2 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly 1

Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit).
Figure 7-55 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
7
6
8
2

Table 7-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
1 0604-001381 End fence sensor 1
2 0604-001393 Stapler position sensor 1
3 JC93-00999A Stapler position motor 1
4 0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor 1
5 JC39-01610A Top cover switch 1
6 0604-001393 Finisher docking sensor 1
7 0604-001393 Punch waste box sensor 1
8 JC39-01610A Compile cover switch 1

Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit).
Figure 7-56 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)

Table 7-31 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)
1 JC59-00040A Stapler assembly 1
1-1 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1
2 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1
2-1 0604-001381 Entrance sensor 1
Not shown SS465-67001 Punch PBA 2-4 hole 1
Not shown SS467-67001 Punch PBA 2-3 hole 1
Not shown SS466-67001 Punch PBA Swedish 1

Inner finisher (ejector unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (ejector unit).
Figure 7-57 Inner finisher (ejector unit)
5 7
2
6

Table 7-32 Inner finisher (ejector unit)
1 SS456-61001 Ejector 1
2 0604-001393 Ejector2 home sensor 1
3 0604-001393 Ejector1 home sensor 1
4 JC90-01309A Ejector motor assembly 1
5 JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor assembly 1
6 0604-001393 Ejector2 motor sensor 1
7 JC93-00998A Ejector1 motor assembly 1

Covers

Removal and replacement: Front cover (C1)
Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.
To view tear down and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.
View a tear down video of the inner finisher.
View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .
JC90-01321B Front cover
Required tools
● Connect the power cable.
● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test
Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.
1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.
2. Remove three screws in the front.
3. Remove the lever.
5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the front
cover.

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (C8)
Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.
To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.
View a teardown video of the inner finisher.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC63-04750B Rear cover
Required tools

Post service test
Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.
Figure 7-59 Open the top cover
3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Middle cover (C3)
Learn how to remove and replace the middle cover.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01322B Middle cover
Required tools

Post service test
Remove the middle cover
Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.
1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 7-63 Open the front door and punch cover
2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by lifting off
the hinge pins at the front.
Figure 7-64 Remove the middle cover

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover (C2)
Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01323B Top cover
Required tools

Post service test
Remove the top cover
Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

Figure 7-67 Remove the top cover
▲ Remove one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the top cover by lifting off the hinge
pins at the front.
instructions.

Removal and replacement: PCA cover (C6)
Learn how to remove and replace the PCA cover.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC63-04792B PCA cover
Required tools

Post service test
Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.
▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.
Figure 7-68 Remove the PCA cover

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover (C7)
Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01324B Left cover
Required tools

Post service test
cover.

Remove the output tray
Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.
Figure 7-73 Remove the output tray.
Remove the output tray frame
Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.
1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 7-74 Remove the pulley
2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.
Figure 7-75 Remove the output tray frame
TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level the
output tray.
a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.
c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.
d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output tray
frame.
e. Rotate the pully in the opposite direction.


2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.
Figure 7-79 Unplug two connectors
TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.


instructions.

Entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor (S1)
Learn how to remove and replace the entrance sensor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
0604-001381 Entrance sensor
Required tools

Post service test
Remove the punch cover
Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.
1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 7-82 Remove the slide shaft
2. Open the punch cover.
Figure 7-83 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the punch
cover.
Figure 7-84 Remove the punch cover
Remove the entrance sensor
Follow these steps to remove the entrance sensor.
1. Loosen the adhesive tape around, and then remove four screws. And then remove the punch cover.

2. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the entrance sensor bracket.
Figure 7-86 Remove the entrance sensor bracket

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 7-87 Remove the entrance sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M10)
Learn how to remove and replace the entrance motor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



cover.
Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller
Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.
1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 7-96 Remove the e-ring and bushing
2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden from
view).
Figure 7-97 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.
Figure 7-98 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller
Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.
1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 7-99 Open the middle paper guide
NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.
Figure 7-100 Remove the middle paper guide
Remove the entrance motor
Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor.

2. Open the clamps, and then unplug the connector.
Figure 7-102 Unplug the connector
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.
Figure 7-103 Remove the entrance motor

instructions.

Exit unit

Removal and replacement: Exit roller (R3)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit roller.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC66-04244A Exit roller
JC61-07449A Front compile guide
JC61-07450A Rear compile guide
Required tools

Post service test

cover.

Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.
1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.
Figure 7-108 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.
Figure 7-109 Remove the sub paddle unit
Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.
1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.
Figure 7-110 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.
Figure 7-111 Release the timing belt
3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.
Figure 7-113 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing
5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.
Figure 7-114 Remove the exit roller

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor (S21)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit sensor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
0604-001415 Exit sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



cover.

view).



Remove the exit sensor
Follow these steps to remove the exit sensor.
▲ Remove the exit sensor from the middle paper guide.

Figure 7-128 Remove the exit sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M2)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC31-00169B Exit motor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.
Remove the exit motor bracket
Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.
▲ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 7-130 Remove the exit motor bracket
Remove the exit motor
Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.
▲ Remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor from the bracket.

instructions.

Paper support unit

Removal and replacement: Front paper support
Learn how to remove and replace the front paper support.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01310A Front paper support
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.



Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.
1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front harness
guide.

2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.
Figure 7-143 Remove the front harness guide
Remove the output tray motor assembly
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.
▲ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.
Figure 7-144 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.
▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.
Figure 7-145 Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Remove the paper holding
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.
1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.
Figure 7-146 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then remove the
bushing.
Figure 7-147 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing
NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.
3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.
Figure 7-148 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

bushing.




bushing.
Remove the front tamper
Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.
Remove the rear tamper
Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.
NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.
Figure 7-160 Remove the rear tamper
Remove the ejector & paper support assembly
Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.
1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.
Figure 7-162 Disconnect two connector
3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.
Figure 7-163 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Remove the front paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support.
1. Remove the e-ring and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.
Figure 7-164 Remove the drive shaft
TIP: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down position(against
the stops).
2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front paper support.
Figure 7-165 Remove the front paper support

instructions.

Rear paper support

Removal and replacement: Rear paper support
Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper support.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC90-01311A Rear paper support
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.




Remove the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.
2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 7-199 Remove the shaft

3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.
Figure 7-200 Remove the rear paper support
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor (S12)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper support home sensor.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
0604-001393 Paper support home sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.




Remove the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.
2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 7-234 Remove the shaft

3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.
Figure 7-235 Remove the rear paper support
Remove the paper support home sensor
Follow these steps to remove the paper support home sensor.
▲ Remove the sensor from the rear paper support.
Figure 7-236 Remove the paper support home sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor (M8)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper support motor.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC93-00802B (not orderable) Paper support motor assembly
JC31-00149A (not orderable) Paper support motor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.




Remove the paper support motor
Follow these steps to remove the paper support motor.
▲ Remove two screws, disconnect one connect, and then remove the paper support motor.
Figure 7-269 Remove the paper support motor
instructions.

Paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Main paddle
Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01327A Main paddle
JC82-01038A Main paddle kit
JC63-04957A Main paddle A
JC63-04958A Main paddle B
JC81-07560A Main paddle holder
Required tools

Post service test

Remove the main paddle
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.
2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.
Figure 7-270 Rotate the main paddle shaft

3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.
Figure 7-271 Remove the main paddle
TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole position of
the shaft, and then assemble them.

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor (S4)
Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle home sensor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.
Remove the main paddle home sensor
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor.
1. Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle home
sensor bracket.

Figure 7-273 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket
2. Remove the main paddle home sensor from the bracket.
Figure 7-274 Remove the main paddle home sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle motor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test
cover.
Remove the main paddle motor
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor.
1. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.

Figure 7-276 Remove the main paddle motor bracket
2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.
Figure 7-277 Remove the main paddle motor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle assembly.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01327A (not orderable) Main paddle assembly
Required tools

Post service test
cover.

Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor bracket.
▲ Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle home
sensor bracket.

Figure 7-281 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket
Remove the main paddle motor bracket
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor bracket.
▲ Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.
Figure 7-282 Remove the main paddle motor bracket
Remove the main paddle
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.

2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.
Figure 7-283 Rotate the main paddle shaft

3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.
Figure 7-284 Remove the main paddle
TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole position of
the shaft, and then assemble them.
Remove the main paddle assembly
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle assembly.
1. Remove the belt in the front.

2. Remove the e-ring and the main paddle CAM in the rear. And then remove the e-ring and the bushing.
Figure 7-286 Remove the e-ring, cam, and bushing

3. Push the shaft to remove the main paddle shaft.
Figure 7-287 Remove the main paddle shaft
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Sub paddle unit
Learn how to remove and replace the sub paddle unit.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit
Required tools

Post service test

bushing.


instructions.

Tamper unit

Front tamper

Removal and replacement: Front tamper
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC82-00899A Front tamper
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S5)
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.

Remove the front tamper home sensor
Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor.
▲ Unplug the connector, and then remove the front tamper home sensor.

Figure 7-347 Remove the front tamper home sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M9)
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.

Remove the front tamper motor
Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor.
▲ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 7-375 Remove the front tamper motor
instructions.

Rear tamper

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC82-00900A Rear tamper
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S14)
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.

Remove the rear tamper home sensor
Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor.
▲ Unplug the connector, and then remove the rear tamper home sensor.

Figure 7-430 Remove the rear tamper home sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M5)
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.

Remove the rear tamper motor
Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor.
▲ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 7-458 Remove the rear tamper motor
instructions.

Stapler unit

Removal and replacement: Stapler
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01342A Stapler assembly
Required tools

Post service test
cover.


Remove the stapler
Follow these steps to remove the stapler.
1. Push the stapler from the rear-side to the front-side.
Figure 7-463 Push the stapler

2. Remove one screw, unplug two connectors, and then remove the stapler assembly.
Figure 7-464 Remove the stapler assembly
3. Remove two screws, and then remove the stapler.
Figure 7-465 Remove the stapler

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor (S2)
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position sensor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
0604-001393 Stapler position sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



cover.

view).



Remove the end fence sensor bracket
Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.

1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.
Figure 7-480 Remove the bracket
2. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.
3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.

4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence sensor
bracket.
Figure 7-483 Remove the end fence sensor bracket
Remove the stapler position sensor

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position sensor.
1. Remove one screw from the front of the inner finisher.

2. Remove one screw from the rear of the inner finisher.
3. Unplug four photo-sensor connectors. Open the six cable clamps.
Figure 7-486 Unplug connectors
4. Remove the assembly, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 7-487 Remove the stapler position sensor

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M1)
Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC93-00999A Stapler position motor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



cover.

view).



Remove the stapler position motor
Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor.
1. Remove three screws, unplug the motor connector, and then remove the stapler position motor bracket.
Figure 7-501 Remove the stapler position motor bracket

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.
Figure 7-502 Remove the stapler position motor
TIP: Use the following steps when reinstalling the stapler position motor.
Release the spring tension screw.
Apply tension to the spring by pulling the belt, and then tighten the spring tension screw. Tightening the
screw puts maximum slack in the belt.
Lower the stapler position motor while placing the belt on the motor pulley, and then secure the bracket
with three screws.
Release the spring tension screw to allow the spring to apply tension to the belt, and then tighten it again

instructions.

Ejector unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector & paper support assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector & paper support assembly.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
SS456-61001 Ejector
JC90-01310A Front paper support
JC90-01311A Rear paper support
Required tools

Post service test

cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.




instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector motor assembly (S11/ M6/ M7)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector motor assembly.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01309A (not orderable) Ejector motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.




Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.
▲ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.
Figure 7-567 Remove paper support assembly
Remove the ejector motor assembly
Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.
1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.
Figure 7-568 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.
Figure 7-569 Remove the belt, screw
3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.
Figure 7-570 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.
Figure 7-571 Remove the ejector motor assembly
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector assembly (include end fence, S10/ S16)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector assembly.
View videos on how to remove and reassemble the inner finisher below:
View a teardown video of the inner finisher .
View a reassembling video of the inner finisher .
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
SS456-61001 Ejector
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.




Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.
▲ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.
Figure 7-604 Remove paper support assembly
Remove the ejector motor assembly
Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.
1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.
Figure 7-605 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.
Figure 7-606 Remove the belt, screw
3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor connector.
Figure 7-607 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.
Figure 7-608 Remove the ejector motor assembly
Remove the ejector assembly
Follow these steps to remove the ejector assembly.

2. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the ejector assembly.
Figure 7-610 Remove the ejector assembly
instructions.

End fence unit

Removal and replacement: End fence sensor (S17)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence sensor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
0604-001381 End fence sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



cover.

view).



Remove the end fence sensor bracket
Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.

1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.
Figure 7-625 Remove the bracket
3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.

4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence sensor
bracket.
Figure 7-628 Remove the end fence sensor bracket
Remove the end fence sensor

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor.
▲ Remove one screw, and then remove the end fence sensor.
Figure 7-629 Remove the end fence sensor

instructions.

Output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Output tray
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01337B Output tray
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor (S8)
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray top of stack sensor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC82-01039A output tray top of stack sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.



Remove the output tray top of stack sensor

Follow these steps to Remove the output tray top of stack sensor.
▲ Remove two screws from both sides of the left cover. Remove the bracket, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 7-648 Remove the output tray top of stack sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch (S7)
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray lower limit switch.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.


instructions.

Output tray motor assembly

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly (M4)
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor assembly.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.


instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor (S6)
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor sensor.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.


Remove the output tray motor sensor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor sensor.
▲ Remove one screw, remove the shaft, and then remove the sensor.
Figure 7-688 Remove the output tray motor sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor.
instructions.
Service level:
cable.
blank).
JC31-00178B Output tray motor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.


Remove the output tray motor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor.
▲ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the output tray motor.
Figure 7-702 Remove the output tray motor
instructions.

Paper holding unit

Removal and replacement: Paper holding
Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor (S9)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding sensor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
0604-001393 Paper holding sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.
Remove the paper holding sensor
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor.

1. Unplug the connector.
2. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.
3. Remove the paper holding sensor.
Figure 7-737 Remove the paper holding sensor
instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid (SL1)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding solenoid.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



output tray.

frame.




guide.



bushing.

bushing.




bushing.

Remove the paper holding solenoid
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding solenoid.


3. Disconnect two connectors and remove the solenoid assembly.
Figure 7-767 Remove the solenoid assembly
4. Remove two screws, and then release the solenoid from the bracket.
Figure 7-768 Remove the paper holding solenoid

instructions.

Punch unit

Removal and replacement: Punch cover
Learn how to remove and replace the punch cover.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
JC90-01343B Punch cover
Required tools

Post service test


cover.

instructions.

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor (S19)
Learn how to remove and replace the punch waste full sensor.
instructions.
Service level:

cable.
blank).
0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor
Required tools

Post service test
cover.



cover.

view).



Remove the punch waste full sensor
Follow these steps to remove the punch waste full sensor.
1. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the punch waste full sensor bracket.
Figure 7-787 Remove the punch waste full sensor bracket

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the punch waste full sensor from the bracket.
Figure 7-788 Remove the punch waste full sensor
instructions.

Problem solving
Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).
Refer to Error codes on page 674 for more details.

Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)
Punch waste full sensor
ENWW Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher) 2793

Figure 7-789 Punch waste full sensor
Punch waste full sensor (0604-001381)
5V
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )
CN3, Rear joint I/F
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
5V 24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU
Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor

Figure 7-790 Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN1, Rear sensor
5V 1 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR 5V
2 DGND
3 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR
4 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR 5V
5 DGND
5V
6 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR
7 DGND
JC39-02174A 8 ENTRANCE SENSOR
9 5V
Punch waste 10 OUT_PATH
box sensor 11 nDETECT_FAN
(0604-00139) 12 DGND
5V
5V
Finisher docking
sensor
(0604-00139)
Entrance motor

Figure 7-791 Entrance motor
24V
Entrance motor (JC31-00169B)
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )

Inner
CN3,Finisher PCA
Rear joint I/F
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
24V 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU
Exit sensor

Figure 7-792 Exit sensor
5V
Exit sensor Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
( 0604-001415 )
CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A
5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

JC39-02176A
6 DGND
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR
8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C
12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
5V 16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A
Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper
holding solenoid

Figure 7-793 Exit motor, paddle motor&sensor, output tray lower limit sensor, and paper holding solenoid
Inner Finisher PCA

( JC92-02774B )
Exit motor CN7, Front

(JC31-00169B)
1 EXIT MOTOR B
24V 24V 2 EXIT MOTOR A
3 EXIT MOTOR nB
24V EXIT MOTOR nA
Main paddle 4
5 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
motor
JC39-02168A 6 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 7 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
8 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR, 5V
5V 9 DGND
5V 10 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR
Main paddle 11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B

home sensor 12 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb
24V 13 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na
(0604-001393) 14 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A
15 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1

16 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2
17 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B
18 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb
19 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na
24V 20 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A
21 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR, 5V
Paper holding 22
24V 5V DGND
sensor 23 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR
(0604-001393) 24 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR, 5V
25 DGND
Output tray lower 5V 26 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR
Paper holding solenoid
limit switch
with harness (JC33-00037A) 27 DGND
with harness 28 OUTPUT TRAY
(JC39-02178A) TOP OF STACK SENSOR
CN6, Stacker limit switch

1 DGND
2 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NO/NC
24V 3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NC
CN9, Paper holding solenoid

1 GND
24V 2 PAPER HOLDING SOLENOID
Paper support motor & home sensor

Figure 7-794 Paper support sensor and motor
Paper support motor ( JC93-00802B)
Paper support home

sensor (0604-001393)
24V
5V

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5

DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7
DGND 8
TOP COVER 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10
JC39-02176A
N.C 11
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21 5V
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25 24V
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26
Front tamper motor and home sensor

Figure 7-795 Front tamper sensor and motor
CN7, Front
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15

Front tamper home sensor
(0604-001393)
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17 5V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18 24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
20 Front tamper motor
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A JC39-02168A
21 (JC93-01001A)
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V
DGND 22 24V
5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
DGND 27
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER
Rear tamper motor and home sensor

Figure 7-796 Rear tamper sensor and motor

CN2, Rear
24V 2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB

6 DGND
5V 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR
8 DGND
JC39-02176A 9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

Rear tamper 14 EXIT SENSOR 5V

home sensor 15 DGND
(0604-001393) 16 EXIT SENSOR
5V
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
24V
Rear tamper motor 21 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
End fence sensor

Figure 7-797 End fence sensor
End fence sensor (0604-001381)
5V Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB

6 DGND
JC39-02176A 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR
8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
5V 19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
Stapler position motor and sensor

Figure 7-798 Stapler position sensor and motor
Inner Finisher PCA
(JC92-02774B)
CN3, Rear joint I/F

5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
24V 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
1.7v /
1.7v or 3.3v or 3.3v /
Stapler position home 12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
5v Vcc (pull up) 5v
rear sensor (0604-001393) 13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
1.7v / 14 DGND
3.3v / 15 FRONT COVER OPEN
5V Stapler position middle front 5v 16 FRONT COVER SWITH
sensor (0604-001393) 17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
5V 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
Stapler position middle sensor (0604-001393) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
Stapler position home 21 STAPLER PCA 5V
1.7v or front sensor
3.3v or (0604-001393) 22 DGND
5v Vcc (pull up) 23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
24V 25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
Stapler position motor 28 DGND
(JC93-00999A) 29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
JC39-02173A 38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU
CN10, Traverse sensor
5V 1 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT 5V

2 DGND
3 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT
5V 4 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR 5V

5 DGND
6 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR
Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor

Figure 7-799 Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor
Ejector1 home sensor (0604-001393)
5V
Ejector2 motor Ejector1 motor

(JC93-00998A) Ejector2 home sensor
24V (JC93-01168A) (0604-001393)
24V
5V
Ejector2 motor sensor
(0604-001393)
5V
JC39-02165A
CN4, Ejector
24V 1 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT2
2 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT1
3 EJECTOR1 MOTOR B
4 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nB
24V 5 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nA
6 EJECTOR1 MOTOR A
5V 7 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR 5V

8 DGND
9 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR
5V 10 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR 5V
11 DGND
12 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR
5V 13 EJECTOR1 HOME 5V
14 DGND
15 EJECTOR1 HOME
Output tray motor and sensor

Figure 7-800 Output tray motor and sensor

CN7, Front
24V
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5 5V
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9 JC39-02168A
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

Output tray motor
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na 13 (JC31-00178B)
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14

24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb 18
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na 19
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20 5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
Output tray motor sensor
DGND 22
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23 (0604-001393)
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
DGND 27
SENSOR RECEIVER
Output tray top of stack sensor

Figure 7-801 Output tray top of stack sensor
Output tray top of

stack sensor receiver
(0603-001309)
Output tray top of
stack sensor LED 3.3V
(0601-003440)
3.3V
JC39-02168A
JC39-02176A
CN2, Rear CN7, Front

1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B EXIT MOTOR B 1
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB EXIT MOTOR A 2
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA EXIT MOTOR nB 3
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V DGND 6
6 DGND OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
8 DGND
9 TOP COVER 24V
10 TOP COVER SWITCH MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11
11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
N.C
3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
17 DGND FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18
18 END FENCE SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V DGND 22
21 DGND FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B DGND 25
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
DGND 27
SENSOR RECEIVER 3.3V 3.3V
Top cover switch

Figure 7-802 Top cover switch
Top cover switch (JC39-01610A)
24V

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4
JC39-02176A
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7
DGND 8
TOP COVER 24V 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10 24V
N.C 11
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26
Front cover switch

Figure 7-803 Frame front
Stapler motor JC39-02177A Staple joint PCA

(JC59-00040A) 24V (JC41-00900A)
CN3, Rear joint I/F
JC39-02164A
Rear joint PCA 24V 4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
(JC41-00905A) 5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
JC39-02173A 10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
14 DGND
24V
15 FRONT COVER OPEN 24V
24V
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
Front cover switch 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
(JC39-01610A) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

A Certificate of Volatility
View the product certificates of volatility.
Certificate of Volatility
Learn about the product certificate of volatility.
ENWW Certificate of Volatility 2809

Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (E725XXdn/z; 1 of 2)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP LaserJet Managed MFP Managed Hewlett Packard Company
E725XXdn X3A60A= E72525dn 11311 Chinden Blvd
X3A63A= E72530dn Boise, ID 83714
HP LaserJet Managed Flow X3A66A= E72535dn
MFP E725XXz X3A59A= E72525z
X3A62A= E72530z
X3A65A= E72535z
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Operation Steps to clear memory:
Z Bundles system and print/scan When the printer is powered off
DDR3 - DRAM HP Formatter buffer the memory is erased.
3GB- Obsidian
1 GB –Accel
board
4 GB - Main
Formatter
Yes No
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP Formatter
3GB- Obsidian
4 GB - Main
Formatter
dn Bundles Yes No .
DDR3 - DRAM
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data There are no steps to clear this
for backup/restore data.
HP side: SPI Flash
4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear this
factory product configuration data
data required for the device
to function. User
modifications are limited to
downloading digitally signed
HP firmware images.
Samsung MSOK : Yes No
MSOK – TPM 2 KB RSA Key Pair is stored on There are none. FW reload will
MSOK – CRUM 256 Bytes the TPM, HP-signed handle any issues.
MSOK - EEProm 1 KB Immutable ID Certificate is
stored on the CRUM, the
new Key pair is saved on the
EEProm
2810 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility ENWW

Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility (E725XXdn/z; 2 of 2)
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
dn & z Bundles 320GB Yes No OS and user data Firmware update
1 – HDD Main board
dn bundles only
1 – EMMC card 16GB Yes OS and user data Firmware update
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:
Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5GHz Bandwidth: 2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected
channel in 2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz
band.
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n
Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected
channel.
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:
ENWW Certificate of Volatility 2811

2812 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility ENWW
B Service parts changes For Environmental
Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products
Learn about service part changes for EPA compliance.
HP is introducing A3 Laser Jet MFPs to meet the new Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 3.0 Compliance
standards. A few service parts are changing even though their appearance and ways of replacing them are
almost the same as before. These new regulations are primarily concerned with lower power consumption which
the parts affected contribute to. All Items listed in this document are service parts being changed for these EPA
3.0 Compliant products.
Theses EPA 3.0 compliant devices will begin manufacturing in Spring 2020 and will not have new product
numbers. Identification of these products will be accomplished by a specific character in their serial numbers.
Printer service parts affected
● Formatter
● FDB (Fuser Drive Board)
● Fuser unit
Printer service parts affected
● HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E77822dn / E77825dn / E77830dn
● HP Color LaserJet Managed Flow MFP E77822z / E77825z / E77830z
● HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E77422a / E77422dv/ E77422dn / E77428dn
● HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525dn / E72530dn / E72535dn
● HP LaserJet Managed Flow MFP E72525z / E72530z / E72535z
● HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72425a / E72425dv / E72425dn / E72430dn
∗ Parts referenced in this doc are also compatible with the SKU’s above. However, installation of these parts in
the SKU’s in BOLD will not make them EPA 3.0 compliant. Only SKU’s identified by a specific character in their
serial number are EPA 3.0 compliant.
Table B-1 E77822z/E77825z/E77830z (color printers)

Item Description
1 Formatter Rock
ENWW 2813
Table B-1 E77822z/E77825z/E77830z (color printers) (continued)
Item Description
2 FDB V1
3 FDB V2
Table B-2 E77822dn/E77825dn/E77830dn (color printers)
Item Description
1 Formatter Obisidian1
2 FDB V1
3 FDB V2
Table B-3 E77422a/E77428dv/E77422dn/E77428dn (color printers)
Item Description
2 FDB V1
3 FDB V2
Table B-4 E72525z/E72530z/E72535z (mono printers)
Item Description
1 Formatter Rock
2 FDB V1
3 FDB V2
4 Fuser V1
5 Fuser V2
Table B-5 E72525dn/E72530dn/E72535dn (mono printers)
Item Description
2 FDB V1
3 FDB V2
4 Fuser V1
5 Fuser V2
2814 Appendix B Service parts changes For Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products ENWW
Table B-6 E72425a/E72425dv/E72425dnE72430dn (mono printers)
Item Description
2 FDB V1
3 FDB V2
4 Fuser V1
5 Fuser V2
Table B-7 Foramtter type 1/2/3
EPA 3.0
Legacy part compliant
No number product Common Part name Description Remark
1 JC92-03070A Y3K99-60005 New Formatter Rock PCA Formatter_Rock
1 JC92-03005A X3A92-60006 New Formatter Obsidian PCA Formatter_Obisid

ian1
1 JC92-03036A X3A92-60007 New Formatter Obsidian PCA Formatter_Obisid

ian2
Table B-8 FDB V1/V2
EPA 3.0
2 JC44-00210E 8GR94-60001 New FDB 110V(V1) FDB V1
3 JC44-00211E 8GR94-60002 New FDB 220V(V2) FDB V1
Table B-9 Fuser V1/V2
EPA 3.0
4 JC82-00479A X3A65-61001 New Fuser 110V(V1) Fuser V1
5 JC82-00481A X3A65-61002 New Fuser 220V(V2) Fuser V1
Notes
● Service parts referenced above for legacy products (Gemstone 1.0/1.1)) and EPA 3.0 Compliant products
are forward and backward compatible. However, Hp does not recommend installing old service parts which
do not meet EPA 3.0 Compliance in EPA 3.0 Compliant products. This is to ensure these products remain
EPA 3.0 compliant after field service.
● If an EPA 3.0 Compliant FUSER is installed in any printer, that unit needs to have firmware upgraded to the
latest level to function properly, especially those with a B or C in 3rd digit of serial number (SN).
ENWW 2815
● EPA 3.0 Compliant products will be identified as indicated below : 3rd digit will be shown as “D” from “B” or
“C”.
2816 Appendix B Service parts changes For Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products ENWW
Glossary of terms
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN
Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n
supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer interferences from microwave ovens,
cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
AC
An electric current that reverses its direction many times a second at regular intervals. For example, the 110V line current
found in a typical US electrical wall receptacle.
AC Control Module (PageWide)

The AC Control Module controls the heating elements in the airflow assembly. Function include: voltage monitoring (ensuring
correct operation in a low-quality-power environment), isolation (low voltage heater control signals are isolated from the
high voltage AC power for safety), AC switching (power is switched on/off to the heater), and heating element configuration
(heating element configuration is changed between series and parallel for temperature predictability).
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a device that automatically feeds an original sheet (or multiple sheets) of paper into
the image scanner. The document feeder is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).
Airflow System (PageWide)

The airflow system conditions the printed pages to avoid page curling due to the ink on the page. The airflow system
functionally consists of a fan and heating elements. The pressurized air is blown on the page through the nozzles that are
placed on the paper path of the airflow system between print and eject zone.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in
the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assigns an IP address from a
pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless workstation” computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading
any advanced operating system.
CCD
A Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is the scanner module which enables a scan job. A CCD locking mechanism is used to hold
the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.
CIS
A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red, green, and blue LEDs
sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the optical system captures each color
in a single row of Charged Coupled Device (CCD) sensors that cover the entire page width.
ENWW Glossary of terms 2817

Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before
printing additional copies.
Control Panel
The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where the user can control and/or monitor the printer. The
control panel is found on the front of the printer.
Coverage
Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4
sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has complicated images or a large amount of text, the
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
DC
An electric current flowing in one direction only. Typically a low voltage load current supplied to an electrical assembly.
DCC
The DC controller (DCC) controls the operation of the printer sub-systems and electrical components. the DCC sends out
various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based on the print command and image data
that the host computer sends the formatter.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an
IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
Digital Send Software

Digital send software allows a mufti-function printer (MFP) to scan and send information quickly and securely to email,
network folders, other printers, and fax services.
DIMM
A Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all data within the printer,
such as printing data and received fax data.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a
higher resolution (more visible detail in the image and a larger file size).
Duplex
A mechanism that automatically turns over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper.
A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during one print cycle.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the printer has the lifespan
limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period.
For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month the printer limit is 2,400 pages a day (assuming 20 working days/
month).
Dynamic Security
Dynamic Security is a toner cartridge design and process for authenticating genuine HP supplies. HP printers use toner
cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP chip or modified or non-HP circuitry
might not work (now or in the future).
2818 Glossary of terms ENWW

e-Duplex
Single-pass electronic duplex (e-Duplex) printer use two separate scan modules to scan the front-side and back-side of an
e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document feeder.
EMC
EMC is a measure of a device's ability to operate as intended in its shared operating environment while, at the same time, not
affecting the ability of other equipment within the same environment to operate as intended.
EMI
EMI is the electromagnetic energy which affects the functioning of an electronic device. Electronic devices (like printers) are a
source of EMI. Because it is rare for electronics to operate in isolation, products are generally engineered to function in the
presence of some amount of EMI.
eMMC
An embedded Multi-Media Card is a compact memory device consisting of NAND flash memory and a simple storage
controller.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one
system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being
simulated, often considering its internal state.
EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a PostScript (PS) code file which is used for storing font and vector graphic image
information.
ESD
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two electrically charged objects caused by contact,
an electrical short, or dielectric breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling
for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model.
Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the
1990s to present.
Ferrite
A ferrite are used to reduce the amount of radio frequency noise (or interference) in a wire or cable. A ferrite enables proper
EMC/EMI performance for regulatory purposes.
FFC
Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) are designed for Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) to PCA connections (for example, connecting a fax
PCA to the formatter).
FIH
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction printers (MFPs) to use third-party devices to extend
the capabilities of the MFP.
Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and upgrade the
firmware.
Flash memory
Flash memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.
Flow integrated scanner assembly

A printer scanner assembly that includes a slide-out external physical keyboard.

Formatter (LaserJet)
The formatter controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and coordinating data placement
and timing with the DC controller PCA, storing font and customer configuration information, communicating with the host
computer, and monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel.
FTP
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a protocol designed for transferring files over the Internet. Files stored on an
FTP server can be accessed using an FTP client, such as a web browser, FTP software program, or a command line interface.
Fuser Unit
The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that adheres the toner onto the printed page. It consists of a heat roller and a
pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to make sure that the toner
stays on the paper permanently (which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer).
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. A gateway is used to
connect two different computer networks, especially a connection to the Internet.
Grayscale
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of a color image printed in monochrome. Colors are represented by a
range of gray shades from white to black.
Halftone
Halftone is a way of reproducing a photograph or other image in which the various tones of gray or color are produced by
variously sized dots of ink or toner. Halftone simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist
of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
A Hard-Disk Drive (HDD) (commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk) is a non-volatile storage device which stores
digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the
advancement of technology related to electricity.
Image scanner
The image scanner (or Sub Scanner Assembly) contains the components to digitally scan an original source document. The
image scanner is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and communicate with other
devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-
sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs, media size, resolution,
etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP also supports access control,
authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing solution.
ISA
The Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA) includes the document feeder and image scanner.
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of
representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.

JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality. It was
designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for photographic
images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services
running over TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that can indicate the status of a printer (formatter LEDs) or a
component in a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner that helps capture an image.
LEDM
Low end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the dynamic and capabilities
tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol, event, security, and discovery methods.
LPDC
Late point differentiation configuration (LPDC) allows the channel partner to configure the speed to the printer depending on
the customer’s order. LPDC configuration is stored on the Trusted Platform Module (TPM).
LVPS - SMPS
Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS) and Switching Mode Power Supplies (SMPS) supply direct current (DC) voltages to
various printer components and assemblies.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48–bit
identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (for example, 00–00–0c-34–11–4e). This address is
usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by the manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate
machines on a large network.
MEt
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of font- and data-
compression methods. MEt is available only in Printer Command Language (PCL) mode; it is not functional when printing in
PostScript (PS) mode.
MFP
A Multi Function Printer (MFP) is a printer that incorporates multiple functionality in a single physical body. For example, an
MFP printer can scan, digitally send, fax, copy, and print.
MHV
Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC connectors (DC voltage between 500 V and 5
kV).
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode
transmitted information.
MPCA (PageWide)
The MPCA integrates both formatter (LaserJet) and engine control electronics (DC controller) into a single assembly. The
Main PCA (MPCA) controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and coordinating data
placement, storing font and customer configuration information, communicating with the host computer, and monitoring
control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel.

NAND
NAND is not an acronym (the term is short for NOT AND a Boolean operator and logic gate). NAND (flash) memory is non-
volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.
NVRAM
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) is used to store I/O and information about the print environment configuration
(stored data even when the power is turned off).
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser
printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum
surface during its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge
development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or translated to
produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.
PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete, electronic components must be assembled
to form a functional printed circuit assembly or PCA.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol. PCL has
become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for
thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF represents two dimension
documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.
PJL
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL and PostScript (PS). With
standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions like dynamic I/O switching, context-sensitive
switching, and isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next.
PML
Printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back from the printer
through the I/O ports.
PostScript (PS)
PostScript (PS) is a Page Description Language (PDL) and programming language used primarily in electronic and desktop
publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of
pages a printer can produce in one minute.
Print Media
Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or copier.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
Printhead (PageWide)
The printhead converts the digital firing instructions from the printer electronics into properly formed and timed microscopic
drops of the four ink colors.

Printhead Wiper (PageWide)
The printhead wiper system keeps the printhead nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the printer as it performs the
wiping and capping functions. The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue and particulates. The capping function
keeps the nozzles moist during storage and when the printer is idle.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two
computing endpoints.
RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the printer memory device where the data in current use is kept so it can be quickly
retrieved by the device's processor. This memory is an important factor in avoiding errors and printing documents properly.
Printer memory is used to store and process print jobs as they are sent to the printer from a computer. After printing, the job
is cleared from the memory to make room for more print jobs. Printer memory is directly linked to two print characteristics:
speed and print quality. More memory allows you to print faster and print larger, high-quality graphics.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the resolution.
SCB
The Scanner Control Board (SCB) controls the functions of the image scanner components in the Sub Scanner Assembly
(SSA).
Service fluid and aerosol management systems (PageWide)

There are two types of service fluid, shipping fluid and ink. The service fluid management system is contained entirely within
the duplex module. Service fluid is discharged as droplets from the printhead, and then collected in a container inside the
duplex module. Some of the droplets are called aerosol because they are lighter than air. Aerosol can float inside the printer
and collect on the lens of optical sensors, producing false failures. The aerosol management system transports the aerosol
and collects it in a safe place. Aerosol management consists of an aerosol fan, mounted on the rear wall of the air flow
assembly, which creates air flow that pulls the aerosol through the holes in the platen and into the aerosol filter inside the
duplex module.
SFP
A single-function printer only processes print jobs sent from a host computer or from an USB port on the printer.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous
communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated inter-process communication
mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP is a relatively simple,
text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message are specified and the message text is transferred. It is a
client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server.
SODIMM
Small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) is a thin profile memory storage device (a smaller alternative to a
standard DIMM device).
SSA
The Sub-Scanner Assembly is the image scanner component of the Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA; which includes the
document feeder and the image scanner).
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network
address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications protocols that
implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bit mapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically
come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file.
This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing
applications.
Toner Cartridge
A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and
photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination of heat/pressure
from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.
TPM
The HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a security accessory for printers. The TPM strengthens protection of encrypted
credentials and data stored on your printer. Certificate private keys are both generated by and protected by the TPM. Once
installed, the printer and the TPM are sealed and the printer owns the TPM. The TPM may not be moved to another device
without losing its ownership from the original printer. Installing a TPM accessory might necessitate a firmware upgrade. The
TPM prevents the printer from starting if the TPM is missing. If the TPM is removed from the printer, a control-panel error
message appears indicating that the TPM is missing.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-compliant software, a
scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh
operating systems.
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The first part of the
address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is
located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and
peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple
peripherals.
Walk-up USB
Some printers support direct printing from a USB flash drive (the walk-up USB port is usually near the control panel).
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks
were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been used by paper makers to identify their product, and
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document format
developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic documents. It is an XML-based specification
based on a new print path and vector-based, device-independent document format.
ZIF Connector
Zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors use a mechanical locking method to secure Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) to a Printed
Circuit Assembly (PCA).

Index
A belt - timing gear booklet c-fold blade motor 2105

accelerator board HCI 608 booklet diverter 2113
remove the accelerator board booklet blade booklet diverter home sensor
218 parts and diagrams 1058 2130
accelerator board (GX ADF only) 218 booklet blade motor booklet diverter motor 2133
accessories parts and diagrams 1058 booklet end fence 1908
dimensions 1, 8, 13 booklet c-fold blade booklet end fence home sensor
weight 1, 8, 13 parts and diagrams 1052 1924
acoustic specifications 1, 8, 14 booklet c-fold motor booklet end fence motor 1920
ADF parts and diagrams 1054 booklet entrance motor 1877
parts and diagrams - exterior LX booklet diverter booklet entrance sensor 1880
420 parts and diagrams 1052 booklet exit sensor 2137
parts and diagrams - lower image booklet diverter motor booklet fold motor 2070
scanner (LX) 544 parts and diagrams 1054 booklet front cover 1157
parts and diagrams - LX models Booklet diverter unit 976, 2112 booklet maker 1866
392, 420, 434 booklet diverter unit booklet maker PCA 2165
parts and diagrams - main frame parts and diagrams 1050 booklet output tray 2156
assembly LX 434 Booklet end fence unit 964, 1907 booklet paddle home sensor
parts and diagrams - pickup LX booklet end fence unit 1898
420 parts and diagrams 1062 booklet paddle motor 1895
ADF (GX/z) booklet entrance booklet presser 1930
parts and diagrams 448 parts and diagrams 1044 booklet presser home sensor
ADF main frame (GX/z) Booklet entrance unit 961, 1876 1945
parts and diagrams 496 booklet entrance unit booklet presser motor 1949
ADF upper pickup (GX/z) parts and diagrams 1042 booklet stapler unit 2010
parts and diagrams 476 booklet entrance-presser motor booklet tamper home sensor
after-service checklist 107, 114, parts and diagrams 1044 1971
115, 905, 987, 990, 2203, 2248, booklet exit booklet tamper motor 1990
2251 parts and diagrams 1052 booklet tamper unit 1953
APS sensor 550 Booklet exit unit 978, 2136 bridge door sensor 1085
authorized service providers, parts booklet exit unit bridge entrance sensor 1067
112, 992, 2253 parts and diagrams 1050 bridge exit sensor 1080
booklet finisher bridge motor 1074
B booklet blade 2029 buffer motor 1852
backup error booklet blade home sensor 2048 buffer solenoid 1858
32.WX.YZ error 673, 674 booklet blade motor 2066 caster cover 1125
reset error 673, 674 booklet c-fold blade 2075 dummy feed guide 1167
restore error 673, 674 booklet c-fold blade home ejector assembly 993
sensor 2090 ejector motor 993
ENWW Index 2825

ejector unit 1577 rear paper holding sensor 1823 booklet presser unit
ejector1 1628 rear paper support 993 parts and diagrams 1042
ejector1 motor sensor 1602 rear tamper home sensor 1443 Booklet stapler unit 970
ejector2 home sensor 1655 rear tamper motor 1469 booklet stapler unit
ejector2 motor 1706 rear tamper unit 1418 parts and diagrams 1046
ejector2 motor sensor 1680 right upper cover 1091 Booklet tamper unit 968, 1952
end fence home 993 sensor 993 booklet tamper unit
end fence home sensor 1304 stacker lower limit switch 993 parts and diagrams 1048
end fence motor 1329 stacker motor 993 bookletr finisher
entrance motor 993 stapler 993 exit motor 993
entrance sensor 993 stapler front sensor 1507 Bridge unit 1002, 1066
exir roller 993 stapler mid-front sensor 1519 bridge unit
exit motor 1257 stapler mid-rear sensor 1531 parts and diagrams 1002, 1004
exit sensor 993 stapler position motor 1564 buffer diverter
feed entrance motor 1161 stapler position sensor 993 parts and diagrams 1038
front cover 1109 stapler rear sensor 1543 Buffer unit 957, 1851
front door 1098 stapler unit 1496 buffer unit
front lower cover 1117 switch 993 parts and diagrams 1036
front paper holding sensor 1810 top cover 1094
front paper support 993 top exit sensor 1216 C
front tamper home sensor 1365 top jam cover assembly 1174 Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
front tamper motor 1391 top lower feed assembly 1203 panel 673, 700, 723, 787
front tamper unit 1340 top output tray 1230 cassette 1, 30, 33
left lower cover 1129 top output tray paper full sensor cassette lift drive 1, 49, 52
left upper cover 1142 1232 Cassettes Tray 2/3
main exit cam motor 1262 tray diverter 1184 parts and diagrams 260
main exit sensor 1244 tray diverter home sensor 1192 caster
main output tray lower limit booklet finisher diagrams 993, 1040 HCI 623
sensor 1764 booklet finisher parts 993, 1040 caution v
main output tray motor 1784 booklet finisher remove and replace caution for moving the scanner 1,
main output tray motor sensor 993 56, 65
1778 booklet finisher specification 908 CCDM PCA 1, 83
main output tray top of stack booklet finisher view 906 certificate of volatility 2809
sensor 1733 booklet fold motor CoV E72525/30/35 2809
main output tray top of stack parts and diagrams 1054 Channel partners
switch 1749 booklet fold roller WISE 107
main paddle 993 parts and diagrams 1056 Channel partners support
main PCA 2160 Booklet fold unit 972, 2028 HP Channel Services Network
manual staple sensor 1555 booklet fold unit (CSN) 107
motor 993 parts and diagrams 1050 checklists
paddle 1271 Booklet maker 1865 after-service 107, 114, 115, 905,
paddle home sensor 1285 booklet maker 987, 990, 2203, 2248, 2251
paddle motor 1294 parts and diagrams 1040 preservice 107, 114, 115, 905,
paper holding home sensor 1794 booklet maker baset 987, 990, 2203, 2248, 2251
paper holding Motor 1836 parts and diagrams 1064 cleaning page 673, 700, 723, 787
paper holding solenoid 993 Booklet output tray unit 979, 2155 cleaning the paper dust stick 107,
paper support 993 Booklet paddle unit 962, 1894 117
paper support home sensor 993 booklet paddle unit cleaning the scan glass 107, 117
punch waste full 993 parts and diagrams 1060 clear paper jams 905, 2177, 2178,
rear cover 1104 Booklet presser unit 966, 1929 2792
2826 Index ENWW

component test CPMP toner 2196
special mode test 673, 680, 681, WISE 108, 676 UI 2198
693, 699 current settings pages 673, 700 diagram, electrical-mechanical
components relationships
diagnostic tests 673, 680, 681, D document feeder section 891
693, 699 DC controller communication error drive section 872
scanning system 1, 56, 59 55.WX.YZ error 673, 675 dual-cassette feeder (DCF) 896
connection DC controller firmware error exit section 871
diagram 2193 70.WX.YZ error 673, 675 frame section 880
connector error DCF 1, 99 fuser section 883
65.WX.YZ error 673, 675 DCF main frame pickup high-capacity input (HCI) 899
control panel 247 parts and diagrams 580 image formation section 893
Backup/Restore menu 673, 700, DCF main frame pickup 1 MP right door section 885
723, 787 parts and diagrams - drive 578 paper handling section 878
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 673, DCF main frame pickup upper PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning
700, 723, 787 parts and diagrams - drive 586 Unit (LSU) 867
Copy menu (MFP only) 673, 700, decoding scanner section 889
723, 766 message 673 Diagrams
CPMD 673 defeating ADF (GX/z) 448
Fax menu (fax models only) 673, interlocks 673, 680, 681, 693, ADF (LX models) 392
700, 723, 779 696, 697 ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX
Print menu 673, 700, 723, 782 definitions and terms models) 420
Reports menu 673, 700, 723 glossary 2817 ADF lower image scanner (LX)
Scan menu (MFP only) 673, 700, determine problem source 673, 680, 544
723, 770 681 ADF main frame (GX/z) 496
Settings menu 673, 700, 723, developer unit 1, 38, 39, 40 ADF main frame assembly (LX
724 diagnostics models) 434
Supplies menu 673, 700, 723, adjustment 673, 795, 806, 819 ADF upper pickup (GX/z) 476
782 component 673, 680, 681, 693, booklet blade 1058
Trays menu 673, 700, 723, 783 699 booklet blade motor 1058
troubleshooting menu 673, 700, engine 673, 680, 681, 693, 696, booklet c-fold blade 1052
723, 783 795, 806 booklet c-fold motor 1054
USB Firmware Upgrade menu fax 673, 795, 806 booklet diverter 1052
673, 700, 723, 787, 788 image management 673, 795, booklet diverter motor 1054
control panel diagnostic flowcharts 806, 823 booklet diverter unit 1050
673, 680, 681, 686, 687 LED 673, 680, 681, 693, 694 booklet end fence unit 1062
control panel menus 673, 700, 723 print test patterns 673, 795, 806, booklet entrance 1044
control panel messages 674 824 booklet entrance unit 1042
conventions used v scanner 673, 795, 806, 814 booklet entrance-presser motor
Copy menu (MFP only), control panel diagram 1044
673, 700, 723, 766 connection 2193 booklet exit 1052
copy specifications 1, 8, 20 dual cassette feeder 2201 booklet exit unit 1050
CoV FDB/LVPS 2197 booklet fold motor 1054
certificate of volatility 2809 front OPC 2199 booklet fold roller 1056
cover fuser exit 2194 booklet fold unit 1050
parts and diagrams 996 laser scanner assembly/HVPS booklet maker 1040
Covers 1090, 2272 2195 booklet maker base 1064
parts and diagrams 348 pickup/ph drive/side 2194 booklet paddle unit 1060
CPMD 674 scanner 2200 booklet presser unit 1042
booklet stapler unit 1046
ENWW Index 2827

booklet tamper unit 1048 paper holding unit 1028 document feeder skew (LX du
bridge unit 1002, 1004 registration sub-frame 292 models) 673
buffer diverter 1038 right door 356 documentation, printer error codes
buffer unit 1036 right door duplex 386 and messages
cassettes tray 2/3 260 right door exit 382 WISE 108, 676
cover 996 right upper cover 1000 drive assembly - feed
covers 348 stapler unit 1022 HCI 637
DCF main frame pickup 580 tamper unit 1022, 1024 drive assembly - feed motor
DCF main frame pickup 1 578 top cover 1000 HCI 641
DCF main frame pickup upper top door 1000 drive assembly - lift drive right and
586 top exit unit 1014 motor - lift drive left motor
Dual cassette feeder DCF 560 top lower cover 1016 HCI 646
ejector unit 1022, 1026 top output tray unit 1014 drive assembly - step motor
end fence unit 1018 Tray 1 374 HCI 649
entrance motor 1008 Tray diverter CAM 1012 drive assembly - sub-pulley
entrance unit 1006, 1008 tray diverter unit 1010 HCI 652
exit assemblies 254 tray jam cover 1012 drive section
exit motor 1016 upper bridge 1002 electrical-mechanical relationships
flow ADF image scanner (GX/ diagrams diagram 872
sGX) 530 covers-inner finisher 2258 drive system 1, 49
flow ADF open cover (GX/z) 466 ejector unit-inner finisher 2270 cassette lift drive 1, 49, 52
flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 492 electrical-mechanical 867, 2193 drive motors 1, 49
front door 1000 finisher system 905, 2191 duct drive unit 52
front jam cover 1038 inner finisher 2255 exit drive 1, 49
fuser exit drive 288 paper support unit-inner finisher feed drive 1, 49
hanress 996 2262 fuser drive 53
HCI drive 635 sensor, motor, and roller-inner fuser release drive 1, 49
HCI main 589 finisher 2260 main drive unit 50
HCI sub - cassette 660 stapler unit-inner finisher 2268 main drive unit motor 1, 49
HCI sub - frame 606 tamper unit-inner finisher 2264, pickup drive 1, 49, 52
HCI sub - pickup upper/lower 628 2266 registration drive 1, 49
image scanner assembly 534 use parts lists and diagrams 112 toner reservoir drive 1, 49
left lower cover 1032 digital sending error (firmware) toner supply drive 1, 49, 54
left upper cover 1030 44.WX.YZ error 673, 675 drivers, supported 1, 8
lower bridge 1004 dimensions dual cassete feeder (DCF) motor 570
main assembly 122 accessories 1, 8, 13 dual cassete feeder (DCF) right door
main engine frame assembly printer 1, 8, 13 564
264 diverter unit 2220 dual cassette feeder 1, 99
main exit CAM motor 1016 document feeder diagram 2201
main exit unit 1014, 1018 document feeder input tray (LX) dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA 567
main frame 316 398 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
main frame pickup 306 document feeder (LX) reverse roller motor 574
main frame pickup 1 and 2 302 436 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
main output tray motor 1034 document feeder error units 582
main output tray unit 1028 31.WX.YZ error 673, 674 dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear
main PCA 1022 document feeder pick roller (LX 426 cover 562
paddle 1020 document feeder section dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit
paddle motor 1020 electrical-mechanical relationships dual cassete feeder (DCF) motor
paddle unit 1018 diagram 891 570
paper holding motor 1034
2828 Index ENWW

dual cassete feeder (DCF) rear engine error (PageWide) rollers 1, 30, 31
cover 562 61.WX.YZ error 673, 675 sensor, motor, and solenoid 1, 30,
dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor entrance motor 2795 31, 32
574 parts and diagrams 1008 Tray 1 feeder assembly 36
dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA Entrance unit 1006, 1160, 2299 feeding system information 1, 30
567 entrance unit 2219 finisher docking sensor 2794
dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup parts and diagrams 1006, 1008 finisher sectional view 905, 906,
units 582 eraser PCA 1, 83, 97 2204
dual cassette feeder (DCF) right error finisher system 905, 906, 915,
door 564 fault 673 2204, 2210
Dual cassette feeder DCF) ESD electrostatic discharge (ESD) diagrams 905, 2191
parts and diagrams - Dual cassette 107, 112, 905, 987, 990, 2203, each unit functions 905, 906,
feeder DCF 560 2248, 2251 2204
dual-cassette feeder (DCF) event log 673, 700, 704 electrical parts layout 905, 906,
electrical-mechanical relationships clear using touchscreen control 2204
diagram 896 panel 673, 700, 704 finisher sectional view 905, 906,
duplexer error event log error (firmware) 2204
69.WX.YZ error 673, 675 42.WX.YZ error 673, 675 paper path 905, 906, 2204
Exit assemblies PCA connection information 905,
E parts and diagrams 254 906, 2204
each unit functions exit drive 1, 49, 53 finisher system diagram 915, 2210
finisher system 905, 906, 2204 exit motor finisher system electrical parts 915,
ejector home sensor 2803 parts and diagrams 1016 2210
ejector motor 2803 exit section finisher system paper path 915,
Ejector unit 949, 1576, 2589 electrical-mechanical relationships 2210
ejector unit 2236 diagram 871 finisher system PBA connection 915,
parts and diagrams 1022, 1026 exit sensor 2796 2210
Ejector1 1601 Exit unit 2316 finisher system sectional view 915,
ejector2 unit 1654 exit unit 2222 2210
electrical parts layout exploded parts views, use parts lists firmware communication error
finisher system layout 905, 906, and diagrams 112 49.WX.YZ error 673, 675
2204 firmware install error
electrical specifications 1, 8, 14 F 99.WX.YZ error 673, 676
electrical-mechanical fan error hard disk error 673, 676
diagrams 867, 2193 58.WX.YZ error 673, 675 remote firmware upgrade error
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 107, Fax menu (fax models only), control 673, 676
112, 905, 987, 990, 2203, 2248, panel 673, 700, 723, 779 flatbed scanner system
2251 FDB/LVPS overview 1, 56, 57
Embedded Jetdirect error diagram 2197 flow (z bundles) document feeder
80.WX.YZ error 673, 675 feed drive 1, 49 document feeder contact image
end fence sensor 2801 feeding system 1, 30 sensor (CIS) 457
End fence unit 941, 1303, 2655 cassette 1, 30, 33 document feeder contact image
end fence unit 2232 main components and functions sensor (CIS) fan 515
parts and diagrams 1018 1, 30, 31 document feeder front motor
engine MP feeder assembly 1, 30 499
diagnostics 673, 680, 681, 693, overview 1, 30 document feeder input tray 450
696 pickup assembly 34 document feeder jam access
engine error (LaserJet) pickup unit 1, 30 cover 468
46.WX.YZ error 673, 675 registration assembly 35 document feeder PCA fan 512
63.WX.YZ error 673, 675 registration unit 1, 30
ENWW Index 2829

document feeder rear motors overview 1, 42 hardware integration pocket (HIP) is
503 temperature control 1, 42, 43 not functioning 673, 680, 681,
document feeder ultrasonic sensor fuser unit drive 1, 42, 43 686, 687, 691
with PCA 518 fuser unit temperature control 1, 42, HCI 1
Flow ADF image scanner (GX/sGX) 43 HCI belt - timing gear 608
parts and diagrams 530 HCI caster 623
Flow ADF open cover (GX/z) G HCI drive
parts and diagrams 466 General Settings menu, control parts and diagrams 635
flow ADF PCA 1, 83 panel 673, 700, 723, 724 HCI drive assembly - feed 637
flow ADF skew (LX du models) 673 general specifications 1, 8, 15 HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley 652
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) glossary HCI guide post and guide post plate
parts and diagrams 492 terms and definitions 2817 625
formatter guide post and guide post plate HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers
locating 1, 2, 3 HCI 625 630
formatter lights 673, 680, 681, 693, HCI main
694, 695 H parts and diagrams 589
frame section hanress HCI main electrical connector 620
electrical-mechanical relationships parts and diagrams 996 HCI motor - feed drive 641
diagram 880 hard disk drive 233 HCI motor - lift drive right and motor -
front cover switch 2807 hard disk partition error lift drive left 646
front door 98.WX.YZ error 673, 676 HCI motor - step drive 649
parts and diagrams 1000 hardware configuration 1, 83 HCI PCA 617
front jam cover CCDM PCA 1, 83 HCI photo interrupter and sensor
parts and diagrams 1038 eraser PCA 1, 83, 97 bracket 669
front OPC flow ADF PCA 1, 83 HCI right door 601
diagram 2199 fuser drive assembly 1, 83 HCI sub - cassette
Front tamper 1339, 2450 fuser drive board 94 parts and diagrams 660
front tamper motor 2799 fuser PCA 1, 83 HCI sub - frame
front tamper sensor 2799 high voltage power supply PCA 1, parts and diagrams 606
front view 2204 83 HCI sub - pickup upper/lower
fuser drive 53 high-voltage power supply (HVPS) parts and diagrams 628
fuser drive assembly 1, 83 PCA 95 HCI sub-paper side right 662
fuser drive board 94 low voltage power supply (LVPS; HCI sup-pickup 591
fuser error Type 5H) / switching mode power HDD 233
41.WX.YZ error 673, 675 supply (SMPS) 91 high capacity input tray 1
laser scanner error 673, 675 low voltage power supply PCA high voltage power supply PCA 1, 83
paper path error 673, 675 (Type 3R) 1, 83 high-capacity input (HCI)
fuser error (LaserJet) low voltage power supply PCA electrical-mechanical relationships
50.WX.YZ error 673, 675 (Type 4) 1, 83, 92 diagram 899
fuser exit low voltage power supply PCA high-voltage power supply (HVPS)
diagram 2194 (Type 5H) 1, 83 PCA 95
fuser exit drive LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 83 home button is unresponsive 673,
parts and diagrams 288 LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 83, 92 680, 681, 686, 687, 690
fuser PCA 1, 83 LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 83, 91 HP Channel Services Network (CSN)
fuser release drive 1, 49 main controller 1, 83, 87 Channel partners support 107
fuser section master system operation key 1, HP internal users
electrical-mechanical relationships 83, 87, 89 WISE 107
diagram 883 scan joint PCA 1, 83 HP Jetdirect print server
fuser unit 1, 42 WLED IF PCA 1, 83 lights 673, 680, 681, 693, 694,
fuser unit drive 1, 42, 43 WLED PCA 1, 83 695
2830 Index ENWW

HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers image scanner assembly paper holding sensor 2744
HCI 630 parts and diagrams 534 paper holding solenoid 2254,
HVPS PCA 1, 83 imaging unit 1, 38, 39 2757
developer unit 1, 38, 39, 40 paper support 2254
I overview 1, 38, 39 paper support home sensor
image creation 1, 38 individual component diagnostics 2254, 2382
imaging unit 1, 38, 39 673, 680, 681, 693 paper support motor 2404
overview 1, 38 information parts and diagrams 2255
paper transfer belt unit 1, 38, 39 general 673, 795, 802 parts and diagrams - covers
toner cartridge 1, 38, 39 print reports 673, 795, 802, 803 2258
image formation section software version 673, 795, 802, parts and diagrams - ejector unit
electrical-mechanical relationships 803 2270
diagram 893 supply status 673, 795, 802 parts and diagrams - paper
image quality inner finisher 103 support unit 2262
black lines, vertical 673, 828, block diagram 2203 parts and diagrams - sensor, motor,
829, 832 ejector & paper support and roller 2260
blurred image 673, 828, 829, assembly 2590 parts and diagrams - stapler unit
838 ejector assembly 2254, 2632 2268
drive unit problem 845 ejector motor 2254 parts and diagrams - tamper
electrical circuit problem 845 ejector motor assembly 2610 unit 2264, 2266
feeding system problems 845 end fence home 2254 PCA cover 2286
flow ADF or ADF skew (LX du end fence sensor 2656 punch cover 2778
models) 673 entrance motor 2254, 2306 punch waste full 2254
foggy image 673, 828, 829, 839 entrance sensor 2254, 2300 punch waste full sensor 2783
fuser problem 845 exir roller 2254 rear cover 2276
image problem 845 exit motor 2254, 2334 rear paper support 2254, 2361
jitter image 673, 828, 829, 840 exit roller 2317 rear tamper 2506, 2524
laser/scanner problem 845 exit sensor 2254, 2325 rear tamper motor 2542
light image 673, 828, 829, 839 front cover 2273 sensor 2254
light lines, vertical 673, 828, 829, front paper support 2254, 2339 stacker lower limit switch 2254
834 front tamper 2451 stacker motor 2254
periodic black dots, horizontal front tamper home sensor 2469 stapler 2254, 2561
673, 828, 829, 836 front tamper motor 2487 stapler position motor 2579
periodic black lines, horizontal left cover 2289 stapler position sensor 2254,
673, 828, 829, 836 main paddle 2254, 2425 2567
periodic light/dark dots, main paddle assembly 2437 sub paddle unit 2445
horizontal 673, 828, 829, 837 main paddle home sensor 2429 switch 2254
periodic light/dark lines, main paddle motor 2433 top cover 2283
horizontal 673, 828, 829, 837 middle cover 2279 inner finisher diagrams 2254
poor fusing 673, 828, 829, 842 motor 2254 inner finisher parts 2254
scanner and ADF problems 845 output tray 2668 inner finisher PCA 2244
skewed image 673, 828, 829, output tray lower limit switch inner finisher remove and replace
841 2685 2254
stain on back side 673, 828, 829, output tray motor 2719 inner finisher specification 2205
843 output tray motor assembly input accessory error
standard tone, setting 673, 828, 2697 67.WX.YZ error 673, 675
829 output tray motor sensor 2708 input/output error
uneven pitch 673, 828, 829, 840 output tray top of stack sensor 40.WX.YZ error 673, 674
white lines, vertical 673, 828, 2675
829, 834 paper holding 2731
ENWW Index 2831

interlocks lights main frame pickup 1 and 2
defeating 673, 680, 681, 693, formatter 673, 680, 681, 693, parts and diagrams 302
696, 697 694, 695 main output tray motor
internal diagnostics error troubleshooting with 673, 680, parts and diagrams 1034
90.WX.YZ error 673, 676 681, 693, 694 Main output tray unit 952, 1732
video display error 673, 676 low voltage power supply (LVPS; Type main output tray unit
interpret control-panel messages and 5H) / switching mode power supply parts and diagrams 1028
event log entries 905, 2177, 2203, (SMPS) 91 main parts 121
2792 low voltage power supply PCA (Type main PCA
3R) 1, 83 parts and diagrams 1022
J low voltage power supply PCA (Type maintenance 107, 117
jam error (LaserJet) 4) 1, 83, 92 machine cleaning for
13.WX.YZ error 673, 674 low voltage power supply PCA (Type maintenance 107, 117
jam error (PageWide) 5H) 1, 83 maintenance counts
13.WX.YZ error 673, 674 lower bridge part replacement count 673,
jams parts and diagrams 1004 795, 804
locations 673, 789 LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 83 maintenance parts 1, 8, 27
Jetdirect print server LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 83, 92 master system operation key 1, 83,
lights 673, 680, 681, 693, 694, LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 83, 91 87, 89
695 switching mode power supply 91 memory error
job accounting error (firmware) 82.WX.YZ error 673, 676
48.WX.YZ error 673, 675 M EMMC error 673, 676
job management error machine cleaning for maintenance hard disk error 673, 676
(firmware) 673, 675 107, 117 menu map 673, 700
job pipeline error (firmware) 673, cleaning the flow ADF white bar menus, control panel
675 and CIS (GX ADF) 107, 117 Calibrate/Cleaning 673, 700, 723,
job parser error (firmware) cleaning the flow ADF white bar 787
47.WX.YZ error 673, 675 and CIS (LX/du model) 107, 117 Copy (MFP only) 673, 700, 723,
printer calibration error 673, 675 cleaning the paper dust stick 766
107, 117 Fax (fax models only) 673, 700,
K cleaning the scan glass 107, 117 723, 779
keyboard 250 main assembly General Settings 673, 700, 723,
parts and diagrams 122 724
L main controller Manage Trays 673, 700, 723,
laser scanner assembly 1 hardware configuration 1, 83, 87 783
laser scanning optical path 1, 47 new model (IR/UI) 1, 83, 87 Print 673, 700, 723, 782
overview 1 previous model 1, 83, 87 Reports 673, 700, 723
laser scanner assembly/HVPS main electrical connector Scan (MFP only) 673, 700, 723,
diagram 2195 HCI 620 770
laser scanner error (LaserJet) Main engine frame assembly Supplies 673, 700, 723, 782
51.WX.YZ error 673, 675 parts and diagrams 264 motor error (LaserJet)
52.WX.YZ error 673, 675 main exit CAM motor 59.WX.YZ error 673, 675
laser scanner unit 46 parts and diagrams 1016 MP right door section
laser scanning optical path 46 Main exit unit 937, 1243 electrical-mechanical relationships
overview 46 main exit unit diagram 885
LED lamp module 539 parts and diagrams 1014, 1018 MSOK 1, 83, 87, 89
LEDs. See lights main frame multipurpose feeder assembly 1, 30
left lower cover parts and diagrams 316
parts and diagrams 1032 main frame pickup
left upper cover parts and diagrams 306
parts and diagrams 1030
2832 Index ENWW

N paddle unit 2226 booklet entrance-presser motor
Near Field Communication error parts and diagrams 1018 1044
81.WX.YZ error 673, 676 page error booklet exit 1052
Bluetooth error 673, 676 21.WX.YZ error 673, 674 booklet exit unit 1050
external I/O card error 673, 676 paper handling error (LaserJet) booklet fold motor 1054
internal EIO error 673, 676 56.WX.YZ error 673, 675 booklet fold roller 1056
wireless error 673, 676 paper handling section booklet fold unit 1050
network and software specifications electrical-mechanical relationships booklet maker 1040
1, 8 diagram 878 booklet maker base 1064
network interface 1, 8 paper handling specifications 1, 8, booklet paddle unit 1060
no control panel sound 673, 680, 23 booklet presser unit 1042
681, 686, 687, 689 paper holding motor booklet stapler unit 1046
note v parts and diagrams 1034 booklet tamper unit 1048
Paper holding unit 954, 1793, 2730 bridge unit 1002, 1004
O paper holding unit 2240 buffer diverter 1038
operating systems, supported 1, 8 parts and diagrams 1028 buffer unit 1036
operating-environment range paper jams cassettes tray 2/3 260
printer 14 locations 673, 789 cover 996
option specifications 1, 8 paper path covers 348
optional configurations 1, 8 finisher system 905, 906, 2204 covers-inner finisher 2258
optional parts 28 paper support motor 2798 DCF main frame pickup 580
options list 1, 8 paper support sensor 2798 DCF main frame pickup 1 578
orderable parts 112, 992, 2253 Paper support unit 2338 DCF main frame pickup upper
ordering 905, 987, 2203, 2248 paper support unit 2225 586
other errors paper transfer belt unit 1, 38, 39 Dual cassette feeder DCF 560
drive unit 673, 828 cleaning blade 1, 38, 39 ejector unit 1022, 1026
electrical circuit 673, 828 overview 1, 38, 39 ejector unit-inner finisher 2270
feeding system 673, 828 transfer belt drive 1, 38, 39 end fence unit 1018
flow ADF 673, 828 Parts entrance motor 1008
fuser 673, 828 ADF (GX/z) 448 entrance unit 1006, 1008
image system 673, 828 ADF (LX models) 392 exit assemblies 254
laser scanner assembly 673, 828 ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX exit motor 1016
scanner 673, 828 models) 420 flow ADF image scanner (GX/
output accessory error ADF lower image scanner (LX) sGX) 530
66.WX.YZ error 673, 675 544 flow ADF open cover (GX/z) 466
output tray 2240 ADF main frame (GX/z) 496 flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 492
output tray motor 2804 ADF main frame assembly (LX front door 1000
Output tray motor assembly 2696 models) 434 front jam cover 1038
output tray motor sensor 2804 ADF upper pickup (GX/z) 476 fuser exit drive 288
Output tray top of stack sensor 2805 booklet blade 1058 hanress 996
Output tray unit 2667 booklet blade motor 1058 HCI drive 635
OXPd/Web kit error booklet c-fold blade 1052 HCI main 589
45.WX.YZ error 673, 675 booklet c-fold motor 1054 HCI sub - cassette 660
booklet diverter 1052 HCI sub - frame 606
P booklet diverter motor 1054 HCI sub - pickup upper/lower 628
paddle booklet diverter unit 1050 image scanner assembly 534
parts and diagrams 1020 booklet end fence unit 1062 inner finisher 2255
paddle motor booklet entrance 1044 left lower cover 1032
parts and diagrams 1020 booklet entrance unit 1042 left upper cover 1030
Paddle unit 940, 1270, 2424 lower bridge 1004
ENWW Index 2833

main assembly 122 parts, order by authorized service electrical circuit problem 860
main engine frame assembly providers 112, 992, 2253 feeding system problem 856
264 parts, orderable 112, 992, 2253 fuser problem 847
main exit CAM motor 1016 parts, ordering 112, 992, 2253 image problem 845
main exit unit 1014, 1018 PCA 2159 laser scanner assembly problem
main frame 316 HCI 617 860
main frame pickup 306 PCA connection information 982 scanner and ADF problem 847
main frame pickup 1 and 2 302 finisher system 905, 906, 2204 test 107, 114, 116, 905, 987,
main output tray motor 1034 PCA precautions 905, 987, 988, 989, 991, 2203, 2248, 2252
main output tray unit 1028 2248, 2249, 2250 print quality troubleshooting 673,
main PCA 1022 PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit 828
paddle 1020 (LSU) flow ADF skew adjust 673
paddle motor 1020 electrical-mechanical relationships image quality 673, 828, 829
paddle unit 1018 diagram 867 other errors 673, 828, 845
paper holding motor 1034 pick roller print specifications 1, 8, 17
paper holding unit 1028 document feeder (LX) 426 Print Test Page 673, 700, 723, 724
paper support unit-inner finisher pickup assembly 34 printer
2262 pickup drive 1, 49, 52 dimensions 1, 8, 13
registration sub-frame 292 pickup unit 1, 30 operating-environment range 14
right door 356 pickup/ph drive/side weight 1, 8, 13
right door duplex 386 diagram 2194 printer memory error
right door exit 382 plastic latches information 905, 987, 20.WX.YZ error 673, 674
right upper cover 1000 988, 989, 2248, 2249, 2250 Process Cleaning Page 673, 700,
ssensor, motor, and roller-inner post-service tests 107, 114, 116, 723, 787
finisher 2260 905, 987, 991, 2203, 2248, 2252 product number
stapler unit 1022 power locating 1, 2, 3
stapler unit-inner finisher 2268 consumption 1, 8, 14 Punch unit 1166, 2777
tamper unit 1022, 1024 power subsystem 673, 680, 681, punch unit 930, 2216
tamper unit-inner finisher 2264, 682 punch waste box sensor 2794
2266 power supply Punch waste full sensor 2793
top cover 1000 troubleshooting 673, 680, 681,
top door 1000 682, 683 R
top exit unit 1014 power-on troubleshooting overview real-time clock error
top lower cover 1016 673, 680, 681, 682, 683 11.WX.YZ error 673, 674
top output tray unit 1014 pre-boot menu options 673, 700, Rear paper support 2360
Tray 1 374 705 Rear tamper 1417, 2505
Tray diverter CAM 1012 precations rear tamper motor 2800
tray diverter unit 1010 information 905, 987, 988, rear tamper sensor 2800
tray jam cover 1012 2248, 2249 rear view 2204
upper bridge 1002 precautions registration assembly 35
parts 112, 992, 2253 replacing parts 114, 988, 2249 registration drive 1, 49
use parts lists and diagrams 112 preservice checklist 107, 114, 115, registration sub-frame
parts and accessories 905, 987, 905, 987, 990, 2203, 2248, 2251 parts and diagrams 292
2203, 2248 print bar error (PageWide) registration unit 1, 30
parts and diagrams 107 62.WX.YZ error 673, 675 removal and replacement 107
parts and diagrams, using 112 print drivers, supported 1, 8 removal and replacement booklet
parts list and diagrams, how to use Print menu, control panel 673, 700, finisher 993
112 723, 782 removal and replacement inner
parts, main 121 print quality finisher 2254
drive unit problem 855
2834 Index ENWW

removal and replacement scanning system components 1, 56, options list 1, 8
precautions 905, 987, 988, 2248, 59 paper handling specifications 1,
2249 security error 8, 23
removal order 33.WX.YZ error 673, 674 print specifications 1, 8, 17
removing order 107, 114, 116, sensor and bracket scan specifications 1, 8, 19
991, 2252 HCI 669 software and solutions 1, 8
removing parts sensor error software specifications 1, 8
checklists 107, 114, 115, 905, 54.WX.YZ error 673, 675 supplies 1, 8, 27
987, 990, 2203, 2248, 2251 58.WX.YZ error 673, 675 Stacker finisher 915
replacing parts serial number stacker finisher 906
precautions 114, 988, 2249 locating 1, 2, 3 standard (dn bundles) document
replacing the main SVC part service and support feeder
right door dampener 338 WISE 107 document feeder PCA 526
Reports menu, control panel 673, service and support information document feeder white backing
700, 723 WISE and CSN 107 129
reverse roller service approach 107, 114, 905, standard (du bundles) document
document feeder (LX) 436 987, 2203, 2248 feeder
revision history iii precautions 114, 988, 2249 document feeder white backing
Right door service functions 126
parts and diagrams 356 capture log 673, 795, 825 standard (LX models) document
right door debug log 673, 795, 825 feeder
HCI 601 envelope rotate 673, 795, 825, document feeder whole unit 132
right door dampener 338 826 standard (LX) document feeder
Right door duplex main memory clear 673, 795, document feeder (ADF) PCA 422
parts and diagrams 386 825 document feeder feed motor
Right door exit transfer assembly control 673, 443
parts and diagrams 382 795, 825, 826 standard (LX) document feeder (ADF)
right upper cover service mode 673, 795 contact image sensor (CIS) 404
parts and diagrams 1000 diagnostics 673, 795, 806 document feeder (ADF) jam access
entering service mode 673, 795 cover (LX) 394
S information 673, 795, 802 standard (LX/du model) document
scan glass 536 maintenance counts 673, 795, feeder
scan joint PCA 1, 83 804 document feeder main motor
Scan menu (MFP only), control panel mode menu tree 673, 795 414
673, 700, 723, 770 service functions 673, 795, 825 standard (z bundles) document feeder
scan specifications 1, 8, 19 sHCI 1 document feeder whole unit 137,
scanner side high capacity input tray 1 143
caution for moving 1, 56, 65 software and solutions 1, 8 Stapler finisher 915
CDD and lens 546 solve problems stapler finisher 906
diagram 2200 control panel messages 674 stapler position motor 2802
scanner glass 536 CPMD 674 stapler position sensor 2802
scanner assembly - CDD and lens specifications 1, 8 Stapler unit 1495, 2560
546 copy specifications 1, 8, 20 stapler unit 2234
scanner error electrical and acoustic 1, 8, 14 parts and diagrams 1022
30.WX.YZ error 673, 674 general specifications 1, 8, 15 Stapler unit (booklet) 2009
scanner section maintenance parts 1, 8, 27 stapler/stacker diagrams 994
electrical-mechanical relationships network interface 1, 8 stapler/stacker parts 994
diagram 889 network specifications 1, 8 static, precautions for 107, 112,
scanning system optional parts 28 905, 987, 990, 2203, 2248, 2251
components 1, 56, 59 options 1, 8
ENWW Index 2835

sub-paper side right Tray 1 W
HCI 662 jams, clearing 673, 789 warning v
sup-pickup parts and diagrams 374 Web-based Interactive Search Engine
HCI 591 Tray 1 feeder assembly 36 WISE 107
supplies 905, 987, 2203, 2248 Tray 2 Web-based Interactive Search Engine
supplies error (LaserJet) jams, clearing 673, 789 (WISE)
10.WX.YZ error 673, 674 Tray 3 HP internal users and Channel
supplies error (PageWide) jams, clearing 673, 789 partners 107
17.WX.YZ error 673, 674 Tray diverter CAM weight
Supplies menu, control panel 673, parts and diagrams 1012 accessories 1, 8, 13
700, 723, 782 Tray diverter unit 933, 1010, 1173 printer 1, 8, 13
switching mode power supply tray diverter unit WISE
LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 91 parts and diagrams 1010 CPMD 108, 676
system error (LaserJet) tray jam cover HP internal users and Channel
62.WX.YZ error 673, 675 parts and diagrams 1012 partners 107
system requirements tray motor error (LaserJet) Web-based Interactive Search
minimum 1, 8 60.WX.YZ error 673, 675 Engine 107
tray selection - use requested tray WLED IF PCA 1, 83
T 673, 700, 723, 724 WLED PCA 1, 83
Tamper unit 943, 946, 1338, 2449 trays
tamper unit 2229 jams, clearing 673, 789
parts and diagrams 1022, 1024 Trays menu, control panel 673, 700,
terms and definitions 723, 783
glossary 2817 troubleshooting
tests checklist 673, 700, 701
post-service 107, 114, 116, 905, control panel checks 673, 680,
987, 991, 2203, 2248, 2252 681, 686
print-quality 107, 114, 116, 905, lights, using 673, 680, 681, 693,
987, 991, 2203, 2248, 2252 694
tip v power 673, 680, 681, 682, 683
toner process 673, 680
diagram 2196 troubleshooting tools
toner cartridge 1, 38, 39 control panel messages 674
top cover CPMD 674
parts and diagrams 1000
top cover switch 2806 U
top door UI
parts and diagrams 1000 diagram 2198
Top exit unit 935, 1202 understand lights on the formatter
top exit unit formatter lights 673, 680, 681,
parts and diagrams 1014 693, 694, 695
top lower cover understand the lights on the formatter
parts and diagrams 1016 HP Jetdirect LEDs 673, 680, 681,
Top output tray unit 936, 1229 693, 694, 695
top output tray unitr upper bridge
parts and diagrams 1014 parts and diagrams 1002
touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no Use Requested Tray 673, 700, 723,
image) 673, 680, 681, 686, 687 724
touchscreen has an unresponsive
zone 673, 680, 681, 686, 687, 688
2836 Index ENWW

LaserJet E725 - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LaserJet E725 - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LaserJet E725 - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP LaserJet MFP E72525, E72530, E72535

© Copyright 2020 HP Development Company,

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without

The information contained herein is subject to

The only warranties for HP products and

Edition 14, 5/2020

Table -1 Revision History

14.0 May, 2020 Part number updates and general edits.

13.0 May, 2020 Part number updates and general edits.

Updated SSBM sections to current HPPK

SRM migration to SDL Tridion Docs.

Updated BHCI sections. See High-capacity

Added HP EPA 3.0 compliance content. See

11.0 January, 2020 Updated numerous part numbers

Added Electrical Mechanical diagrams to

Removed references to Control panel that

Updated developer unit remove and replace

Added right door dampner kit remove and

6.0 July, 2018 Updated parts numbers throughout

Minor content edits (including graphics)

Revision Number Revision Date Revision Notes

5.0 March, 2018 Upload all graphics to data base.

Part number updates.

4.0 January, 2018 Minor changes to environmental specs and

3.0 November, 2017 Updated code data for Diagnostics and

Replaced Product Overview with the UG-

Updated R&R TOC level to 1.

Replaced references to SAW with WISE and

Replaced Samsung Paper Jam content with

Moved specifications out of the appendix to

Added additional specification content to

Removed the lists of tables and figures and

Placed ESD cautions at the beginning of the

Removed the Samsung precaution sections

Updated variable list items to refer only to

Updated part numbers, part descriptions,

Linked Removal and Replacement

2.0 July, 2017 Updated TOC to only consist of 3 levels

Add error code and CPMD overview

Added “How to search for documentation”

Updated toner average yield data

Changed all occurrences of #2 Phillips to #2

1.0 April, 2017 Service manual initial release

iv Revision History ENWW

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

1 Product specifications and description .................................................................................................................................................. 1

2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement .................................................................................................................................... 107

3 Problem solving .................................................................................................................................................................................... 673

4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams ......................................................................................................................................................... 867

5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) ...................................................................................................................................... 905

6 Diagrams ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2193

7 Inner finisher ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2203

Appendix A Certificate of Volatility ..................................................................................................................................................... 2809

Glossary of terms ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2817

Index ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2825

You will learn more about the following sub sections:

Printer front view

Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)